Ford 2016 F 250 Owners Manual

2015-10-23

: Ford Ford-2016-Ford-F-250-Owners-Manual-815558 ford-2016-ford-f-250-owners-manual-815558 ford pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 507 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

2016 SUPER DUTY Owner’s Manual
ford.cafordowner.com
2016 SUPER DUTY Owner’s Manual
April 2015
First Printing
Owner’s Manual
Super Duty
Litho in U.S.A.
GC3J 19A321 AA
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2015
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 20150323155431
Introduction
About This Manual...........................................7
Symbols Glossary.............................................7
Data Recording..................................................9
California Proposition 65..............................11
Perchlorate.........................................................11
Ford Credit..........................................................11
Replacement Parts
Recommendation........................................11
Special Notices................................................12
Mobile Communications
Equipment.....................................................13
Export Unique Options..................................13
Environment
Protecting the Environment........................14
Child Safety
General Information.......................................15
Installing Child Seats.....................................16
Booster Seats..................................................24
Child Seat Positioning..................................26
Child Safety Locks..........................................27
Safety Belts
Principle of Operation..................................29
Fastening the Safety Belts.........................30
Safety Belt Height Adjustment.................33
Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime.............................................................33
Safety Belt Minder.........................................34
Child Restraint and Safety Belt
Maintenance................................................36
Supplementary Restraints
System
Principle of Operation...................................37
Driver and Passenger Airbags...................38
Side Airbags.....................................................43
Safety Canopy™............................................44
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......45
Airbag Disposal..............................................46
Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio
Frequencies..................................................47
Remote Control...............................................47
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control...........................................................50
MyKey™
Principle of Operation...................................51
Creating a MyKey............................................52
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................53
Checking MyKey System Status...............53
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems.........................................................55
MyKey Troubleshooting...............................55
Locks
Locking and Unlocking.................................56
Keyless Entry....................................................57
Tailgate
Tailgate Lock...................................................60
Removing the Tailgate.................................60
Tailgate Step.....................................................61
Bed Extender...................................................62
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System........................64
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................65
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel...................66
Audio Control..................................................66
Voice Control....................................................67
Cruise Control..................................................67
Information Display Control.......................67
Heated Steering Wheel...............................68
1
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Pedals
Adjusting the Pedals....................................69
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers.........................................70
Windshield Washers.....................................70
Lighting
General Information.......................................71
Lighting Control................................................71
Autolamps.........................................................72
Instrument Lighting Dimmer......................73
Daytime Running Lamps.............................73
Front Fog Lamps.............................................73
Direction Indicators........................................74
Interior Lamps..................................................74
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows..............................................76
Global Opening................................................77
Exterior Mirrors.................................................77
Interior Mirror....................................................79
Sliding Windows.............................................79
Sun Visors.........................................................80
Moonroof..........................................................80
Instrument Cluster
Gauges...............................................................82
Warning Lamps and Indicators................84
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............87
Information Displays
General Information.....................................89
Information Messages...............................100
Climate Control
Manual Climate Control.............................110
Automatic Climate Control.........................111
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate..........................................................112
Heated Windows and Mirrors...................115
Remote Start..................................................116
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position...................117
Head Restraints..............................................117
Manual Seats..................................................119
Power Seats...................................................120
Memory Function.........................................120
Rear Seats........................................................122
Heated Seats..................................................124
Climate Controlled Seats..........................125
Front Seat Armrest.......................................127
Rear Seat Armrest........................................128
Universal Garage Door
Opener
Universal Garage Door Opener...............129
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points................................137
Storage Compartments
Center Console..............................................139
Overhead Console........................................139
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
General Information....................................140
Ignition Switch..............................................140
Starting a Gasoline Engine........................141
Engine Block Heater....................................142
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions......................................144
Fuel Quality....................................................145
Running Out of Fuel....................................146
Refueling.........................................................146
2
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Fuel Consumption........................................147
Emission Control System..........................148
Transmission
Automatic Transmission.............................151
Power Take-Off.............................................156
Four-Wheel Drive
Using Four-Wheel Drive.............................158
Rear Axle
Limited Slip Differential.............................167
Electronic Locking Differential.................167
Brakes
General Information....................................169
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes...........................................................169
Parking Brake.................................................170
Hill Start Assist..............................................170
Traction Control
Principle of Operation.................................172
Using Traction Control................................172
Stability Control
Principle of Operation.................................174
Using Stability Control................................174
Terrain Response
Principle of Operation..................................177
Using Hill Descent Control.........................177
Parking Aids
Parking Aid......................................................179
Rear View Camera.......................................180
Cruise Control
Principle of Operation.................................183
Using Cruise Control....................................183
Driving Aids
Steering............................................................184
Load Carrying
Load Limit.......................................................185
Towing
Towing a Trailer.............................................192
Trailer Sway Control....................................193
Recommended Towing Weights............193
Essential Towing Checks...........................196
Towing Points...............................................204
Transporting the Vehicle..........................205
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels......206
Driving Hints
Breaking-In.....................................................207
Economical Driving.....................................207
Driving Through Water..............................208
Floor Mats......................................................208
Snowplowing................................................209
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance...................................212
Hazard Warning Flashers...........................213
Fuel Shutoff....................................................213
Jump Starting the Vehicle.........................214
Post-Crash Alert System...........................216
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need................217
In California (U.S. Only).............................218
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)......................219
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only)........................219
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada........................................................220
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature......................................................221
3
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only)..............................................................221
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only).............................................................222
Fuses
Fuse Specification Chart...........................223
Changing a Fuse............................................231
Maintenance
General Information....................................232
Opening and Closing the Hood..............232
Under Hood Overview - 6.2L...................233
Under Hood Overview - 6.8L..................234
Engine Oil Dipstick......................................235
Engine Oil Check..........................................235
Oil Change Indicator Reset......................236
Engine Coolant Check...............................236
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check...........................................................240
Transfer Case Fluid Check........................243
Brake Fluid Check........................................244
Power Steering Fluid Check....................244
Washer Fluid Check....................................244
Fuel Filter........................................................244
Changing the 12V Battery.........................245
Checking the Wiper Blades......................247
Changing the Wiper Blades.....................247
Adjusting the Headlamps.........................247
Removing a Headlamp.............................249
Changing a Bulb..........................................249
Bulb Specification Chart...........................252
Changing the Engine Air Filter................254
Vehicle Care
General Information...................................256
Cleaning Products.......................................256
Cleaning the Exterior..................................256
Waxing..............................................................257
Cleaning the Engine....................................257
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades..........................................................258
Cleaning the Interior...................................258
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens.......................259
Cleaning Leather Seats.............................259
Repairing Minor Paint Damage...............261
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels........................261
Vehicle Storage.............................................261
Wheels and Tires
General Information...................................264
Tire Care..........................................................267
Using Snow Chains.....................................284
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........284
Changing a Road Wheel...........................290
Technical Specifications............................301
Capacities and Specific-
ations
Engine Specifications................................303
Motorcraft Parts..........................................304
Vehicle Identification Number...............305
Vehicle Certification Label......................306
Transmission Code Designation...........306
Capacities and Specifications - 6.2L
V8..................................................................307
Capacities and Specifications - 6.8L
Triton-30V - V10........................................311
Audio System
General Information.....................................317
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM.......318
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC.............................................................319
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
Touchscreen Display..............................322
Digital Radio..................................................323
Satellite Radio..............................................325
USB Port.........................................................328
Media Hub......................................................328
4
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
SYNC™
General Information...................................329
Using Voice Recognition............................331
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............334
SYNC™ Applications and Services......346
SYNC™ AppLink™.....................................354
Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player...........................................................355
SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................365
MyFord Touch™
General Information...................................374
Settings...........................................................382
Entertainment..............................................395
Phone.................................................................411
Information.....................................................418
Climate............................................................428
Navigation.......................................................431
MyFord Touch™ Troubleshooting........440
Accessories
Accessories....................................................447
Auxiliary Switches.......................................448
Extended Service Plan
(ESP)
Extended Service Plan (ESP)..................451
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information.......453
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........456
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance..............................................457
Scheduled Maintenance Record...........462
Appendices
End User License Agreement..................472
5
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
6
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about
your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will get from driving it.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any handheld device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options that are not on your
vehicle.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this
manual may show features as used in
different models, so they may appear
differently to you on your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling
your vehicle. It is an integral part of the
vehicle.
Note: Either Ford Motor Company or an
authorized Ford dealer may have originally
sold this incomplete vehicle to a vehicle
modifier who upfitted it. As a result, some
of the options and features on this vehicle
may differ from what we describe in this
manual.
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
E154903
Right-hand sideA
Left-hand sideB
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
E162384
Air conditioning system
Anti-lock braking system
7
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Battery
Battery acid
Brake fluid - non petroleum
based
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
Child seat lower anchor
Child seat tether anchor
E71340
Cruise control
Do not open when hot
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Fan warning
Fasten safety belt
Front airbag
Front fog lamps
Fuel pump reset
Fuse compartment
Hazard warning flashers
Heated rear window
Heated windshield
Interior luggage compartment
release
Jack
E161353
Keep out of reach of children
Lighting control
8
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
Note operating instructions
Panic alarm
E139213
Parking aid
Parking brake
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
Service engine soon
Side airbag
E167012
Shield the eyes
E138639
Stability control
Windshield wash and wipe
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing
diagnostic information about your vehicle.
This potentially includes information about
the performance or status of various
systems and modules in the vehicle, such
as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and
service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company,
Ford of Canada, and service and repair
facilities may access or share among them
vehicle diagnostic information received
through a direct connection to your vehicle
when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, when your vehicle is in for
service or repair, Ford Motor Company,
Ford of Canada, and service and repair
facilities may access or share among them
data for vehicle improvement purposes.
For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose
to use the SYNC Vehicle Health Report,
you consent that certain diagnostic
information may also be accessed
electronically by Ford Motor Company and
Ford authorized service facilities, and that
the diagnostic information may be used
for any purpose. See SYNC™ (page 329).
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder. The main purpose of an
event data recorder is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle;
this data will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The event data recorder is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
9
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
The event data recorder in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
•How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
•Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
•How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or
the brake pedal; and
•How fast the vehicle was traveling;
and
•Where the driver was positioning
the steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: Event data recorder data is
recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
is recorded by the event data recorder
under normal driving conditions and no
personal data or information (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) is
recorded (see limitations regarding 911
Assist and Traffic, directions and
Information privacy below). However,
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data
with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event
data recorder is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that
have such special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the event data recorder.
Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada do not access event data
recorder information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court order
or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities or other
third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to
access the information independently
of Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada.
Note: Including to the extent that any
law pertaining to Event Data Recorders
applies to SYNC or its features, please
note the following: Once 911 Assist (if
equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist
may, through any paired and connected
cell phone, disclose to emergency
services that the vehicle has been in a
crash involving the deployment of an
airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
activation of the fuel pump shut-off.
Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist
may also be capable of being used to
electronically or verbally provide to 911
operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other
details about the vehicle or crash or
personal information about the
occupants to assist 911 operators to
provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose
this information, do not activate the 911
Assist feature. See SYNC™ (page 329).
Additionally, when you connect to
Traffic, Directions and Information (if
equipped, U.S. only), the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect the vehicle’s current
location, travel direction, and speed
(“vehicle travel information”), only to
help provide you with the directions,
traffic reports, or business searches
that you request. If you do not want
Ford or its vendors to receive this
information, do not activate the
service. For more information, see
Traffic, Directions and Information,
Terms and Conditions. See SYNC™
(page 329).
10
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Some constituents of engine
exhaust, certain vehicle components,
certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such
as airbag modules, safety belt
pretensioners and remote control batteries
may contain perchlorate material. Special
handling may apply for service or vehicle
end of life disposal.
For more information visit:
Web Address
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate
FORD CREDIT
(U.S. Only)
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing
and lease plans to help you acquire your
vehicle. If you have financed or leased your
vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for
your business.
For your convenience we offer a number
of ways to contact us, as well as to help
manage your account.
Phone: 1-800-727-7000
For more information regarding Ford Credit,
as well as to access Account Manager,
please go to www.fordcredit.com.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
Your vehicle has been built to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that
conform to the specifications detailed in
this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and
Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these
specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine
Ford replacement collision parts meet our
stringent requirements for fit, finish,
structural integrity, corrosion protection
and dent resistance. During vehicle
development we validate these parts
deliver the intended level of protection as
a whole system. A great way to know for
sure you are getting this level of protection
is to use genuine Ford replacement
collision parts.
11
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty. Damage
caused to your vehicle as a result of the
failure of non-Ford parts may not be
covered by the Ford Warranty. For
additional information, refer to the terms
and conditions of the Ford Warranty.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is
covered and what is not covered by your
vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
refer to the Warranty Manual that is
provided to you along with your Owner’s
Manual.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted
with sophisticated electronic controls.
WARNINGS
You risk death or serious injury to
yourself and others if you do not
follow the instruction highlighted by
the warning symbol. Failure to follow the
specific warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury.
Front seat mounted rear-facing child
or infant seats should NEVER be
placed in front of an active
passenger airbag.
On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle’s On-board Diagnostics
(OBD-II) system has a data port for
diagnostics, repair and reprogramming
services with diagnostic scan tools.
Installing a non-Ford-approved
aftermarket OBD plug-in device that uses
the port during normal driving, for example
remote insurance company monitoring,
remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or
engine reprogramming, may cause
interference or damage to vehicle systems.
We do not recommend or endorse the use
of any non-Ford-approved aftermarket
OBD plug-in devices. The vehicle Warranty
may not cover damage caused by any
non-Ford-approved aftermarket OBD
plug-in device.
Using your Vehicle With a
Snowplow
More information and guidelines for using
your vehicle with a snowplow in this
Owner's Manual. See Snowplowing (page
209).
Using your Vehicle as an
Ambulance
If your light truck is equipped with the Ford
Ambulance Preparation Package, it may
be utilized as an ambulance. Ford urges
ambulance manufacturers to follow the
recommendations of the Ford Incomplete
Vehicle Manual, Ford Truck Body Builder’s
Layout Book and the Qualified Vehicle
Modifiers (QVM) Guidelines as well as
pertinent supplements. For additional
information, please contact the Truck Body
Builders Advisory Service at
http://www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas/
and then by selecting Contact Us or by
phone at 1–877–840–4338.
Use of your Ford light truck as an
ambulance, without the Ford Ambulance
Preparation Package voids the Ford New
Vehicle Limited Warranty and may void
the emissions warranties. In addition,
ambulance usage without the preparation
package could cause high underbody
temperatures, overpressurized fuel and a
risk of spraying fuel which could lead to
fires.
12
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
If your vehicle is equipped with the Ford
Ambulance Preparation Package, it will be
indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label is located on
the driver’s side door pillar or on the rear
edge of the driver’s door. You can
determine whether the ambulance
manufacturer followed Ford’s
recommendations by directly contacting
that manufacturer. Ford Ambulance
Preparation Package is only available on
certain Diesel engine equipped vehicles.
Using your Vehicle as a Stationary
Power Source
Information and guidelines for operating a
vehicle equipped with an aftermarket
power take-off system can be found in this
Owner's Manual. See Power Take-Off
(page 156).
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
Using mobile communications equipment
is becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your
vehicle may be equipped with features and
options that are different from the features
and options that are described in this
Owner’s Manual. A market unique
supplement may be supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the
market unique supplement, if provided,
you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that
are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and
Canadian Markets. Features or equipment
listed as standard may be different on units
built for Export. Refer to this Owner’s
Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
13
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
You must play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and
the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant
steps toward this aim.
14
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Environment
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions
on how to properly use safety restraints
for children.
WARNINGS
Always make sure your child is
secured properly in a device that is
appropriate for their height, age and
weight. Child safety restraints must be
bought separately from your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and
guidelines may result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death to your child.
All children are shaped differently.
The recommendations for safety
restraints are based on probable
child height, age and weight thresholds
from National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and other safety
organizations, or are the minimum
requirements of law. Ford recommends
checking with a NHTSA Certified Child
Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and
consult your pediatrician to make sure your
child seat is appropriate for your child, and
WARNINGS
is compatible with and properly installed
in your vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting
station and CPST, contact the NHTSA toll
free at 1-888-327-4236 or go to
http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada,
check with your local St. John Ambulance
office for referral to a CPST or for further
information, contact your provincial
ministry of transportation, locate your local
St. John Ambulance office by searching for
St. John Ambulance on the internet, or
Transport Canada at 1-800-333-0371
(http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly
restrain children in safety seats made
especially for their height, age, and weight
may result in an increased risk of serious
injury or death to your child.
Do not leave children or animals
unattended in the vehicle. On hot
days, the temperature in the trunk or
vehicle interior can rise very quickly.
Exposure of people or animals to these
high temperatures for even a short time
can cause death or serious heat-related
injuries, including brain damage. Small
children are particularly at risk.
15
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended restraint
type
Child size, height, weight, or ageChild
Use a child safety seat
(sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Infants or
toddlers
Use a belt-positioning
booster seat.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (gener-
ally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in.
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four
and less than age 12, and between 40 lb
(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer).
Small children
Use a vehicle safety belt
having the lap belt snug
and low across the hips,
shoulder belt centered
across the shoulder and
chest, and seat back
upright.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a belt-positioning booster
seat (generally children who are at least
4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80
lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recom-
mended by child restraint manufacturer).
Larger children
•You are required by law to properly use
safety seats for infants and toddlers in
the United States and Canada.
•Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Check your local and state or provincial
laws for specific requirements about
the safety of children in your vehicle.
•When possible, always properly
restrain children 12 years of age and
under in a rear seating position of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions
than in a front seating position.
INSTALLING CHILD SEATS
Child Seats
E142594
16
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called
an infant carrier, convertible seat, or
toddler seat) for infants, toddlers, or
children weighing 40 pounds (18
kilograms) or less (generally age four or
younger).
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in the
rear seat whenever possible.
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants
should only use seating positions where
they are able to be properly restrained.
When installing a child safety seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
•Use the correct safety belt buckle for
that seating position.
•Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
•Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child
seat and the release button, to prevent
accidental unbuckling.
•Place the vehicle seat upon which the
child seat will be installed in the upright
position.
•This vehicle does not require the use
of a locking clip.
Perform the following steps when
installing the child seat with combination
lap and shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is
a forward facing child seat, the steps are
the same for installing a rear facing child
seat.
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.
E142529
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and
then grasp the shoulder belt and lap
belt together.
17
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder
portion of the belt and pull downward
until all of the belt is pulled out.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt will click as it retracts
to indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142533
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
18
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that will exist once the extra
weight of the child is added to the child
restraint. It also helps to achieve the
proper snugness of the child seat to
your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
toward the buckle will help to remove
remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat
is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place.
To check this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side and
forward and back. There should be no
more than 1 inch (2.5 centimeters) of
movement for proper installation.
Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with your local St. John Ambulance
office for referral to a Certified Passenger
Seat Technician.
Using Cinch Tongue Lap and
Shoulder Belts (All Front Center,
Super Cab and Crew Cab Rear
Center Positions)
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. If you must use a
forward-facing child seat in the front
seat, move seat upon which the child seat
is installed all the way back.
Rear facing child seats should never
be placed in front of an active airbag.
Always use both lap and shoulder
safety belt in the Regular Cab center
seating position if applicable.
The belt webbing below the tongue is the
lap portion of the combination lap and
shoulder belt, and the belt webbing above
the tongue is the shoulder belt portion of
the combination lap and shoulder belt.
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in the
front center seat.
19
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
E162708
2. Slide the tongue up the webbing.
E142530
3. While holding both shoulder and lap
portions next to the tongue, route the
tongue and webbing through the child
seat according to the child seat
manufacturer's instructions. Be sure
that the belt webbing is not twisted.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
E142533
5. While pushing down with your knee on
the child seat pull up on the shoulder
belt portion to tighten the lap belt
portion of the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
6. Allow the safety belt to retract and
remove any slack in the belt to securely
tighten the child safety seat in the
vehicle.
7. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat
is equipped).
E142534
20
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
8. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than 1
inch (2.5 centimeters) of movement
for proper installation.
9. Check from time to time to be sure that
there is no slack in the lap and shoulder
belt. The shoulder belt must be snug
to keep the lap belt tight during a crash.
Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with your local St. John Ambulance
office for referral to a Child Passenger
Safety Technician.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH)
The LATCH system is composed of three
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
located where the vehicle seatback and
seat cushion meet (called the seat bight)
and one top tether anchor located behind
that seating position. Your vehicle is not
equipped with the lower anchor points in
the seat bight. For this vehicle, use the
vehicle safety belt and upper tether to
secure a child seat.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety seats
include a tether strap which extends from
the back of the child safety seat and hooks
to an anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child
seat for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
strap if the tether strap on your safety seat
does not reach the appropriate top tether
anchor in the vehicle.
The passenger seats of your vehicle may
be equipped with built-in tether strap
anchors located behind the seats as
described below.
The tether anchors in your vehicle may be
straps on the seat back or an anchor
bracket mounted to the body shell on the
back panel.
The SuperCab rear seat has three straps
behind the top of the seatback that
function as both routing loops for the
tether straps and anchor loops.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle
are in the following positions (shown from
top view):
21
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
F-Series Regular Cab
F-Series SuperCab
F-Series Crew Cab
Attach the tether strap only to the
appropriate tether anchor as shown. The
tether strap may not work properly if
attached somewhere other than the
correct tether anchor.
Once the child safety seat has been
installed using the safety belt, you can
attach the top tether strap.
Tether Strap Attachment
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the back of the seat.
Note: For vehicles with adjustable head
restraints, route the tether strap under the
head restraint and between the head
restraint posts, otherwise route the tether
strap over the top of the seat back. If the
top of the safety seat hits the head restraint,
raise the head restraint to let the child seat
fit further rearward.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position.
3. You may need to pull the seatback
forward to access the tether anchors.
Make sure the seat is locked in the
upright position before installing the
child seat.
22
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
E162712
4. Remove the tether cover.
5. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
shown.
E162713
Front seats (Regular Cab) and Rear seats
(Crew Cab)
If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the
child safety seat may not be retained
properly in the event of a crash.
6. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap
according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
If your child restraint system is equipped
with a tether strap, and the child restraint
manufacturer recommends its use, Ford
also recommends its use.
Tether Strap Attachment (Rear
SuperCab Only)
There are three loops of webbing just
above the back of the rear seat (along the
bottom edge of the rear window) in the
SuperCab. Use these loops as both routing
loops and anchor loops for up to three
child safety seat tether straps.
You can secure these straps below the
back of the seat with rubber bands. To
access, reach below the back of the seat
and pull the tether loop out of the rubber
band securing it.
Many tether straps cannot be tightened if
the tether strap is hooked to the loop
directly behind the child seat. To provide
a tight tether strap:
E162714
1. Route the tether strap through the loop
directly behind the child seat.
E162715
23
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
2. Attach the strap hook onto the loop
behind an adjacent seating position.
E162716
3. Install the child safety seat tightly using
the vehicle belts. Follow the
instructions in this chapter.
4. Tighten the tether strap according to
the child seat manufacturer's
instructions.
You can use a single loop to route and
anchor more than one child seat. For
example, use the center loop as a routing
loop for a child safety seat in the center
rear seat and as an anchoring loop for child
seats installed in the outboard rear seats.
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it
reduces the protection for the upper part
of the body and may increase the risk of
injury or death in a crash.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally
children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four
(4) and less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and
80 pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to
100 pounds (45 kilograms) if
recommended by your child restraint
manufacturer). Many state and provincial
laws require that children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall,
or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions
when seated without a booster seat:
E142595
•Can the child sit all the way back
against their vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the edge of
the seat cushion?
•Can the child sit without slouching?
•Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
•Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
•Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction
with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
24
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Types of Booster Seats
E68924
•Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat
back or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child's head
(as measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this case,
move the backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back or
head restraint and lap and shoulder belts,
or consider using a high back booster seat.
E70710
•High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the
lap belt low and snug across the hips,
never up across the stomach, and lets you
adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
and rest snugly near the center of the
shoulder. The following drawings compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt
uncomfortably close to the neck and a
shoulder belt that could slip off the
shoulder. The drawings also show how the
lap belt should be low and snug across the
child's hips.
25
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
E142597
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle
seat upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet
liner under the booster seat may improve
this condition. Do not introduce any item
thicker than this under the booster seat.
Check with the booster seat
manufacturer's instructions.
CHILD SEAT POSITIONING
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the vehicle seat
upon which the child seat is installed all
WARNINGS
the way back. When possible, all children
age 12 and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position. If all
children cannot be seated and restrained
properly in a rear seating position, properly
restrain the largest child in the front seat.
Always carefully follow the
instructions and warnings provided
by the manufacturer of any child
restraint to determine if the restraint device
is appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and
warnings provided by your vehicle
26
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
WARNINGS
manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age,
or weight or does not properly fit the child
may increase the risk of serious injury or
death.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash,
which may result in serious injury or death.
Never use pillows, books, or towels
to boost a child. They can slide
around and increase the likelihood
of injury or death in a crash.
WARNINGS
Always restrain an unoccupied child
seat or booster seat. These objects
may become projectiles in a crash or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk
of serious injury.
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it
reduces the protection for the upper part
of the body and may increase the risk of
injury or death in a crash.
To avoid risk of injury, do not leave
children or pets unattended in your
vehicle.
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Use any attachment method as indicated below by XCombined
child and
seat
weight
Restraint
Type Safety belt
only
Safety belt
and LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
Safety belt
and top
tether
anchor
LATCH
(lower
anchors
only)
LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
XUp to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing
child seat
XOver 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing
child seat
XUp to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child seat
XOver 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child seat
Note: The child seat must rest tightly
against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Head
Restraints (page 117).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.
27
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
E162719
The childproof locks are located on the
rear edge of each rear door. You must set
the lock separately for each door.
Move the lock control up or down to
engage or disengage the childproof lock.
28
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Always drive and ride with the
seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make
sure children sit where they can be
properly restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash
which may result in serious injury or death.
All occupants of the vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided. Failure to properly wear
your safety belt could seriously increase
the risk of injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a safety belt properly.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a safety
belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle
has a specific safety belt assembly
which is made up of one buckle and
one tongue that are designed to be used
as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the
shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never
swing the safety belt around your neck over
the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single
belt for more than one person.
WARNINGS
When possible, all children 12 years
old and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position.
Failure to follow this could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.
Safety belts and seats can become
hot in a vehicle that has been closed
up in sunny weather; they could burn
a small child. Check seat covers and
buckles before you place a child anywhere
near them.
Front and rear seat occupants,
including pregnant women, should
wear safety belts for optimum
protection in an accident.
All seating positions in this vehicle have
lap and shoulder safety belts. All
occupants of the vehicle should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when
an airbag supplemental restraint system
is provided.
The safety belt system consists of:
•Lap and shoulder safety belts.
•Shoulder safety belt with automatic
locking mode, (except driver safety
belt).
•Height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions.
•Safety belt pretensioner at the front
outboard seating positions.
•Safety belt warning light and chime.
•Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.
29
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
The safety belt pretensioners at the front
seating positions are designed to tighten
the safety belts when activated. In frontal
and near-frontal crashes, side crashes and
rollovers, the safety belt pretensioners may
be activated alone or, if the crash is of
sufficient severity, together with the front
airbags.
FASTENING THE SAFETY
BELTS
The front outboard and rear safety
restraints in the vehicle are combination
lap and shoulder belts.
E142587
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
E142588
2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the
buckle.
Using the Safety Belt with Cinch
Tongue (Front Center and Rear
Center Seats Only)
The cinch tongue will slide up and down
the belt webbing when the belt is stowed
or while putting safety belts on. When the
lap and shoulder safety belt is buckled, the
cinch tongue will allow the lap portion to
be shortened, but pinches the webbing to
keep the lap portion from getting longer.
The cinch tongue is designed to slip during
a crash, so always wear the shoulder belt
properly and do not allow any slack in
either the lap or shoulder portions.
Before you can reach and latch a lap and
shoulder belt having a cinch tongue into
the buckle, you may have to lengthen the
lap belt portion of it.
30
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
E162708
1. To lengthen the lap belt, pull some
webbing out of the shoulder belt
retractor.
2. While holding the webbing below the
tongue, grasp the tip (metal portion)
of the tongue so that it is parallel to the
webbing and slide the tongue upward.
3. Provide enough lap belt length so that
the tongue can reach the buckle.
Fastening the Cinch Tongue
WARNING
The lap belt should fit snugly and as
low as possible around the hips, not
across the waist.
1. Pull the lap and shoulder belt from the
retractor so that the shoulder belt
portion of the safety belt crosses your
shoulder and chest.
2. Be sure the belt is not twisted. If the
belt is twisted, remove the twist.
3. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle for your seating position until
you hear a snap and feel it latch.
4. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened to the buckle by pulling on
the tongue.
While you are fastened in the safety belt,
the lap and shoulder belt with a cinch
tongue adjusts to your movement.
However, if you brake hard, turn hard, or if
your vehicle receives an impact of 5.0 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the safety belt will
become locked and help reduce your
forward movement.
Using Safety Belts During
Pregnancy
WARNING
Always ride and drive with your
seatback upright and the safety belt
properly fastened. The lap portion of
the safety belt should fit snug and be
positioned low across the hips. The
shoulder portion of the safety belt should
be positioned across the chest. Pregnant
women should also follow this practice.
See the following figure.
E142590
Pregnant women should always wear their
safety belt. Position the lap belt portion of
a combination lap and shoulder belt low
across the hips below the belly and worn
as tight as comfort will allow. Position the
shoulder belt to cross the middle of the
shoulder and the center of the chest.
31
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
Safety Belt Locking Modes
WARNINGS
After any vehicle crash, the safety
belt system at all passenger seating
positions must be checked by an
authorized dealer to verify that the
automatic locking retractor feature for
child seats is still functioning properly. In
addition, all safety belts should be checked
for proper function.
The belt and retractor must be
replaced if the safety belt assembly
automatic locking retractor feature
or any other safety belt function is not
operating properly when checked by an
authorized dealer. Failure to replace the
belt and retractor assembly could increase
the risk of injury in crashes.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver safety belt has the first type of
locking mode. The front outboard
passenger and rear outboard seat safety
belts have both types of locking modes
described as follows:
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and
locking in response to vehicle movement.
For example, if the driver brakes suddenly
or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle
receives an impact of about 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety
belts will lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if the webbing is pulled out too quickly. If
this occurs, let the belt retract slightly and
pull webbing out again in a slow and
controlled manner.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder
belt. The automatic locking mode is not
available on the driver safety belt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
Use this mode any time a child safety seat,
except a booster, is installed in passenger
front or rear seating positions. You should
properly restrain children 12 years old and
under in a rear seating position whenever
possible. See Child Safety (page 15).
How to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
E142591
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire belt is pulled
out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the safety belt is now in
the automatic locking mode.
32
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
How to Disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic
locking mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Safety Belt Extension Assembly
WARNING
Do not use extensions to change the
fit of the shoulder belt across the
torso.
If the safety belt is too short when fully
extended, you can obtain a safety belt
extension assembly from an authorized
dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the
same supplier as the safety belt.
Manufacturer identification is on a label
located either at the end of the webbing
or on the retractor behind the trim. Also,
use the safety belt extension only if the
safety belt is too short for you when fully
extended.
SAFETY BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Position the safety belt height
adjuster so that the belt rests across
the middle of your shoulder. Failure
to adjust the safety belt properly could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
and increase the risk of injury in a crash.
E145664
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so
the belt rests across the middle of your
shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height:
1. Pull the button and slide the height
adjuster up or down.
2. Release the button and pull down on
the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.
SAFETY BELT WARNING LAMP
AND INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound if the
driver's safety belt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is
turned on.
33
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
Conditions of operation
Then...If...
The safety belt warning light illuminates 1-
2 minutes and the warning chime sounds
4-8 seconds.
The driver's safety belt is not buckled
before the ignition switch is turned to the
on position...
The safety belt warning light and warning
chime turn off.
The driver's safety belt is buckled while the
indicator light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and indicator
chime remain off.
The driver's safety belt is buckled before
the ignition switch is turned to the on posi-
tion...
SAFETY BELT MINDER
Belt-Minder™
This feature supplements the safety belt
warning function. It provides additional
reminders by intermittently sounding a
chime and illuminating the safety belt
warning light when the driver's seat is
occupied and the safety belt is unbuckled.
34
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
Then...If...
The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.The driver's safety belt is buckled before
the ignition switch is turned to the on posi-
tion or less than 1-2 minutes have elapsed
since the ignition switch has been turned
to on...
The Belt-Minder feature is activated - the
safety belt warning light illuminates and
the warning chime sounds for six seconds
every 25 seconds, repeating for about five
minutes or until the safety belts are
buckled.
The driver's safety belt is not buckled when
the vehicle has reached at least 6 mph (9.7
km/h) and 1-2 minutes have elapsed since
the ignition switch has been turned to on...
The Belt-Minder feature is activated - the
safety belt warning light illuminates and
the warning chime sounds for six seconds
every 25 seconds, repeating for about five
minutes or until the safety belts are
buckled.
The driver's safety belt becomes unbuckled
for about one minute while the vehicle is
traveling at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and
more than 1-2 minutes have elapsed since
the ignition switch has been turned to on...
Deactivating and Activating the
Belt-Minder Feature (Driver Only)
WARNING
While the system allows you to
deactivate it, this system is designed
to improve your chances of being
safely belted and surviving an accident.
We recommend you leave the system
activated for yourself and others who may
use the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury,
do not deactivate or activate the system
while driving the vehicle.
Note: If you are using MyKey, you cannot
disable the Belt-Minder. Also, if the
Belt-Minder has been previously disabled,
it will be re-enabled during the use of
MyKey. See MyKey™ (page 51).
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before
proceeding with the programming
procedure.
Deactivate or activate the system by
performing the following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure
that:
•The parking brake is set.
•The transmission is in park (P).
•The ignition is off.
•All vehicle doors are closed.
•The driver's safety belt is unbuckled.
1. Turn the ignition on. Do not start the
engine.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light
turns off (about one minute). Step 3
must be completed within 30 seconds
after the safety belt warning light turns
off.
3. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt
three times at a moderate speed,
ending with the safety belt in the
unbuckled state. After Step 3, the
safety belt warning light will turn on.
35
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
4. While the safety belt warning light is
on, buckle then unbuckle the safety
belt. After Step 4, the safety belt
warning light will flash for confirmation.
•This will disable the feature if it is
currently enabled.
•This will enable the feature if it is
currently disabled.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND
SAFETY BELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child
safety seat systems periodically to make
sure they work properly and are not
damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child
seat safety belts to make sure there are no
nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary.
All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies
(slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt
height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder
belt guide on seat back (if equipped), child
safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and
attaching hardware, should be inspected
after a crash. Read the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions for additional
inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint.
Ford Motor Company recommends that
all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles
involved in a crash be replaced. However,
if the crash was minor and an authorized
dealer finds that the belts do not show
damage and continue to operate properly,
they do not need to be replaced. Safety
belt assemblies not in use during a crash
should also be inspected and replaced if
either damage or improper operation is
noted.
Properly care for safety belts. See Vehicle
Care (page 256).
36
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Safety Belts
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Airbags do not inflate slowly or
gently, and the risk of injury from a
deploying airbag is the greatest close
to the trim covering the airbag module.
All occupants of your vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided. Failure to properly wear
your safety belt could seriously increase
the risk of injury or death.
Always transport children 12 years
old and under in the back seat and
always properly use appropriate
child restraints. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
Never place your arm over the airbag
module as a deploying airbag can
result in serious arm fractures or
other injuries.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag supplemental
restraint systems or its fuses as you
could be seriously injured or killed. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Several airbag system components
get hot after inflation. To avoid risk
of injury, do not touch them after
inflation.
If the airbag has deployed, the airbag
will not function again and must be
replaced immediately. If the airbag
is not replaced, the unrepaired area will
increase the risk of injury in a crash.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
safety belts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying
airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
upon activation. After airbag deployment,
it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
(to lubricate the bag) or sodium
compounds (for example, baking soda)
that result from the combustion process
that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
sodium hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of
the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with a
deploying airbag may also cause abrasions
or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also
a possibility as a result of the noise
associated with a deploying airbag.
Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,
particularly to occupants who are not
properly restrained or are otherwise out of
position at the time of airbag deployment.
Thus, it is extremely important that
occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
37
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Never place your arm or any objects
over an airbag module. Placing your
arm over a deploying airbag can
result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries. Objects placed on or over the
airbag inflation area may cause those
objects to be propelled by the airbag into
your face and torso causing serious injury.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
E151127
The driver and front passenger airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag
system consists of:
•Driver and passenger airbag modules.
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 45).
Passenger Airbag On and Off
Switch (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Even with Advanced Restraints
Systems, children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in a
rear seating position. Failure to follow this
could seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
The front passenger airbag is not
designed to offer protection to an
occupant in the center seating
position.
An airbag ON and OFF switch may
be installed in this vehicle. Before
driving, always look at the face of the
switch to be sure the switch is in the proper
position in accordance with these
instructions and warnings. Failure to put
the switch in a proper position can increase
the risk of serious injury or death in a crash.
E162720
High-series vehicles (if equipped)
The front passenger airbag on and off
switch has indicators that will illuminate,
indicating that the front passenger frontal
airbag is either on or off. The indicator lamp
is located by the radio.
Note: The passenger airbag status indicator
OFF and ON lamps will illuminate for a short
period of time when the ignition is first
turned on to confirm it is functional.
38
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Passenger airbagPassenger airbag status
indicator
Switch position
DisabledOFF: LitOff
ON: Unlit
EnabledOFF: UnlitOn
ON: Lit
E162721
Low-series vehicles (if equipped)
The front passenger airbag on and off
switch has an indicator that will illuminate
and stay lit to remind you that the front
passenger frontal airbag is off. The
indicator lamp is located by the radio.
Note: The indicator lamp will illuminate for
a short period of time when the ignition is
first turned on to confirm it is functional.
Turning the Passenger Airbag Off
WARNINGS
If the light fails to illuminate when
the passenger air bag switch is off
and the ignition is on, have the
passenger air bag switch serviced at your
authorized dealer immediately.
In order to avoid inadvertent
activation of the switch, always
remove the ignition key from the
passenger air bag on and off switch.
WARNINGS
An infant in a rear-facing seat faces
a high risk of serious or fatal injuries
from a deploying passenger airbag.
Rear facing infant seats should never be
placed in the front seats, unless the
passenger airbag is turned off.
E162722
1. Insert the ignition key, turn the switch
to OFF and hold in OFF while removing
the key.
2. When the ignition is turned on, the pass
airbag off light illuminates briefly,
momentarily shuts off and then turns
back on. This indicates that the
passenger airbag is deactivated.
39
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Turning the Passenger Airbag Back On
WARNINGS
The safety belts for the driver and
right front passenger seating
positions have been specifically
designed to function together with the
airbags in certain types of crashes. When
you turn off your airbag, you not only lose
the protection of the airbag, you also may
reduce the effectiveness of your safety belt
system, which was designed to work with
the airbag. If you are not a person who
meets the requirements stated in the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration or Transport Canada
deactivation criteria turning off the airbag
can increase the risk of serious injury or
death in a crash.
If your vehicle has rear seats, always
transport children who are 12 and
younger in the rear seat. Always use
safety belts and child restraints properly.
Do not place a child in a rear facing infant
seat in the front seat unless your vehicle is
equipped with an airbag on and off switch
and the passenger airbag is turned off. This
is because the back of the infant seat is
too close to the inflating airbag and the
risk of a fatal injury to the infant when the
airbag inflates is substantial.
If the pass airbag off light is
illuminated when the passenger
airbag switch is on and the ignition
is on, have the passenger airbag switch
serviced at your authorized dealer
immediately.
The passenger airbag remains off until you
turn it back on.
E162723
1. Insert the ignition key and turn the
switch to ON.
2. The pass airbag off light will briefly
illuminate when the ignition is turned
to on. This indicates that the passenger
airbag is operational.
The passenger side airbag should always
be on (the pass airbag off light should not
be illuminated) unless the passenger is a
person who meets the requirements stated
either in Category 1, 2 or 3 of the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration or
Transport Canada deactivation criteria
which follows.
The vast majority of drivers and passengers
are much safer with an airbag than
without. To do their job and reduce the risk
of life threatening injuries, airbags must
open with great force, and this force can
pose a potentially deadly risk in some
situations, particularly when a front seat
occupant is not properly buckled up. The
most effective way to reduce the risk of
unnecessary airbag injuries without
reducing the overall safety of the vehicle
is to make sure all occupants are properly
restrained in the vehicle, especially in the
front seat. This provides the protection of
safety belts and permits the airbags to
provide the additional protection they were
designed to provide. If you choose to
deactivate your airbag, you are losing the
40
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
very significant risk reducing benefits of
the airbag and you are also reducing the
effectiveness of the safety belts, because
safety belts in modern vehicles are
designed to work as a safety system with
the airbags.
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Deactivation Criteria
(Excluding Canada)
WARNING
This vehicle has special energy
management safety belts for the
driver and right front passenger.
These particular belts are specifically
designed to work with airbags to help
reduce the risk of injury in a crash. The
energy management safety belt is
designed to give or release additional belt
webbing in some accidents to reduce
concentration of force on an occupant's
chest and reduce the risk of certain bone
fractures and injuries to underlying organs.
In a crash, if the airbag is turned off, this
energy management safety belt might
permit the person wearing the belt to move
forward enough to incur a serious or fatal
injury. The more severe the crash, and the
heavier the occupant, the greater the risk
is. Be sure the airbag is turned on for any
person who does not qualify under the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration deactivation criteria.
1. Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old)
must ride in the front seat because:
•The vehicle has no rear seat;
•The vehicle has a rear seat too small
to accommodate a rear-facing infant
seat; or
•The infant has a medical condition
which, according to the infant's
physician, makes it necessary for the
infant to ride in the front so that the
driver can constantly monitor the
child's condition.
2. Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must
ride in the front seat because:
•The vehicle has no rear seat;
•Although children ages 1 to 12 ride in
the rear seat(s) whenever possible,
children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must
ride in the front because no space is
available in the rear seat(s) of the
vehicle; or
•The child has a medical condition
which, according to the child's
physician, makes it necessary for the
child to ride in the front seat so that the
driver can constantly monitor the
child's condition.
3. Medical condition. A passenger has a
medical condition which, according to his
or her physician:
•Causes the passenger airbag to pose
a special risk for the passenger;
•Makes the potential harm from the
passenger airbag in a crash greater
than the potential harm from turning
off the airbag and allowing the
passenger, even if belted, to hit the
dashboard or windshield in a crash.
41
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Transport Canada Deactivation Criteria
(Canada Only)
WARNING
This vehicle has special energy
management safety belts for the
driver and right front passenger.
These particular belts are specifically
designed to work with airbags to help
reduce the risk of injury in a crash. The
energy management safety belt is
designed to give or release additional belt
webbing in some accidents to reduce
concentration of force on an occupant's
chest and reduce the risk of certain bone
fractures and injuries to underlying organs.
In a crash, if the airbag is turned off, this
energy management safety belt might
permit the person wearing the belt to move
forward enough to incur a serious or fatal
injury. The more severe the crash, and the
heavier the occupant, the greater the risk
is. Be sure the airbag is turned on for any
person who does not qualify under the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration deactivation criteria.
1. Infant: An infant (less than 1 year old)
must ride in the front seat because:
•My vehicle has no rear seat;
•The rear seat in my vehicle cannot
accommodate a rear-facing infant
seat;
•The infant has a medical condition
which, according to the infant's
physician, makes it necessary for the
infant to ride in the front seat so that
the driver can monitor the infant's
condition.
2. Child age 12 or under: A child age 12 or
under must ride in the front seat because:
•My vehicle has no rear seat;
•Although children age 12 and under ride
in the rear seat whenever possible,
children age 12 and under have no
option but to sometimes ride in the
front seat because rear seat space is
insufficient;
•The child has a medical condition that,
according to the child's physician,
makes it necessary for the child to ride
in the front seat so that the driver can
monitor the child's condition.
3. Medical condition: A passenger has a
medical condition that, according to his or
her physician:
•Poses a special risk for the passenger
if the airbag deploys; and
•Makes the potential harm from the
passenger airbag deployment greater
than the potential harm from turning
off the airbag and experiencing a crash
without the protection offered by the
airbag
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
WARNING
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration recommends a
minimum distance of at least 10
inches (25 centimeters) between an
occupant’s chest and the driver airbag
module.
To properly position yourself away from
the airbag:
•Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
•Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.
42
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on safety belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. Properly seated occupants sit
upright, lean against the seat back, and
center themselves on the seat cushion,
with their feet comfortably extended on
the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies
down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans
forward or sideways, or puts one or both
feet up, the chance of injury during a crash
is greatly increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
E142846
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the
front seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
If two adults and a child occupy a Regular
Cab, properly restrain the child in the
center front unless doing so would interfere
with driving your vehicle. This provides lap
and shoulder belt protection for all
occupants, and airbag protection for the
adults. A child or infant properly restrained
in the center front seat should not incur
risk of serious injury from the airbags.
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the seatbacks
(of the front seats), or in front seat areas
that may come into contact with a
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
Do not use accessory seat covers.
The use of accessory seat covers
may prevent the deployment of the
side airbags and increase the risk of injury
in an accident.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The side airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the side of the
seatback.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag, its fuses or the
seat cover on a seat containing an
airbag as you could be seriously injured or
killed. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
If the side airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again. The
side airbag system (including the
seat) must be inspected and serviced by
an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a crash.
43
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The side airbags are located on the
outboard side of the seatbacks of the front
seats. In certain sideways crashes, the
airbag on the side affected by the crash
will be inflated. The airbag was designed
to inflate between the door panel and
occupant to further enhance the protection
provided occupants in side impact crashes.
E152533
The system consists of the following:
•A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are found
on your vehicle.
•Side airbags located inside the
seatback of the driver and front
passenger seats.
·Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 45).
The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed
by a group of automotive safety experts
known as the Side Airbag Technical
Working Group. These recommended
testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side
airbags.
SAFETY CANOPY™
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the headliner
at the siderail that may come into
contact with a deploying curtain airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The curtain airbag could injure you
as it deploys from the headliner.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the curtain airbags, its fuses,
the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the
headliner on a vehicle containing curtain
airbags as you could be seriously injured
or killed. Contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
All occupants of your vehicle
including the driver should always
wear their safety belts even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system and
curtain airbag is provided. Failure to
properly wear your safety belt could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
To reduce risk of injury, do not
obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the curtain
airbag.
If the curtain airbags have deployed,
the curtain airbags will not function
again. The curtain airbags (including
the A, B and C pillar trim and headliner)
must be inspected and serviced by an
authorized dealer. If the curtain airbag is
not replaced, the unrepaired area will
increase the risk of injury in a crash.
44
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The Safety Canopy will deploy during
significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected
by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy
is mounted to the roof side-rail sheet
metal, behind the headliner, above each
row of seats. In certain sideways crashes
or rollover events, the Safety Canopy will
be activated, regardless of which seats are
occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed
to inflate between the side window area
and occupants to further enhance
protection provided in side impact crashes
and rollover events.
E75004
The system consists of the following:
•Safety canopy curtain airbags located
above the trim panels over the front
and rear side windows identified by a
label or wording on the headliner or
roof-pillar trim.
•A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
deployment
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with a readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 45).
Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear
seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere
with children restrained using a properly
installed child or booster seat because it
is designed to inflate downward from the
headliner above the doors along the side
window opening.
The design and development of the Safety
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a
group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of injuries
related to the deployment of side airbags
(including the Safety Canopy).
CRASH SENSORS AND
AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING
Modifying or adding equipment to
the front end of the vehicle (including
frame, bumper, front end body
structure and tow hooks) may affect the
performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify
the front end of the vehicle.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors which provide
information to the restraints control
module which deploys (activates) the
front safety belt pretensioners, driver
airbag, passenger airbag, seat mounted
side airbags, and the Safety Canopy®.
Based on the type of crash (frontal impact,
side impact or rollover), the restraints
control module will deploy the appropriate
safety devices.
45
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The restraints control module also
monitors the readiness of the above safety
devices plus the crash and occupant
sensors. The readiness of the safety
system is indicated by a warning indicator
light in the instrument cluster or by a
backup tone if the warning light is not
working. See Instrument Cluster (page
82). Routine maintenance of the airbag is
not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after the
ignition is turned on.
•The readiness light will either flash or
stay lit.
•A series of five beeps will be heard. The
tone pattern will repeat periodically
until the problem, the light or both are
repaired.
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.
The fact that the safety belt pretensioners
or front airbags did not activate for both
front seat occupants in a crash does not
mean that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the restraints
control module determined the accident
conditions (crash severity, belt usage)
were not appropriate to activate these
safety devices.
•The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts) unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration.
•The design of the safety belt
pretensioners is to activate in frontal,
near-frontal and side crashes, and in
rollovers.
•The design of the side airbags is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes.
Side airbags may activate in other
types of crashes if the vehicle
experiences sufficient sideways motion
or deformation.
•The design of the Safety Canopy is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes
or rollover events. The Safety Canopy
may activate in other types of crashes
if the vehicle experiences sufficient
sideways motion or deformation, or a
certain likelihood of rollover.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
46
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term IC before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 feet (10
meters). Vehicles with the remote start
feature will have a greater range. One of
the following could cause a decrease in
operating range:
•weather conditions
•nearby radio towers
•structures around the vehicle
•other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle
The radio frequency used by your remote
control can also be used by other short
distance radio transmissions, for example
amateur radios, medical equipment,
wireless headphones, remote controls and
alarm systems. If the frequencies are
jammed, you will not be able to use your
remote control. You can lock and unlock
the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.
Note: The remote control contains sensitive
electrical components. Exposure to moisture
or impact may cause permanent damage.
REMOTE CONTROL
Integrated Keyhead Transmitters
(If Equipped)
E163046
Use the key blade to start your vehicle and
unlock or lock the driver door from outside
your vehicle. The transmitter portion
functions as the remote control.
E163047
Note: Your vehicle’s keys came with a
security label that provides important
vehicle key cut information. Keep the label
in a safe place for future reference.
Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
47
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Note: Replacing the battery will not delete
the transmitter from the vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
E163048
3
2
1
1. Twist a thin coin in the slot of the
transmitter near the key ring to remove
the battery cover.
2. Carefully peel up the rubber gasket
from the transmitter. It may come off
with the battery cover.
3. Remove the old battery
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the
instructions inside the transmitter for
the correct orientation of the battery.
Press the battery down to make sure
it is fully in the housing.
5. Reinstall the rubber gasket.
6. Snap the battery cover back onto the
transmitter.
Memory Feature (If Equipped)
You can program your integrated keyhead
transmitter to recall memory settings for
the driver seat, power mirrors and power
foot pedals. See Memory Function (page
120).
Car Finder
E138623
Press the button twice within
three seconds. The horn will
sound and the turn signals will
flash. We recommend you use this method
to locate your vehicle, rather than using
the panic alarm.
Sounding a Panic Alarm
Note: The panic alarm will only operate
when the ignition is off.
E138624
Press the button to activate the
alarm. Press the button again or
turn the ignition on to deactivate
it.
Remote Start (If Equipped)
WARNING
To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use
remote start if your vehicle is parked
indoors or areas that are not well
ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your vehicle
is low on fuel.
E138625
The remote start button is on the
transmitter.
This feature allows you to start your
vehicle from outside the vehicle. The
transmitter has an extended operating
range.
Vehicles with automatic climate control
can be set to operate when you remote
start the vehicle. See Climate Control
(page 110). A manual climate control
system will run at the setting it was set to
when you switch the vehicle off.
48
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Many states and provinces have
restrictions for the use of remote start.
Check your local and state or provincial
laws for specific requirements regarding
remote start systems.
The remote start system will not work if:
•the ignition is on
•the alarm system is triggered
•you disable the feature
•the hood is open
•the transmission is not in P
•the vehicle battery voltage is too low
•the service engine soon indicator is on.
Remote Starting the Vehicle
Note: You must press each button within
three seconds of each other. Your vehicle
will not remote start and the horn will not
sound if you do not follow this sequence.
E138626
The label on your transmitter details the
starting procedure.
To remote start your vehicle:
1. Press the lock button to lock all the
doors.
2. Press the remote start button twice.
The exterior lamps will flash twice.
The horn will sound if the system fails to
start.
Note: If you remote start your vehicle with
an integrated keyhead transmitter, you must
switch the ignition on before driving your
vehicle. If you remote start your vehicle with
an intelligent access transmitter, you must
press the START/STOP button on the
instrument panel once while applying the
brake pedal before driving your vehicle.
The power windows will not work during
the remote start and the radio will not turn
on automatically.
The parking lamps will remain on and the
vehicle will run for 5, 10, or 15 minutes,
depending on the setting.
Extending the Vehicle Run Time
Repeat Steps 1 and 2 with the vehicle still
running to extend the run time for another
remote start duration. If the duration is set
to last 10 minutes, the duration will extend
by another 10 minutes. For example, if the
vehicle had been running from the first
remote start for five minutes, the vehicle
will continue to run now for a total of 20
minutes.
Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting after a vehicle shutdown.
Turning the Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting
E138625
Press the button once. The
parking lamps will turn off.
You may have to be closer to the
vehicle than when starting due to ground
reflection and the added noise of the
running vehicle.
You can disable or enable the remote start
system through the information display.
See (page 89).
49
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 64).
To re-program the passive anti-theft
system see an authorized dealer.
50
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. All but one of the keys
programmed to the vehicle can be
activated with these restricted modes.
Any keys that have not been programmed
are referred to as administrator keys or
admin keys. They can be used to:
•create a MyKey
•program configurable MyKey settings
•clear all MyKey features.
When you have programmed a MyKey, you
can access the following information using
the information display:
•How many admin keys and MyKeys are
programmed to your vehicle.
•The total distance your vehicle has
traveled using a MyKey.
Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the
same settings. You cannot program them
individually.
Non-configurable Settings
The following settings cannot be changed
by an admin key user:
•Belt-Minder. You cannot disable this
feature. The audio system will mute
when the front seat occupants’ safety
belts are not fastened. Note: If your
vehicle is equipped with AM/FM radio
only, then the radio will not mute.
•Early low fuel. The low fuel warning is
activated earlier, giving the MyKey user
more time to refuel.
•Driver assist features, if equipped on
your vehicle, are forced on: parking aid,
blind spot information system (BLIS)
with cross traffic alert, lane departure
warning and forward collision warning
system.
Configurable Settings
With an admin key, you can configure
certain MyKey settings when you first
create a MyKey and before you recycle the
key or restart the vehicle. You can also
change the settings afterward with an
admin key:
•A vehicle speed limit can be set.
Warnings will be shown in the display
followed by an audible tone when your
vehicle reaches the set speed. You
cannot override the set speed by fully
depressing the accelerator pedal or by
setting cruise control.
WARNING
Do not set MyKey maximum speed
limit to a limit that will prevent the
driver from maintaining a safe speed
considering posted speed limits and
prevailing road conditions. The driver is
always responsible to drive in accordance
with local laws and prevailing conditions.
Failure to do so could result in accident or
injury.
•Various vehicle speed minders can be
set. Once you select a speed, it will be
shown in the display, followed by an
audible tone when the preselected
vehicle speed is exceeded.
•Audio system maximum volume of
45%. A message will be shown in the
display when you attempt to exceed
the limited volume. Also, the
speed-sensitive or compensated
automatic volume control will be
disabled. Note: If your vehicle is
equipped with AM/FM radio only, then
the radio volume will not be limited.
•Always on setting. When this is
selected, you will not be able to turn
off AdvanceTrac (if your vehicle is
equipped with this feature).
51
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a
MyKey. There are two types of information
displays, and their controls and messaging
vary. To determine which type of display
you have, you will need to reference
another chapter. See (page 89).
If You Have a Type 1 Information
Display:
1. Insert the key you want to program into
the ignition.
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu on the
information display controls. Press
SETUP using the information display
buttons until PRESS RESET TO
CREATE MYKEY is displayed.
4. Press and release the RESET button.
You will see HOLD RESET TO
CONFIRM MYKEY in the display.
5. Press and hold the RESET button for
two seconds until you see the message
MARK THIS AS RESTRICTED in the
display. Wait until you see KEY
RESTRICTED AT NEXT START in the
display.
If You Have a Type 2 Information
Display:
1. Insert the key you want to program into
the ignition.
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu on the
information display controls, and select
SETTINGS, then MYKEY by pressing
OK or the > button.
4. Press OK or the > button to select
CREATE A MYKEY.
5. When prompted, hold the OK button
until you see KEY RESTRICTED AT
NEXT START in the display. The key
will be restricted at the next start.
MyKey is successfully created. Make sure
you label it so you can distinguish it from
the admin keys.
You can also program configurable
settings for the key(s). Refer to
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings.
Programming/Changing
Configurable Settings
Use the information display to program or
change your configurable MyKey settings.
There are two types of information
displays, and their controls and messaging
vary. To determine which type of display
you have, you will need to reference
another chapter. See (page 89).
If You Have a Type 1 Information
Display:
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
key.
2. Access the main menu on the
information display controls, and press
SETUP until RESET FOR MYKEY
SETTINGS displays.
3. Press and release the RESET button
to display MyKey setup menus.
4. Press the SETUP button to enter your
choice. Once you make a selection, the
next configurable setting will be
displayed.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until you are
done changing the configurable
settings.
If You Have a Type 2 Information
Display:
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
key.
2. Access the main menu on the
information display controls, and select
SETTINGS, then MYKEY by pressing
OK or the > button.
52
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
3. Use the arrow buttons to get to a
configurable feature.
4. Press OK or > to make a selection.
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
settings at any time during the same key
cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you
have switched the engine off, however, you
will need an admin key to change or clear
your MyKey settings.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
You can clear all MyKeys within the same
key cycle as you created the MyKey. If you
switch your ignition off, however, you will
need to use an admin key to clear your
MyKeys.
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you
remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys
to their original admin key status at once.
To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings,
use the information display. There are two
types of information displays, and their
controls and messaging vary. To determine
which type of display you have, you will
need to reference another chapter. See
(page 89).
If You Have a Type 1 Information
Display:
1. Press SETUP until PRESS RESET TO
CLEAR MYKEY displays.
2. Press and release the RESET button.
The display will show HOLD RESET
TO CONFIRM CLEAR.
3. Press and hold the RESET button for
two seconds until ALL MYKEYS
CLEARED displays.
If You Have a Type 2 Information
Display:
1. Access the main menu and select
SETTINGS, then MYKEY.
2. Scroll to CLEAR ALL and press the OK
button.
3. Hold the OK button until ALL
MYKEYS CLEARED displays.
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
You can find information on programmed
MyKey(s) using the information display
control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 89).
To find information on programmed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button to
access the main menu and scroll to:
DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.MyKey
Select one of the following:
53
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
DescriptionMessage
Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way
to delete the accumulated distance is by using an admin key
to clear your MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate as
expected, then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or
an admin key user recently cleared and then recreated a
MyKey.
MyKey Dist.
Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle.
Use this feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for
your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted.
{0} MyKeys
Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your
vehicle. Use this feature to determine how many unrestricted
keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional
MyKey has been programmed.
{0} Admin Keys
54
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non
Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for
a Ford-approved remote start system.
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Potential causesCondition
· The key used to start the vehicle does not
have admin privileges.
I cannot create a MyKey.
· The key used to start the vehicle is the only
admin key. There always has to be at least
one admin key.
· SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.
· The key in the ignition does not have admin
privileges.
I cannot program the configurable settings.
· There are no keys programmed to the
vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 52).
· The key used to start the vehicle does not
have admin privileges.
I cannot clear the MyKeys.
· No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 52).
· Purchase a new key from your authorized
dealer.
I lost the only admin key.
· Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-
Theft System (page 64).
I lost a key.
· The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.MyKey distances do not accumulate.
· An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys
and created new MyKeys.
· The key system has been reset.
55
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control
or the remote control to lock and unlock
your vehicle.
Power Door Locks (If Equipped)
The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels.
A B
E163049
UnlockA
LockB
Remote Control (If Equipped)
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage
Unlock)
E138629
Press the button to unlock the
driver door.
Press the button again within
three seconds to unlock all doors. The turn
signals will flash.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for four
seconds to disable or enable two-stage
unlocking. Disabling two-stage unlocking
allows all vehicle doors to unlock with one
press of the button. The turn signals will
flash twice to indicate a change to the
unlocking mode. The unlocking mode
applies to the remote control and keyless
entry keypad.
Locking the Doors
E138623
Press the button to lock all the
doors. The turn signals will
illuminate.
Press the button again within three
seconds to confirm that all the doors are
closed. The doors will lock again, the horn
will sound and the turn signals will
illuminate if all the doors are closed.
Mislock
If any door is open or if the hood is open on
vehicles with an anti-theft alarm or remote
start, the horn will sound twice and the
lamps will not flash.
Smart Unlocks (If Equipped)
This feature helps to prevent you from
locking yourself out of your vehicle if your
key is still in the ignition.
When you open the driver door and lock
your vehicle with the power door lock
control, all the doors will lock then unlock
if your key is still in the ignition.
Your can still lock your vehicle with the key
in the ignition by:
•using the manual lock on the door
•locking the driver door with a key
•using the keyless entry keypad
•using the lock button on the remote
control
Autolock and Autounlock (If Equipped)
The autolock feature will lock all the doors
when:
•all doors are closed, and
•the ignition is on, and
•you shift into any gear putting your
vehicle in motion, and
•your vehicle attains a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h).
56
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Locks
The autolock feature will unlock all the
doors when:
•autolock has locked the doors
•you stop the vehicle and switch the
ignition off or to accessory mode, and
•you open the driver door within 10
minutes.
Note: The doors will not autounlock if you
have electronically locked them before
opening the driver door.
Enabling or Disabling
You can enable or disable these features
in the information display or your
authorized dealer can do it for you. See
(page 89).
Note: You can enable or disable the
autolock and autounlock features
independently of each other.
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and select exterior
lamps will illuminate when you unlock the
doors with the remote entry system.
The illuminated entry system will turn off
the lights if:
•the ignition is on
•you press the remote control lock
button, or
•after 25 seconds of illumination.
The dome lamp will not turn on if the
control is set to the off position.
The lights will not turn off if:
•you turn them on with the dimmer
control, or
•any door is open.
Battery Saver
The battery saver turns off the interior
lamps 30 minutes after you switch the
ignition off if a door is open and the dome
lamp switch is on. It turns off the interior
lamps after 10 minutes if the dome lamp
switch is off.
KEYLESS ENTRY (If Equipped)
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD
The keypad is located near the driver
window.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast
on the keypad, the unlock function may not
work. Re-enter your entry code more slowly.
E163050
You can use the keypad to lock or unlock
the doors without using a key.
For vehicles without intelligent access, you
can operate the keypad with the
factory-set 5-digit entry code. The code is
located on the owner’s wallet card in the
glove box and is available from an
authorized dealer. You can also create up
to five of your own 5-digit personal entry
codes.
For vehicles with intelligent access, you do
not need to enter a 5-digit entry code.
Press any button on keyless entry keypad
once to unlock all doors.
Note: You must have an intelligent access
key within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.
57
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Programming a Personal Entry Code
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory-set code.
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. You
must enter each number within five
seconds of each other.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save
personal code 1.
The doors will lock then unlock to confirm
that programming was successful.
To program additional personal entry
codes, repeat Steps 1-3, then for Step 4:
•press 3·4 to save personal code 2
•press 5·6 to save personal code 3
•press 7·8 to save personal code 4
•press 9·0 to save personal code 5.
You may also program a personal entry
code through the information display.
Tips:
•Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
•Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
•The factory-set code will work even if
you have set your own personal code.
Recalling Memory Positions (If
Equipped)
The programmed entry codes will recall
driver memory positions as follows:
•Entry code 1 will recall driver 1 memory
positions.
•Entry code 2 will recall driver 2 memory
positions.
Note: Personal entry codes 3, 4 and 5 will
not recall memory positions.
Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory-set 5-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds.
You must do this within five seconds
of completing Step 2.
All personal codes will erase and only the
factory-set 5-digit code will work.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad will go into an anti-scan mode
if you enter the wrong code seven times
(35 consecutive button presses). This
mode disables the keypad for one minute
and the keypad lamp will flash.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
•one minute of keypad inactivity
•pressing the unlock button on the
remote control
•switching the ignition on.
Displaying the Factory Set Code
Note: You will need to have two
programmed passive anti-theft keys for this
procedure.
To display the factory-set code in the
information display:
1. Insert a key into the ignition and switch
the ignition on for a few seconds.
2. Switch the ignition off and remove the
key.
3. Insert the second key into the ignition
and switch the ignition on.
The factory-set code will display for a few
seconds.
Note: The code may not display until after
any other warning messages first display.
58
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Unlocking and Locking the Doors
Vehicles Without Intelligent Access
To Unlock the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set 5-digit code or your
personal code. You must press each
number within five seconds of each other.
The interior lamps will illuminate.
Note: All doors will unlock if you disable
the two-stage unlocking mode. See
Locking and Unlocking (page 56).
To Unlock All Doors
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 3·4 within five seconds.
To Lock All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the same
time (with the driver door closed). You do
not need to enter the keypad code first.
Vehicles With Intelligent Access
Press any button on keyless entry keypad
once to unlock all doors.
Note: You must have an intelligent access
key within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.
59
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Locks
TAILGATE LOCK
The tailgate lock can help prevent theft of
the tailgate.
E163087
Insert the ignition key into the tailgate lock.
Turn it to the right to lock the tailgate. Turn
it to the left to unlock the tailgate.
REMOVING THE TAILGATE
WARNING
Always properly secure cargo to
prevent shifting cargo or cargo falling
from vehicle, which could result in
compromised vehicle stability and serious
personal injury to vehicle occupants or
others.
You can remove the tailgate for more
loading room.
Note: Skip to Step 4 if your vehicle does
not have a rearview camera.
E163090
1. Locate and disconnect the rearview
camera in-line connector. It is under
the pickup box on the right-hand side
of the vehicle near the spare tire.
2. There is a tethered cap on the wire
assembly. Install it on the in-line
connector that remains under the
pickup box.
3. Partially lower the tailgate. Carefully
feed the tailgate harness up through
the gap between the pickup box and
the bumper and place it out of the way
under the pickup box.
4. Lower the tailgate.
E163092
5. Use a screwdriver to gently pry the
spring clip on each connector past the
head of the support screw. Disconnect
the cable.
6. Disconnect the other cable.
60
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Tailgate
7. Lift the tailgate to a 45-degree angle
from horizontal.
8. Lift the right side off its hinge.
9. Lift the tailgate to an 80-degree angle
from horizontal.
10. Remove the tailgate from the left side
hinge by sliding it to the right.
Reverse the steps to reinstall the tailgate.
TAILGATE STEP (If Equipped)
To reduce the risk of falling:
•Only operate the step when your
vehicle is on a level surface.
•Only operate the step in areas with
sufficient lighting.
•Always open the step panel to widen
the step.
•Always use the grab handle when
climbing on the step.
•Do not use the step with bare feet.
•Make sure the step is clean before use.
•Keep the step load, you plus the load,
below 350 lb (159 kg).
Opening the step
Note: Make sure to close and fully latch the
step before moving your vehicle. Never drive
with the step or grab handle open.
1. Lower the tailgate.
2. Pull the yellow lever on the grab handle
to the unlock position.
E163093
3. Raise the handle upright until you feel
it latch and see the lever in the lock
position. You only need to use the lever
when releasing the grab handle.
E163094
4. Rotate the center molding to unlatch
the step. Pull it toward you to extend
it.
5. Open the step panel to widen the step.
Note: Do not tow with the step or grab
handle.
Replace the slip resistance tape or grab
handle molding if it appears worn or
damaged.
Closing the step
1. Close the step panel then lift and fully
close the step into the tailgate.
61
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Tailgate
2. Move the yellow lever on the grab
handle to the unlock position and lower
the handle.
BED EXTENDER (If Equipped)
Note: Do not use the bed extender when
driving off road.
Note: Make sure to engage the locking pins
and knobs fully before driving your vehicle.
Note: Make sure to secure all cargo.
Note: Do not exceed 150 pounds (68
kilograms) on the tailgate when your vehicle
is moving.
Note: Do not keep the bed extender in the
tailgate mode when you are not using it for
restraining cargo. Always keep the bed
extender in the grocery mode or the stowed
position with the tailgate closed.
Tailgate mode
E163095
1. Pull the locking pin toward the center
of your vehicle.
E163096
2. Open the latches to release the panels.
E163097
3. Rotate the panels toward the tailgate.
Repeat Steps 1-3 on the other side of
your vehicle.
E163098
4. Connect the two panels. Rotate both
knobs one-quarter turn clockwise to
secure the panels.
62
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Tailgate
E163099
5. Make sure to insert the latch rod into
the tailgate hole. Make sure to engage
both sides of the locking pins into their
holes in the pick-up box.
Reverse the steps to store the bed
extender.
Grocery mode
E163100
Follow Steps 1-4 of the tailgate mode
instructions by rotating the panels away
from the tailgate. Close the tailgate.
63
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Tailgate
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM (If Equipped)
Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security
protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices
or a second coded key on the same key
chain may cause vehicle starting problems
if they are too close to the key when starting
the engine. Prevent these objects from
touching the coded key while starting the
engine. Switch the ignition off, move all
objects on the key chain away from the
coded key and restart the engine if a
problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in the vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
SecuriLock™
The system is an engine immobilization
system. It helps prevent the engine from
starting unless you use a coded key
programmed to your vehicle. Using the
wrong key may prevent the engine from
starting. A message may appear in the
information display.
If you are unable to start the engine with a
correctly coded key, the system has
malfunctioned. A message may appear in
the information display.
Automatic Arming
The system arms immediately after you
switch the ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
Switching the ignition on with a coded key
disarms the system.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle may have two integrated
keyhead transmitters.
The integrated keyhead transmitter
functions as a programmed ignition key. It
operates all the locks, starts the vehicle
and acts as a remote control.
If your programmed transmitters or
standard SecuriLock coded keys are lost
or stolen and you do not have an extra
coded key, you will need to have your
vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. You
need to erase the key codes from your
vehicle and program new coded keys.
Store an extra programmed key away from
your vehicle in a safe place to help prevent
any inconveniences. See an authorized
dealer to purchase additional spare or
replacement keys.
Programming a Spare Key
Note: You can program a maximum of eight
coded keys to your vehicle. Only four of
these can be integrated keyhead
transmitters.
You can program your own integrated
keyhead transmitter or standard
SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle. This
procedure will program both the engine
immobilizer keycode and the remote entry
portion of the remote control to your
vehicle.
Only use integrated keyhead transmitters
or standard SecuriLock keys.
You must have two previously
programmed coded keys and the new
unprogrammed key readily accessible. See
an authorized dealer to have the spare key
programmed if two previously
programmed coded keys are not available.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
64
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Security
1. Insert the first previously programmed
coded key into the ignition.
2. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
3. Switch the ignition off and remove the
first coded key from the ignition.
4. After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off,
insert the second previously coded key
into the ignition.
5. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
6. Switch the ignition off and remove the
second previously programmed coded
key from the ignition.
7. After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off
and removing the previously
programmed coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key into the ignition.
8. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least six seconds
until you hear the door locks cycle.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded
key from the ignition.
The key will start the engine if
programming is successful. You can
operate the remote entry system if the new
key is an integrated keyhead transmitter.
If programming was not successful, wait
20 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 8.
If you are still unsuccessful, take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM (If Equipped)
The system warns you of an unauthorized
entry to your vehicle. It triggers if any door
or the hood opens without using the key,
remote control or keyless entry keypad.
The direction indicators flash and the horn
sounds if the system triggers while the
alarm is armed.
Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm
problem with your vehicle.
Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is
not a key in the ignition. Electronically lock
the vehicle to arm the alarm.
The direction indicators flash once after
you lock the vehicle. This indicates the
alarm is in the pre-armed mode. It will fully
arm in 20 seconds.
Disarming the Alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
•Press the power door unlock button
within the 20-second pre-armed mode.
•Unlock the doors with the remote
control or keyless entry keypad.
•Switch the ignition on or start the
vehicle.
•Use a key in the driver door to unlock
the vehicle, then switch the ignition on
within 12 seconds.
Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control will stop the horn and signal
indicators, but will not disarm the system.
65
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Security
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 117).
E183047
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
E183049
3. Lock the steering column.
AUDIO CONTROL (If Equipped)
You can operate the following functions
with the control:
E163051
Media.A
Volume up.B
Volume down.C
66
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
Seek down or previous.D
Seek up or next.E
Media
Press repeatedly to scroll through available
audio modes.
Seek, Next or Previous
Press the seek button to:
•Tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset.
•Play the next or the previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to:
•Tune the radio to the next station up
or down the frequency band.
•Seek through a track.
VOICE CONTROL (If Equipped)
E163052
Voice recognition.A
Phone mode.B
See SYNC™ (page 329). See MyFord
Touch™ (page 374).
CRUISE CONTROL (If Equipped)
E163053
See Cruise Control (page 183).
INFORMATION DISPLAY
CONTROL
Type 1
E163054
67
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
Type 2
E163055
See Information Displays (page 89).
HEATED STEERING WHEEL (If
Equipped)
See MyFord Touch™ (page 374).
68
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE PEDALS (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Never use the controls while your
feet are on the accelerator and brake
pedals and the vehicle is moving.
You can find the control on the left side of
the steering column. Press and hold the
appropriate side of the control to move the
pedals.
A B
E162916
A. Farther
B. Closer
You can save and recall the pedal positions
with the memory feature. See Memory
Function (page 120).
Note: Adjust the pedals only when your
vehicle is in P (Park).
69
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Pedals
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
switching on the windshield wipers.
Note: Make sure the windshield wipers are
switched off before entering a car wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper
blades if they begin to leave streaks or
smears. If that does not resolve the issue,
install new wiper blades.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
E171242
Rotate the end of the control:
•away from you to increase the wiper
speed
•toward you to decrease the wiper
speed.
Speed dependent wipers
When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes decreases.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washer before wiping a dry
windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washers when
the washer reservoir is empty. This may
cause the washer pump to overheat.
E171243
Press the button to operate the windshield
washers.
•A brief press causes a single wipe
without washer fluid.
•A quick press and hold causes the
wipers to swipe three times with
washer fluid.
•A long press and hold will activate the
wipers and washer fluid for up to 10
seconds.
A wipe will occur a few seconds after
washing to clear any remaining washer
fluid. This feature can be turned on and off
in the information display.
Front Camera Washer (If Equipped)
Operating the windshield washer will also
operate the front camera washer.
70
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
GENERAL INFORMATION
Condensation in Lamp Assemblies
Exterior lamps have vents to
accommodate normal changes in air
pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When
normal condensation occurs, a fine mist
can form on the interior of the lens. The
fine mist eventually clears and exits
through the vents during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
•The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets).
•A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation
are:
•A water puddle inside the lamp.
•Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
LIGHTING CONTROL
E163267
•Rotate the headlamp control clockwise
to the first position to turn on the
parking lamps, instrument panel lamps,
license plate lamps and tail lamps.
•Rotate clockwise to the second
position to also turn on the headlamps.
High Beams
E167827
Push the lever toward the instrument panel
to switch the high beams on.
Push the lever toward the instrument panel
again or pull the lever towards you to
switch the high beams off.
71
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
Headlamp Flasher
E163268
Pull the lever toward you to flash the
headlamps and release the lever to switch
the headlamps off.
AUTOLAMPS (If Equipped)
E163269
A
The autolamp system provides light
sensitive automatic on-off control of the
exterior lights normally controlled by the
headlamp control.
•To turn autolamps on, rotate the
control to the fourth position.
•To turn autolamps off, rotate the
control to the first, second, or third
position.
Note: If the vehicle is equipped with
autolamps, it will have the headlamps on
with windshield wipers feature. If the
windshield wipers are turned on, the exterior
lamps will turn on with the headlamp
control in the autolamp position.
The autolamp system also keeps the lights
on for a predetermined amount of time after
the ignition switch is turned to off. You can
change the amount of time the lamps stay
on by using the programming procedure that
follows:
Autolamps - Programmable Exit
Delay
Programmable exit delay allows the length
of the autolamp exit delay to be changed.
To program the auto lamp exit time delay:
1. Start with the ignition in the off position
and the headlamp control in the
autolamp position.
2. Turn the headlamp control to off.
3. Turn the ignition switch to on and then
back to off.
4. Turn the headlamp control to the
autolamp position. The headlamps will
turn on.
5. Wait the desired amount of time for
the exit delay you want (up to three
minutes), then turn the headlamps off.
72
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER
E163270
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel and all applicable lit
components in the vehicle during
headlamp and parking lamp operation.
•Tap the top or bottom of the control
to brighten/dim all interior lit
components incrementally, or
•Press and hold at the first position the
top or bottom of the control until the
desired lighting level is reached.
•Press and hold the top of the control
to the full on position to activate the
“dome on” feature. This will turn on the
interior courtesy lights. The lights will
remain on until the bottom of the
control is pressed.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Always remember to switch your
headlamps on in low light situations
or during inclement weather. The
system does not activate the tail lamps
and may not provide adequate lighting
during these conditions. Failure to activate
your headlamps under these conditions
may result in a collision.
The system switches the headlamps on
with a reduced output in daylight
conditions.
To switch the system on:
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Switch the lighting control to the off,
or parking lamp position.
3. Disengage the parking brake.
4. Make sure the transmission selector
lever is not in position P.
FRONT FOG LAMPS (If Equipped)
E163271
A
73
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
The headlamp control also operates the
fog lamps. The fog lamps can be turned
on only when the headlamp control is in
the parking lamp (second) position,
headlamps on (third) position, or autolamp
(fourth) position, and the high beams are
not turned on.
Pull headlamp control towards you to turn
fog lamps on. The fog lamp indicator light
will illuminate.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
E163272
The direction indicator lever does not
mechanically lock in the upward or
downward position when activated. The
direction indicator activation and
cancellation is electronic.
•To operate the left direction indicator,
push the lever down until it stops and
releases.
•To operate the right direction indicator,
push the lever up until it stops and
releases.
•To cancel direction indicator operation
manually, push the lever again in either
direction.
Lane Change
To indicate a left or right lane change:
•Push the lever up or down to the first
stop position and release. The direction
indicators flash three times and stop.
•Push the lever up or down to the first
stop position and hold. The direction
indicators flash for as long as you hold
the lever in this position.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Front Map Lamps (If equipped)
The map lamps are located on the
overhead console. Press the controls on
either side of each map lamp to turn on
the lamps. The map lamps also light when:
•any door is opened.
•the instrument panel dimmer switch is
pressed up until the courtesy lamps
come on.
•any of the remote entry controls are
pressed and the ignition is off.
E163273
74
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
Rear Dome and Map Lamps
E163274
Your vehicle may have map lamps within
the rear dome lamp. Press the switches on
either side of the dome lamp to turn the
lamps on.
75
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
POWER WINDOWS (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
When closing the power windows,
you should verify they are free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the window openings.
E163056
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
Press the switch to open the window.
Lift the switch to close the window.
One-Touch Up or Down (If Equipped)
Press or lift the switch fully and release it.
Press or lift it again to stop the window.
Note: The window may disable for up to
five minutes if you cycle it up and down
repeatedly. This helps prevent damage to
the motor. Normal operation will resume
once the motor cools.
Restoring the One-Touch Up Function
You may lose the one-touch function if the
vehicle battery is low.
Note: Perform one-touch up re-calibration
with the door closed. Calibrating with the
door open will cause the window to
continuously bounce back.
To reset the function after full battery
power is restored:
1. Pull the switch all the way up.
2. Hold the switch until the glass stops
and continue to hold for two seconds.
3. Press the switch down and operate the
window to the full down position.
One-touch up will now be functional.
Bounce-Back (If Equipped)
The window will stop automatically while
closing. It will reverse some distance if
there is an obstacle in the way.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING
When you override the bounce-back
feature the window will not reverse
if it detects an obstacle. Take care
when closing the windows to avoid
personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
Pull up the window switch and hold within
two seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window will
travel up with no bounce-back protection.
The window will stop if you release the
switch before the window is fully closed.
76
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Window Lock
E163057 AB
UnlockA
LockB
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear
window controls.
Accessory Delay (If Equipped)
You can use the window switches for
several minutes after you switch the
ignition off or until you open either front
door.
GLOBAL OPENING (If Equipped)
You can use the remote control to operate
the windows with the ignition off.
Note: To operate this feature, accessory
delay must not be active.
Opening the Windows
You can only open the windows for a short
time after you unlock your vehicle with the
remote control. After you unlock your
vehicle, press and hold the remote control
unlock button to open the windows.
Release the button once movement starts.
Press the lock or unlock button to stop
movement.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving.
E163059
B
AC
Left-hand mirrorA
OffB
Right-hand mirrorC
To adjust a mirror:
1. Rotate the control to select the mirror
you want to adjust.
2. Adjust the position of the mirror.
3. Return the control to the center
position to lock mirrors in place.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
For tight parking conditions, you can push
the mirror toward the door window glass.
Before driving, make sure that you fully
engage the mirror in its support when
returning it to its original position.
77
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Power-Folding Mirrors (If Equipped)
E163060
1. Rotate the control so the dots line up.
2. Pull the control back to fold the mirrors
in or out.
Note: If you repeatedly fold and unfold the
mirrors several times within one minute, the
system may disable to protect the motors
from overheating. It will reset to normal
function automatically within three to five
minutes.
You can also fold a mirror manually by
pushing it toward the door window glass.
After you manually adjust the mirror, you
will need to reset it.
To reset the power-folding mirror system
and return it to its normal function:
•Fold the mirror manually by pushing it
toward the door window glass.
•Use the power-fold control to fold and
unfold the mirror two or three times.
The mirror will make a sound as it
resets.
Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page
115).
Memory Mirrors (If Equipped)
You can save and recall the mirror
positions through the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 120).
Clearance Lamps (If Equipped)
The lower, outer part of the mirror housings
light when you switch the headlamps or
parking lamps on.
Telescoping Mirrors (If Equipped)
E163061
This feature lets you extend the mirror
about 3 inches (75 millimeters). It is useful
when towing a trailer. You can manually
pull out or push in the mirrors to the desired
position.
PowerScope™ Power Telescoping
Mirrors (If Equipped)
This feature lets you position both mirrors
in or out at the same time. The control is
on the door trim panel.
E163062 BA
Telescope OutA
Telescope InB
78
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
To adjust the mirrors:
•Press and hold the control.
•When you position the mirrors in or out,
the motors will run as long as you hold
the control. The running motors allow
you to make adjustments as needed.
•After positioning the mirrors, return the
control to the center position to help
protect the motors from overheating.
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirror when your
vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of
any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a
second pivot point. This lets you move the
mirror head up or down and from side to
side.
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you
to reduce glare at night.
Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. Mirror performance
may be affected. A rear center passenger or
raised rear center head restraint may also
block light from reaching the sensor.
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce
glare when bright lights are detected from
behind your vehicle. It will automatically
return to normal reflection when you select
reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
SLIDING WINDOWS (If Equipped)
Power Sliding Back Window (If
Equipped)
WARNINGS
When operating the power sliding
back window, you must make sure
all rear seat occupants and cargo are
not in the proximity of the back window.
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power sliding back window.
They may seriously injure themselves.
E163058
The control is on the overhead console.
Press and hold the control to open the
window. Pull and hold the control to close
the window.
79
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
SUN VISORS
Slide-on-rod (If Equipped)
E138666
Rotate the sun visor toward the side
window and extend it rearward for extra
shade.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If Equipped)
E162197
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
MOONROOF (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not let children play with the
moonroof or leave them unattended
in the vehicle. They may seriously
hurt themselves.
WARNINGS
When closing the moonroof, you
should verify that it is free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the roof opening.
You can manually open or close the sliding
shade when the moonroof is closed. Pull
the shade toward the front of your vehicle
to close it.
The moonroof controls are located on the
overhead console and have a one-touch
open and close feature. To stop it during
one-touch operation, press the control a
second time.
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
E163063
Press and release the SLIDE control to
open the moonroof. The moonroof will
stop short of the fully opened position.
Note: This position helps to reduce wind
noise or rumbling which may happen with
the moonroof fully open. Press and release
the control again to fully open the
moonroof.
Pull and release the SLIDE control to close
the moonroof.
80
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Bounce-Back
The moonroof will stop automatically
while closing. It will reverse some distance
if there is an obstacle in the way.
Pull and hold the SLIDE control within two
seconds of a bounce-back event to
override this function. While bounce-back
is active, the closing force increases for
each of the next three times that you close
the moonroof.
Venting the Moonroof
Press and release the TILT control to vent
the moonroof. Pull and hold the TILT
control to close the moonroof.
81
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
GAUGES
Engine oil pressure gaugeA
Engine coolant temperature gaugeB
Transmission fluid temperature gaugeC
Fuel gaugeD
SpeedometerE
Information display See (page 89).F
TachometerG
82
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
Indicates engine oil pressure. The needle
should stay in the normal operating range
(between L and H). If the needle falls
below the normal range, stop the vehicle,
turn off the engine and check the engine
oil level. Add oil if needed. If the oil level is
correct, have your vehicle checked by your
authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
WARNING
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At
normal operating temperature, the level
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible, switch off the engine and
let the engine cool.
Transmission Fluid Temperature
Gauge
Indicates transmission fluid temperature.
At normal operating temperature, the level
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
transmission fluid temperature exceeds
the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon
as safely possible and verify the airflow is
not restricted such as snow or debris
blocking airflow through the grill. Also,
higher than normal operating temperature
can be caused by special operation
conditions (i.e. snowplowing, towing or
off-road use). Refer to Special operating
conditions in the scheduled maintenance
information for instructions. Operating the
transmission for extended periods of time
with the gauge in the higher than normal
area may cause internal transmission
damage. Altering the severity of the driving
conditions is recommended to lower the
transmission temperature into the normal
range. If the gauge continues to show high
temperatures, see your authorized dealer.
Fuel Gauge
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly
when your vehicle is moving or on a gradient.
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will
indicate approximately how much fuel is
left in the fuel tank. The arrow adjacent to
the fuel pump symbol indicates on which
side of your vehicle the fuel filler door is
located.
The needle should move toward F when
you refuel your vehicle. If the needle points
to E after adding fuel, this indicates your
vehicle needs service soon.
After refueling some variability in needle
position is normal:
•It may take a short time for the needle
to reach F after leaving the gas station.
This is normal and depends upon the
slope of pavement at the gas station.
•The fuel amount dispensed into the
tank is a little less or more than the
gauge indicated. This is normal and
depends upon the slope of pavement
at the gas station.
•If the gas station nozzle shuts off
before the tank is full, try a different
gas pump nozzle.
Low Fuel Reminder
A low fuel reminder triggers when the fuel
gauge needle is at 1/16th.
83
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Variations:
Distance-to-emptyFuel gauge positionDriving type (fuel economy
conditions)
35 miles to 80 miles (56 km
to 129 km)
1/16thHighway driving
35 miles (56km)1/16thSevere duty driving (trailer
towing, extended idle)
Information Display
Odometer
Located in the bottom of the information
display Registers the accumulated
distance your vehicle has traveled.
Trip Computer
See (page 89).
Vehicle Settings and Personalization
See (page 89).
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and
indicators will alert you to a vehicle
condition that may become serious. Some
lamps will illuminate when you start your
vehicle to make sure they work. If any
lamps remain on after starting your vehicle,
refer to the respective system warning
lamp for further information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and function the
same as a warning lamp but do not display
when you start your vehicle.
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You will continue
to have the normal braking system
(without ABS) unless the brake system
warning lamp is also illuminated. Have the
system checked by your authorized dealer.
Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it
indicates a malfunction. Switch
off all unnecessary electrical
equipment and have the system checked
by your authorized dealer immediately.
Brake System
E144522
Illuminates when you engage the
parking brake with the ignition
on.
If it illuminates when you are driving, check
that the parking brake is not engaged. If
the parking brake is not engaged, this
indicates low brake fluid level or a brake
system malfunction. Have the system
checked immediately by your authorized
dealer.
84
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
WARNING
Driving your vehicle with the warning
lamp on is dangerous. A significant
decrease in braking performance
may occur. It will take you longer to stop
your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked by
your authorized dealer immediately. Driving
extended distances with the parking brake
engaged can cause brake failure and the
risk of personal injury.
Check Fuel Cap (If Equipped)
Illuminates when the fuel cap
may not be properly installed.
Continued driving with this light
on may cause the Service engine soon
warning indicator to come on.
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E71340
Illuminates when you switch this
feature on. See Using Cruise
Control (page 183).
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when the left or right
turn signal or the hazard warning
flasher is turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for
a burned out bulb.
Door Ajar
Displays when the ignition is on
and any door is not completely
closed.
Electronic Locking Differential
E163170
Illuminates when using the
electronic locking differential.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Illuminates when the engine
coolant temperature is high.
Stop the vehicle as soon as
possible, switch off the engine and let cool.
Engine Oil
If it illuminates with the engine
running or when you are driving,
this indicates a malfunction.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check
(page 235).
Note: Do not resume your journey if it
illuminates despite the level being correct.
Have the system checked by your authorized
dealer immediately.
Fasten Safety Belt
It will illuminate and a chime will
sound to remind you to fasten
your safety belt.
Front Airbag
If it fails to illuminate when you
start your vehicle, continues to
flash or remains on, it indicates
a malfunction. Have the system checked
by your authorized dealer.
High Beam
Illuminates when you switch the
high beam headlamps on. It will
flash when you use the
headlamp flasher.
Hill Descent (If Equipped)
E163171
Illuminates when hill descent is
switched on.
85
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Low Fuel Level
Illuminates when the fuel level
is low or the fuel tank is nearly
empty. Refuel as soon as
possible.
Low Tire Pressure Warning
Illuminates when your tire
pressure is low. If the lamp
remains on with the engine
running or when driving, check your tire
pressure as soon as possible.
It will also illuminate momentarily when
you switch the ignition on to confirm the
lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate
when you switch the ignition on, or begins
to flash at any time, have the system
checked by your authorized dealer.
Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced
Power/Electronic Throttle Control
Illuminates when a powertrain
or an AWD fault has been
detected. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Service Engine Soon
If the service engine soon
indicator light stays illuminated
after the engine is started, it
indicates that the On-Board Diagnostics
(OBD-II) system has detected a
malfunction of the vehicle emissions
control system. Refer to On-Board
Diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Fuel and
Refueling chapter for more information
about having your vehicle serviced. See
Emission Control System (page 148).
If the light is blinking, engine misfire is
occurring which could damage your
catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate
fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and
deceleration) and have your vehicle
serviced immediately.
WARNING
Under engine misfire conditions,
excessive exhaust temperatures
could damage the catalytic
converter, the fuel system, interior floor
coverings or other vehicle components,
possibly causing a fire. Have an authorized
dealer service your vehicle immediately.
The service engine soon indicator light
illuminates when the ignition is first turned
on prior to engine start to check the bulb
and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready
for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing.
Normally, the service engine soon light will
stay on until the engine is cranked, then
turn itself off if no malfunctions are
present. However, if after 15 seconds the
service engine soon light blinks eight times,
it means that the vehicle is not ready for
I/M testing. See Emission Control
System (page 148).
Stability Control
E138639
Illuminates when the system is
active. If it remains illuminated
or does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, this indicates a
malfunction. During a malfunction the
system will switch off. Have the system
checked by your authorized dealer
immediately. See Using Stability
Control (page 174).
86
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Stability Control Off
Illuminates when you switch the
system off. It will go out when
you switch the system back on
or when you switch the ignition off. See
Using Stability Control (page 174).
Transmission Tow/Haul (If Equipped)
E161509
Illuminates when the tow/haul
feature has been activated. If the
light flashes steadily, have the
system serviced immediately, damage to
the transmission could occur.
4X2 (If Equipped)
E163173
Illuminates momentarily when
two-wheel drive high is selected.
If the light fails to display when
the ignition is turned on, or remains on,
have the system serviced immediately by
your authorized dealer.
4X4 LOW (If Equipped)
E163174
Illuminates when four-wheel
drive low is engaged. If the light
fails to display when the ignition
is turned on, or remains on, have the
system serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer.
4X4 HIGH (If Equipped)
E163175
Illuminates when four-wheel
drive high is engaged. If the light
fails to display when the ignition
is turned on, or remains on, have the
system serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer.
Diesel Warning Lights
If your vehicle is equipped with a diesel
engine, it has some unique warning lights;
refer to your diesel supplement for detailed
information on their function.
Diesel engine brake
E171217
For more information see your
diesel supplement.
Diesel exhaust fluid
E163176
For more information see your
diesel supplement.
Glow plug pre-heat
For more information see your
diesel supplement.
Water in fuel
For more information see your
diesel supplement.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when you remove the key from the
ignition and open the driver's door and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps
on.
Key in Ignition Warning Chime
Sounds when you open the driver's door
and you have left the key in the ignition.
87
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking
brake on and drive your vehicle. If the
warning chime remains on after you have
released the parking brake, have the
system checked by your authorized dealer
immediately.
88
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
You can control various systems on your
vehicle using the information display
controls on the steering wheel. The
information display provides the
corresponding information.
Information Display Controls
(Type 1)
E163177
•Press the INFO button to scroll through
trip, outside temperature, fuel usage,
trailer gain and MyKey® information.
•Press the SETUP button to scroll
through various vehicle feature
settings.
•Press the RESET button to choose
settings, reset information and confirm
messages.
Info
Press the INFO button repeatedly to cycle
through the following features:
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
89
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
INFO
TRIP A/B
XXX° (if equipped)
MYKEY MILES (km) (if programmed)
XXX MILES (km) TO E
XX.X AVG MPG (L/100km)
MPG (L/km)
TIMER
TBC GAIN (if equipped)
EXHAUST FILTER (diesel only)
TRIP A/B
Registers the distance of individual
journeys. Press and release the INFO
button until TRIP A/B appears in the
display (this represents the trip mode).
Press and hold the RESET button to reset.
XXX° (outside air temperature)
This displays the outside temperature.
MYKEY MILES (km)
For more information, See Principle of
Operation (page 51).
XXX MILES (km) TO E
This displays an estimate of approximately
how far you can drive with the fuel
remaining in your tank under normal driving
conditions. Remember to turn the ignition
off when refueling to allow this feature to
detect the correct amount of added fuel.
The system calculates the distance to
empty by using a running average fuel
economy, which uses your recent driving
history of 500 miles (800 km).
This value is not the same as the average
fuel economy display. The running average
fuel economy resets to a factory default
value if the battery is disconnected.
XX.X AVG MPG (L/100km)
Average fuel economy displays your
average fuel economy in miles per gallon
or liters/100 km.
MPG (L/km)
Displays the instantaneous fuel economy
as a bar graph. Your vehicle must be
moving to calculate instantaneous fuel
economy. You cannot reset the
instantaneous fuel economy.
TIMER
Displays the trip elapsed drive time. Press
and release RESET to pause the timer.
Press and hold RESET to reset the timer.
TBC GAIN
Displays the level of trailer brake gain or if
the trailer is not connected.
90
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
EXHAUST FILTER
For more information, refer to the Diesel
supplement.
System check and vehicle feature
customization
Press the SETUP button repeatedly to
cycle the information display through the
following features:
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
Note: When returning to the SETUP menu
and you selected a non-English language,
HOLD RESET FOR ENGLISH will display to
change back to English. Press and hold the
RESET button to change back to English.
SETUP
OIL LIFEpress the RESET buttonRESET FOR SYSTEM
CHECK EXHAUST FLUID LEVEL
(Diesel only)
ENGINE HOURS
ENGINE IDLE HOURS
CHARGING SYSTEM
DOOR
BRAKE SYSTEM
TBC GAIN = XX.X
FUEL LEVEL
MYKEY DISTANCE
SETUP (cont’d)
MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMEDpress the RESET
button
RESET FOR
SYSTEM CHECK ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED
OIL LIFE
English or Metricpress the RESET
button
UNITS
0 to 180 secondsAUTOLAMP (SEC)
On or OffAUTOLOCK
On or OffAUTOUNLOCK
On or OffCOURTESY WIPE
91
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
SETUP (cont’d)
On or OffREAR PARK AID
On or OffREMOTE WINDOW
OPEN
CREATE MYKEY / MYKEY SETUP / CLEAR MYKEY
On or Offpress the RESET
button
RESET FOR REMOTE START
5, 10, 15 minutes
Electric or EOHTBC MODE
LOW, MED or HIGHTBC EFFORT
On or OffTRAILER SWAY
English / Spanish / FrenchLANGUAGE = ENGLISH / SPANISH /
FRENCH
PRESS RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK
The information display will begin to cycle
through the vehicle systems and provide
a status of the item if needed.
Note: Some systems show a message only
if a condition is present
OIL LIFE
Displays the remaining oil life. An oil
change is required whenever indicated by
the information display and according to
the recommended maintenance schedule.
USE ONLY RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS.
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100%
after each oil change, perform the
following:
1. Press and release the SETUP button
to display OIL LIFE XXX% HOLD RESET
= NEW.
2. Press and hold the RESET button for
two seconds and release to reset the
oil life to 100%.
Note: To change oil life 100% value (if
equipped with this feature) to another value,
proceed to Step 3.
3. Once OIL LIFE SET TO XXX% is
displayed, release and press the RESET
button to change the Oil Life Start
Value. Each release and press will
reduce the value by 10%.
UNITS
Displays the current units English or Metric
AUTOLAMP (SEC)
This feature keeps your headlights on for
up to three minutes after the ignition is
switched off.
AUTOLOCK
This feature automatically locks all vehicle
doors when the vehicle is shifted into any
gear, putting the vehicle in motion.
92
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
AUTOUNLOCK
This feature automatically unlocks all
vehicle doors when the driver’s door is
opened within 10 minutes of the ignition
being turned off.
COURTESY WIPE
This feature allows for an extra swipe of
the wipers after a wipe/wash cycle.
CREATE MYKEY / MYKEY SETUP /
CLEAR MYKEY
For more information, See Creating a
MyKey (page 52).
RESET FOR REMOTE START (if
equipped)
REAR PARK AID
This feature sounds a warning tone to warn
the driver of obstacles near the rear
bumper, and functions only when R
(Reverse) gear is selected.
TBC MODE (if equipped)
Allows you to choose the trailer brake
mode.
TBC EFFORT (if equipped)
Allows you to choose the level of initial
braking.
TRAILER SWAY (if equipped)
This feature uses the electronic stability
control to mitigate trailer sway.
LANGUAGE = ENGLISH / SPANISH /
FRENCH
Allows you to choose which language the
message center will display in.
Waiting four seconds or pressing the
RESET button cycles the message center
through each of the language choices.
Press the RESET button to set the
language choice.
Information Display Controls
(Type 2) (If Equipped)
E163178
•Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
•Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
•Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
•Press the OK button to choose and
confirm a setting/messages.
Main menu
You can access the menus using the
information display control.
93
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
E163179
Gauge Mode
E138660
Trip A / B
E163180
Fuel Economy
E163181
Truck Apps (If Equipped)
E144641
Settings
E144642
Information
Display Mode
E163179
Use the arrow buttons to choose
between the following gauge
options.
Gauge Mode
Engine Oil Temperature (Diesel only)Gauges Detail
Transmission Temperature
The compass orientation
can be changed between
fixed north or rotating north.
To change the modes, press
OK when the compass
display is shown. Use the
right arrow to choose the
mode. Press and hold OK to
set the mode.
Compass
Exhaust Filter (diesel only). Refer to your diesel supple-
ment for more information.
Blank
Trip A / B
E138660
Use the arrow buttons to choose
between the following trip
options.
94
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Trip A / B
Trip time
Trip distance
Fuel used
Avg MPG (L/100km)
Odometer
Press OK to pause the Trip A or B screen,
press again to un-pause.
Press and hold OK to reset the currently
displayed trip information.
Trip time
This shows the elapsed trip time. The timer
will stop when your vehicle is turned off
and will restart when your vehicle is
restarted.
Trip distance
Registers the mileage of individual
journeys.
Fuel used
Shows the amount of fuel used for a given
trip.
Average MPG
Shows the average distance traveled per
unit of fuel used for a given trip.
Fuel Economy
E163180
Use the arrow buttons to choose
the desired fuel economy
display.
Fuel Economy
Instant MPG (L/100km)Fuel Econ.
Miles (kilometers) to Empty
AVG MPG (L/100km)
5, 10, 30 Minutes or Last 5 ResetsFuel Hist.
Instant MPG
Shows your instantaneous fuel usage.
Miles to empty
Shows the approximate distance your
vehicle can travel before running out of
fuel.
Average MPG
Shows the average fuel usage based on
time. Press and hold OK to reset this value.
95
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Fuel Hist.
Shows fuel usage as a bar graph based on
time. The graph is updated each minute
with the fuel economy that was achieved
during the prior 5, 10, 30 minutes of driving.
Truck Apps
E163181
In this mode, off-road
information depicted with
graphics and trailer towing
application options are available.
Note: Some items are optional and may
not appear.
Truck Apps
Pitch and bank angle (in degrees)Off Road
Steering angle (in degrees)
Differential lock/unlock
Energy flow
ELD (Electronic Locking Differential)Press OK for Info
Hill Descent Control
4X4 System
Traction Control
AdvanceTrac + RSC
Active trailer name or default trailerTrailer
Accumulated trailer distance
Trailer gain and output
Trailer Disconnected
OptionsPress OK for options
Change Active Trailer
Adding a new trailer
Conventional, Fifth
Wheel or Gooseneck
Connection Checklist (if
equipped)
Delete Trailer
Tow / Haul or Trailer
Brake Controller
Information Screen
96
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Truck Apps (cont’d)
Rename TrailerPress OK for optionsTrailer (cont’d)
Reset Trailer Mileage / Kilometers
(if equipped)
Trailer disconnected
Disregard this status if your vehicle is not
equipped with a factory installed trailer
brake controller. This message may appear
when an aftermarket TBC is used even
when the trailer is connected.
Change Active Trailer
When this is highlighted, press the right
arrow key to change the currently selected
trailer. Use the up and down arrows to
select a trailer and press the OK button to
choose the highlighted trailer.
Adding a new trailer
Use the up/down arrows to highlight New
Trailer and press the right arrow key to
enter the New Trailer input screen. Use the
up/down arrow keys to choose alpha,
numeric and symbol characters and then
press the right arrow to move the character
space over. Continue adding characters as
needed. Press the left arrow to go back
and change a previously selected
character. When finished with the new
trailer name, press OK to accept the new
trailer name.
Connection Checklist
Use the up/down arrows to highlight one
of these choices and press OK to display
the connection checklist. Follow the
on-screen instructions to go through the
connections list.
Delete Trailer
Use the up/down arrows to highlight the
trailer you want to delete and press OK to
delete. Follow the on-screen prompts to
exit or confirm delete.
Rename Trailer
Use the up/down buttons to highlight a
trailer and press OK to select it. Use the
up/down arrow buttons to change the
characters as needed. When done, press
OK to accept the change.
Reset Trailer Mileage / Kilometers
Use the up/down buttons to select a
trailer, then press and hold OK to reset the
trailer mileage (kilometers).
Settings
E144641
Use the arrow buttons to
configure different driver setting
choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may
not appear.
97
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
On or OffRear Park AidDriver
Assist On or OffCamera DelayRear Video Camera
Electric or Elect. Over
Hydraulic
Trailer Brake ModeTrailer Brake
Light, Medium or HighTrailer Brake Effort
On or OffTrailer Sway Control
Off or XXX secondsAutolamp DelayVehicle
NormalDTE Calculation
(distance to empty) Towing
On or OffEasy Entry/Exit
On or OffAutolockLocks
On or OffAutounlock
One Stage or Two
Stage
Unlocking
Hold OK if Coolant
Changed
Coolant (if equipped)Maintenance
Hold OK if Fuel Filter
Changed
Fuel Filter (diesel only)
Settings (cont’d)
Standard or Memory OnMenu ControlVehicle
(cont’d) Set to XXX% (Hold OK to Reset)Oil Life Reset
5, 10 or 15 minutesDurationRemote Start
Enable or DisableSystem
On or OffRemote OpenWindows
Courtesy Wipe - On or OffWiper Control
98
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings (cont’d)
Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate MyKeyMyKey
Always On or SelectableAdvanceTrac
80 MPH (130 km/h) or OffMAX Speed
45, 55 or 65 MPH (75, 90 or 105 km/h), OffSpeed Warning
On or OffVolume Limiter
Hold OK to Clear MyKeyClear MyKey
English, Français, EspañolLanguage
EnglishDistanceUnits
Metric
Fahrenheit (°F)Temperature
Celsius (°C)
Information
E144642
In this mode, you can view
different vehicle system
information and perform a
system check.
Information
Admin Keys (Number of admin keys)MyKey
MyKeys (Number of MyKeys programmed)
MyKey Miles (km) (Distance traveled using a programmed
MyKey)
Some items will only display during a system check if a
problem has been detected. If an issue exists on one of
the monitored systems, the number of warnings that need
immediate attention will display in red and the number of
informational warnings will display in amber. Use the up/
down arrow buttons to scroll through the list; press the
right arrow button to display specific information on the
highlighted warning
System Check
99
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Compass/Transmission indicator
display (if equipped)
The compass heading will display in the
upper right corner of the information
display; the transmission gear indicator
displays in the right side of the information
display when using the SelectShift
Automatic™ transmission feature. These
displays will not be shown in all screen
modes. For example: when programming
certain vehicle features or in certain
information menus.
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
and instrument cluster type, not all of the
messages will display or be available.
Additionally, the information display may
abbreviate or shorten certain messages.
Press the RESET button for Type 1 displays
or the OK button for Type 2 displays to
acknowledge and remove some messages
from the information display. The
information display automatically removes
other messages after a short time.
You need to confirm certain messages
before you can access the menus.
AdvanceTrac™
ActionMessage
The system detects a condition that requires service. Have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
SERVICE ADVAN-
CETRAC
The driver has disabled the stability control system. See
Using Stability Control (page 174).
ADVANCETRAC OFF
The driver has disabled the traction control system. See Using
Traction Control (page 172).
TRACTION CONTROL
OFF
Alarm
ActionMessage
An unauthorized entry has triggered the alarm. See Anti-Theft
Alarm (page 65).
TO STOP ALARM
START VEHICLE
The security system has detected a fault. Have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
SECURITY SYSTEM
FAULT
100
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Diesel Messages WARNING
When the CLEANING EXHAUST
FILTER message appears in the
information display, do not park near
flammable materials, vapors or structures
until filter cleaning is complete.
ActionMessage
The coolant additive needs checking. Refer to your diesel
supplement for more information.
CHECK COOLANT
ADDITIVE
Your vehicle has entered the cleaning mode. Various engine
actions will raise the exhaust temperature in the Diesel
Particulate Filter system to burn off the particles (exhaust
soot). After the vehicle burns the particles off the exhaust
temperature will return to normal levels. This message is
NORMAL. Refer to your diesel supplement for more informa-
tion.
CLEANING EXHAUST
FILTER
The diesel particulate filter is full of particles (exhaust soot)
and you are not operating the vehicle in a manner that allows
normal cleaning. One of these messages will stay on until the
exhaust filter cleaning has begun, at which time the CLEANING
EXHAUST FILTER message displays. We recommend you
drive the vehicle above 30 mph (48 km/h) until the CLEANING
EXHAUST FILTER message turns off. Refer to your diesel
supplement for more information.
EXHAUST OVER-
LOADED DRIVE TO
CLEAN
EXHAUST AT LIMIT
DRIVE TO CLEAN NOW
The diesel particulate filter will continue to fill with particles
(exhaust soot) if you ignore this message. The service engine
soon light will illuminate and engine power may be limited, if
cleaning is not permitted. Dealer service will then be required
to restore your vehicle to full-power operation.
Your vehicle exhaust system temperature exceeds intended
operating range. If this warning occurs, a chime will sound,
followed by reduced engine power. The engine will shut down
when your vehicle speed is below 3 mph (5 km/h). Stop the
vehicle as soon as safely possible. Have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
STOP SAFELY NOW
The diluted engine oil needs to be changed. Refer to your
diesel supplement for more information.
ENGINE OIL DILUTED
The powertrain control module will intentionally turn the
engine off due to your vehicle being in the final second of a
countdown. The diesel engine shutdown is a optional feature.
Refer to your diesel supplement for more information.
ENGINE TURNS OFF IN
1 SECOND
101
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
The powertrain control module will intentionally turn the
engine off due to your vehicle being in the final 30 seconds of
a countdown. The diesel engine shutdown for extended idling
is an optional feature. Refer to your diesel supplement for
more information.
ENGINE TURNS OFF IN
XX SECONDS
Appears after the 30 second countdown. Refer to your diesel
supplement for more information.
ENGINE TURNED OFF
In extremely cold weather, typically below –15°F (–26°C)
and if the engine block heater is not utilized, your engine will
not respond to accelerator pedal movement for 30 seconds.
This restriction allows your engine to circulate the oil properly
in order to avoid engine damage. Refer to your diesel supple-
ment for more information.
ENGINE WARMING
PLEASE WAIT
Your diesel particulate filter is clean. Refer to your diesel
supplement for more information.
EXHAUST FILTER DRIVE
COMPLETE
Your diesel particulate filter is clean. Refer to your diesel
supplement for more information.
EXHAUST FILTER
CLEANED
The manual operator commanded regeneration process has
stopped. Refer to your diesel supplement for more informa-
tion.
EXHAUST CLEAN
STOPPED
The distance you can travel before depleting the remaining
diesel exhaust fluid. Refer to your diesel supplement for more
information.
EXHAUST FLUID RANGE
XXX MI
Your diesel exhaust fluid is nearing empty. Your vehicle’s top
speed will become limited in the displayed distance. You must
replenish the diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal operation
of your vehicle. Refer to your diesel supplement for more
information.
IN XX MILES, SPEED
LIMITED TO XX MPH
EXHAUST FLUID EMPTY
Your remaining diesel exhaust fluid has depleted. Your speed
will be limited upon restart. You must replenish the diesel
exhaust fluid to resume normal operation of your vehicle.
Refer to your diesel supplement for more information.
SPEED LIMITED TO XX
MPH UPON RESTART
EXHAUST FLUID EMPTY
The diesel exhaust fluid is empty. You must replenish the
diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal operation of your
vehicle. Refer to your diesel supplement for more information.
SPEED LIMITED TO XX
MPH EXHAUST FLUID
EMPTY
102
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
The selective catalytic reduction system detects low exhaust
fluid. The engine will eventually enter into an idle only mode.
You must replenish the diesel exhaust fluid to resume normal
operation of your vehicle. Refer to your diesel supplement for
more information.
ENGINE IDLED SOON
EXHAUST FLUID EMPTY
A problem exists with the selective catalytic reduction system.
The vehicle will enter into an idle-only mode. If the exhaust
fluid is empty, you must replenish the diesel exhaust fluid to
resume normal operation of your vehicle. Refer to your diesel
supplement for more information.
ENGINE IDLED - SEE
OWNER’S MANUAL
EXHAUST FLUID EMPTY
The selective catalytic reduction system detects a fault. The
vehicle’s top speed will become limited in the displayed
distance starting at 50 miles (80 km) and count down from
this point. Refer to your diesel supplement for more informa-
tion. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
IN XX MILES, SPEED
LIMITED TO 50 MPH
EXHAUST FLUID
SYSTEM FAULT
The selective catalytic reduction system detects a fault. The
vehicle’s top speed will become limited upon restarting. Refer
to your diesel supplement for more information. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
SPEED LIMITED TO 50
MPH UPON RESTART
EXHAUST FLUID
SYSTEM FAULT
The selective catalytic reduction system detects a fault. The
vehicle’s top speed is limited. Refer to your diesel supplement
for more information. Have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
SPEED LIMITED TO 50
MPH EXHAUST FLUID
SYSTEM FAULT
A fuel filter change is required. See Normal Scheduled
Maintenance (page 456).
FUEL FILTER CHANGE
REQUIRED
You must have your vehicle serviced by an authorized dealer
if approximately two hours after the EXHAUST OVERLOADED
DRIVE TO CLEAN message has displayed and you have not
driven your vehicle above 30 mph (48 km/h) for at least 20
minutes to clean the diesel particulate filter. Refer to your
diesel supplement for more information.
EXHAUST OVER LIMIT
SERVICE NOW
103
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
You are responsible for assuring that you operate your vehicle
in a manner that allows diesel particulate filter cleaning to
occur. Ignoring the EXHAUST OVER LIMIT SERVICE NOW
warning message could lead to reduced drivability and
customer expense, including damage to the diesel particulate
filter. Your new vehicle warranty may not cover this damage.
The water separator has reached a predetermined capacity
and needs draining. Refer to your diesel supplement for more
information.
WATER IN FUEL DRAIN
FILTER SEE MANUAL
A low fuel pressure condition has occurred due to cold, low
fuel level or fuel filters need to be changed. Refer to your diesel
supplement for more information.
LOW FUEL PRESSURE
Doors and Locks
ActionMessage
The door listed is not completely closed.X Door Ajar
Drivetrain
ActionMessage
The electronic locking differential is engaged.LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL
ENGAGED
ELD ENGAGED
The electronic locking differential is disengaged.LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL
DISENGAGED
ELD DISENGAGED
The electronic locking differential requests a certain speed
requirement to engage.
TO ENGAGE LOCKING
DIFFERENTIAL SLOW
TO XX MPH/KM/H
TO ENGAGE ELD SLOW
TO XX MPH/KM/H
The electronic locking differential request the release of the
accelerator pedal in order to engage.
TO ENGAGE LOCKING
DIFFERENTIAL RELEASE
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
104
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
TO ENGAGE ELD
RELEASE PEDAL
The electronic locking differential requests a certain speed
requirement to engage.
SLOW VEHICLE TO XX
KM/H FOR ELD
The electronic locking differential requests a certain speed
requirement to engage.
SLOW VEHICLE TO XX
MPH FOR ELD
An electronic locking differential system fault is present. See
Using Four-Wheel Drive (page 158).
CHECK LOCKING
DIFFERENTIAL
A reminder to shift into park.SHIFT TO PARK
Engine
ActionMessage
Your vehicle is set to transport mode. The transport
mode disables certain vehicle functions to prevent
battery discharge.
TRANSPORT MODE CONTACT
DEALER
The engine has reduced power in order to help reduce
high coolant temperature See Engine Coolant Check
(page 236).
POWER REDUCED TO LOWER
ENGINE TEMP
Fuel
ActionMessage
An early reminder of a low fuel condition.FUEL LEVEL LOW
The fuel cap may not be properly closed.CHECK FUEL CAP
Key
ActionMessage
You have attempted to program a fifth integrated key. See
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control (page 50).
COULD NOT PROGRAM
INTEGRATED KEY
The factory equipped remote start is active. Turn your key to
on to drive.
TO DRIVE: TURN KEY
TO ON
105
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Maintenance
ActionMessage
The engine oil life is nearing its end. See Engine Oil
Check (page 235).
ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON
The oil life left reaches 0%. See Engine Oil Check
(page 235).
OIL CHANGE REQUIRED
The brake fluid level is low and the brake system needs
inspection immediately. See Brake Fluid Check (page
244).
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LOW
The brake system needs servicing. If the warning stays
on or continues to come on, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM
MyKey®
ActionMessage
MyKey is active.MYKEY ACTIVE DRIVE SAFELY
A MyKey is in use and you cannot turn off the electronic
stability control.
ADVANCETRAC ALWAYS ON -
MYKEY SETTING
A MyKey is in use, the MyKey speed limit is on and your
vehicle speed is approaching 80 mph (130 km/h).
VEHICLE NEAR TOP SPEED
A MyKey is in use, the MyKey speed limit is on and your
vehicle speed is 80 mph (130 km/h).
VEHICLE AT TOP SPEED -
MYKEY SETTING
When starting your vehicle and MyKey is in use and the
MyKey speed limit is on.
SPEED LIMITED TO 80 MPH
When starting your vehicle and MyKey is in use and the
MyKey speed limit is on.
SPEED LIMITED TO 130 KM/H
A MyKey is in use, the optional setting is on and your
vehicle exceeds a preselected speed.
CHECK SPEED DRIVE SAFELY
A MyKey is in use and Belt-Minder® is active.BUCKLE UP TO UNMUTE
AUDIO
An attempt failed to program a spare key using two
existing MyKeys.
MYKEY COULD NOT PROGRAM
106
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Park Aid
ActionMessage
The transmission is in R (Reverse) and the park aid is
disabled.
CHECK REAR PARK AID
The rear park aid is disabled.REAR PARK AID OFF
The rear park aid is enabled.REAR PARK AID ON
Park Brake
ActionMessage
The parking brake is set and your vehicle is in motion.PARK BRAKE ENGAGED
Power Steering
ActionMessage
The power steering system has detected a condition
that requires service. Have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
SERVICE POWER STEERING
The power steering system has detected a condition
within the power steering system that requires service
immediately. Have the system checked by an author-
ized dealer.
SERVICE POWER STEERING
NOW
The power steering system has disabled power
steering assist due to a system error. Have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
POWER STEERING ASSIST
FAULT
Off Road
ActionMessage
The driver has disabled hill descent control mode.HILL DESCENT CONTROL OFF
You have not met the vehicle speed requirement for
entry into off-road mode.
FOR HILL DESCENT REDUCE
SPEED
The driver is able to select a transmission gear for hill
descent mode.
FOR HILL DESCENT SELECT
GEAR
107
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Hill descent control mode is no longer active and the
driver must resume control.
HILL DESCENT - DRIVER
RESUME CONTROL
A hill descent system fault is present.HILL DESCENT CONTROL
FAULT
The hill descent system is cooling due to overuse.HILL DESCENT CONTROL OFF
SYSTEM COOLING
Hill descent control is active.HILL DESCENT CONTROL
READY
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
ActionMessage
One or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 284).
LOW TIRE PRESSURE
The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monit-
oring System (page 284).
TIRE PRESSURE
MONITOR FAULT
A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is
in use. For more information on how the system operates
under these conditions, see See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 284). If the warning stays on or continues to
come on, have the system checked by an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
TIRE PRESSURE
SENSOR FAULT
Trailer
ActionMessage
The current gain setting for the trailer brake.TRAILER BRAKE GAIN: XX.X
[OUTPUT]
The current gain setting for the trailer brake when a
trailer is not connected.
TRAILER BRAKE GAIN: XX.X NO
TRAILER
Accompanied by a single chime, in response to faults
sensed by the TBC. See Trailer Sway Control (page
193).
TRAILER BRAKE MODULE
FAULT
108
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
A correct trailer connection (a trailer with electric trailer
brakes) is sensed during a given ignition cycle.
TRAILER CONNECTED
A trailer connection becomes disconnected, either
intentionally or unintentionally, and has been sensed
during a given ignition cycle. Disregard this status if
your vehicle is not equipped with a factory installed
trailer brake controller. This message may appear when
an aftermarket TBC is used even when the trailer is
connected.
TRAILER DISCONNECTED
Your trailer sway control has detected trailer sway so
you need to reduce your speed.
TRAILER SWAY REDUCE
SPEED
Faults with your vehicle wiring and trailer wiring or
brake system. See Towing a Trailer (page 192).
WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER
4WD
ActionMessage
A fault is present in your 4X4 system. See Using
Four-Wheel Drive (page 158).
CHECK 4X4
Your 4X4 system is making a shift.4X4 SHIFT IN PROGRESS
You need to apply the brake in order to shift into
4X4 LOW.
FOR 4X4 LOW APPLY BRAKE
When your vehicle is at a stop and you need to shift
into Neutral before you select 4X4 LOW.
FOR 4X4 LOW SHIFT TO N
When your vehicle is moving and you need to
reduce your speed to select 4X4 LOW.
FOR 4X4 LOW SLOW TO 3 MPH
You select 2WD and need to apply the brakes in
order to exit 4X4 LOW.
TO EXIT 4X4 LOW APPLY BRAKE
You select 2WD while your vehicle is at a stop in
4X4 LOW and you need to shift into Neutral.
TO EXIT 4X4 LOW SHIFT TO N
You select 2WD while your vehicle is operating in
4X4 LOW and you need to reduce your speed.
TO EXIT 4X4 LOW SLOW TO 3
MPH
May display when shifting to or from 4X4 LOW.SHIFT DELAYED PULL FORWARD
109
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
Defrost: Select to distribute air through the windshield air vents. Air distribution
to the instrument panel and footwell vents turns off. You can also use this
setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
A
Heated rear window: Press the button to switch the heated rear window on
and off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 115).
B
Air distribution control: Adjust the control to turn airflow from the windshield,
instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through any
combination of these vents.
C
A/C: Press the button to turn air conditioning compressor on or off. Use air
conditioning with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency.
D
Note: In certain conditions, the air conditioning compressor may continue to
operate even after you switch off the air conditioning with the A/C button.
Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. When you select recirculated air, the air currently in the
passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool
the interior (when used with A/C) and may reduce unwanted odors from
entering your vehicle.
E
Note: Recirculated air may turn off automatically (or be prevented from turning
on) in all airflow modes except MAX A/C to reduce risk of fogging. Recirculated
air may also turn on and off automatically in Panel or Panel and Floor airflow
modes during hot weather in order to improve cooling efficiency.
110
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
MAX A/C: Press the button to maximize cooling. Recirculated air flows through
the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
F
Note: Recirculated air may turn off automatically (or be prevented from turning
on) in all airflow modes except MAX A/C to reduce risk of fogging.
Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the air circulated in your
vehicle.
G
Fan speed control: Adjusts the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.H
Power: Press the button to switch the system on and off. When the system is
off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.
I
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
Power and Driver temperature control: Press the button to switch the system
on and off. When the system is off, it prevents outside air from entering the
vehicle. Adjusts the temperature setting using the control on the driver side.
A
Heated rear window: Press the button to switch the heated rear window on
and off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 115).
B
Defrost: Select to distribute air through the windshield air vents. Air distribution
to the instrument panel and footwell vents turns off. You can also use this
setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
C
111
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
Air distribution control: Adjust the control to turn airflow from the windshield,
instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through any
combination of these vents.
D
A/C: Press the button to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning
cools your vehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach a comfortable
temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air
through the air vents.
E
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even though the air conditioning is
switched off.
MAX A/C: Press the button for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through
the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on and the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
F
Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates.
This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors
from entering your vehicle.
G
Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument
panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during hot weather to improve
cooling efficiency.
Passenger temperature control: Adjusts the temperature on the passenger
side.
H
Fan speed control: Adjusts the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.I
AUTO: Press the button to switch on automatic operation. Adjust to select the
desired temperature. Fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and
outside or recirculated air are automatically adjusted to heat or cool the vehicle
to maintain the desired temperature. You can also turn off dual zone mode by
pressing and holding the button for greater than two seconds.
J
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
112
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
Note: To improve the time to reach comfort
in hot weather, drive with the windows
slightly open for 2-3 minutes after start-up
or until your vehicle airs out.
Manual Climate Control
Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield
during humid weather, adjust the air
distribution control to the windshield air
vents position.
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is
not necessary. The system automatically
adjusts to heat or cool the cabin to your
selected temperature as quickly as possible.
For the system to function efficiently, the
instrument panel and side air vents should
be fully open.
Note: If you select AUTO during cold
outside temperatures, the system directs
airflow to the windshield and side window
vents. In addition, the fan may run at a
slower speed until the engine warms up.
Note: If you select AUTO during hot outside
temperatures, or when the inside of the
vehicle is hot, the system automatically uses
recirculated air to maximize interior cooling.
When the interior reaches the selected
temperature, the system automatically
switches to using outside air.
Heating the Interior Quickly
Vehicle with automatic climate controlVehicle with manual climate control
Press the AUTO button.Adjust the fan speed to the highest
speed setting.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
Adjust the temperature control to the
highest setting.
2
Select the footwell air vents using the
air distribution buttons.
3
113
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
Recommended Settings for Heating
Vehicle with automatic climate controlVehicle with manual climate control
Press the AUTO button.Adjust the fan speed to the center
setting.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the hot settings.
2
Select the footwell air vents using the
air distribution buttons.
3
Cooling the Interior Quickly
Vehicle with automatic climate controlVehicle with manual climate control
Press the MAX A/C button.Press the MAX A/C button.1
Drive with the windows open for 2-3
minutes.
2
Recommended Settings for Cooling
Vehicle with automatic climate controlVehicle with manual climate control
Press the AUTO button.Adjust the fan speed to the center
setting.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the cold settings.
2
Select the instrument panel air vents
using the air distribution buttons.
3
114
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
Side Window Defogging in Cold Weather
Vehicle With Automatic Climate ControlVehicle With Manual Climate Control
Press the defrost button.Select the instrument panel and footwell
air vents positions through the air distri-
bution control.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Press the A/C button.2
Direct the instrument panel side air vents
toward the side windows.
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
3
Close the instrument panel center vents.Adjust the fan speed to the highest
setting.
4
Direct the instrument panel side air vents
toward the side windows.
5
Close the instrument panel center vents.6
HEATED WINDOWS AND
MIRRORS
Heated Rear Window (If Equipped)
Note: Make sure the engine is running
before operating the heated windows.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a
sliding rear window, the feature still
operates when you open the window.
E184884
Press the button to clear the
heated rear window of thin ice
and fog. The heated rear window
will automatically turn off after a short
period of time. Start the engine before you
switch the heated rear window on.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp
objects to clean or remove decals from
the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear
window grid lines.
Heated Exterior Mirror
When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors will
automatically turn on.
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
115
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
REMOTE START (If Equipped)
The remote start feature allows you to
pre-condition the interior of your vehicle.
The climate control system works to
achieve comfort according to your previous
settings.
Note: You cannot adjust the system during
remote start operation.
Turn the ignition on to return the system
to its previous settings. You can now make
adjustments normally, but you need to turn
certain vehicle-dependent features back
on, such as:
•Heated seats.
•Cooled seats.
•Heated steering wheel.
•Heated mirrors.
•Heated rear window.
You can adjust the default remote start
settings using the information display
controls. See Information Displays
(page 89).
Automatic Settings
In hot weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The cooled seats are set to high
(if available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display).
In moderate weather, the system either
heats or cools (based on previous
settings). The rear defroster, heated
mirrors and heated seats do not
automatically turn on.
In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The heated seats are set to high
(if available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display). The rear defroster
and heated mirrors automatically turn on.
116
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNINGS
Sitting improperly, out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far
can take weight off the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit
upright against your seat back, with your
feet on the floor.
Do not recline the seatback as this
can cause the occupant to slide
under the safety belt, resulting in
serious injury in the event of a crash.
Do not place objects higher than the
seatback to reduce the risk of serious
injury in the event of a crash or during
heavy braking.
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat,
head restraint, safety belt and airbags will
provide optimum protection in the event
of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
•Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
•Do not recline the seatback more than
30 degrees.
•Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of it is level with the top of your
head and as far forward as possible.
Make sure that you remain
comfortable.
•Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in
(25 cm) between your breastbone and
the airbag cover.
•Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
•Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
•Position the shoulder strap of the
safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS
Fully adjust the head restraint before
you sit in or operate your vehicle. This
will help minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash. Do not adjust
the head restraint when your vehicle is
moving.
The head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be
installed and properly adjusted when
the seat is occupied. An improperly
adjusted head restraint may not
adequately protect an occupant during an
impact from the rear.
117
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
WARNINGS
Install the head restraint properly to
help minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a crash.
Note: Adjust the seat back to an upright
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position.
Front Seat Head Restraint
E138642
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust and release
button.
C
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
D
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold buttons C and D.
2. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Front Row Center, Outboard (Crew
Cab), and Rear Seat Center (Crew Cab)
Head Restraints
Note: The SuperCab has rear outboard
head restraints that are not removable and
are bolted to the back wall.
Your vehicle may be equipped with head
restraints that are non-adjustable. The
non-adjustable head restraints consist of:
E162872
A
C
B
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
C
118
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold buttons C.
2. Pull up the head restraint.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Tilting Head Restraints (If Equipped)
The front head restraints tilt for extra
comfort. To tilt the head restraint, do the
following:
E144727
1. Adjust the seat back to an upright
driving or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the desired position.
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward
again to release it to the rearward, un-tilted
position.
Note: Do not attempt to force the head
restraint backward after it is tilted. Instead,
continue tilting it forward until the head
restraint releases to the upright position.
MANUAL SEATS
WARNING
Do not adjust the driver's seat or seat
back when your vehicle is moving.
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward
E162727
Recline Adjustment
E162728
119
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Manual Lumbar (If Equipped)
E162729
The lumbar support control is located on
the outboard side of the seat. Turn the
control to adjust your support.
POWER SEATS (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the driver seat or
seatback while your vehicle is
moving. Adjusting your seatback
while the vehicle is in motion may cause
loss of control of the vehicle.
Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seatback before returning
it to the original position.
E181777
The control is located on the outboard side
of the seat. Move the switch in the direction
of the arrow to raise or lower the seat
cushion or to move the seat forward,
backward, up or down.
Power Recline (If Equipped)
E162731
Move the switch to recline the seatback
forward or rearward.
Power Lumbar (If Equipped)
E164101
The control is located on the outboard side
of the seat. Press the forward or rearward
side of the control for more or less support.
MEMORY FUNCTION (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Before activating the seat memory,
make sure that the area immediately
surrounding the seat is clear of
obstructions and that all occupants are
clear of moving parts.
120
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
WARNINGS
Do not use the memory function
when your vehicle is moving.
This feature automatically recalls the
position of the following:
•Driver seat.
•Power mirrors.
•Optional adjustable pedals.
The memory control is located on the
driver door.
2
1
E162734
Saving a Preset Position
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Adjust the seat, exterior mirrors and
adjustable pedals to the position you
desire.
3. Press and hold the preset button until
you hear a single tone.
Note: You can save up to two preset
memory positions.
Note: You can save a memory preset at any
time.
Recalling a Preset Position
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Press and release the preset button
associated with your desired driving
position. The seat and mirrors move to
the position stored for that preset.
Note: You can only recall preset memory
positions when the ignition is off, or when
the transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N)
if the ignition is on.
You can also recall a preset memory
position by:
•Pressing the unlock button on your
remote control if it is linked to a preset
position.
•Entering a personal entry code on the
Securicode keypad. See Locks (page
56).
Note: Using a linked key fob to recall your
memory position when the ignition is off
moves the seat to the easy entry position.
Note: Pressing any active memory feature
control - power seat, mirror (or any memory
button) during a memory recall cancels the
operation.
Linking a PreSet Position to your
Remote Control or Intelligent
Access Key Fob
Your vehicle can save the preset memory
positions for up to two remote controls.
1. With the ignition on, move the memory
positions to the positions you desire.
2. Press and hold the desired preset
button for about five seconds. A tone
sounds after about two seconds.
Continue holding until you hear a
second tone.
3. Within three seconds, press the lock
button on the remote control you are
linking.
To unlink a remote control, follow the
same procedure – except in step 3, press
the unlock button on the remote control.
121
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Note: If more than one linked remote
control or intelligent access key is in range,
the memory function moves to the settings
of the first key to initiate a memory recall.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature (If
Equipped)
If you enable the easy entry and exit
feature, it automatically moves the driver
seat rearward up to 2 inches (5
centimeters) when you put the
transmission in park (P) and remove the
key from the ignition.
The driver seat returns to the previous
position when you put the key in the
ignition.
You can enable or disable this feature
through the information display. See
Information Displays (page 89).
REAR SEATS
Folding Up the Rear Seats (SuperCab)
E162737
1. Pull the control to release the seat
cushion.
2. Rotate the seat cushion up until it locks
into the vertical storage position.
Returning the Seat to the Seating
Position
WARNING
Make sure that cargo or any objects
are not trapped underneath the seat
cushion before returning the seat
cushion to its original position, and that the
seat cushion locks into place. Failure to do
so may prevent the seat from operating
properly in the event of a crash, which
could increase the risk of serious injury.
1. Pull the control on the side of the seat
to release the seat cushion from the
storage position.
2. Push the seat cushion down until it
locks into the horizontal position.
Folding the Rear Seat Back (Crew
Cab)
E162738
1. Pull forward on the control to fold
down the seatback.
2. Pull down on the handle and lift up on
the seatback to return it to the original
position.
Folding up the Rear Seat Cushion
1. Pull the control to release the seat
cushion.
2. Rotate the seat cushion up until it locks
into the vertical storage position.
122
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Returning the Seat to the Seating
Position
WARNING
Make sure that cargo or any objects
are not trapped underneath the seat
cushion before returning the seat
cushion to its original position, and that the
seat cushion locks into place. Failure to do
so may prevent the seat from operating
properly in the event of a crash, which
could increase the risk of serious injury.
1. Pull the control on the side of the seat
to release the seat cushion from the
storage position.
2. Push the seat cushion down until it
locks into the horizontal position.
Rear Under Seat Storage (Crew
Cab) (If Equipped)
The rear seat has storage space located
under the seat cushion.
E162739 A
Lift up the lever and flip up the seat
cushion to access the storage space and
the power point (A).
E162740
To remove the storage space divider,
squeeze the sides and lift it from the
storage tub.
E162741
Use your vehicle key to lock the storage
space.
123
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
HEATED SEATS (If Equipped)
WARNING
People who are unable to feel pain
to their skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal
cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the heated seat to overheat.
Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles
or other pointed objects. This may damage
the heating element which may cause the
heated seat to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
Do not do the following:
•Place heavy objects on the seat.
•Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow
the seat to dry thoroughly.
•Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
E146322
To operate the heated seats, touch the
heated seat symbol on the touchscreen to
cycle through the various heat settings and
off. Warmer settings are indicated by more
indicator lights.
Rear Heated Seats (If Equipped)
WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel pain
to the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion,
or other physical conditions, must exercise
care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not
puncture the seat with pins, needles, or
other pointed objects because this may
damage the heating element which may
cause the seat heater to overheat. An
overheated seat may cause serious
personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
•Place heavy objects on the seat.
•Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow
the seat to dry thoroughly.
The rear seat heat controls are located on
the rear door armrest.
To operate the heated seats:
•Push the indicated side of the control
for maximum heat.
•Push again to deactivate.
124
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E162742
•Push the indicated side of the control
for minimum heat.
•Push again to deactivate.
E162743
The heated seat module resets at every
ignition run cycle. While the ignition is in
the on position, activate the high or low
heated seat switch to enable heating
mode. When activated, they will turn off
automatically when the engine is turned
off.
The indicator light will illuminate when the
heated seats have been activated.
CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS
(If Equipped)
Heated Seats
WARNING
People who are unable to feel pain
to their skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal
cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the heated seat to overheat.
Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles
or other pointed objects. This may damage
the heating element which may cause the
heated seat to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
Do not do the following:
•Place heavy objects on the seat.
•Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
•Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
E146322
125
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
To operate the heated seats, touch the
heated seat symbol on the touchscreen to
cycle through the various heat settings and
off. More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
Cooled Seats
The cooled seats will only function when
the engine is running.
E146309
To operate the cooled seats, touch the
cooled seat symbol on the touchscreen to
cycle through the various cool settings and
off. More indicator lights indicate cooler
settings.
If the engine falls below 350 RPM while
the cooled seats are on, the feature will
turn itself off. You will need to reactivate
it.
Climate Controlled Seat Air Filter
Replacement
The climate controlled seat system
includes air filters. You must replace them
periodically.
The filter is located under each front seat.
Access the filter from the second row
footwell area. Move the front seats all the
way to the full front and full up positions
to ease access.
E146319
To remove a filter:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Push up on the outside rigid edge of
the filter until the tabs are released,
then remove the filter.
E146321
To install a filter:
1. First, position the filter in its housing
making sure that the far forward end
is all the way up in the housing.
2. Push in on the center of the outside
edge of the filter and rotate clockwise
into the housing until it clips into
position.
126
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
FRONT SEAT ARMREST
E162745
Press the button on the right-hand side of
the seat and pull the seatback down to
release the armrest. You can also gain
access to the cupholders and seatback
storage bin.
E162746
Pull up on the tab to open the storage bin
Lift up on the seatback to return it to the
upright position.
E162747
If your vehicle has an under-seat storage
compartment in the seat cushion, lift the
latch to open the lid of the compartment.
You cannot open the lid when the armrest
is down.
E162748
The under-seat storage compartment has
a programmable lock. Use the ignition key
to program the lock to the compartment.
You can power or charge electronics using
the under-seat storage compartment
auxiliary power point. See Auxiliary
Power Points (page 137).
127
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
REAR SEAT ARMREST (If Equipped)
E162744
Fold the armrest down to use it.
128
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Seats
The appearance of your vehicle’s universal
garage door opener varies according to
your option package. Before programming,
make sure you identify which transmitter
you have by comparing it to the graphics
below:
E164776
Car2U Home Automation System
E142657
HomeLink
Note: Programming these two types of
universal garage door openers are different,
and they have different instructions. Identify
your package and refer to the instructions
listed in this chapter.
CAR2U® Home Automation
System (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from
obstruction when you are
programming. Do not program the system
with the vehicle in the garage.
WARNINGS
Do not use the system with any
garage door opener that does not
have the safety stop and reverse
feature as required by U.S. Federal Safety
Standards (this includes any garage door
opener manufactured before April 1, 1982).
Note: Before you begin the programming
process, park your vehicle in front of the
garage door opener motor or other device
you want to program.
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future system
programming.
Note: We recommend that, upon the sale
or lease termination of your vehicle, you
erase the programmed function buttons for
security reasons. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes later in this section.
Note: Programming the system to a
community gate will require a unique set of
instructions depending on the gate system
model. Contact the help line at
1-866-572-2728 for further information.
Note: If you accidently enter the program
mode by pressing and releasing the outer
two buttons or all three buttons
simultaneously, do not press any button
until the module times out after a few
seconds and resets to normal mode. When
the module has timed out, all three LED
lamps will flash rapidly for a few seconds
then turn off. Any settings should remain as
previously set.
The universal garage door opener replaces
the common hand-held garage door
opener with a three-button transmitter,
integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
129
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
The system includes two primary features,
a garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the
home. This functionality allows you to
program garage door openers as well as
security devices and home lighting
systems.
You can find additional system information
online at www.learcar2U.com or by calling
the toll-free help line on 1-866-572-2728.
E164776
Rolling Code Programming
Note: If you do not follow the time-sensitive
instructions, the device will time out and
you will have to repeat the complete
procedure.
Note: It may be helpful to have another
person assist you in programming the
transmitter.
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the outer two buttons for
1–2 seconds, then release.
E164777
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
unit and you may need to remove the cover
or lamp lens.
Note: If you cannot locate the learn button,
see the Owner’s Manual for your garage
door opener or call the toll-free help line at
1-866-572-2728.
3. Press the learn button on the garage
door opener motor.
E142659
Note: You will have 10–30 seconds to
complete the following steps.
4. Return to your car.
5. Press and hold the function button you
would like to use to control the garage
door. You may need to hold the button
from 5–20 seconds, during which time the
selected button LED lamp will flash slowly.
E164776
6. When the garage door moves, release
the button within one second. The LED
lamp will flash rapidly until programming
is complete.
7. Press and release the button again. The
garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful. If your garage
door does not operate, repeat the previous
steps.
130
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
The LED lamp above the selected button
will illuminate to confirm that the system
is responding to the button command.
To program another rolling code device,
repeat Steps 1 through 6, substituting a
different function button in Step 5.
Fixed Code Programming
Note: It may be helpful to have another
person assist you in programming the
transmitter.
To program units with fixed code DIP
switches, you will need the garage door
hand-held transmitter, paper and a pen or
pencil.
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Open the battery cover and note all the
switch settings from left to right.
E164778
•When the switch is in the up, on, or +
position, mark down “left button”.
•When the switch is in the middle,
neutral, or 0 position, mark down
“middle button”.
•When the switch is in the down, off, or
– position, mark down “right button”.
3. Press all three function buttons
simultaneously for a few seconds and then
release. The LED lamps will flash slowly.
E164776
Note: You must complete the following
step within 2.5 minutes.
4. Enter the corresponding DIP switch
settings from left to right into the system
by pressing and releasing the buttons
corresponding to the settings you noted.
5. Simultaneously press and release all
three function buttons. The LED lamps will
illuminate.
E164776
6. Press and hold the function button you
would like to use to control the garage
door.
Note: You may need to hold the button
from 5–55 seconds before observing
movement of the garage door.
7. When the garage door moves, release
the button within one second. After you
release the button, the LED lamp will flash
slowly.
8. The LED lamp will begin to flash rapidly
until programming is complete. If your
garage door does not operate, repeat the
previous steps. Otherwise, call the toll-free
help line at 1-866-572-2728.
131
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
The LED lamp above the selected button
will illuminate to confirm that the system
is responding to the button command.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for approximately
20 seconds until the LED lamps above the
buttons flash rapidly
E164777
2. When the LED lamps flash, release the
buttons. You have erased all of the button
codes.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications to your device
not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance can void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
HomeLink Wireless Control
System (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not use the system with any
garage door opener that does not
have the safety stop and reverse
feature as required by U.S. Federal Safety
Standards (this includes any garage door
opener manufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door opener that cannot detect
an object, signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases
the risk of serious injury or death.
Note: Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from obstruction
when you are programming. Do not program
the system with the vehicle in the garage.
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future system
programming.
Note: We recommend that, upon the sale
or lease termination of your vehicle, you
erase the programmed function buttons for
security reasons. See Erasing the Button
Codes later in this section.
Note: You can program a maximum of
three devices. To change or replace any of
the three devices after you have
programmed them, you must first erase the
current settings. See Erasing the Button
Codes later in this section.
E142657
132
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
The universal garage door opener replaces
the common hand-held garage door
opener with a three-button transmitter,
integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
The system includes two primary features,
a garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the
home. This functionality allows you to
program garage door openers as well as
entry gate operators, security systems,
entry door locks and home or office
lighting.
You can find additional system information
online at www.homelink.com or by calling
the toll-free help line on 1-800-355-3515.
In-vehicle Programming
This process is to program your hand-held
transmitter and your in-vehicle HomeLink
button.
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This will ensure quicker training
and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
E142658
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the
garage, turn your ignition to the on
position, but do not start your vehicle.
2. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 1–3 inches (2–8
centimeters) away from the HomeLink
button that you want to program.
3. Using both hands, simultaneously,
press and hold the desired HomeLink
button and the hand-held transmitter
button. DO NOT release either one until
the HomeLink indicator light flashes
slowly and then rapidly. When the
indicator light flashes rapidly, you can
release both buttons. The rapid
flashing indicates successful training.
4. Press and hold the HomeLink button
you programmed for five seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete. See
Programming Your Garage Door Motor
later in this section.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for two
seconds and then turns to a constant light,
you have not programmed the HomeLink
button yet. Do the following:
Press and hold the HomeLink button while
you press and release the hand-held
transmitter button every two seconds. The
HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly
and then rapidly once the HomeLink
function button recognizes and accepts
the hand-held transmitter’s radio
frequency signal.
After programming the HomeLink button,
begin programming your garage door
opener motor.
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
unit and you may need to remove the cover
or lamp lens on your garage door opener.
133
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
E142659
To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1 – 4.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming Your Garage Door
Opener Motor
1. Press the learn button on the garage
door opener motor and then you have
30 seconds to complete the next two
steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.
E142658
3. Press and hold the function button you
want to program for two seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending
on your brand of garage door opener,
you may need to repeat this sequence
a third time.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
E142660
1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for
approximately 20 seconds until the
indicator lights above the buttons flash
rapidly.
2. When the indicator lights flash, release
the buttons. You have erased the codes
for all buttons.
Reprogramming a Single Button
To program a device to a previously trained
button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash
after 20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, follow Step 1 in the
Programming section.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming to a Genie Intellicode 2
Garage Door Opener
Note: You must program the Genie
Intellicode 2 transmitter to operate it with
the garage door opener.
Note: To program HomeLink to the
transmitter, you must first put the
transmitter into programming mode.
134
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
BA
E142661
Red indicator lightA.
Green indicator lightB.
1. Press and hold one of the buttons on
the hand-held transmitter for 10
seconds. The indicator light will change
from green to red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change to programming mode. If
done properly the indicator light will
appear red.
3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 inches
(2–8 centimeters) of the button on the
visor you want to program.
4. Press and hold both the programmed
Genie button on the hand-held
transmitter and the button you want
to program. The indicator light on the
visor will flash rapidly when the
programming is successful.
Note: The Genie transmitter will transmit
for up to 30 seconds. If HomeLink does not
program within 30 seconds you will need to
press the Genie transmitter again. If the
Genie transmitter indicator light displays
green and red, release the button until the
indicator light turns off before pressing the
button again.
Once you have programmed HomeLink
successfully, you must change the Genie
transmitter out of program mode. To do
this:
1. Press and hold the previously
programmed Genie button on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds.
The indicator light will change from red
to red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change. If done correctly the
indicator light will turn green.
Programming HomeLink to the Genie
Intellicode Garage Door Opener Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to access the
garage door opener motor.
E142662
1. Press and hold the program button on
the garage door opener motor until
both blue indicator lights turn on.
2. Release the program button. Only the
smaller round indicator light should be
on.
3. Press and release the program button.
The larger purple indicator light will
flash.
Note: The next two steps must be
completed in 30 seconds.
4. Press and release the previously
programmed button on the Genie
Intellicode 2 hand-held transmitter.
Both indicator lights on the garage door
opener motor unit should now flash
purple.
135
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
5. Press and hold the previously
programmed button on the visor for
two seconds. Repeat this step up to
three times until the garage door
moves.
Programming is now complete.
Clearing a HomeLink Device
To erase programming from the three
HomeLink buttons press and hold the two
outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator
light begins to flash. The indicator light will
begin flashing in 10-20 seconds. When this
happens, release both buttons. You have
now erased the programming, and the
indicator light should blink slowly to
indicate the device is in train mode when
you press any of the three HomeLink
buttons.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications to your device
not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance can void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
136
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
12 Volt DC Power Point
WARNING
Do not plug optional electrical
accessories into the cigar lighter
socket. Incorrect use of the cigar
lighter can cause damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty, and can result in fire
or serious injury.
Note: If used when the vehicle is not
running, the battery will run out of charge.
There may be insufficient power to restart
your vehicle.
Note: Do not insert objects other than an
accessory plug into the power point. This
will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the
accessory plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or
a fuse may blow.
Note: Do not use a power point for
operating a cigar lighter.
Note: Incorrect use of the power points can
cause damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty, and can result in fire or serious
injury.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point. To prevent the battery from
running out of charge:
•Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is not
running.
•Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
Locations
Power points may be in the following
locations:
•On the instrument panel.
•Inside the center console.
•On the rear of the center console.
•Inside the front under-seat storage
compartment (if equipped).
•Inside the rear under-seat storage
compartment (if equipped).
110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not keep electrical devices
plugged in the power point whenever
the device is not in use. Do not use
any extension cord with the 110 volt AC
power point, since it will defeat the safety
protection design. Doing so my cause the
power point to overload due to powering
multiple devices that can reach beyond
the 150 watt load limit and could result in
fire or serious injury.
Note: Run the vehicle for full capacity use
of the power point.
Note: Depending on your vehicle, the power
point may open to the right or upward.
E193395
Use the power point for powering electric
devices that require up to 150 watts. It is
on the rear of the center console.
137
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
When the indicator light on the power point
is:
•On, the power point is working, the
ignition is on and a device is plugged
in.
•Off, the power point is off, the ignition
is off or no device is plugged in.
•Flashing, the power point is in fault
mode.
The power outlet temporarily turns off
power when in fault mode if the device
exceeds the 150 watt limit. Unplug your
device and switch the ignition off. Switch
the ignition back on, but do not plug your
device back in. Let the system cool off and
switch the ignition off to reset the fault
mode. Switch the ignition back on and
make sure the indicator light remains on.
The power point is not designed for electric
devices such as:
•Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.
•Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools or compressor-driven
refrigerators.
•Measuring devices, which process
precise data, such as medical
equipment or measuring equipment.
•Other appliances requiring an
extremely stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.
138
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
CENTER CONSOLE (If Equipped)
Stow items in the cupholder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or collisions, including
hot drinks which may spill.
E163064
Available console features include:
•Locking storage compartment with
hanging file folder supports.
•Storage for laptop computer, binder or
book between the hanging file folder
support and the passenger side of the
console bin.
•Auxiliary power points.
Removable Front Cupholders
E163065
You can lift the two cupholder modules
out. You can also remove the false bottom
for hidden storage or to hold a large cup.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (If Equipped)
E75193
Press near the rear edge of the door to
open it.
139
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Storage Compartments
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNINGS
Extended idling at high engine
speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or
other damage.
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground
cover. The emission system heats up
the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
Do not start the engine in a closed
garage or in other enclosed areas.
Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start the
engine.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside
your vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by your authorized dealer
immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if
you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 miles
(8 kilometers) after you reconnect it. This
is because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You can
disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the
engine.
If your vehicle is operated in a heavy snow
storm or blowing snow conditions, the
engine air induction may become partially
clogged with snow and ice. If this occurs,
the engine may experience a significant
reduction in power output. At the earliest
opportunity, clear all the snow and ice
away from the air induction inlet.
IGNITION SWITCH
C
D
B
A
E163165
A (off) - The ignition is off.
Note: When you switch the ignition off and
leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in
the ignition. This could cause your vehicle
battery to lose charge.
B (accessory) - Allows the electrical
accessories, such as the radio, to operate
while the engine is not running.
Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this
position for too long. This could cause your
vehicle battery to lose charge.
C (on) - All electrical circuits are
operational and the warning lamps and
indicators illuminate.
D (start) - Cranks the engine.
140
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
STARTING A GASOLINE
ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases, this helps to warm up the
engine. If the engine idle speed does not
slow down automatically, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
Before starting the engine check the
following:
•Make sure all occupants have fastened
their safety belts.
•Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
•Make sure the parking brake is on.
•Move the transmission selector lever
to position P.
•Turn the ignition key to the on position.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Turn the key to the start position to
start the engine. Release the key when
the engine starts.
Note: The engine may continue cranking
for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
Note: If you cannot start the engine on the
first try, wait for a short period and try again.
Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
3. Start the engine.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
1. Move the transmission selector lever
to position P.
2. Turn the key to the off position.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving
WARNING
Switching off the engine when the
vehicle is still moving will result in a
loss of brake and steering assistance.
The steering will not lock, but higher effort
will be required. When the ignition is
switched off, some electrical circuits,
including air bags, warning lamps and
indicators may also be off. If the ignition
was turned off accidentally, you can shift
into neutral (N) and re-start the engine.
1. Move the transmission selector lever
to position N and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, move
the transmission selector lever to
position P and turn the key to the off
position.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Cold Weather Starting (Flexible
Fuel Vehicles Only)
The starting characteristics of all grades
of E85 ethanol make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below
0°F (-18°C). Consult your fuel distributor
for the availability of winter grade ethanol.
As the outside temperature approaches
freezing, ethanol fuel distributors should
supply winter grade ethanol (same as with
unleaded gasoline). If summer grade
ethanol is used in cold weather conditions,
0°F to 32°F (-18°C to 0°C), you may
experience increased cranking times, rough
idle or hesitation until the engine has
warmed up.
141
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
You may experience a decrease in peak
performance when the engine is cold when
operating on E85 ethanol.
Do not crank the engine for more than 10
seconds at a time as starter damage may
occur. If the engine fails to start, turn the
key to off and wait 30 seconds before
trying again.
Do not use starting fluid such as ether in
the air intake system. Such fluid could
cause immediate explosive damage to the
engine and possible personal injury.
If you should experience cold weather
starting problems on E85 ethanol, and
neither an alternative brand of E85 ethanol
nor an engine block heater is available, the
addition of unleaded gasoline to your tank
improves cold starting performance. Your
vehicle is designed to operate on E85
ethanol alone, unleaded gasoline alone, or
any mixture of the two.
If the Engine Fails to Start Using the
Preceding Instructions (Flexible Fuel
Vehicles Only)
1. Press and hold down the accelerator
one-third to one-half the way to the
floor, then crank the engine.
2. When the engine starts, release the
key, then gradually release the
accelerator pedal as the engine speeds
up. If the engine still fails to start,
repeat Step 1.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING
If you smell exhaust fumes inside
your vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by your authorized dealer
immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if
you smell exhaust fumes. Carbon
monoxide is present in exhaust fumes.
Take precautions to avoid its dangerous
effects.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
engine idling for long periods of time, we
recommend that you do one of the
following:
•Open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5
centimeters).
•Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If
Equipped)
WARNINGS
Failure to follow engine block heater
instructions could result in property
damage or serious personal injury.
Do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk
of electrical shock.
Do not fully close the hood, or allow
it to drop under its own weight when
using the engine block heater. This
could damage the power cable and may
cause an electrical short resulting in fire,
injury and property damage.
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F
(-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by
warming the engine coolant. This allows
the climate control system to respond
quickly. The equipment includes a heater
element (installed in the engine block) and
a wire harness. You can connect the
system to a grounded 120-volt AC
electrical source.
142
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
We recommend that you do the following
for a safe and correct operation:
•Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
Canadian Standards Association
(CSA). This extension cord must be
suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
•Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
•Do not use multiple extension cords.
•Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord
plug connections are free and clear of
water. This could cause an electric
shock or fire.
•Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
•Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
•Check for heat anywhere in the
electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30
minutes.
•Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
•Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are
clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with
a dry cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
of energy per hour of use. The system does
not have a thermostat. It achieves
maximum temperature after
approximately three hours of operation.
Using the heater longer than three hours
does not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.
143
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler door, do not refuel
until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious
injury or death if you misuse or
mishandle them.
Fuel ethanol and gasoline may
contain benzene, which is a
cancer-causing agent.
When refueling always shut the
engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the filler neck.
Never smoke or use a cell phone while
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
The flow of fuel through a fuel pump
nozzle can produce static electricity,
which can cause a fire if you pump
fuel into an ungrounded fuel container.
Observe the following guidelines when
handling automotive fuel:
•Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
•Automotive fuels can be harmful or
fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as
gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If swallowed, call a
physician immediately, even if no
symptoms are immediately apparent.
The toxic effects of fuel may not be
visible for hours.
•Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too
much fuel vapor of any kind can lead
to eye and respiratory tract irritation.
In severe cases, excessive or prolonged
breathing of fuel vapor can cause
serious illness and permanent injury.
•Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If
you splash fuel in your eyes, remove
contact lenses (if worn), flush with
water for 15 minutes and seek medical
attention. Failure to seek proper
medical attention could lead to
permanent injury.
•Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If you splash fuel on
your skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and
wash your skin thoroughly with soap
and water. Repeated or prolonged skin
contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes
skin irritation.
•Be particularly careful if you are taking
“Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram
for the treatment of alcoholism.
Breathing gasoline vapors, or skin
contact could cause an adverse
reaction. In sensitive individuals, serious
personal injury or sickness may result.
If you splash fuel on your skin, promptly
wash your skin thoroughly with soap
and water. Consult a physician
immediately if you experience an
adverse reaction.
144
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
FUEL QUALITY
Note: Do not add after-market fuel additive
products to your fuel tank. We recommend
that you use only high quality fuel without
after-market additives or other engine
treatments.
Note: Your warranty will not cover any
vehicle damage, loss of vehicle performance
or repairs to your vehicle caused by the use
of fuel not recommended.
Choosing the Right Fuel
Use only unleaded gasoline or unleaded
gasoline blended with a maximum of 15%
ethanol in your gasoline vehicle. If your
vehicle is a flex fuel vehicle (FFV), it will
have a yellow cap.
Do not use:
•Fuels containing more than 15%
ethanol or E-85 fuel.
•Fuels containing methanol.
•Fuels containing metallic based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
•Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
•Prohibited by law, you cannot use
leaded fuel.
Diesel Engine
Refer to the diesel supplement for
information regarding diesel fuel
recommendations and requirements of
your diesel-powered truck.
Choosing the Right Fuel With a
Flex Fuel Vehicle (If Equipped)
Note: Flex fuel vehicles will have a yellow
fuel cap.
Use only unleaded gasoline or unleaded
gasoline blended with a maximum of 85%
ethanol (E-85) in your flex fuel vehicle
(FFV).
Do not use:
•Fuels containing more than 85%
ethanol or E-100 fuel.
•Fuels containing methanol.
•Fuels containing metallic based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
•Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
•Prohibited by law, you cannot use
leaded fuel.
Your warranty will not cover any vehicle
damage, loss of vehicle performance or
repairs to your vehicle, caused by the use
of fuel not recommended.
It is best not to alternate repeatedly
between gasoline and E85. If you do switch
fuels, it is recommended that you add as
much fuel as possible—at least half a tank.
Do not add less than 5.0 gal (18.9 L) when
refueling. You should drive the vehicle
immediately after refueling for at least 5 mi
(8 km) to allow the vehicle to adapt to the
change in ethanol concentration. The
recommendation if you exclusively use E85
fuel, is to fill the fuel tank with regular
unleaded gasoline at each scheduled oil
change.
Octane Recommendations
E161513
145
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
We recommend regular unleaded gasoline
with a pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
Some stations offer fuels posted as regular
with an octane rating below 87, particularly
in high altitude areas. We do not
recommend fuels with an octane rating
below 87.
Do not be concerned if your engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if it
knocks heavily under most driving
conditions while you are using fuel with the
recommended octane rating, see your
authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Avoid running out of fuel because this
situation may have an adverse effect on
engine components.
If you have run out of fuel:
•You may need to cycle the ignition from
off to on several times after refueling
to allow the fuel system to pump the
fuel from the tank to the engine. On
restarting, cranking time will take a few
seconds longer than normal. With
keyless ignition, just start the engine.
Crank time will be longer than usual.
•Normally, adding 1.06 gal (4 L) of fuel
is enough to restart the engine. If the
vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep
grade, more than 1.06 gal (4 L) may be
required.
REFUELING
WARNINGS
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel
fire can cause severe injuries.
Read and follow all the instructions
on the pump island.
WARNINGS
Turn off your engine when you are
refueling.
Do not smoke if you are near fuel or
refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from fuel.
Stay outside your vehicle and do not
leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle. This is
against the law in some places.
Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
Do not use personal electronic
devices while refueling.
Wait at least 10 seconds before
removing the fuel pump nozzle to
allow any residual fuel to drain into
the fuel tank.
Stop refueling after the fuel pump
nozzle automatically shuts off for the
second time. Failure to follow this
will fill the expansion space in the fuel tank
and could lead to fuel overflowing.
Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle
from its fully inserted position when
refueling.
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up when filling
an ungrounded fuel container:
•Place approved fuel container on the
ground.
•Do not fill a fuel container while it is in
the vehicle (including the cargo area).
•Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container while filling.
•Do not use a device that would hold
the fuel pump handle in the fill position.
146
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Fuel Filler Cap
WARNINGS
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler door, do not refuel
until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.
If you do not use the proper fuel filler
cap, excessive pressure or vacuum
in the fuel tank may damage the fuel
system or cause the fuel cap to disengage
in a collision, which may result in possible
personal injury.
Note: If you must replace the fuel filler cap,
replace it with a fuel filler cap that is
designed for your vehicle. The customer
warranty may be void for any damage to the
fuel tank or fuel system if the correct
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or other certified
fuel filler cap is not used.
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed
design with a 1/4th turn on and off feature.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Put your vehicle in park (P).
2. Switch the engine off.
3. Carefully turn the filler cap
counterclockwise until it spins off.
4. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel
filler pipe.
5. To install the cap, align the tabs on the
cap with the notches on the filler pipe.
6. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a
turn clockwise until it clicks at least
once.
If the Check Fuel Cap light or a Check Fuel
Cap message appears in the instrument
cluster and stays on after you start the
engine, you may not have installed the fuel
filler properly.
If the fuel cap light remains on, at the next
opportunity, safely pull off of the road,
remove the fuel filler cap, align the cap
properly and reinstall it. The check fuel cap
light or Check fuel cap message may not
reset immediately. It may take several
driving cycles for the indicators to turn off.
A driving cycle consists of an engine
start-up (after four or more hours with the
engine off) followed by normal city and
highway driving.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Empty reserve is the amount of fuel
remaining in the tank after the fuel gauge
indicates empty. The amount of usable
fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range.
•The usable capacity of the fuel tank is
the amount of fuel that can be added
into the tank after the gauge indicates
empty
•The advertised capacity is the total fuel
tank size. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 303). It is the
combined usable capacity plus the
empty reserve.
•Due to the empty reserve, you may not
be able to refuel the full amount of the
advertised capacity of the fuel tank
even when the fuel gauge reads empty.
Filling the Tank
For consistent results when filling the fuel
tank:
•Turn the ignition off before fueling; an
inaccurate reading results if the engine
is left running.
•Use the same fill rate
(low-medium-high) each time the tank
is filled.
•Allow no more than two automatic
click-offs when filling.
147
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Results are most accurate when the filling
method is consistent.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Do not measure fuel economy during the
first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers) of
driving (this is your engine’s break-in
period); a more accurate measurement is
obtained after 2000 miles - 3000 miles
(3200 kilometers - 4800 kilometers). Also,
fuel expense, frequency of fill ups or fuel
gauge readings are not accurate ways to
measure fuel economy.
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record
the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the
amount of fuel added.
3. After at least 3 to 5 tank fill ups, fill the
fuel tank and record the current
odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading
from the current odometer reading.
5. Calculate fuel economy by dividing
miles traveled by gallons used (For
Metric: Multiply liters used by 100, then
divide by kilometers traveled).
Keep a record for at least 1 month and
record the type of driving (city or highway).
This provides an accurate estimate of the
vehicle’s fuel economy under current
driving conditions. Additionally, keeping
records during summer and winter show
how temperature impacts fuel economy.
In general, lower temperatures mean lower
fuel economy.
Conditions
•Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a
trailer may reduce fuel economy at any
speed.
•Carrying unnecessary weight may
reduce fuel economy (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400
pounds [180 kilograms] of weight
carried).
•Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle (for example bug deflectors,
rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski
racks) may reduce fuel economy.
•Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.
•Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures during the first 8–10
miles (12–16 kilometers) of driving.
•Driving on flat terrain offers improved
fuel economy as compared to driving
on hilly terrain.
•Transmissions give their best fuel
economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure
on the gas pedal.
•Close windows for high speed driving.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle
in dry grass or other dry ground cover.
The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system,
which can start a fire.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your dealer inspect your
vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
smell exhaust fumes.
148
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Your vehicle is equipped with various
emission control components and a
catalytic converter that will enable your
vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust
emission standards. To make sure that the
catalytic converter and other emission
control components continue to work
properly:
•Use only the specified fuel listed.
•Avoid running out of fuel.
•Do not turn off the ignition while your
vehicle is moving, especially at high
speeds.
•Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed
in scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of
your vehicle and to its emissions system.
If you use parts other than Ford, Motorcraft
or Ford-authorized parts for maintenance
replacements, or for service of
components affecting emission control,
such non-Ford parts should be the
equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company
parts in performance and durability.
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
power could indicate that the emission
control system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged
exhaust system may allow exhaust to
enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or
improperly operating exhaust system
inspected and repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles
are not permitted to intentionally remove
an emission control device or prevent it
from working. Information about your
vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle
Emission Control Information Decal
located on or near the engine. This decal
also lists engine displacement
Please consult your warranty information
for complete details.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle has a computer known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that
monitors the engine’s emission control
system. The system protects the
environment by making sure that your
vehicle continues to meet government
emission standards. The OBD-II system
also assists a service technician in properly
servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a
malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may
cause the service engine soon indicator to
illuminate.
Examples of temporary malfunctions are:
•the vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly
•poor fuel quality or water in the
fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly
•the fuel fill inlet may not have closed
properly. See Refueling (page 146).
•driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.
You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with
good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel
fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry
out. After three driving cycles without these
or any other temporary malfunctions
149
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
present, the service engine soon indicator
should stay off the next time you start the
engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold
engine startup followed by mixed
city/highway driving. No additional vehicle
service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may
not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine
soon indicator on can result in increased
emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced
engine and transmission smoothness, and
lead to more costly repairs.
Readiness for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
Testing
Some state/provincial and local
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs
to inspect the emission control equipment
on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting
a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon
indicator is on or the bulb does
not work, you may need to have
the vehicle serviced. See On-Board
Diagnostics (OBD-II).
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if
the service engine soon indicator is on or
not working properly (bulb is burned out),
or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this
case, your vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To
determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M
testing, turn the ignition key to the on
position for 15 seconds without cranking
the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if
the service engine soon indicator stays on
solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for
I/M testing.
The OBD-II system monitors the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days. If
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, you
may need to perform the following driving
cycle consisting of mixed city and highway
driving:
Drive on an expressway or highway for a
steady 15 minutes, followed by 20 minutes
of stop-and-go driving with at least four
30-second idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight
hours without starting the engine. Then,
start the engine and complete the above
driving cycle. The engine must warm up to
its normal operating temperature. Once
started, do not turn off the engine until the
above driving cycle is complete. If the
vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, you
will have to repeat the above driving cycle.
150
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING
Always set the parking brake fully
and make sure the gearshift is
latched in park (P). Turn the ignition
to the off position and remove the key
whenever you leave your vehicle.
Understanding the Shift Positions
of the 5–Speed Automatic
Transmission (If Equipped)
E161511
PRND321
Putting your vehicle in or out of gear:
1. Fully press down the brake pedal.
2. Move the gearshift lever into the
desired gear.
3. Come to a complete stop.
4. Move the gearshift lever and securely
latch it in park (P).
Park (P)
This position locks the transmission and
prevents the rear wheels from turning.
Reverse (R)
With the gearshift lever in reverse (R), your
vehicle moves backward. Always come to
a complete stop before shifting into and
out of reverse (R).
Neutral (N)
With the gearshift lever in neutral (N), you
can start your vehicle and it is free to roll.
Hold the brake pedal down while in this
position.
Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy. The overdrive
function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through five.
Third (3)
Transmission operates in third (3) gear
only. Use third (3) gear for improved
traction on slippery roads.
Second (2)
Transmission operates in second (2) gear
only. Use second (2) gear to start-up on
slippery roads.
First (1)
•Transmission operates in first (1) gear
only.
•Provides maximum engine braking.
•Allows upshifts by moving gearshift
lever.
•Does not downshift into first (1) gear
at high speeds; allows for first (1) gear
when vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
•Allowed in drive (D) with the tow/haul
feature on or off.
•Press the accelerator to the floor.
•Allows transmission to select an
appropriate gear.
151
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
Tow/Haul Mode
E161509
To activate tow/haul, press the
button on the gearshift lever
once. The TOW HAUL indicator
light illuminates in the instrument cluster.
The tow/haul feature:
•Delays upshifts to reduce the frequency
of transmission shifting.
•Provides engine braking in all forward
gears, which slows your vehicle and
assists you in controlling your vehicle
when descending a grade.
•Depending on driving conditions and
load conditions, may downshift the
transmission, slow your vehicle and
control your vehicle speed when
descending a hill, without pressing the
accelerator pedal. The amount of
downshift braking provided varies
based upon the amount you press the
brake pedal.
The tow/haul feature improves
transmission operation when towing a
trailer or a heavy load. All transmission
gear ranges are available when using
tow/haul.
To deactivate the tow/haul feature and
return to normal driving mode, press the
button on the gearshift lever twice. The
TOW HAUL light deactivates. Tow/haul
also deactivates when you power down
your vehicle.
WARNING
Do not use the tow/haul feature
when driving in icy or slippery
conditions as the increased engine
braking can cause the rear wheels to slide
and your vehicle to swing around with the
possible loss of vehicle control.
Understanding the Shift Positions
of a 6–Speed Automatic
Transmission (If Equipped)
E163183
Putting your vehicle in or out of gear:
1. Fully press down the brake pedal.
2. Move the gearshift lever into the
desired gear.
3. Come to a complete stop.
4. Move the gearshift lever and securely
latch it in park (P).
Park (P)
This position locks the transmission and
prevents the rear wheels from turning.
Reverse (R)
With the gearshift lever in reverse (R), your
vehicle moves backward. Always come to
a complete stop before shifting into and
out of reverse (R).
Neutral (N)
With the gearshift lever in neutral (N), you
can start your vehicle and it is free to roll.
Hold the brake pedal down while in this
position.
Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy. The overdrive
function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through six.
152
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
M (Manual)
With the gearshift lever in manual (M), the
driver can change gears up or down as
desired. By moving the gearshift lever from
drive position drive (D) to manual (M) you
now have control of selecting the gear you
desire using buttons on the shift lever. See
Understanding your SelectShift
Automatic™ transmission later in this
section.
To return to normal drive (D) position,
move the shift lever back from manual (M)
to drive (D).
The transmission operates in gears one
through six.
Second (2)
Transmission operates in second (2) gear
only. Use second (2) gear to start-up on
slippery roads.
First (1)
•Transmission operates in first (1) gear
only.
•Provides maximum engine braking.
•Allows upshifts by moving gearshift
lever.
•Does not downshift into first (1) gear
at high speeds; allows for first (1) gear
when vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
•Allowed in drive (D) with the tow/haul
feature on or off.
•Press the accelerator to the floor.
•Allows transmission to select an
appropriate gear.
Tow/Haul Mode
E161509
To activate tow/haul, press the
button on the gearshift lever
once. The TOW HAUL indicator
light illuminates in the instrument cluster.
The tow/haul feature:
•Delays upshifts to reduce the frequency
of transmission shifting.
•Provides engine braking in all forward
gears, which slows your vehicle and
assists you in controlling your vehicle
when descending a grade.
•Depending on driving conditions and
load conditions, may downshift the
transmission, slow your vehicle and
control your vehicle speed when
descending a hill, without pressing the
accelerator pedal. The amount of
downshift braking provided will vary
based upon the amount you press the
brake pedal.
The tow/haul feature improves
transmission operation when towing a
trailer or a heavy load. All transmission
gear ranges are available when using
tow/haul.
To deactivate the tow/haul feature and
return to normal driving mode, press the
button on the gearshift lever twice. The
TOW HAUL light deactivates. Tow/haul
also deactivates when you power down
your vehicle.
WARNING
Do not use the tow/haul feature
when driving in icy or slippery
conditions as the increased engine
braking can cause the rear wheels to slide
and your vehicle to swing around with the
possible loss of vehicle control.
153
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
Understanding your SelectShift
Automatic™ transmission (If Equipped)
E163184
Your vehicle is equipped with a SelectShift
Automatic™ transmission gearshift lever.
The SelectShift Automatic transmission
gives you the ability to change gears up or
down (without a clutch) as desired.
In order to prevent the engine from running
at too low an RPM, which may cause it to
stall, SelectShift will still automatically
make some downshifts if it has determined
that you have not downshifted in time.
Although SelectShift will make some
downshifts for you, it will still allow you to
downshift at any time as long as the
SelectShift determines that damage will
not be caused to the engine from
over-revving.
SelectShift will not automatically upshift,
even if the engine is approaching the RPM
limit. It must be shifted manually by
pressing the + button.
Note: Engine damage may occur if you
maintain excessive engine revving without
shifting.
The SelectShift Automatic transmission
feature has two modes: PRS and M mode.
PRS (Progressive Range Selection)
Progressive Range Selection gives you the
ability to lockout gears from the automatic
shifting range. This may provide you with
an improved driving experience (for
example, in slippery conditions or when
experiencing a steep grade).
With the gearshift lever in drive (D), press
the – button to active PRS. The available
and selected gears are indicated on the
instrument cluster.
All available gears will display with the
current gear indicated. Press the – button
again to lock out gears beginning with the
highest gear. Example: press the – button
twice to lock out 6th and 5th gears. Only
the available gears will display and the
transmission will automatically shift
between the available gears. Press the +
button to unlock gears to allow the
transmission to shift to higher gears. The
transmission will shift automatically within
the gear range you select.
Manual (M)
Moving the gearshift lever to the manual
(M) position will allow you to manually
select the gear you desire. Only the current
gear will display. Use the buttons on the
gearshift lever to manually select gears.
Press the + button to upshift or the –
button to downshift. Return the
transmission to a different gearshift
position to deactivate manual control.
Recommended shift speeds
Upshift according to the following chart:
154
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel economy)
Diesel enginesGasoline enginesShift from:
12 mph (19 km/h)15 mph (24 km/h)1 – 2
19 mph (31 km/h)25 mph (40 km/h)2 – 3
26 mph (42 km/h)40 mph (64 km/h)3 – 4
34 mph (55 km/h)45 mph (72 km/h)4 – 5
46 mph (74 km/h)50 mph (80 km/h)5 – 6
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning
This feature's design is to increase
durability and provide consistent shift feel
over the life of your vehicle. A new vehicle
or transmission may have firm shifts, soft
shifts or both. This operation is normal and
does not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive
learning process fully updates transmission
operation. Additionally, whenever you
disconnect the battery or install a new
battery, the system must relearn the
strategy.
Brake-Shift Interlock
WARNINGS
Do not drive your vehicle until you
verify that the brake lamps are
working.
When doing this procedure, you will
be taking your vehicle out of park
which means your vehicle can roll
freely. To avoid unwanted vehicle
movement, always fully set the parking
brake prior to doing this procedure. Use
wheel chocks if appropriate.
WARNINGS
If the parking brake is fully released,
but the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized
dealer.
Your vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift
interlock feature that prevents the
gearshift lever from moving from park (P)
when the ignition is in the 3 (on) position
and the brake pedal is not pressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out
of park (P) position with the ignition in the
4 (on) position and the brake pedal
pressed, a malfunction may have occurred.
It is possible that a fuse has blown or your
vehicle’s brake lamps are not operating
properly. See Fuse Specification Chart
(page 223).
If the fuse is not blown and the brake
lamps are working properly, the following
procedure allows you to move the gearshift
lever from park (P):
1. Apply the parking brake. Switch the
ignition key to 1 (off), then remove the
key.
2. Move the steering column to the full
down and full rearward position
(toward the driver’s seat).
3. Remove the gearshift lever boot.
155
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
4. Place fingers into hole where you
removed the gearshift lever boot and
pull top half of shroud up and forward
to separate it from the lower half of the
shroud. There is a hinge at the forward
edge of the top shroud. Roll the top
half of the shroud upward on the hinge
point to clear the hazard flasher button,
then pull straight rearward toward the
driver’s seat to remove.
5. Remove the top half of the shroud.
6. Remove the three fasteners under the
column that secure the lower shroud
half to the column.
E163185
7. Pull the lock lever into the full unlocked
position and remove the lower shroud
cover by pulling the lever handle
through the slot in the cover.
8. Apply the brake. Gently lift the override
disk and move the gearshift lever into
neutral (N).
E163186
9. Start your vehicle.
Perform Steps 4 through 8 in reverse order,
making sure to engage the hinge pivots
between the upper and lower halves of the
shroud. Keep slight pressure in the forward
direction as you rotate the halves together.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud
or Snow
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the
engine may overheat.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, you
may rock it out by shifting between forward
and reverse gears, stopping between shifts
in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the
accelerator in each gear.
POWER TAKE-OFF
Auxiliary equipment called power take-off,
or PTO, is often added to the engine or
transmission to operate utility equipment.
Examples include a wheel-lift for tow
trucks, cranes, tools for construction or tire
service, and pumping fluids. PTO
applications draw auxiliary horsepower
from the powertrain, often while the
156
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
vehicle is stationary. In this condition, there
is limited cooling air flow through the
radiator and around the vehicle that
normally occurs when a vehicle is moving.
The aftermarket PTO system installer,
having the most knowledge of the final
application, is responsible for determining
whether additional chassis heat protection
or powertrain cooling is required, and
alerting the user to the safe and proper
operation.
Ford Super Duty Vehicles are approved for
use as a stationary (including split shaft
capability) or mobile power source, within
limits and operating guidelines detailed in
the Ford Truck Body Builders Layout Book,
found at www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas,
and through the Ford Truck Body Builders
Advisory Service.
157
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
WARNING
For important information regarding
safe operation of this type of vehicle,
See General Information (page
264).
Note: Do not use 4X4 mode on dry, hard
surfaced roads. Doing so will produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may
damage drive components. 4X4 mode is
only intended for consistently slippery or
loose surfaces.
Note: If 4X4 low is selected while the
vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h),
the 4WD system will not perform a shift.
This is normal and should be no reason for
concern. Refer to Shifting to/from 4L (4X4
Low) for proper operation.
Manual Shift On Stop (MSOS)
4WD system (If Equipped)
Note: Some vehicles may be equipped with
wheel ornaments that cover the 4x4 manual
hub lock. These ornaments must be
removed to access the manual hub locks.
Note: The vehicle should not be driven in
4X4 High or 4X4 Low modes with the hub
locks set to FREE as this condition may
damage driveline system components.
LO
CK
E
E
R
F
E163187
The 4WD system is engaged or disengaged
by rotating the control for both front wheel
hub locks from the FREE or LOCK position,
then manually engaging or disengaging the
transfer case with the floor-mounted
shifter. For increased fuel economy in 2WD,
rotate both hub locks to the FREE position.
Electronic Shift-On-the-Fly
(ESOF) 4WD system
Note: If 4X4 Low is selected while the
vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h),
the 4WD system will not perform a shift.
This is normal and should be no reason for
concern. Refer to Shifting to/from 4L (4X4
Low) for proper system operation.
Note: Auto-manual hub locks can be
manually overridden by rotating the hub lock
control from AUTO to LOCK.
LO
CK
O
T
U
A
E163188
For proper operation, make sure that each
hub is fully engaged and that both hub
locks are set to the same position (both
set to LOCK or both set to AUTO). To
engage LOCK, turn the hub locks
completely clockwise; to engage AUTO,
turn the hub locks completely
counterclockwise.
The ESOF 4WD system:
158
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
•provides 4x4 High engagement and
disengagement while the vehicle is
moving.
•is operated by a rotary control located
on the instrument panel that allows
you select 4x2, 4x4 High or 4x4 Low
operation.
•uses auto-manual hub locks that can
be engaged and disengaged
automatically based on the 4x4 mode
selected.
•will increase fuel economy when used
in the recommended AUTO lock mode.
4WD Indicator Lights
Note: When a 4X4 system fault is present,
the system will typically remain in whichever
4X4 mode was selected prior to the fault
condition occurring. It will not default to 4X2
in all circumstances. When this warning is
displayed, have your vehicle serviced by an
authorized dealer.
4X2
E163173
Momentarily illuminates when
2H is selected.
4X4 HIGH
E163175
Continuously illuminates when
4H is selected.
4X4 LOW
E163174
Continuously illuminates when
4L is selected.
CHECK 4X4
Displays when a 4X4 fault is
present.
Using a Manual Shift On Stop
(MSOS) 4WD system (If Equipped)
Note: High shift efforts may be encountered
when attempting to shift into and out of 4x4
modes. It is recommended to allow the
vehicle to roll at a speed below 3 mph
(5 km/h) when shifting between modes.
E163189
2H (2WD)
For general on-road driving. Sends power
to the rear wheels only and should be used
for street and highway driving. Provides
optimal smoothness and fuel economy at
high speeds
4H (4x4 High)
Used for extra traction such as in snow or
icy roads or in off road situations. This
mode is not intended for use on dry
pavement.
N (Neutral)
Only used when towing the vehicle. No
power to front or rear wheels.
4L (4x4 Low)
Uses extra gearing to provide maximum
power to all four wheels at reduced
speeds. Intended only for off road
applications such as deep sand, steep
grades or pulling heavy objects.
159
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Shifting between system modes
Note: Do not perform these operations if
the rear wheels are slipping.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the 4x4
system shifts or engages. This is normal. In
order to reduce engagement noise, it is
recommended that all shifts be performed
at speeds below3 mph (5 km/h).
Note: The vehicle should not be driven in
4X4 High with the hub locks disengaged as
this condition may damage driveline system
components.
Engage the locking hubs by rotating the
hub lock control from FREE to LOCK, then
move the transfer case lever from 2H
(2WD) to 4H (4x4 High) at a stop or a
vehicle speed below 3 mph (5 km/h).
Move the transfer case lever from 4H (4x4
High) to 2H (2WD) at a stop or a vehicle
speed below 3 mph (5 km/h), then
disengage the locking hubs (optional) by
rotating the hub lock control from LOCK
to FREE.
For proper operation, make sure that both
indicator arrows on the hub are aligned,
and that both hubs are set to either FREE
or LOCK.
Shifting to/from 4L (4x4 Low)
1. Bring the vehicle to a stop or a speed
below 3 mph (5 km/h).
2. Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
3. Move the transfer case shift lever
through N (Neutral) directly to the
desired position.
4. If the transfer case does not, or only
partially moves to the desired position,
perform a shift with the transmission
in N (Neutral) and the vehicle rolling at
a speed below 3 mph (5 km/h).
5. If shifting to 2H (2WD) with the vehicle
at a complete stop, disengage the
locking hubs (optional) by rotating the
hub lock control from LOCK to FREE.
Using the N (Neutral) position
WARNING
Do not leave the vehicle unattended
with the transfer case in the N
(Neutral) position. Always set the
parking brake fully and turn off the ignition
when leaving the vehicle.
E163189
The transfer case neutral position overrides
the transmission and puts the vehicle in
neutral regardless of transmission gearshift
lever position. The vehicle can move
forward or backwards.
This position should only be used when
towing the vehicle.
160
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Using the Electronic Shift on the
Fly 4WD system (If Equipped)
E163190
2H (2WD)
For general on-road driving. Sends power
to the rear wheels only and should be used
for street and highway driving. Provides
optimal smoothness and fuel economy at
high speeds.
4H (4X4 HIGH)
Used for extra traction such as in snow or
icy roads or in off road situations. This
mode is not intended for use on dry
pavement.
4L (4X4 LOW)
Uses extra gearing to provide maximum
power to all four wheels at reduced
speeds. Intended only for off-road
applications such as deep sand, steep
grades, or pulling heavy objects. 4L (4x4
low) will not engage while the vehicle is
moving above 3 mph (5 km/h); this is
normal and should be no reason for
concern. Refer to Shifting to/from 4L (4x4
low) for proper operation.
Shifting between system modes
Note: Momentarily releasing the accelerator
pedal while performing a shift will improve
engagement/disengagement times.
Note: Do not perform this operation if the
rear wheels are slipping.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the
system shifts or engages; this is normal.
Note: 4X4 high mode is not intended for
use on dry pavement.
You can move the control from 2H or 4H
at a stop or while driving. The information
display may display a message indicating
a 4X4 shift is in progress. Once the shift is
complete the message center will then
display the system mode selected.
If SHIFT DELAYED PULL FORWARD is
displayed in the information display during
the mode shift, transfer case gear tooth
blockage is present. To alleviate this
condition, place the transmission in a
forward gear and move the vehicle forward
approximately 5 ft (1.5 m) to allow the
transfer case to complete the mode shift.
Shifting to/from 4L (4X4 low)
Note: Some noise may be heard as the
system shifts or engages; this is normal.
Note: 4x4 low mode is not intended for use
on dry pavement.
1. Bring the vehicle to a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
2. Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
3. Move the 4WD control to the desired
position.
The information display will display a
message indicating a 4X4 shift is in
progress. The information display will then
display the system mode selected. If any
of the above shift conditions are not met,
the shift will not occur and the information
display will display information guiding the
driver through the proper shifting
procedures.
161
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
If SHIFT DELAYED PULL FORWARD is
displayed in the information display,
transfer case gear tooth blockage is
present. To alleviate this condition, place
the transmission in a forward gear, move
the vehicle forward approximately 5 ft
(1.5 m), and shift the transmission back to
neutral to allow the transfer case to
complete the range shift.
How Your Vehicle Differs From
Other Vehicles
WARNING
Vehicles with a higher center of
gravity such as utility and four-wheel
drive vehicles handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity.
Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are
not designed for cornering at speeds as
high as passenger cars any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to
perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive
speed and abrupt maneuvers in these
vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death.
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from
some other vehicles. Your vehicle may be
higher to allow it to travel over rough
terrain without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
The differences that make your vehicle so
versatile also make it handle differently
than an ordinary passenger car.
Maintain steering wheel control at all
times, especially in rough terrain. Since
sudden changes in terrain can result in
abrupt steering wheel motion, make sure
you grip the steering wheel from the
outside. Do not grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage
from concealed objects such as rocks and
stumps.
You should either know the terrain or
examine maps of the area before driving.
Map out your route before driving in the
area. To maintain steering and braking
control of your vehicle, you must have all
four wheels on the ground and they must
be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
Driving Off-Road With Truck and
Utility Vehicles
Note: On some models, the initial shift from
two-wheel drive to four-wheel drive while
the vehicle is moving can cause some
momentary clunk and ratcheting sounds.
This is the front drivetrain coming up to
speed and the automatic locking hubs
engaging and is not cause for concern.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with
a front air dam that can become damaged
(due to reduced ground clearance) when
taking your vehicle off-road. This air dam
can be taken off by removing two bolts.
Four-wheel drive vehicles are specially
equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud
and rough terrain and have operating
characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both
on and off the road.
Power is supplied to all four wheels
through a transfer case. On four-wheel
drive vehicles, the transfer case allows you
to select 4WD when necessary.
Information on transfer case operation and
shifting procedures can be found in this
chapter. Information on transfer case
maintenance can be found in the
Maintenance chapter. You should become
thoroughly familiar with this information
before you operate your vehicle.
162
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Four-wheel drive (when you select a 4WD
mode) uses all four wheels to power the
vehicle. This increases traction, enabling
you to drive over terrain and road
conditions that a conventional two-wheel
drive vehicle cannot.
Basic Operating Principles
•Drive slower in strong crosswinds which
can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
•When driving your vehicle on surfaces
made slippery by loose sand, water,
gravel, snow or ice proceed with care.
•Do not use four-wheel drive on dry,
hard surfaced roads. Doing so will
produce excessive noise, increase tire
wear and may damage drive
components. Four-wheel drive modes
are only intended for consistently
slippery or loose surfaces.
If Your Vehicle leaves the Road
If your vehicle leaves the road, reduce your
vehicle speed and avoid severe braking.
When your vehicle speed has been reduced
ease your vehicle back onto the road. Do
not turn the steering wheel sharply while
returning your vehicle to the road.
It may be safer to stay on the shoulder of
the road and slow down gradually before
returning to the road. You may lose control
if you do not slow down or if you turn the
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
It may be less risky to strike small objects,
such as freeway reflectors, with minor
damage to your vehicle rather than
attempt a sudden return to the road which
could cause your vehicle to slide sideways
out of control or roll over. Remember, your
safety and the safety of others should be
your primary concern.
Emergency Maneuvers
In an unavoidable emergency situation
where a sudden sharp turn must be made,
remember to avoid over-driving your
vehicle (i.e. turn the steering wheel only as
rapidly and as far as required to avoid the
emergency). Excessive steering can result
in loss of vehicle control. Apply smooth
pressure to the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal when changes in vehicle speed are
required. Avoid abrupt steering,
acceleration and braking. This could result
in an increased risk of vehicle roll over, loss
of vehicle control and personal injury. Use
all available road surface to bring your
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
In the event of an emergency stop, avoid
skidding the tires and do not attempt any
sharp steering wheel movements.
If your vehicle goes from one type of
surface to another (i.e. from concrete to
gravel) there will be a change in the way
your vehicle responds to a maneuver (i.e.
steering, acceleration or braking).
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift
to a lower gear and drive steadily through
the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid excessive wheel slip.
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
under high outside temperatures, use a low
gear when possible. Low gear operation
will maximize the engine and transmission
cooling capability.
Avoid driving at excessive speeds, this
causes vehicle momentum to work against
you and your vehicle could become stuck
to the point that assistance may be
required from another vehicle. Remember,
you may be able to back out the way you
came if you proceed with caution.
163
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Mud and Water
Mud
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even four-wheel drive vehicles can
lose traction in slick mud. If your vehicle
does slide, steer in the direction of the slide
until you regain control of your vehicle.
After driving through mud, clean off residue
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.
Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating
driveshafts can cause an imbalance that
could damage drive components.
Water
If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. Traction or brake capability may
be limited.
When driving through water, determine the
depth and avoid water higher than the
bottom of the hubs. If the ignition system
gets wet, your vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop your vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be
improved by applying light pressure to the
brake pedal while moving slowly.
Note: Driving through deep water may
damage the transmission. If the front or rear
axle is submerged in water, the axle
lubricant and power transfer unit lubricant
should be checked and changed if
necessary.
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down
a hill or steep incline, you should always
try to drive straight up or straight down.
Note: Avoid turning on steep slopes or hills.
A danger lies in losing traction, slipping
sideways and possible vehicle roll over.
Whenever driving on a hill, determine
beforehand the route you will use. Do not
drive over the crest of a hill without seeing
what conditions are on the other side. Do
not drive in reverse over a hill without the
aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start
in a lower gear rather than downshifting to
a lower gear from a higher gear once the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on
the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If your vehicle stalls, do not try to turn
around because this could cause vehicle
roll over. It is better to reverse back to a
safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power will cause
the tires to slip, spin or lose traction,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
E143949
Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
brake application and brake overheating.
Do not descend in neutral. Disengage
overdrive or move the transmission
selector lever to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid sudden hard
braking as you could lose control. The front
wheels have to be turning in order to steer
your vehicle.
164
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply
the brakes steadily. Do not pump the
brakes.
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING
If you are driving in slippery
conditions that require tire chains or
cables, then it is critical that you drive
cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for
longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances
of a loss of vehicle control which can lead
to serious injury or death. If the rear end of
your vehicle slides while cornering, steer in
the direction of the slide until you regain
control of your vehicle.
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
transmission damage.
Four-wheel drive vehicles have advantages
over two-wheel drive vehicles in snow and
ice but can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and
quick changes of direction on snow and
ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and
steadily when starting from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking. Although a
four-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in
snow and ice, it will not stop any faster as
braking occurs at all four wheels. Do not
become overconfident as to road
conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between you and other vehicles for
stopping. Drive slower than usual and
consider using one of the lower gears. In
emergency stopping situations, apply the
brake steadily. Do not pump the brake
pedal. See Hints on Driving With
Anti-Lock Brakes (page 169).
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow
WARNING
Do not spin the wheels at over
35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may fail
and injure a passenger or bystander.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
it may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature,
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
than a minute, damage to the transmission
and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
Parking
WARNINGS
If the parking brake is fully released,
but the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized
dealer.
Always set the parking brake fully
and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition
to the off position and remove the key
whenever you leave your vehicle.
165
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
On some four-wheel drive vehicles, when
the transfer case is in the N (Neutral)
position, the engine and transmission are
disconnected from the rest of the driveline.
Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if
the automatic transmission is in P (Park)
or the manual transmission is in gear. Do
not leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the N (Neutral) position.
Always set the parking brake fully and turn
off the ignition when leaving the vehicle.
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle have been designed and
tested to provide predictable performance
whether loaded or empty. For this reason,
we strongly recommend that you do not
make modifications such as adding or
removing parts (i.e. lift kits or stabilizer
bars) or by using replacement parts not
equivalent to the original factory
equipment.
We recommend that you use caution when
your vehicle has either a high load or device
(i.e. ladder or luggage racks). Any
modifications to your vehicle that raise the
center of gravity may cause your vehicle
to roll over when there is a loss of vehicle
control.
Failure to maintain your vehicle correctly
may void the warranty, increase your repair
cost, reduce vehicle performance and
operational capabilities and adversely
affect you and your passenger's safety. We
recommend you frequently inspect your
vehicle's chassis components when your
vehicle is subject to off road usage.
166
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
This axle provides added traction on
slippery surfaces, particularly when one
wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under
normal conditions, the limited-slip axle
functions like a standard rear axle. The axle
may exhibit a slight noise or vibration
during tight turns with low vehicle speed.
This is normal behavior and indicates the
axle is working.
ELECTRONIC LOCKING
DIFFERENTIAL (If Equipped)
Note: The electronic locking differential is
for off-road use only and is not for use on
dry pavement. Using the electronic locking
differential on dry pavement will result in
increased tire wear, noise and vibration.
The electronic locking differential is a
device housed in the rear axle that allows
both rear wheels to turn at the same
speed. The electronic locking differential
can provide additional traction should your
vehicle become stuck. You can activate
the differential electronically and shift it
on the fly within the differential operating
speed range. The differential is for use in
mud, rocks, sand, or any off-road condition
where you need maximum traction. It is
not for use on dry pavement.
The following conditions will affect the
electronic locking differential:
•On 2WD vehicles and 4WD vehicles in
2H (4X2) or 4H (4X4 High), the ELD
will not engage if the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
•On 2WD vehicles and 4WD vehicles in
2H (4X2) or 4H (4X4 High), the ELD
will automatically disengage at speeds
above 25 mph (40 km/h) and will
automatically reengage at speeds
below 20 mph (32 km/h).
•On 4WD vehicles in 4L (4X4 Low), the
ELD can be engaged at any speed and
will not automatically disengage.
Activating the Electronic Locking
Differential
Note: Do not use electronic locking
differential on dry, hard surfaced roads.
Doing so will produce excessive noise,
vibration and increase tire wear.
Note: If the electronic locking differential
has difficulty disengaging, release the
accelerator pedal and turn the steering
wheel in the opposite direction while rolling.
For vehicles equipped with an
electronic shift 4WD system
E172924
Pull the 4WD control knob toward you.
167
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Rear Axle
For 2WD vehicles and vehicles
equipped with a manual shift 4WD
system
E163191
Turn the control to ON.
E163170
Once the indicator light
illuminates in the information
display, both rear wheel axle
shafts will be locked together providing
added traction.
If the indicator does not come on, or the
indicator turns off while driving, one of the
following has occurred:
•The vehicle speed is too high.
•The left and right rear wheel speed
difference is too high during an
engagement attempt.
•The system has malfunctioned and is
accompanied by CHECK LOCKING
DIFFERENTIAL in the information
display. See your authorized Ford
dealer for assistance.
168
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Rear Axle
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer. If
your vehicle has continuous vibration or
shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
have it checked by an authorized dealer.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning the Alloy
Wheels (page 261).
E144522
See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 84).
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power.
If you experience this condition, apply the
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe
stop. Move the transmission to park (P),
switch the engine off and apply the parking
brake. Inspect the accelerator pedal for
any interference. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.
Brake Assist
Brake assist detects when you brake
rapidly by measuring the rate at which you
press the brake pedal. It provides
maximum braking efficiency as long as you
press the pedal, and can reduce stopping
distances in critical situations.
Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.
This lamp momentarily
illuminates when you turn the
ignition on. If the light does not
illuminate during start up, remains on or
flashes, the system may be disabled. Have
the system checked by an authorized
dealer. If the anti-lock brake system is
disabled, normal braking is still effective.
E144522
If the brake warning lamp
illuminates when you release the
parking brake, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
Note: When the system is operating, the
brake pedal will pulse and may travel
further. Maintain pressure on the brake
pedal. You may also hear a noise from the
system. This is normal.
The anti-lock braking system will not
eliminate the risks when:
•You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
•Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
•You take corners too fast.
•The road surface is poor.
169
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Brakes
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING
Always set the parking brake fully
and make sure the transmission is
placed in park (P). Failure to set the
parking brake and engage park could result
in vehicle roll-away, property damage or
bodily injury. Turn the ignition to the lock
position and remove the key whenever you
leave your vehicle.
Apply the parking brake whenever your
vehicle is parked. Press the pedal
downward to set the parking brake. The
brake warning lamp in the instrument
cluster will illuminate and remains
illuminated until the parking brake is
released.
To release, pull the brake release lever
located at the lower left side of the
instrument panel.
If you are parking your vehicle on a grade
or with a trailer, press and hold the brake
pedal down, then set the parking brake.
There may be a little vehicle movement as
the parking brake sets to hold the vehicle's
weight. This is normal and should be no
reason for concern. If needed, press and
hold the service brake pedal down, then
try reapplying the parking brake. Chock the
wheels if required. If the parking brake
cannot hold the weight of the vehicle, the
parking brake may need to be serviced or
the vehicle may be overloaded.
HILL START ASSIST
WARNINGS
The system does not replace the
parking brake. When you leave your
vehicle, always apply the parking
brake. Failure to leave your vehicle securely
parked may lead to a crash or injury. See
Parking Brake (page 170).
WARNINGS
You must remain in your vehicle
when the system turns on. At all
times, you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening, if required. Failure
to take care may result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, serious personal
injury or death.
The system will turn off if a
malfunction is apparent or if you rev
the engine excessively. Failure to
take care may result in the loss of control
of your vehicle, serious personal injury or
death.
The system makes it easier to pull away
when your vehicle is on a slope without the
need to use the parking brake.
When the system is active, your vehicle
remains stationary on the slope for two to
three seconds after you release the brake
pedal. This allows time to move your foot
from the brake to the accelerator pedal.
The system releases the brakes
automatically once the engine has
developed sufficient drive to prevent your
vehicle from rolling down the slope. This
is an advantage when pulling away on a
slope, for example from a car park ramp,
traffic lights or when reversing uphill into
a parking space.
Note: The system only functions when you
bring your vehicle to a complete standstill
in an uphill gear (for example, drive when
facing uphill or reverse when facing
downhill).
Note: There is no warning light to indicate
the system is either on or off.
Using Hill Start Assist
1. Press the brake pedal to bring your
vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep
the brake pedal pressed.
170
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Brakes
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle
is on a slope, the system activates
automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, your vehicle remains on
the slope without rolling away for
about two to three seconds. This hold
time automatically extends if you are
in the process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
system releases the brakes
automatically.
Note: When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal and press the pedal again when
the system is active, you will experience
significantly reduced brake pedal travel. This
is normal.
Switching the System On and Off
Vehicles with Manual Transmission
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. The system
remembers the last setting when you start
your vehicle.
Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
You cannot turn the system on or off.
When you switch the ignition on, the
system automatically turns on.
171
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Brakes
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels
and, when needed, reduces engine power
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
(Dual rear wheel vehicles only)
In certain situations (for example, stuck in
snow or mud), it may be beneficial to turn
the traction control system off. This allows
the wheels to spin with full engine power.
E162724
Turn the traction control system
off by pressing the stability
control button located on the
instrument panel.
If you cannot turn the system off, see the
MyKey chapter for more information.
Placing your vehicle into four-wheel drive
mode automatically disables traction
control. Traction control operation will
resume when you place your vehicle back
into two-wheel drive mode.
Engine only traction control
(Dual rear wheel vehicles only)
Traction control systemStability control OFF
indicator
Button functions
EnabledNot illuminatedDefault at start-up
DisabledIlluminatedButton pressed momentarily
EnabledNot illuminatedButton pressed again after
deactivation
DisabledIlluminatedTransfer case switched to
4WD*
*Engaging 4WD automatically disables the traction control system.
172
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Traction Control
System Indicator Lights and
Messages
WARNING
If a failure has been detected within
the AdvanceTrac system, the
stability control light will illuminate
steadily. Verify that the traction control
system was not manually disabled using
the stability control button. If the stability
control light still illuminates steadily, have
the system serviced by an authorized
dealer immediately. Operating your vehicle
with traction control disabled could lead
to an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death.
E138639
The stability control light
temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and flashes
when a driving condition activates the
stability system.
The stability control off light
temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and stays on
when you turn the traction control system
off, or if a problem occurs in the stability
system.
173
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Vehicle modifications involving
braking system, aftermarket roof
racks, suspension, steering system,
tire construction and wheel and tire size
may change the handling characteristics
of your vehicle and may adversely affect
the performance of the AdvanceTrac
system. In addition, installing any stereo
loudspeakers may interfere with and
adversely affect the AdvanceTrac system.
Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker
as far as possible from the front center
console, the tunnel, and the front seats in
order to minimize the risk of interfering with
the AdvanceTrac sensors. Reducing the
effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac system
could lead to an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
Remember that even advanced
technology cannot defy the laws of
physics. It’s always possible to lose
control of a vehicle due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause
you to lose control of your vehicle
increasing the risk of personal injury or
property damage. Activation of the
AdvanceTrac system is an indication that
at least some of the tires have exceeded
their ability to grip the road; this could
reduce the operator’s ability to control the
vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death. If your AdvanceTrac
system activates, SLOW DOWN.
The AdvanceTrac with Roll Stability
Control system helps you keep control of
your vehicle when on a slippery surface.
The electronic stability control portion of
the system helps avoid skids and lateral
slides and roll stability control helps avoid
a vehicle rollover. The traction control
system helps avoid drive wheel spin and
loss of traction. See Using Traction
Control (page 172).
E72903
AA
A
B
B
B
B
Vehicle without AdvanceTrac
with RSC skidding off its
intended route.
A
Vehicle with AdvanceTrac with
RSC maintaining control on a
slippery surface.
B
USING STABILITY CONTROL
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability
Control™ (RSC®)
(Single rear wheel vehicles only)
174
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Stability Control
The system automatically activates when
you start your engine. The electronic
stability control and roll stability control
portions of the system can be turned off
below 35 mph (56 km/h) and are disabled
when the transmission is in position R. See
Using Traction Control (page 172).
You can turn off the traction
control portion of the system
independently. Press the stability
control button located on the instrument
panel.
AdvanceTrac with RSC Features
(Single rear wheels only)
Traction
control system
Electronic
stability
control
Roll stability
control
Stability
control light
Button func-
tions
EnabledEnabledEnabledIlluminated
during bulb
check
Default at start-
up
Disabled
Enabled1
EnabledIlluminated
solid
Button pressed
momentarily
DisabledDisabledDisabledFlashes then
illuminated
solid2
Button pressed
and held for
more than 5
seconds at
vehicle speed
under 35 mph
(56 km/h)
Disabled
Enabled 1
EnabledIlluminated
solid
Vehicle speed
exceeds 35 mph
(56 km/h) after
button is
pressed and
held for more
than 5 seconds
175
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Stability Control
AdvanceTrac with RSC Features
(Single rear wheels only)
EnabledEnabledEnabledNot illuminatedButton pressed
again after
deactivation
DisabledDisabledDisabledIlluminatedTransfer case
switched to
4WD Low 3
1Electronic stability control has reduced sensitivity compared to fully active system.
2Lamp light starts blinking for four seconds after entering the press and hold state.
3Engaging 4WD Low locked automatically disables roll stability control, electronic stability
control and the traction control system.
176
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Stability Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Hill descent control cannot control
descent in all surface conditions and
circumstances, such as ice or
extremely steep grades. Hill descent
control is a driver assist system and cannot
substitute for good judgment by the driver.
Failure to do so may result in loss of vehicle
control, crash or serious injury.
Hill descent control does not provide
hill hold at zero miles per hour (0
kilometers per hour). When stopped,
the parking brake must be applied or the
vehicle must be placed in P (Park) or it
may roll away.
Hill descent control allows the driver to set
and maintain vehicle speed while
descending steep grades in various surface
conditions.
Hill descent control can maintain vehicle
speeds on downhill grades between 2 mph
(3 km/h) and 12 mph (20 km/h). Above 20
mph (32 km/h), the system remains
armed, but descent speed cannot be set
or maintained.
Hill descent control requires a cooling
down interval after a period of sustained
use. The amount of time that the feature
can remain active before cooling varies
with conditions. The system will provide a
warning in the message center and a chime
will sound when the system is about to
disengage for cooling. At this time,
manually apply the brakes as needed to
maintain descent speed.
USING HILL DESCENT
CONTROL
E163957
Press and release the hill
descent button located on the
instrument panel. A light in the
cluster will illuminate and a chime will
sound when this feature is activated.
To increase descent speed, press the
accelerator pedal until the desired speed
is reached. To decrease descent speed,
press the brake pedal until the desired
speed is reached.
Whether accelerating or decelerating, once
the desired descent speed is reached,
remove your feet from the pedals and the
chosen vehicle speed will be maintained.
Note: Noise from the ABS pump motor may
be observed during hill descent control
operation. This is a normal characteristic of
the ABS and should be no reason for
concern.
Hill descent modes
•At speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h):
When the Hill Descent Control switch
is pressed and Hill Descent Control is
active, the Hill Descent Control telltale
will flash.
•At speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h):
When the Hill Descent Control switch
is pressed and conditions are not
correct for hill descent activation, the
Hill Descent Control system will be
enabled, the Hill Descent Control
telltale will be solid and a message will
display in the information display.
•At speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h):
When the Hill Descent Control switch
is pressed, the Hill Descent Control
system will be enabled, the telltale in
the cluster will not be illuminated and
a message will be displayed in the
information display.
177
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Terrain Response (If Equipped)
Refer to the Information Displays for
additional Hill Descent Control messages.
See Information Messages (page 100).
178
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Terrain Response (If Equipped)
PARKING AID (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention.
If your vehicles has a non-Ford
approved trailer tow module the
system may not correctly detect
objects.
The sensors may not detect objects
in heavy rain or other conditions that
cause disruptive reflections.
The sensors may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic
waves.
The system does not detect objects
that are moving away from your
vehicle. They will only be detected
shortly after they start to move toward
your vehicle.
Take particular care when reversing
with a tow ball arm or a rear fitted
accessory. For example, a bicycle
carrier. The rear parking aid will only
indicate the approximate distance from
the rear bumper to an object.
Note: If you use a high pressure spray to
wash your vehicle, only spray the sensors
briefly from a distance not less than 8 in
(20 cm).
Note: If your vehicle has a tow ball arm, the
system is turned off automatically when
trailer lamps (or lighting boards) are
connected to the 13-pin socket through a
Ford approved trailer tow module.
Note: Keep the sensors free from dirt, ice
or snow. Do not clean with sharp objects.
Note: The system may emit false alerts if
it detects a signal using the same frequency
as the sensors or if your vehicle is fully
loaded.
Note: The outer sensors may detect the
side walls of a garage. If the distance
between the outer sensors and the side wall
remains constant for three seconds, the
alert will turn off. As you continue the inner
sensors will detect objects directly behind
your vehicle.
Rear Parking Aid
The rear sensors are only active when the
transmission is in reverse (R). As your
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
rate of the audible warning increases.
When the obstacle is less than 10 in
(25 cm) away, the warning sounds
continuously. If the system detects a
stationary or receding object farther than
10 in (25 cm) from the corners of the
bumper, the tone sounds for only three
seconds. Once the system detects an
object approaching, the warning sounds
again.
E130178
Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from
the rear bumper. There may be decreased
coverage area at the outer corners of the
bumper.
179
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
The system detects certain objects while
the transmission is in reverse (R):
•Your vehicle is moving toward a
stationary object at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
•Your vehicle is not moving, but a
moving object is approaching the rear
of your vehicle at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
•Your vehicle is moving at a speed of
less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving
object is approaching the rear of your
vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
REAR VIEW CAMERA (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
The rear view camera system is a
reverse aid supplement device that
still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior
mirrors for maximum coverage.
Objects that are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the
bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the
camera system.
Back up as slow as possible since
higher speeds might limit your
reaction time to stop the vehicle.
Use caution when using the rear
video camera and the tailgate is ajar.
If the tailgate is ajar, the camera will
be out of position and the video image may
be incorrect. All guidelines will be removed
when the tailgate is ajar.
Use caution when turning camera
features on or off while in reverse
(R). Make sure your vehicle is not
moving.
WARNINGS
When manual zoom is enabled
(Level 1, Level 2 or Level 3), the full
area behind your vehicle will not be
shown. Be aware of your surroundings
when using the manual zoom feature.
The rear view camera system provides a
video image of the area behind your
vehicle.
During operation, lines appear in the
display which represent your vehicle’s path
and proximity to objects behind your
vehicle.
E163192
The camera is located on the tailgate.
Using the Rear View Camera
System
The rear view camera system displays
what is behind your vehicle when you place
the transmission in reverse (R).
180
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
The system uses three types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
•Active guidelines: Show the intended
path of your vehicle when reversing.
•Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another
object behind you.
•Centerline: Helps align the center of
your vehicle with an object (for
example, a trailer).
Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R)
and the luggage compartment is ajar, no
rear view camera features are displayed.
Note: If the image does not turn off while
the transmission is not in reverse (R) and
your driving over a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h),
have the system inspected by an authorized
dealer.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what is being towed behind your vehicle.
This might not provide adequate coverage
as it usually provides in normal operation
and some objects might not be seen. In
some vehicles, the guidelines may disappear
once the trailer tow connector is engaged.
The camera may not operate correctly
under the following conditions:
•Nighttime or dark areas if the reverse
lamps are not operating.
•Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a
soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
cleaner.
•The camera is misaligned due to
damage to the rear of your vehicle.
To access any of the rear view camera
system settings, make the following
selections in the touch screen when the
transmission is not in reverse (R):
•Menu > Vehicle > Rear View Camera
After changing a system setting, the touch
screen shows a preview of the selected
features.
Guidelines and the Centerline
Note: Active guidelines and fixed guidelines
are only available when the transmission is
in reverse (R).
Note: The centerline is only available if
Active or Fixed guidelines are on.
A B C D
F
E
E142436
Active guidelinesA
CenterlineB
Fixed guideline: Green zoneC
Fixed guideline: Yellow zoneD
Fixed guideline: Red zoneE
Rear bumperF
181
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
Fixed guidelines are always shown in the
display, but the active guidelines only
display when the steering wheel is turned.
To use active guidelines, turn the steering
wheel to point the guidelines toward an
intended path. If the steering wheel
position is changed while reversing, the
vehicle might deviate from the original
intended path.
The active guidelines fade in and out
depending on the steering wheel position.
The active guidelines are not shown when
the steering wheel position is straight.
Always use caution while reversing.
Objects in the red zone are closest to your
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects are getting closer to
your vehicle as they move from the green
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of your vehicle.
Enhanced Park Aids
Note: Enhanced park aids is only available
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: The reverse sensing system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h)
and may not detect certain angular or
moving objects.
The system uses red, yellow and green
highlights which appear on top of the video
image when an object is detected by the
reverse sensing system. The alert highlights
the closest object detected. The reverse
sensing alert can be disabled and if visual
park aid alert is enabled, highlighted areas
are still displayed.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
Manual Zoom
WARNING
When manual zoom is on, the full
area behind your vehicle is not
shown. Be aware of your
surroundings when using the manual zoom
feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: When manual zoom is enabled, only
the centerline is shown.
This feature allows you to get a closer view
of an object behind your vehicle (for
example, a trailer). The zoomed image
keeps the bumper in the image to provide
a reference. The zoom is only active while
the transmission is in reverse (R). When
the transmission is shifted out of reverse
(R), the feature automatically turns off
and must be reset when it is used again.
Selectable settings for this feature is OFF,
Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3. The selected
level will appear between the buttons (for
example, Level 1) The default setting for
the manual zoom is OFF.
Rear Camera Delay
When shifting the transmission out of
reverse (R) and into any gear other than
park (P), the camera image remains in the
display until your vehicle speed reaches
5 mph (8 km/h). This occurs when the rear
camera delay feature is on or until a radio
button is selected.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF. The default setting for the rear
camera delay is ON.
182
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. You can use cruise
control when your vehicle speed is greater
than 20 mph (30 km/h).
USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNINGS
Do not use cruise control in heavy
traffic, on winding roads or when the
road surface is slippery. This could
result in loss of vehicle control, serious
injury or death.
When you are going downhill, your
vehicle speed may increase above
the set speed. The system will not
apply the brakes. Change down a gear to
assist the system in maintaining the set
speed. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control, serious injury or death.
Note: Cruise control will disengage if the
vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph
(16 km/h) below your set speed while
driving uphill.
E163053
The cruise controls are located on the
steering wheel.
Switching Cruise Control On
Press and release ON.
E71340
The indicator will appear in the
instrument cluster.
Setting a Speed
1. Accelerate to the desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
The indicator will change colors in the
instrument cluster.
Changing the Set Speed
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed will not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, you will return to the speed that you
previously set.
•Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed.
•Press and release SET+ or SET-. The
set speed will change in approximately
1 mph (2 km/h) increments.
•Press the accelerator or brake pedal
until you reach the desired speed. Press
and release SET+.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal. You
will not erase the set speed.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release RSM.
Switching Cruise Control Off
Note: You will erase the set speed if you
switch the system off.
Press and release OFF or switch the
ignition off.
183
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
STEERING
To help prevent damage to the power
steering system:
•Never hold the steering wheel at its
furthest turning points (until it stops)
for more than three to five seconds
when the engine is running.
•Do not operate the vehicle with a low
power steering pump fluid level (below
the MIN mark on the reservoir).
•Some noise is normal during operation.
If excessive, check for low power
steering pump fluid level before
seeking service by your dealer.
•Heavy or uneven efforts may be caused
by low power steering fluid. Check for
low power steering pump fluid level
before seeking service by your dealer.
•Do not fill the power steering pump
reservoir above the MAX mark on the
reservoir, as this may result in leaks
from the reservoir.
If the power steering system breaks down
(or if the engine is turned off), you can
steer the vehicle manually, but it takes
more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
•an improperly inflated tire
•uneven tire wear
•loose or worn suspension components
•loose or worn steering components
•improper vehicle alignment
If any steering components are serviced or
replaced, install new fasteners (many are
coated with thread adhesive or have
prevailing torque features which may not
be re-used). Never re-use a bolt or nut.
Torque fasteners to specifications.
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds
may also make the steering seem to
wander or pull.
184
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading - with and
without a Trailer
This section will guide you in the
proper loading of your vehicle,
trailer or both, to keep your loaded
vehicle weight within its design
rating capability, with or without
a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle will provide maximum
return of vehicle design
performance. Before loading your
vehicle, familiarize yourself with
the following terms for
determining your vehicle’s weight
ratings, with or without a trailer,
from the vehicle’s Tire Label or
Safety Compliance Certification
Label:
Base Curb Weight - is the weight
of the vehicle including a full tank
of fuel and all standard
equipment. It does not include
passengers, cargo, or optional
equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight - is the
weight of your new vehicle when
you picked it up from your
authorized dealer plus any
aftermarket equipment.
E143816
PAYLOAD
Payload - is the combined weight
of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum
payload for your vehicle can be
found on the Tire Label on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver
door (vehicles exported outside
the US and Canada may not have
a Tire Label). Look for “THE
COMBINED WEIGHT OF
OCCUPANTS AND CARGO
SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX
kg OR XXX lb.” for maximum
payload. The payload listed on the
Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by
the assembly plant. If you install
any aftermarket or
authorized-dealer installed
equipment on the vehicle, you
must subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed
on the Tire Label in order to
determine the new payload.
185
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
WARNING
The appropriate loading
capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume
capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity
(how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have
reached the maximum payload of
your vehicle, do not add more
cargo, even if there is space
available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
Example only:
E210944
E210945
186
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
Cargo Weight - includes all
weight added to the Base Curb
Weight, including cargo and
optional equipment. When towing,
trailer tongue load or king pin
weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) - is
the total weight placed on each
axle (front and rear) including
vehicle curb weight and all
payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight that can be
carried by a single axle (front or
rear). These numbers are shown
on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label shall
be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver seating
position. The total load on each
axle must never exceed its
Gross Axle Weight Rating.
Note: For trailer towing
information refer to the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) -
is the Vehicle Curb Weight, plus
cargo, plus passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight of the fully
loaded vehicle (including all
options, equipment, passengers
and cargo). It is shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The label shall be affixed
to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position.
The Gross Vehicle Weight must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating.
187
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
Example only:
E198828
WARNING
Exceeding the Safety
Compliance Certification
Label vehicle weight rating limits
could result in substandard
vehicle handling or performance,
engine, transmission and/or
structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of
control and personal injury.
188
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
GCW (Gross Combined Weight)
- is the Gross Vehicle Weight plus
the weight of the fully loaded
trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined
Weight Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight of the vehicle
and the loaded trailer, including
all cargo and passengers, that the
vehicle can handle without risking
damage. (Important: The towing
vehicle’s braking system is rated
for operation at Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, not at Gross
Combined Weight Rating.)
Separate functional brakes should
be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the
Gross Combined Weight of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating of the towing vehicle. The
Gross Combined Weight must
never exceed the Gross
Combined Weight Rating.
Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight - is the highest possible
weight of a fully loaded trailer the
vehicle can tow. It assumes a
vehicle with mandatory options,
driver and front passenger weight
(150 pounds [68 kilograms]
each), no cargo weight (internal
or external) and a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or
king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth
wheel trailer). Consult an
authorized dealer (or the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer) for more
detailed information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel
King Pin Weight - refers to the
amount of the weight that a trailer
pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5000 pound
(2268 kilogram) conventional
trailer, multiply 5000 by 0.10 and
0.15 to obtain a proper tongue
load range of 500 to 750 pounds
(227 to 340 kilograms). For an
11500 pound (5216 kilogram) fifth
wheel trailer, multiply by 0.15 and
0.25 to obtain a proper king pin
load range of 1725 to 2875 pounds
(782 to 1304 kilograms).
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or
the GAWR specified on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label.
Do not use replacement tires
with lower load carrying
capacities than the original tires
because they may lower the
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limitations. Replacement tires
with a higher limit than the original
tires do not increase the GVWR
and GAWR limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight
rating limitation could result
in serious damage to the vehicle
and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the
correct load limit:
189
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lb. and there will
be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.).
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few
examples on how to calculate the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity:
*Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You decide
to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, four of your
friends and all the golf bags? You
and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and
the golf bags weigh approximately
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.
The calculation would be: 1400 -
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100
- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends
and your golf bags. In metric units,
the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) -
(5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 -
67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
*Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You and
one of your friends decide to pick
up cement from the local home
improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for
the past two years. Measuring the
inside of the vehicle with the rear
seat folded down, you have room
for twelve 100-pound
(45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do
you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),
the calculation would be: 1400 -
(2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
- 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do
not have enough cargo capacity
to carry that much weight. In
metric units, the calculation would
190
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.
You will need to reduce the load
weight by at least 240 pounds
(104 kilograms). If you remove
three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load
calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x
220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -
900 = 60 pounds. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.
The above calculations also
assume that the loads are
positioned in your vehicle in a
manner that does not overload
the Front or the Rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating specified for your
vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label shall
be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver seating
position.
Special Loading Instructions
for Owners of Pick-up Trucks
and Utility-type Vehicles
WARNING
Loaded vehicles may handle
differently than unloaded
vehicles. Extra precautions, such
as slower speeds and increased
stopping distance, should be
taken when driving a heavily
loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo
and people than most passenger
cars. Depending upon the type
and placement of the load,
hauling cargo and people may
raise the center of gravity of the
vehicle.
191
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or
the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Towing trailers beyond the
maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the
limit of the vehicle and could
result in engine damage,
transmission damage, structural
damage, loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Your vehicle may have electrical
items, such as fuses or relays,
related to towing. See the Fuses
chapter.
Your vehicle's load capacity
designation is by weight, not by
volume, so you cannot necessarily
use all available space when
loading a vehicle or trailer.
Towing a trailer places an extra
load on your vehicle's engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires
and suspension. Inspect these
components periodically during,
and after, any towing operation.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer
movement affects your vehicle
when driving:
•Load the heaviest items closest
to the trailer floor.
•Load the heaviest items
centered between the left and
right side trailer tires.
•Load the heaviest items above
the trailer axles or just slightly
forward toward the trailer
tongue. Do not allow the final
trailer tongue weight to go
above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
•Select a tow bar with the
correct rise or drop. When both
the loaded vehicle and trailer
are connected, the trailer frame
should be level, or slightly
angled down toward your
vehicle, when viewed from the
side.
When driving with a trailer or
payload, a slight takeoff vibration
or shudder may be present due to
the increased payload weight.
Additional information regarding
proper trailer loading and setting
your vehicle up for towing is
located in another chapter of this
manual. See Load Limit (page
185).
You can also find information in
the RV & Trailer Towing Guide
available at your authorized
dealer, or online.
192
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/Website
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Turning off trailer sway control
increases the risk of loss of vehicle
control, serious injury or death. Ford
does not recommend disabling this feature
except in situations where speed reduction
may be detrimental (such as hill climbing),
the driver has significant trailer towing
experience, and can control trailer sway
and maintain safe operation.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
sway, but reduces it once it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if vehicle speed is too
high, the system may activate multiple
times, gradually reducing vehicle speed.
This feature applies your vehicle brakes at
individual wheels and, if necessary, reduces
engine power. If the trailer begins to sway,
the stability control light flashes and the
message TRAILER SWAY REDUCE
SPEED appears in the information display.
The first thing to do is slow your vehicle
down, then pull safely to the side of the
road and check for proper tongue load and
trailer load distribution. See Load
Carrying (page 185).
RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS
Note: Make sure to take into
consideration trailer frontal area.
Do not exceed 60 feet2 (5.6
meters2) trailer frontal area for
conventional trailers. Do not
exceed 75 feet2 (6.9 meters2) trailer
frontal area for 5th wheel and
gooseneck trailers.
Note: Exceeding this limitation
may significantly reduce the
performance of your towing
vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a
low aerodynamic drag and rounded
front design helps optimize
performance and fuel economy.
Note: For high altitude operation,
reduce the gross combined weight
by 2% per 1000 feet (300 meters)
starting at the 1000 foot (300
meter) elevation point.
Note: Certain states require
electric trailer brakes for trailers
over a specified weight. Be sure to
check state regulations for this
specified weight. The maximum
trailer weights listed may be limited
to this specified weight, as your
vehicle's electrical system may not
include the wiring connector
needed to use electric trailer
brakes.
193
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Your vehicle may tow a trailer
provided the maximum trailer
weight is less than or equal to the
maximum trailer weight listed for
your vehicle configuration on the
following chart.
Pickup and box delete
Maximum
GCWR
Rear axle ratioEngineVehicle
19000 lb (8618
kg)
3.73
6.2L gas
F-250 22000 lb (9979
kg)
4.30
23500 lb (10659
kg)
3.31, 3.556.7L diesel
19000 lb (8618
kg)
3.73
6.2L gas
F-350 single
rear wheel 22000 lb (9979
kg)
4.30
23500 lb (10659
kg)
3.31, 3.556.7L diesel
19500 lb (8845
kg)
3.73
6.2L gas
F-350 dual rear
wheel
22500 lb (10206
kg)
4.30
31900 lb (14470
kg)
3.73
6.7L diesel 35000 lb (15875
kg)*
4.30
40400 lb
(18325 kg)
4.30
6.7L dieselF-450
* Requires optional GCWR Package.
194
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Chassis cab
Maximum
GCWR
Rear axle ratioEngineVehicle
19000 lb (8618
kg)
3.73
6.2L gas
F-350 single
rear wheel 22000 lb (9979
kg)
4.30
23500 lb (10659
kg)
3.73
6.7L diesel
19500 lb (8845
kg)
3.73
6.2L gas
F-350 dual rear
wheel 22500 lb (10206
kg)
4.30
24500 lb (11113
kg)
3.73, 4.10
6.7L diesel
26000 lb (11793
kg)
4.886.8L gas
F-450 26000 lb (11793
kg)
4.10
6.7L diesel 30000 lb
(13608 kg)*
4.30
26000 lb (11793
kg)
4.88
6.8L gas
F-550 (17500/
18000 lb
GVWR)
26000 lb (11793
kg)
4.10
6.7L diesel 35000 lb (15875
kg)*
4.30
26000 lb (11793
kg)
4.88
6.8L gas
F-550 (19000/
19500 lb
GVWR)
195
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Chassis cab
Maximum
GCWR
Rear axle ratioEngineVehicle
26000 lb (11793
kg)
4.886.7L diesel 35000 lb (15875
kg)*
* Requires optional GCWR Package.
Calculating the Maximum
Loaded Trailer Weight for Your
Vehicle
1. Start with the gross combined
weight rating for your vehicle
model and axle ratio. See the
previous chart.
2. Subtract all of the following
that apply to your vehicle:
•Vehicle curb weight
•Hitch hardware weight, such as
a draw bar, ball, locks or weight
distributing hardware
•Driver weight
•Passenger(s) weight
•Payload, cargo and luggage
weight
•Aftermarket equipment weight.
This equals the maximum loaded
trailer weight for this combination.
Note: The trailer tongue load is
considered part of the payload for
your vehicle. Reduce the total
payload by the final trailer tongue
weight.
Note: Consult an authorized dealer
to determine the maximum trailer
weight allowed for your vehicle if
you are not sure.
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
•Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1000 miles (1600
kilometers).
•Consult your local motor vehicle laws
for towing a trailer.
•See the instructions included with
towing accessories for the proper
installation and adjustment
specifications.
•Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See your scheduled
maintenance information.
•If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives
you.
See Load limits in the Load Carrying
chapter for load specification terms found
on the tire label and Safety Compliance
label and instructions on calculating your
vehicle's load.
196
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Remember to account for the trailer
tongue weight as part of your vehicle load
when calculating the total vehicle weight.
Trailer Towing Connector
E163167
When attaching the trailer wiring connector
to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting
connector that works with the vehicle and
trailer functions. Some seven-position
connectors may have the SAE J2863 logo,
which confirms that it is the proper wiring
connector and works correctly with your
vehicle.
FunctionColor
Left turn signal and stop lampYellow
Ground (-)White
Electric brakesBlue
Right turn signal and stop
lamp
Green
Battery (+)Orange
Running lightsBrown
Reverse lightsGrey
Dynamic Hitching Using the Rear
View Camera System
Note: Active guidelines and fixed guidelines
are only available when the transmission is
in reverse (R).
Use the centerline (B) guideline to assist
you in setting your steering wheel properly
to help align the trailer hitch and tongue.
A B C D
F
E
E142436
Active guidelinesA
CenterlineB
Fixed guideline: Green zoneC
Fixed guideline: Yellow zoneD
Fixed guideline: Red zoneE
Rear bumperF
197
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Fixed guidelines are always shown in the
display, but the active guidelines only
display when the steering wheel is turned.
To use active guidelines, turn the steering
wheel to point the guidelines toward an
intended path. If the steering wheel
position is changed while reversing, your
vehicle might deviate from the original
intended path.
The active guidelines fade in and out
depending on the steering wheel position.
The active guidelines are not shown when
the steering wheel position is straight.
Always use caution while reversing.
Objects in the red zone are closest to your
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects are getting closer to
your vehicle as they move from the green
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of your vehicle.
Refer to the Rear View Camera section for
additional information. See Rear View
Camera (page 180).
Hitches
WARNING
On pick-up trucks, the trailer hitch
provided on this vehicle enhances
crash protection for the fuel system.
Do not remove!
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle. You
must distribute the load in your trailer so
that 10-15% for conventional towing or
15-25% for fifth wheel towing of the total
weight of the trailer is on the tongue.
Weight-distributing Hitches
WARNING
Do not adjust a weight-distributing
hitch to any position where the rear
bumper of the vehicle is higher than
it was before attaching the trailer. Doing
so will defeat the function of the
weight-distributing hitch, which may cause
unpredictable handling, and could result
in serious personal injury.
When hooking-up a trailer using a
weight-distributing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
1. Park the loaded vehicle, without the
trailer, on a level surface.
2. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender. This is H1.
3. Attach the loaded trailer to your vehicle
without the weight-distributing bars
connected.
4. Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender a second time. This is H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the
weight-distributing bars so that the
height of your vehicle's front wheel
opening on the fender is approximately
halfway between H1 and H2.
6. Check that the trailer is level or slightly
nose down toward your vehicle. If not,
adjust the ball height accordingly and
repeat Steps 2-6.
Once the trailer is level or slightly nose
down toward the vehicle:
•Lock the bar tension adjuster in place.
•Check that the trailer tongue securely
attaches and locks onto the hitch.
•Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer
brake controls as required by law or the
trailer manufacturer.
198
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Fifth-wheel Trailer Hitch (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
The mounting pads in the bed are
specifically designed for certain
fifth-wheel trailer hitches and
gooseneck ball hitches. Do not use these
mounting pads for other purposes. Doing
so could result in vehicle structural
damage, loss of vehicle control, and
personal injury. Contact an authorized
dealer to purchase gooseneck and
fifth-wheel hitches that are compatible
with your vehicle.
Towing trailers beyond the maximum
limit of the towing system could
result in vehicle structural damage,
loss of vehicle control and personal injury.
The hitch rating listed on the trailer
hitch label is the maximum possible
trailer rating. To find the maximum
trailer weight allowed for your specific
vehicle, consult an authorized dealer or the
RV & Trailer Towing Guide provided by an
authorized dealer.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
fifth-wheel prep package. This package
enables your vehicle to accept certain
fifth-wheel trailer hitches and gooseneck
ball hitches. The fifth-wheel trailer hitch
attaches to the four mounting pads in the
pick-up bed. An optional 7-pin trailer wiring
connector may be in the bed as well. The
gooseneck ball hitch is a separate
mounting pad from the fifth-wheel hitch,
located in the center of the bed.
Shorter pick-up boxes, such as the 6½-foot
box on the F-250 and F-350, provide less
clearance between the cab and the
fifth-wheel and gooseneck trailer
compared to longer box pick-ups, such as
an 8-foot box on the F-250 or F-350. When
selecting a trailer and tow vehicle, it is
critical to check that this combination
provides clearance between the front of
the trailer and tow vehicle for turns up to
90 degrees. Failure to follow this
recommendation could result in the trailer
contacting the cab of the tow vehicle
during tight turns that are typical during
low-speed parking and turning maneuvers.
This contact could result in damage to the
trailer and tow vehicle.
Safety Chains
Note: Do not attach safety chains to the
bumper.
Always connect the safety chains to the
frame or hook retainers of your vehicle
hitch.
To connect the safety chains, cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning tight corners. Do
not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
WARNING
Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic
brake system directly to your
vehicle's brake system. Your vehicle
may not have enough braking power and
your chances of having a collision greatly
increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you
install them properly and adjust them to
the manufacturer's specifications. The
trailer brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
Separate functioning brake systems
are required for safe control of towed
vehicles and trailers weighing more
than 1500 pounds (680 kilograms)
when loaded.
199
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller
(If Equipped)
WARNING
The Ford trailer brake controller has
been verified to be compatible with
trailers having electric-actuated
drum brakes (one to four axles) and some
electric-over-hydraulic brakes. It will not
activate hydraulic surge-style trailer
brakes. It is the responsibility of the
customer to ensure that the trailer brakes
are adjusted appropriately, functioning
normally and all electric connections are
properly made. Failure to do so may result
in loss of vehicle control, crash or serious
injury.
B
A
E163166
When used properly, the trailer brake
controller assists in smooth and effective
trailer braking by powering the trailer’s
electric or electric-over-hydraulic brakes
with a proportional output based on the
towing vehicle’s brake pressure.
You can adjust the amount of initial trailer
brake output by selecting one of three
settings through the message center.
Ford has tested the trailer brake controller
to be compatible with several major
brands of electric-over-hydraulic trailer
brakes. Contact an authorized dealer for
information on which brands you can use.
The controller user interface consists of
the following:
A: + and - (Gain adjustment buttons):
Pressing these buttons adjusts the
controller's power output to the trailer
brakes in 0.5 increments. You can increase
the gain setting to 10.0 (maximum trailer
braking) or decrease it to 0 (no trailer
braking). Pressing and holding a button
raises or lowers the setting continuously.
The gain setting displays in the message
center as follows: TBC GAIN = XX.X.
B: Manual control lever: Slide the control
lever to the left to switch on the trailer's
electric brakes independent of the tow
vehicle's. See the following Procedure for
adjusting gain section for instructions on
proper use of this feature. If you use the
manual control while the brake is also
applied, the greater of the two inputs
determines the power sent to the trailer
brakes.
•Stop lamps: Using the manual control
lever lights both the trailer brake lamps
and your vehicle brake lamps.
Trailer brake control messages appear in
the information display as follows:
•TBC GAIN = XX.X NO TRAILER:
Shows the current gain setting.
•TBC GAIN = XX.X OUTPUT=/ / / /
/ /: Displays when braking. The bars
indicate the amount of power going to
the trailer brakes.
•TRAILER CONNECTED: Displays
when the system senses a correct
trailer wiring connection.
•TRAILER DISCONNECTED: Displays
when the system senses a trailer
disconnection.
200
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Trailer Brake Effort Setting
The trailer brake controller allows the user
to customize how aggressively the trailer
brakes engage. The default value is "Low"
and is the recommended setting for most
trailers. If your trailer's brakes require more
initial voltage, or if you prefer more
aggressive trailer braking, then select either
the "Medium" or the "High" setting. See
Information Displays (page 89).
Procedure for Adjusting Gain
Note: Only perform this procedure in a
traffic-free environment at speeds of
approximately 20-25 mph (30-40 km/h).
The gain setting adjusts the trailer brake
controller for the specific towing condition.
You should change the setting as towing
conditions change. Changes to towing
conditions include trailer load, vehicle load,
road conditions and weather.
The gain should be set to provide the
maximum trailer braking assistance while
making sure the trailer wheels do not lock
when using the brakes. Locked trailer
wheels may lead to trailer instability.
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good
working condition, functioning normally
and properly adjusted. See your trailer
dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the
electrical connections according to the
trailer manufacturer's instructions.
3. When you plug in a trailer with electric
or electric-over-hydraulic brakes,
TRAILER CONNECTED appears in
the information display.
4. Use the gain adjustment (+ and -)
buttons to increase or decrease the
gain setting to the desired starting
point. A gain setting of 6.0 is a good
starting point for heavier loads.
5. In a traffic-free environment, tow the
trailer on a dry, level surface at a speed
of 20-25 mph (30-40 km/h) and
squeeze the manual control lever
completely.
6. If the trailer wheels lock up, indicated
by squealing tires, reduce the gain
setting. If the trailer wheels turn freely,
increase the gain setting. Repeat Steps
5 and 6 until the gain setting is at a
point just below trailer wheel lock-up.
If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheel
lock-up may not be attainable even
with the maximum gain setting of 10.
Information Display Warning Messages
Note: An authorized dealer can diagnose
the trailer brake controller to determine
exactly which trailer fault has occurred.
However, your Ford warranty does not cover
this diagnosis if the fault is with the trailer.
TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT
Displays in response to faults sensed by
the trailer brake controller, accompanied
by a single tone. If this message appears,
contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible for diagnosis and repair. The
controller may still function, but with
degraded performance.
WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER
Displays when there is a short circuit on
the electric brake output wire.
If this message displays, with no trailer
connected, the problem is with your vehicle
wiring or trailer brake controller. Contact
an authorized dealer.
201
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
If the message only displays with a trailer
connected, the problem is with the trailer
wiring. Consult your trailer dealer for
assistance. This can be a short to ground
(such as a chaffed wire), short to voltage
(such as a pulled pin on trailer emergency
breakaway battery) or the trailer brakes
may be drawing too much current.
Points to Remember
Note: Do not attempt removal of the trailer
brake controller without consulting the
Workshop Manual. Damage to the unit may
result.
•Adjust gain setting before using the
trailer brake controller.
•Adjust gain setting, using the procedure
above, whenever road, weather, trailer
or vehicle loading conditions change
from when the gain was initially set.
•Only use the manual control lever for
proper adjustment of the gain during
trailer setup. Misuse, such as
application during trailer sway, could
cause instability of trailer or tow
vehicle.
•Avoid towing in adverse weather
conditions. The trailer brake controller
does not provide anti-lock control of
the trailer wheels. Trailer wheels can
lock up on slippery surfaces, resulting
in reduced stability of trailer and tow
vehicle.
•The trailer brake controller is equipped
with a feature that reduces output at
vehicle speeds below 11 mph (18 km/h)
so trailer and vehicle braking is not jerky
or harsh. This feature is only active
when applying the brakes using your
vehicle's brake pedal, not the
controller.
•The controller interacts with the brake
control system and powertrain control
system of your vehicle to provide the
best performance on different road
conditions.
•Your vehicle's brake system and the
trailer brake system work
independently of each other. Changing
the gain setting on the controller does
not affect the operation of your
vehicle's brakes.
•When you switch the engine off, the
controller output is disabled and the
display and module shut down.
Trailer Lamps
WARNING
Never connect any trailer lamp wiring
to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; this
may damage the electrical system
resulting in fire. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible for assistance
in proper trailer tow wiring installation.
Additional electrical equipment may be
required.
Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
lights, turn signals and hazard lights are
working.
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up
to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip.
When turning, make wider turns so the
trailer wheels clear curbs and other
obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
•Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113
km/h) during the first 500 miles (800
kilometers).
•Do not make full-throttle starts.
202
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
•Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly
after you have traveled 50 miles (80
kilometers).
•When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
gearshift in position P to aid engine and
transmission cooling and to help A/C
performance.
•Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed
control may turn off automatically
when you are towing on long, steep
grades.
•Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
•If your transmission is equipped with a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.
•If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac with RSC, this system
may turn on during typical cornering
maneuvers with a heavily loaded trailer.
This is normal. Turning the corner at a
slower speed while towing may reduce
this tendency.
•If you are towing a trailer frequently in
hot weather, hilly conditions, at the
gross combined weight rating (or any
combination of these factors), consider
refilling your rear axle with synthetic
gear lubricant (if the axle is not already
filled with it). See Capacities and
Specifications (page 303).
•Allow more distance for stopping with
a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
•Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in
position P.
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back
of the trailer wheels. (Chocks not
included with vehicle.)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
temporary or conventional spare tire. A
"temporary" spare tire is different in size
(diameter or width), tread-type
(All-Season or All Terrain) or is from a
different manufacturer than the road tires
on your vehicle. Consult information on the
tire label or Safety Compliance label for
limitations when using.
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after you remove the trailer from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
•Do not allow the static water level to
rise above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
•Do not allow waves to break higher
than 6 inches (15 centimeters) above
the bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
•Causing internal damage to the
components.
•Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.
203
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime
the rear axle has been submerged in water.
Water may have contaminated the rear
axle lubricant, which is not normally
checked or changed unless a leak is
suspected or other axle repair is required.
TOWING POINTS
WARNINGS
Using recovery hooks is dangerous
and should only be done by a person
familiar with proper vehicle recovery
safety practices. Improper use of recovery
hooks may cause hook failure or separation
from the vehicle and could result in serious
injury or death.
Always slowly remove the slack from
the recovery strap prior to pulling.
Failure to do so can introduce
significantly higher loads which can cause
the recovery hooks to break off, or the
recovery strap to fail which can cause
serious injury or death.
Never link two straps together with
a clevis pin. These heavy metal
objects could become projectiles if
the strap breaks and can cause serious
injury or death.
Your vehicle comes equipped with
frame-mounted front recovery hooks.
These hooks should never have a load
applied to them greater than the gross
vehicle weight rating of your vehicle.
Before using recovery hooks:
•Make sure all attaching points are
secure and capable of withstanding
the applied load.
•Never use chains, cables or tow straps
with metal hook ends.
•Only use recovery straps that have a
minimum breaking strength two to
three times the gross vehicle weight of
the stuck vehicle.
•Make sure the recovery strap is in good
condition and free of visible cuts, tears
or damage.
•Use a damper device such as a tarp,
heavy blanket or piece of carpet
draped over the recovery strap to help
absorb the energy in the event the
strap breaks.
•Make sure the stuck vehicle is not
loaded heavier than its gross vehicle
weight rating specified on the
certification label.
•Always align the tow vehicle and stuck
vehicle in a straight line (within 10
degrees).
•Keep bystanders to the sides of the
vehicle, at a distance of at least twice
the length of the recovery strap. This
helps avoid injury from the hazard of a
recovery hook or strap breaking, or a
vehicle lurching into their path.
204
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
E143886
If you need to have your vehicle towed,
contact a professional towing service or,
if you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, your roadside
assistance service provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford
Motor Company has not approved a
slingbelt towing procedure. Vehicle
damage may occur if towed incorrectly, or
by any other means.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck
operators. Have your tow truck operator
refer to this manual for proper hook-up
and towing procedures for your vehicle.
It is acceptable to have your two-wheel
drive vehicle towed with the front wheels
on the ground (without dollies) and the
rear wheels off the ground.
We recommend towing a four-wheel drive
vehicle with all wheels off the ground, such
as using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed
equipment. However, it is acceptable to
use a wheel lift to raise the rear of your
vehicle so long as, depending on vehicle
configuration, you perform the following
before towing:
•If your vehicle is equipped with a
manual-shift transfer case, make sure
the front wheel hub locks are in the
FREE position before towing.
•If your vehicle is equipped with an
electronic shift-on-the-fly transfer
case, make sure you turn the
four-wheel drive control to the 2H
position before towing.
Note: Towing an electronic shift-on-the-fly
four-wheel drive vehicle with the front
wheels on the ground without disengaging
the front hubs may cause damage to the
automatic transmission.
Note: Towing a two-wheel drive vehicle or
an electronic shift-on-the-fly four-wheel
drive vehicle with the rear wheels on the
ground for more than 50 miles (80 km) or
faster than 35 mph (56 km/h) may cause
damage to the automatic transmission.
Note: Using wheel lift equipment to tow a
dual rear wheel vehicle requires removing
an outer rear wheel before towing.
205
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
FOUR WHEELS
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle becomes inoperable
(without access to wheel dollies,
car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport
vehicle), it can be flat-towed (all wheels
on the ground, regardless of the powertrain
and transmission configuration) under the
following conditions:
•Your vehicle is facing forward for
towing in a forward direction.
•Place the transmission in position N. If
you cannot move the transmission into
N, you may need to override it. See
Transmission (page 151).
•Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
•Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
WARNING
If your vehicle has a steering wheel
lock make sure the ignition is in the
accessory or on position when being
towed.
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering your vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 110).
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational towing, such as towing
your vehicle behind a motorhome. We
designed these guidelines to prevent
damage to your transmission.
Two-wheel Drive Vehicles and
Four-wheel Drive Vehicles Equipped
with an Electronic-shift Transfer Case
Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels
on the ground, as vehicle or transmission
damage may occur. It is recommended to
tow your vehicle with all four (4) wheels
off the ground, such as when using a
car-hauling trailer. Otherwise, you cannot
tow your vehicle.
Four-wheel Drive Vehicles Equipped
with a Manual-shift Transfer Case
1. Put the transmission in position N.
2. Put the transfer case in position N.
3. Put the hub locks in the FREE position.
Always make sure that both hub locks
are set to the same position.
206
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Towing
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 miles (480
kilometers). During this time, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics.
Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000
miles (1600 kilometers). Vary your speed
frequently and change up through the
gears early. Do not labor the engine.
Do not tow during the first 1000 miles
(1600 kilometers).
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Your fuel economy is affected by several
things, such as how you drive, the
conditions you drive under, and how you
maintain your vehicle.
You may improve your fuel economy by
keeping these things in mind:
•Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
•Drive at steady speeds without
stopping.
•Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
•Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving.
•Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
•Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling
at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15% less
fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105
km/h]).
•Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
•Use the recommended engine oil.
•Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
Avoid these actions; they reduce your fuel
economy:
•Sudden accelerations or hard
accelerations.
•Revving the engine before turning it off.
•Idle for periods longer than one minute.
•Warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.
•Use the air conditioner or front
defroster.
•Use the speed control in hilly terrain.
•Rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving.
•Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a
trailer.
•Carry unnecessary weight
(approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is
lost for every 400 lb [180 kilogram] of
weight carried).
•Driving with the wheels out of
alignment.
Conditions
•Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a
trailer may reduce fuel economy at any
speed.
•Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle (for example bug deflectors,
rollbars, light bars, running boards, ski
racks or luggage racks) may reduce
fuel economy.
•To maximize the fuel economy, drive
with the tonneau cover installed (if
equipped).
•Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.
•Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures during the first 8–10
miles (12–16 kilometers) of driving.
•Driving on flat terrain offers improved
fuel economy as compared to driving
on hilly terrain.
207
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Hints
•Transmissions give their best fuel
economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure
on the gas pedal.
•Four-wheel-drive operation (if
equipped) is less fuel efficient than
two-wheel-drive operation.
•Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING
Do not drive through flowing or deep
water as you may lose control of your
vehicle.
Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
Before driving through standing water,
check the depth. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of the wheel
hubs.
E176913
When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction may
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:
•Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
•Check that the horn works.
•Check that the exterior lights work.
•Turn the steering wheel to check that
the steering power assist works.
FLOOR MATS
WARNINGS
Always use floor mats that are
designed to fit the foot well of your
vehicle. Only use floor mats that
leave the pedal area unobstructed. Only
use floor mats that are firmly secured to
retention posts so that they cannot slip out
of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in
other ways.
Pedals that cannot move freely can
cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal
injury.
Always make sure that the floor
mats are properly attached to the
retention posts in the carpet that are
supplied with your vehicle. Floor mats must
be properly secured to both retention posts
to make sure mats do not shift out of
position.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering in the vehicle foot well that
cannot be properly secured to
prevent them from moving and interfering
with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering on top of already installed
floor mats. Floor mats should always
rest on top of vehicle carpeting surface and
not another floor mat or other covering.
Additional floor mats or any other covering
will reduce the pedal clearance and
potentially interfere with pedal operation.
208
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Hints
WARNINGS
Check attachment of floor mats on
a regular basis. Always properly
reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning or
replacement.
Always make sure that objects
cannot fall into the driver foot well
while the vehicle is moving. Objects
that are loose can become trapped under
the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
Failure to properly follow floor mat
installation or attachment
instructions can potentially cause
interference with pedal operation causing
a loss of vehicle control.
E142666
To install floor mats, position the floor mat
so that the eyelet is over the retention post
and press down to lock in.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
SNOWPLOWING
Ford recommends that the Super Duty
F-Series used for snow removal include
the snowplow package option.
Installing the Snowplow
Weight limits and guidelines for selecting
and installing the snowplow are in the Ford
Truck Body Builders Layout Book,
snowplow section, found at
www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas. A typical
installation affects the following:
•Certification to government safety laws
such as occupant protection and airbag
deployment, braking, and lighting. Look
for an Alterer’s Label on the vehicle
from the snowplow installer certifying
that the installation meets all
applicable Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards (FMVSS).
•The Total Accessory Reserve Capacity
(TARC) is on the lower right side of the
vehicle’s Safety Compliance
Certification Label. This applies to
Ford-completed vehicles of 10,000
pounds (4,536 kilograms) GVWR or
less. This is the weight of
permanently-attached auxiliary
equipment, such as snowplow
frame-mounting hardware, that can
be added to the vehicle and satisfy
Ford compliance certification to
FMVSS. Exceeding this weight may
require the auxiliary equipment installer
additional safety certification
responsibility. The Front Accessory
Reserve Capacity (FARC) is for
customer convenience.
•Rear ballast weight behind the rear
axle may be required to prevent
exceeding the FGAWR, and provide
front-to-rear weight balance for proper
braking and steering.
•Front wheel toe may require
re-adjustment to prevent premature
uneven tire wear. Specifications are in
the Ford Workshop Manual.
•Headlight aim may require
re-adjustment.
209
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Hints
•The tire air pressures recommended
for general driving are on the vehicle’s
Safety Certification Label. The
maximum cold inflation pressure for
the tire and associated load rating is
on the tire sidewall. Tire air pressure
may require re-adjustment within these
pressure limits to accommodate the
additional weight of the snowplow
installation.
•Federal and some local regulations
require additional exterior lamps for
snowplow-equipped vehicles. Consult
your authorized dealer for additional
information.
Operating the Vehicle with the
Snowplow Attached
Note: Do not use your vehicle for snow
removal until you have driven at least
500 mi (800 km).
Ford recommends vehicle speed does not
exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) when
snowplowing.
The attached snowplow blade restricts
airflow to the radiator, and may cause the
engine to run at a higher temperature:
Attention to engine temperature is
especially important when outside
temperatures are above freezing. Angle
the blade to maximize airflow to the
radiator and monitor engine temperature
to determine whether a left or right angle
provides the best performance.
Follow the severe duty schedule in your
Scheduled Maintenance information for
engine oil and transmission fluid change
intervals.
Snowplowing with your Airbag
Equipped Vehicle
WARNINGS
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag supplemental
restraint system (SRS) or its fuses.
Contact an authorized dealer.
Additional equipment such as
snowplow equipment may affect the
performance of the airbag sensors
increasing the risk of injury. Please refer to
the Body Builders Layout Book for
instructions about the appropriate
installation of additional equipment.
All occupants of the vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even
when provided with an airbag
supplemental restraint system (SRS).
Your vehicle is equipped with a driver and
passenger airbag supplemental restraint
system. The supplemental restraint system
will activate in certain frontal and offset
frontal collisions when the vehicle sustains
sufficient frontal deceleration.
Careless or high speed driving while
plowing snow that results in sufficient
vehicle decelerations can deploy the
airbag. Such driving also increases the risk
of accidents
Never remove or defeat the tripping
mechanisms designed into the snow
removal equipment by its manufacturer.
Doing so may cause damage to the vehicle
and the snow removal equipment as well
as possible airbag deployment.
Engine temperature while plowing
When driving with a plow, your engine may
run at a higher temperature than normal
because the attached snowplow blade will
restrict airflow to the radiator.
210
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Hints
•If you are driving more than 15 mi
(24 km) at temperatures above
freezing, angle the plow blade either
full left or full right to provide
maximum airflow to the radiator.
•If you are driving less than 15 mi
(24 km) at speeds up to 45 mph
(72 km/h) in cold weather, you will not
need to worry about blade position to
provide maximum airflow.
Transmission operation while
plowing
WARNING
Do not spin the wheels at over
34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may fail
and injure a passenger or bystander.
•Shift transfer case to 4L (4WD Low)
when plowing in small areas at speeds
below 5 mph (8 km/h).
•Shift transfer case to 4H (4WD High)
when plowing larger areas or light snow
at higher speeds. Do not exceed 15 mph
(24 km/h).
•Do not shift the transmission from a
forward gear to R (Reverse) until the
engine is at idle and the wheels have
stopped.
211
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Driving Hints
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company
offers a complimentary roadside
assistance program. This program is
separate from the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. The service is available:
•24 hours a day, seven days a week.
•For the coverage period listed on the
Roadside Assistance Card included in
your Owner's Manual portfolio.
Roadside Assistance covers:
•A flat tire change with a good spare, if
provided with the vehicle (except
vehicles supplied with a tire inflation
kit).
•Battery jump start.
•Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the customer's responsibility).
•Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall deliver up
to 2 gal (7.6 L) of gasoline or 5 gal
(18.9 L) of diesel fuel to a disabled
vehicle. Roadside Assistance limits fuel
delivery service to two no-charge
occurrences within a 12-month period.
•Winch out — available within 100 ft
(30.5 m) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries.
•Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall tow Ford
eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer
within 35 mi (56 km) of the
disablement location or to the nearest
authorized dealer. If a member
requests a tow to an authorized dealer
that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from
the disablement location, the member
shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km).
Roadside Assistance includes up to $200
for a towed trailer if the disabled eligible
vehicle requires service at the nearest
authorized dealer. If the towing vehicle is
operational but the trailer is not, then the
trailer does not qualify for any roadside
services.
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is in
the owner's information portfolio in the
glove compartment.
United States Ford vehicle customers who
require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Ford Motor Company
reimburses a reasonable amount for
towing to the nearest dealership within
35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States Ford vehicle
customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers need to submit their original
receipts.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
Canadian customers who require roadside
assistance, call 1-800-665-2006.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using
Roadside Assistance
For your convenience, you may complete
the roadside assistance identification card
found in the centerfold of your warranty
guide and retain for future reference.
212
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Canadian roadside coverage and benefits
may differ from the U.S. coverage. If you
require more information, please refer to
the coverage section of your warranty
guide, call us in Canada at
1-800-665-2006, or visit our website at
www.ford.ca.
Sykes Assistance Services Corporation
administers the Roadside Assistance
program. You must receive covered
services in Canada or the continental
United States. Coverage extends to
vehicles that use public, non-seasonal,
annually traveled roadways. Roadside
Assistance coverage does not extend to
vehicles involved in cross-country driving,
logging, autocross and any other form of
off-road use. Well maintained roads and
surfaces help ensure safe travel for the
supplier, and allow their representatives
to perform service as per the standard
operating procedures.
In Remote Locations
If our supplier cannot take your vehicle by
road to the nearest authorized dealership,
transportation by rail or water may be
necessary. The program covers a tow to
the dock or rail terminal and also to the
dealership at the end of the trip.
For rail or water transportation, however,
contact your authorized dealer to confirm
if you are eligible for additional coverage
before you authorize or pay for the service.
Call Ford Roadside Assistance at
1-800-665-2006 for additional
information.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
Note: The hazard warning flashers will
operate when the ignition is in any position
or if the key is not in the ignition. If used
when the engine is not running, the battery
will lose charge. As a result, there may be
insufficient power to restart your engine.
E142663
In some models, the hazard
flasher control is located on the
instrument panel.
In other models, this feature is located on
the steering column, just behind the
steering wheel.
E161463
Use your hazard warning flashers when
your vehicle is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
•Press the flasher control and all front
and rear direction indicators flash.
•Press the flasher control again to turn
them off.
FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING
Failure to inspect and, if necessary,
repair fuel leaks after a collision may
increase the risk of fire and serious
injury. Ford Motor Company recommends
that the fuel system be inspected by an
authorized dealer after any collision.
213
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
In the event of a moderate to severe
collision, this vehicle is equipped with a
fuel pump shut-off feature that stops the
flow of fuel to the engine. Not every impact
will cause a shut-off.
Should your vehicle shut off after a
collision, you may restart your vehicle by
doing the following:
1. Turn the ignition off.
2. Turn the ignition to crank.
3. Turn the ignition off.
4. Turn the ignition on again to re-enable
the fuel pump.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal
injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
Keep batteries out of reach of
children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
Use only adequately sized cables
with insulated clamps.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Do not attempt to push-start your
automatic transmission vehicle.
Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle
with an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle electrical system.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the
two vehicles do not touch.
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNINGS
Do not attach the cables to fuel lines,
engine rocker covers, the intake
manifold or electrical components
as grounding points. Stay clear of moving
parts. To avoid reverse polarity
connections, make sure that you correctly
identify the positive (+) and negative (-)
terminals on both the disabled and booster
vehicles before connecting the cables.
Do not attach the end of the positive
cable to the studs or L-shaped eyelet
located above the positive (+)
terminal of your vehicle’s battery. High
current may flow through and cause
damage to the fuses.
Do not connect the end of the
second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped.
A spark may cause an explosion of the
gases that surround the battery.
Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle.
214
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
4
2
1
3
E142664
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) terminal of the
discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive
(+) cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed metal
part of the stalled vehicle's engine,
away from the battery and the fuel
injection system, or connect the
negative (-) cable to a ground
connection point if available.
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
RPM, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
4
1
3
2
E142665
1. Remove the negative (-) jumper cable
from the disabled vehicle.
215
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
5. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
The system flashes the direction indicators
and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the safety belt pretensioners.
The horn and indicators will turn off when:
•You press the hazard control button.
•You press the panic button on the
remote entry transmitter (if equipped).
•Your vehicle runs out of power.
216
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line will provide warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure
your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized
to perform all warranty repairs. This means
that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle
to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle
to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be
made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Ford.
Away From Home
If you are away from home when your
vehicle needs service, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center or use the
online resources listed below to find the
nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952)
Online
Additional information and resources are
available online at www.fordowner.com
These are some of the items that can be
found online:
•U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
City/State or Zip Code.
•Owner Manuals.
•Maintenance Schedules.
•Recalls.
•Ford Extended Service Plans.
•Ford Genuine Accessories.
•Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Online
www.ford.ca
Twitter
@FordServiceCA (English Canada)
@FordServiceQC (Quebec)
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are
receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling/servicing
authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Ford Motor Company policies,
please contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center.
217
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Customer Relationship
Center:
•Vehicle Identification Number.
•Your telephone number (home and
business).
•The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
•The vehicle’s current odometer reading.
In some states, you must directly notify
Ford in writing before pursuing remedies
under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is
also allowed a final repair attempt in some
states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute
must be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
before taking action under the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to the
extent allowed by state law, before
pursuing replacement or repurchase
remedies provided by certain state laws.
This dispute handling procedure is not
required prior to enforcing state created
rights or other rights which are independent
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or
state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s
applicable express warranty after a
reasonable number of attempts, the
manufacturer shall be required to either
replace the vehicle with one substantially
identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to
the actual price paid or payable by the
consumer (less a reasonable allowance
for consumer use). The consumer has the
right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had
a reasonable number of attempts to
conform the vehicle to its applicable
express warranties if, within the first 18
months of ownership of a new vehicle or
the first 18000 miles (29 000 km),
whichever occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect
or condition that substantially impairs
the use, value or safety of the vehicle)
OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair
of nonconformities for a total of more
than 30 calendar days (not necessarily
all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the
need for the repair of the nonconformity
at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred
by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b).
You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking
remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C.
sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek
redress by pursuing rights and remedies
not created by California Civil Code Section
1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
not required by those statutes.
218
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
THE BETTER BUSINESS
BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE
PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford
Motor Company and to your dealer. If a
warranty concern has not been resolved
using the three-step procedure outlined
earlier in this chapter in the Getting the
Services you need section, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration.
During mediation, a representative of the
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor
Company to explore options for settlement
of the claim. If an agreement is not reached
during mediation or you do not want to
participate in mediation, and if your claim
is eligible, you may participate in the
arbitration process. An arbitration hearing
will be scheduled so that you can present
your case in an informal setting before an
impartial person. The arbitrator will
consider the testimony provided and make
a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty
days after you file your claim with the BBB.
You are not bound by the decision, and
may reject the decision and proceed to
court where all findings of the BBB Auto
Line dispute, and decision, are admissible
in the court action. Should you choose to
accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford
is then bound by the decision, and must
comply with the decision within 30 days
of receipt of your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application.
You will be asked for your name and
address, general information about your
new vehicle, information about your
warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A
Customer Claim Form will be mailed that
will need to be completed, signed and
returned to the BBB along with proof of
ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will
review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by
calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where
you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford
of Canada and the authorized dealer to
resolve a factory-related vehicle service
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of
Canada participates in an impartial third
party mediation/arbitration program
administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.
219
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
In the CAMVAP program, impartial
third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at
mutually convenient times and places in
an informal environment. These impartial
arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when
appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,
and final as the arbitrator’s award is
binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For
more information, without charge or
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685
or visit www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE
OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND
CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded
fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only
get fuel with an anti-knock index lower
than is recommended for your vehicle,
contact our Customer Relationship Center.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle
without proper conversion may damage
the effectiveness of your emission control
system and may cause engine knocking or
serious engine damage. Ford Motor
Company or Ford of Canada is not
responsible for any damage caused by use
of improper fuel. Using leaded fuel may
also result in difficulty importing your
vehicle back into the United States.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands,
Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
Fax: (313) 390-0804
Email: expcac@ford.com
For customers in Guam, the
Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana
Islands (CNMI), America Samoa, and the
U.S. Virgin Islands, please feel free to call
our Toll-Free Number: (800) 841-FORD
(3673).
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Puerto Rico,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: prcac@ford.com
www.ford.com.pr
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in the Middle East,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
220
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Ford: 80004443673
Lincoln: 80004441067
If calling from the UAE: 80004441066
If calling from the Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia: 8008443673
If calling from Kuwait: 22280384
FAX: +971 4 3327266
Email: menacac@ford.com
www.me.ford.com
If you buy your vehicle in North America
and then relocate to any of the above
locations, register your vehicle
identification number (VIN) and new
address with Ford Motor Company Export
Operations & Global Growth Initiatives by
emailing expcac@ford.com.
If you are in another foreign country,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. In
the event your inquiry is unresolved,
communicate your concern with the
dealership’s Sales Manager, Service
Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
If you require additional assistance or
clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as
previously listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL
OWNER'S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached
by their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased
by credit card, check or money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s
Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by
contacting Helm, Incorporated using the
contact information listed previously in this
section.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)
E142557
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Ford Motor Company.
221
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada.
Transport Canada Contact Information
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/menu.htmWebsite
1–800–333–0510Phone
222
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNINGS
Always disconnect the battery before
servicing high current fuses.
To reduce risk of electrical shock,
always replace the cover to the
power distribution box before
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid
reservoirs.
The power distribution box is located in
the engine compartment. It has
high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle's main electrical systems from
overloads.
If you disconnect and reconnect the
battery, you will need to reset some
features. See Changing the 12V Battery
(page 245).
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Blower motorRelay1
Not used—2
Urea heaters (diesel engine)Relay3
Not used—4
Heated mirrorsRelay5
Rear window defroster
Not used—6
Heated mirrors50A*7
Rear window defroster
Passenger seat30A*8
Driver seat30A*9
223
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Trailer tow40A*10
Not used—11
Driver smart window motor30A*12
Not used—13
Not used—14
Fuel pump (diesel engine)Diode15
Not used—16
Heated mirror15A**17
Not used—18
Not used—19
Not used—20
Not used—21
Trailer tow electric brake30A*22
Blower motor40A*23
Not used—24
Wipers30A*25
Trailer tow park lamps30A*26
Urea heaters (diesel engine)25A*27
Buss bar—28
Trailer tow park lampsRelay29
A/C clutchRelay30
WipersRelay31
Not used—32
Vehicle power 115A**33
Vehicle power 2 (diesel engine)15A**34
Vehicle power 2 (gas engine)20A**
Vehicle power 310A**35
224
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Vehicle power 4 (diesel engine)15A**36
Vehicle power 4 (gas engine)20A**
Vehicle power 5 (diesel engine)10A**37
Electronic control module (diesel engine)Relay38
Powertrain control module (gas engine)
4x4 hub lock10A**39
4x4 electronic lock15A**40
Not used—41
Rear heated seats20A**42
Not used—43
Not used—44
Run/start relay coil10A**45
Transmission control module keep-alive
power (diesel engine)
10A**46
A/C clutch feed10A**47
Run/startRelay48
Rearview camera system10A**49
Blower motor relay coil10A**50
Not used—51
Electronic control module10A**52
Powertrain control module,
Transmission control module run/start
4x4 module10A**53
Anti-lock brake system run/start10A**54
Rear window defroster coil10A**55
Passenger compartment fuse panel run/
start feed
20A**56
Fuel pumpRelay57
Not used—58
225
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used—59
Not used—60
Not used—61
Not used—62
Not used—63
Not used—64
Not used—65
Fuel pump20A**66
Not used—67
Fuel pump relay coil10A**68
Not used—69
Trailer tow backup lamp10A**70
Canister vent (gas engine)10A**71
Electronic control module relay coil feed
keep-alive power
10A**72
Powertrain control module
Not used—73
Not used—74
Not used—75
Trailer tow backup lampRelay76
Not used—77
Not used—78
Not used—79
Not used—80
Not used—81
Auxiliary power point #220A*82
Auxiliary power point #120A*83
4x4 shift motor30A*84
226
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Heated/cooled seats30A*85
Anti-lock brake system coil feed25A*86
Auxiliary power point #520A*87
Auxiliary power point #620A*88
Starter motor40A*89
Trailer tow battery charge25A*90
Not used—91
Auxiliary power point #420A*92
Auxiliary power point #320A*93
Auxiliary switch #125A*94
Auxiliary switch #225A*95
Anti-lock brake system pump50A*96
Inverter40A*97
Not used—98
Instrument panel power inverter40A*99
Not used—100
StarterRelay101
Not used—102
Not used—103
Not used—104
Not used—105
Not used—106
Not used—107
*Cartridge fuses
**Mini fuses
227
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel
The fuse panel is in the passenger footwell.
Remove the panel cover to access the
fuses.
Pull the fuse panel cover toward you to
remove it. When the clips of the panel
disengage, let the panel fall easily.
Use the provided fuse puller tool to remove
a fuse. It is on the fuse panel cover.
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used (spare)30A1
Auxiliary switch relay #415A2
Passenger smart window motor30A3
Hood lamp10A4
Interior lights
Moonroof20A5
Driver seat module5A6
228
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Driver lumbar motor7.5A7
Driver seat switch
Power mirror switch10A8
Auxiliary switch relay #310A9
Customer access feed10A10
Run/accessory relay
Instrument cluster10A11
Interior lighting15A12
Lighted running board lamps
Right turn signals and brake lamps15A13
Left turn signals and brake lamps15A14
Backup lamps, Trailer tow backup relay15A15
High-mounted stop lamps
Reverse signal interior mirror
Right low beam headlamp10A16
Left low beam headlamp10A17
Brake shift interlock10A18
Keypad illumination
Passive anti-theft transceiver
Powertrain control module
Amplifier20A19
Subwoofer
Power door locks20A20
Brake on/off switch10A21
Horn20A22
Not used (spare)15A23
Diagnostic connector15A24
Electronic finish panel
Power fold mirror relay
Remote keyless entry
Steering wheel control module
Not used (spare)15A25
229
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Steering wheel control module5A26
Not used (spare)20A27
Ignition switch15A28
GPS module20A29
Radio
SYNC
Parking lamp relay15A30
Trailer tow parking lamp relay
Customer access5A31
Trailer brake controller (brake signal)
Auto dimming mirror15A32
Driver and passenger door lock switch
illumination
Driver and passenger smart window motor
Moonroof motor
Passenger window switch
Power inverter
Rear heated seat switch illumination
Telescoping mirror switch
Restraint control module10A33
Heated steering wheel module10A34
Rear heated seats module
Reverse park aid module5A35
Select shift switch
Trailer brake control module
Fuel tank select switch10A36
Positive temperature coefficient heater10A37
AM/FM base radio10A38
High beam headlamps15A39
Parking lamps (in mirrors)10A40
Roof marker lamps
Passenger airbag deactivation indicator7.5A41
Not used (spare)5A42
230
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Wiper relay10A43
Auxiliary switches10A44
Not used (spare)5A45
Climate control10A46
Fog lamps15A47
Fog lamp indicator (in switch)
Power rear sliding window switch30A Circuit breaker48
Power windows switch
Moonroof switch
Delayed accessoryRelay49
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING
Always replace a fuse with one that
has the specified amperage rating.
Using a fuse with a higher amperage
rating can cause severe wire damage and
could start a fire.
E142430
If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. A
break in the fuse wire will indicate a blown
fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before
replacing any electrical components.
231
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale
value. There is a large network of
authorized dealers that are there to help
you with their professional servicing
expertise. We believe that their specially
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly.
They are supported by a wide range of
highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
To help you service your vehicle, we
provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine
service easy. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 453).
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which
parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
•Do not work on a hot engine.
•Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
•Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed space,
unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation.
•Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away
from the battery and all fuel related
parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and/or personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Block the wheels
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
E142457
1. To open the hood, go inside the vehicle
and pull the hood release handle
located under the left hand side of the
instrument panel.
232
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
locate the secondary release lever,
which is located under the front of the
hood, to your right of the center of the
vehicle (driver's side), toward the
headlight.
3. Release the hood latch by pushing the
secondary release lever to your left,
toward the center of the vehicle.
4. Raise the hood.
5. To close the hood, lower the hood and
allow it to drop the last 8 to 11 inches
(20 to 30 centimeters).
Note: Make sure that the hood is closed
properly.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW -
6.2L
Note: Refer to the diesel supplement for
diesel engine component locations.
Windshield washer fluid reservoirA.
Engine oil dipstickB.
Automatic transmission fluid dipstickC.
Brake fluid reservoirD.
Engine coolant reservoirE.
233
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Power distribution boxF.
Air filter assemblyG.
Power steering fluid reservoirH.
Engine oil filler capI.
BatteryJ.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW -
6.8L
Note: Refer to the diesel supplement for
diesel engine component locations.
Windshield washer fluid reservoirA.
BatteryB.
Automatic transmission fluid dipstickC.
234
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Engine oil filler capD.
Engine oil dipstickE.
Power steering fluid reservoirF.
Brake fluid reservoirG.
Engine coolant reservoirH.
Air filter assemblyI.
Power distribution boxJ.
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
E161560
A B
MINA
MAXB
ENGINE OIL CHECK
Note: For diesel engine information, refer
to the diesel supplement.
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 15 minutes
for the oil to drain into the oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the
gearshift is in P.
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from
engine heat.
5. Locate and carefully remove the engine
oil level dipstick. See the Under Hood
Overview in this chapter for location of
dipstick.
6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert the
dipstick fully, then remove it again.
•If the oil level is between the lower
and upper holes, the oil level is
acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL.
•If the oil level is below the lower
hole, add enough oil to raise the
level within the lower and upper
holes.
•Oil levels above the upper hole may
cause engine damage. Some oil
must be removed from the engine
by an authorized dealer.
7. Put the oil level dipstick back into the
oil dipstick tube and ensure it is fully
seated.
Adding Engine Oil
Note: Do not remove the filler cap when
the engine is running.
Note: Do not remove the engine oil level
dipstick when the engine is runnin
Note: Do not add oil further than the MAX
mark. Oil levels above the MAX mark may
cause engine damage.
235
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
E142732
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol
conforms to the current engine and
emission system protection standards and
fuel economy requirements of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC), comprised of
U.S. and Japanese automobile
manufacturers.
1. Check the engine oil level.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the
normal range, add engine oil that
meets Ford specifications. See
Capacities and Specifications for more
information.
3. Remove the engine oil filler cap and
use a funnel to pour the engine oil into
the opening.
4. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure
the oil level is not above the normal
operating range on the engine oil level
dipstick.
5. Install the engine oil level dipstick and
ensure it is fully seated.
6. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by
turning the filler cap clockwise until
three clicks are heard or until the cap
is fully seated.
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR
RESET
Resetting the Oil Life Monitoring
System
Only reset the oil life monitoring system
after changing the engine oil and oil filter.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
engine. For vehicles with push-button
start, press and hold the start button
for two seconds without pressing the
brake pedal. Do not start the engine.
2. Press the accelerator and brake pedals
at the same time.
3. Keep the accelerator and brake pedals
fully pressed.
4. After three seconds, a message
confirming that the reset is in progress
will be displayed.
5. After 25 seconds, a message
confirming that the reset is complete
will be displayed.
6. Release the accelerator and brake
pedals.
7. The message confirming that the reset
is complete will no longer be displayed.
8. Switch the ignition off. For vehicles with
push-button start, press the start
button to switch the ignition off.
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
WARNINGS
Do not add engine coolant when the
engine is hot. Steam and scalding
liquids released from a hot cooling
system can burn you badly. Also, you can
be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine
parts.
236
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
WARNINGS
Do not put engine coolant in the
windshield washer fluid container. If
sprayed on the windshield, engine
coolant could make it difficult to see
through the windshield.
To reduce the risk of personal injury,
make sure the engine is cool before
unscrewing the coolant pressure
relief cap. The cooling system is under
pressure; steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when the cap is loosened
slightly.
Do not add coolant further than the
MAX mark.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a
diesel engine, refer to the Diesel
Supplement.
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the engine
coolant at the intervals listed in the
scheduled maintenance information. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 453).
Note: Make sure that the level is between
the MIN and MAX marks on the coolant
reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Note: If the level is at the MIN mark, below
the MIN mark, or empty, add coolant
immediately. See Adding Engine Coolant
in this chapter.
The coolant concentration should be
maintained within 48% to 50%, which
equates to a freeze point between -30°F
(-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C).
Note: For best results, coolant
concentration should be tested with a
refractometer such as Robinair® Coolant
and Battery Refractometer 75240. We do
not recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentrations.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Do not use engine coolant
or antifreeze or windshield washer fluid
outside of its specified function and vehicle
location.
Adding Engine Coolant
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants, or additives as they can
cause damage to the engine cooling or
heating systems. This damage would not
be covered under your vehicle’s warranty.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
engine coolant may change color from
orange to pink or light red. As long as the
engine coolant is clear and uncontaminated,
this color change does not indicate the
engine coolant has degraded nor does it
require the engine coolant to be drained, the
system to be flushed, or the engine coolant
to be replaced.
237
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
•Do not mix different colors or types of
coolant in your vehicle. Make sure the
correct coolant is used. Mixing of
engine coolants may harm your
engine’s cooling system. The use of an
improper coolant may harm engine and
cooling system components and may
void the warranty. Use prediluted
engine coolant meeting the Ford
specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 303).
•In case of emergency, a large amount
of water without engine coolant may
be added in order to reach a vehicle
service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained,
chemically cleaned with Motorcraft
Premium Cooling System Flush, and
refilled with engine coolant as soon as
possible. Water alone (without engine
coolant) can cause engine damage
from corrosion, overheating or freezing.
•Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or
any engine coolants mixed with alcohol
or methanol antifreeze (coolant).
Alcohol and other liquids can cause
engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
•Do not add extra inhibitors or additives
to the coolant. These can be harmful
and compromise the corrosion
protection of the engine coolant.
Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure will
escape as you unscrew the cap.
Add prediluted engine coolant meeting the
Ford specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 303).
Whenever coolant has been added, the
coolant level in the coolant reservoir
should be checked the next few times you
drive the vehicle. If necessary, add enough
prediluted engine coolant to bring the
coolant level to the proper level.
Recycled Engine Coolant
Ford Motor Company does not recommend
the use of recycled engine coolant since a
Ford-approved recycling process is not yet
available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed
of in an appropriate manner. Follow your
community’s regulations and standards
for recycling and disposing of automotive
fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
•It may be necessary to have a Ford
authorized dealer increase the coolant
concentration above 50%.
•A coolant concentration of 60% will
provide improved freeze point
protection. Engine coolant
concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection
characteristics of the engine coolant
and may cause engine damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
•It may be necessary to have a Ford
authorized dealer decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
•A coolant concentration of 40% will
provide improved overheat protection.
Engine coolant concentrations below
40% will decrease the freeze and
corrosion protection characteristics of
the engine coolant and may cause
engine damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted engine
coolant for optimum cooling system and
engine protection.
238
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
What You Should Know About Fail-
Safe Cooling
If the engine coolant supply is depleted,
this feature allows the vehicle to be driven
temporarily before incremental component
damage is incurred. The “fail-safe”
distance depends on ambient
temperatures, vehicle load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, the engine
coolant temperature gauge will move to
the red (hot) area and:
The coolant temperature
warning light will illuminate.
The service engine soon
indicator will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating
cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder
acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still
operate. However:
•The engine power will be limited.
•The air conditioning system will be
disabled.
Continued operation will increase the
engine temperature and the engine will
completely shut down, causing steering
and braking effort to increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the
engine can be re-started. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to minimize engine damage.
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNINGS
Fail-safe mode is for use during
emergencies only. Operate the
vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long
as necessary to bring the vehicle to rest in
a safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, the vehicle will
have limited power, will not be able to
maintain high-speed operation, and may
completely shut down without warning,
potentially losing engine power, power
steering assist, and power brake assist,
which may increase the possibility of a
crash resulting in serious injury.
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
You have limited engine power when in the
fail-safe mode, so drive the vehicle with
caution. The vehicle will not be able to
maintain high-speed operation and the
engine will run rough. Remember that the
engine is capable of completely shutting
down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to
an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short
period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish
if low.
5. Re-start the engine and take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Note: Driving the vehicle without repairing
the engine problem increases the chance of
engine damage. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
239
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Engine Fluid Temperature
Management (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
To reduce the risk of collision and
injury, be prepared that the vehicle
speed may reduce and the vehicle
may not be able to accelerate with full
power until the fluid temperatures reduce.
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
Your vehicle has been designed to pull a
trailer, but because of the added load, the
vehicle’s engine may temporarily reach
higher temperatures during severe
operating conditions such as ascending a
long or steep grade while pulling a trailer
in hot ambient temperatures.
At this time, you may notice your engine
coolant temperature gauge needle move
toward the H and the POWER REDUCED
TO LOWER TEMP message may appear
in the information display.
You may notice a reduction in the vehicle’s
speed caused by reduced engine power.
In order to manage the engine fluid
temperatures, your vehicle may enter this
mode if certain high-temperature and
high-load conditions take place. The
amount of speed reduction will depend on
the vehicle loading, towing, grade, ambient
temperature, and other factors. If this
occurs, there is no need to pull off the road.
The vehicle can continue to be driven while
this message is active.
The air conditioning may turn on and off
during severe operating conditions to
protect the engine from overheating. When
the engine coolant temperature decreases
to a more normal operating temperature,
the air conditioning will turn on once again.
If the engine coolant temperature gauge
moves fully into the red (hot) area, or if the
coolant temperature warning or service
engine soon messages appear in your
information display:
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as safely
possible and shift the transmission into
park (P).
2. Leave the engine running until the
coolant temperature gauge needle
moves away from the H range. After
several minutes, if this does not
happen, follow the remaining steps.
3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool before checking the coolant level.
4. If the coolant level is normal, you may
restart your engine and continue on.
5. If the coolant is low, add coolant,
restart the engine and take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer. See Adding
engine coolant in this chapter for more
information. Refer to fail-safe cooling
for additional information.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK
Have an authorized dealer check and
change the transmission fluid and filter at
the correct service interval. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 453).
Do not use supplemental transmission
fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
agents. The use of these materials may
affect transmission operation and result
in damage to internal transmission
components.
240
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Checking Automatic Transmission
Fluid
For scheduled intervals of the fluid checks
and changes, See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 453). Your
transmission does not consume fluid.
However, the fluid level should be checked
if the transmission is not working properly,
i.e., if the transmission slips or shifts slowly
or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Automatic transmission fluid expands
when warmed. To obtain an accurate fluid
check, drive the vehicle until it is at normal
operating temperature (approximately
19 mi (30 km)). Verify that the
transmission fluid temperature gauge,
located on the instrument cluster, is within
normal range.
1. Drive the vehicle 19 (30 km)until it
reaches normal operating temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
engage the parking brake.
3. With the engine running, parking brake
engaged and your foot on the brake
pedal, move the gearshift lever through
all of the gear ranges. Allow sufficient
time for each gear to engage.
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P and leave
the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean
with a clean, dry lint free rag. If
necessary, refer to the Under Hood
Overview in this chapter for the
location of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully
seated in the filler tube.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the
fluid level. The fluid should be in the
designated area for normal operating
temperature or ambient temperature.
Low Fluid Level
Type A
E163739
Type B
E163740
Do not drive the vehicle if there is no
indication of fluid on the dipstick and the
ambient temperature is above 50°F
(10°C).
Correct Fluid Level
Type A
241
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
E163741
Type B
E163742
For vehicles equipped with 5-speed
transmissions, check the fluid at the
normal operating temperature of 151°F
(66°C) to 170°F (77°C) on a level surface.
For vehicles equipped with 6-speed
transmissions, check the fluid at the
normal operating temperature of 196°F
(91°C) to 215°F (102°C) on a level surface.
The normal operating temperature can be
reached after approximately 19 mi
(30 km).
High Fluid Level
Type A
E163743
Type B
E163744
Fluid levels above the safe range may
result in transmission failure. An overfill
condition of transmission fluid may cause
shift and engagement concerns, and
possible damage.
High fluid levels can be caused by an
overheating condition.
Adjusting Automatic Transmission
Fluid Levels
Note: Use of a non-approved automatic
transmission fluid may cause internal
transmission component damage.
Before adding any fluid, make sure the
correct type is used. The type of fluid used
is normally indicated on:
242
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
•the dipstick handle.
•See Capacities and Specifications
(page 303).
If necessary, add fluid in 8 (250 ml)
increments through the filler tube until the
level is correct.
Type A
E163745
Type B
E163746
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid should be
removed by a qualified technician.
Note: An overfill condition of transmission
fluid may cause shift and engagement
concerns, and possible damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission
fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
agents. The use of these materials may
affect transmission operation and result
in damage to internal transmission
components.
TRANSFER CASE FLUID
CHECK (If Equipped)
E164246
1. Clean the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug and inspect the
fluid level.
3. Add only enough fluid through the filler
opening so that the fluid level is at the
bottom of the opening.
Only use fluid that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 303).
243
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX
lines are within the normal operating range;
there is no need to add fluid. If the fluid
levels are outside of the normal operating
range, the performance of the system
could be compromised; seek service from
your authorized dealer immediately.
POWER STEERING FLUID
CHECK
Check the power steering fluid. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 453). If
adding fluid is necessary, use only
MERCON LV ATF
Note: This procedure is for vehicles with
gasoline engines. Vehicles with diesel
engines are similar. See Under Hood
Overview in your diesel supplement.
Check the fluid level when it is at ambient
temperature.
1. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It
should be between the MIN and MAX
range. Do not add fluid if the level is
within this range.
2. If the fluid level is low, add fluid to bring
the fluid level up to between the MIN
and MAX range.
3. Switch the engine on.
4. While the engine idles, turn the steering
wheel left and right several times.
5. Switch the engine off.
6. Recheck the fluid level in the reservoir.
Do not add fluid if the level is between
the MIN and MAX range.
7. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small
amounts, continuously checking the
level until it is between the MIN and
MAX range. For proper fluid type, See
Capacities and Specifications (page
303). Be sure to put the cap back on the
reservoir.
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING
If you operate your vehicle in
temperatures below 40°F (5°C), use
washer fluid with antifreeze
protection. Failure to use washer fluid with
antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and
increase the risk of injury or accident.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is
low. Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 303).
State or local regulations on volatile
organic compounds may restrict the use
of methanol, a common windshield washer
antifreeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol antifreeze
agents should be used only if they provide
cold weather protection without damaging
the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or
washer system.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime
fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel
tank. Regular maintenance or replacement
is not needed.
244
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNINGS
This vehicle may be equipped with
more than one battery, removal of
cable from only one battery does not
disconnect the vehicle electrical system.
Be sure to disconnect cables from all
batteries when disconnecting power.
Failure to do so may cause serious
personal injury or property damage.
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal
injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide proper
ventilation.
When lifting a plastic-cased battery,
excessive pressure on the end walls
could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and
damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the
battery with a battery carrier or with your
hands on opposite corners.
Keep batteries out of reach of
children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
Note: If your battery has a cover/shield,
make sure it is reinstalled after the battery
has been cleaned or replaced.
Note: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories
or components added to the vehicle by the
dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft
maintenance-free battery which normally
does not require additional water during
its life of service.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry. Also,
make certain the battery cables are always
tightly fastened to the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or
terminals, remove the cables from the
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water.
It is recommended that the negative
battery cable terminal be disconnected
from the battery if you plan to store your
vehicle for an extended period of time.
Because your vehicle’s engine is
electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained
by power from the battery. When the
battery is disconnected or a new battery
is installed, the engine must relearn its idle
and fuel trim strategy for optimum
driveability and performance. Flexible fuel
vehicles (FFV) must also relearn the
ethanol content of the fuel for optimum
driveability and performance. To begin this
process
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop,
set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P, turn off all
accessories.
3. Start the engine. Run the engine until
it reaches normal operating
temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine
to idle for at least one minute.
245
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
6. Release the parking brake. With your
foot on the brake pedal and with the
A/C on, put the vehicle in D and allow
the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
•If you do not allow the engine to
relearn its idle trim, the idle quality
of your vehicle may be adversely
affected until the idle trim is
eventually relearned.
7. Drive the vehicle to complete the
relearning process
•The vehicle may need to be driven
10 mi (16 km) or more to relearn the
idle and fuel trim strategy along
with the ethanol content for flexible
fuel vehicles.
•For flexible fuel vehicles, if you are
operating on E85, you may
experience poor starts or an
inability to start the engine and
driveability problems until the fuel
trim and ethanol content have been
relearned.
If the battery has been disconnected or a
new battery has been installed, the clock
and radio settings must be reset once the
battery is reconnected.
Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized standards
for disposal. Call your local authorized
recycling center to find out more about
recycling automotive batteries.
Battery Management System (If
Equipped)
The battery management system (BMS)
monitors battery conditions and takes
actions to extend battery life. If excessive
battery drain is detected, the system may
temporarily disable certain electrical
features to protect the battery. Those
electrical accessories affected include the
rear defrost, heated/cooled seats, climate
control fan, heated steering wheel, audio
and navigation system. A message may be
shown in the information displays to alert
the driver that battery protection actions
are active. These messages are only for
notification that an action is taking place,
and not intended to indicate an electrical
problem or that the battery requires
replacement.
Electrical accessory installation
To ensure proper operation of the BMS,
any electrical devices that are added to
the vehicle should not have their ground
connection made directly at the negative
battery post. A connection at the negative
battery post can cause inaccurate
measurements of the battery condition
and potential incorrect system operation.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories
added to the vehicle by the dealer or the
owner may adversely affect battery
performance and durability, and may also
affect the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
When a battery replacement is required,
the battery should only be replaced with
a Ford recommended replacement battery
which matches the electrical requirements
of the vehicle. After battery replacement,
or in some cases after charging the battery
with the external charger, the BMS requires
eight hours of vehicle sleep time (key off
with doors closed) to relearn the new
battery state of charge. Prior to relearning
the state of charge, the BMS may disable
electrical features (to protect the battery)
earlier than normal.
246
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
CHECKING THE WIPER
BLADES
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
or water applied with a soft sponge or
cloth.
CHANGING THE WIPER
BLADES
You can manually move the wiper arms
when the ignition is off. This allows for ease
of blade replacement and cleaning under
the blades.
E165804
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away
from the glass.
A
E165794
2. Release the wiper blade lock (A) and
separate the wiper blade from the
wiper arm.
3. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place. Lower the wiper arm and blade
back on the windshield. The wiper arms will
automatically return to their normal position
when you turn the ignition on.
•Replace wiper blades at least once per
year for optimum performance.
•You can improve poor wiper quality by
cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
The headlamps on your vehicle are
properly aimed at the assembly plant. If
your vehicle has been in an accident, the
alignment of your headlamps should be
checked by your authorized dealer.
247
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Headlamp Aiming Target
E142592
8 feet (2.4 meters)A
Center height of lamp to groundB
25 feet (7.6 meters)C
Horizontal reference lineD
Vertical Aim Adjustment Procedure
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a
wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters)
away.
2. Measure the height of the headlamp
bulb center from the ground and mark
an 8 foot (2.4 meter) horizontal
reference line on the vertical wall or
screen at this height.
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the
other.
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to
illuminate the wall or screen and open
the hood.
E142465
4. On the wall or screen you will observe
a flat zone of high intensity light
located at the top of the right hand
portion of the beam pattern. If the top
edge of the high intensity light zone is
not at the horizontal reference line, the
headlamp will need to be adjusted.
E163806
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Using a Phillips #2
screwdriver, turn the adjuster either
clockwise or counterclockwise in order
to adjust the vertical aim of the
headlamp.
6. Repeat steps 3 thru 5 to adjust the
other headlamp.
7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment
Horizontal aim is not required for this
vehicle and is not adjustable.
248
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
REMOVING A HEADLAMP
WARNING
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb
carefully and keep out of children’s
reach. Grasp the bulb only by its
plastic base and do not touch the glass.
The oil from your hand could cause the
bulb to break the next time the headlamps
are operated.
Note: If the bulb is accidentally touched, it
should be cleaned with rubbing alcohol
before being used.
Note: This procedure is for replacing the
headlamps, park lamps or turn lamps.
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in
the off position and open the hood.
E163821
2. Using masking tape or a marker, make
an alignment mark between one of the
grille brackets and the vehicle radiator
support to ensure correct grille
alignment during the installation
procedure. Do not scratch the black
coating from the radiator support.
3. Remove the two grille to headlamp
assembly push pins and the four bolts
attaching the top of the grille to the
radiator support.
4. Pull the top of the grille forward to gain
access to the lower grille spring clips.
5. Depress the spring clips through the
lower inner grille access openings using
a flat head screwdriver.
6. Pull the grill straight out to remove.
E163822
7. Remove the four bolts from the
headlamp assembly.
8. Pull the assembly straight out
disengaging one snap clip from the
fender.
9. Disconnect the electrical connector by
squeezing the release tab and pushing
the connector forward, then pulling it
rearward.
CHANGING A BULB
WARNINGS
Switch all of the lamps and the
ignition off. Failure to follow this
warning could result in serious
personal injury.
Bulbs become hot when in use. Let
them cool down before you remove
them.
Use the correct specification bulb. See
Bulb Specification Chart (page 252).
Install in the reverse order unless otherwise
stated.
249
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Replacing Front Park and Direction
Indicator Lamp Bulbs
E163824
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Remove the headlamp. See
Removing a Headlamp (page 249).
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
Replacing Headlamp Bulbs
E163823
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Remove the headlamp. See
Removing a Headlamp (page 249).
3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and
remove it.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
Replacing Front Clearance and
Identification Lamp Bulbs (If Equipped)
E163825
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Remove the screw and lens from the
lamp assembly.
3. Separate the bulb from the bulb
socket.
Replacing Fog Lamp Bulbs (If Equipped)
E163826
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
250
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
Replacing
Brake/Tail/Turn/Reverse Lamp
Bulbs
Pickup Models
E163827
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Open the tailgate to expose the lamp
assemblies.
3. Remove the two bolts from the tail
lamp assembly and carefully pull the
lamp assembly from the tailgate pillar
by releasing the two retaining tabs.
4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
5. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
Chassis Cabs
E163828
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Remove the four screws and the lamp
lens from lamp assembly.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
Replacing Cargo Lamp and Central
High Mounted Brake Lamp Bulbs
E163829
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Remove the screws and lamp
assembly from the vehicle as wiring
permits.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
251
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
Replacing the License Plate Lamp
Bulb
Note: The license plate bulbs are located
behind the rear bumper.
E163830
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Reach behind the rear bumper to
locate the bulb.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the
chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be
marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for
North America and an “E” for Europe to
ensure lamp performance, light brightness
and pattern and safe visibility. The correct
bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly
or void the lamp assembly warranty and
will provide quality bulb illumination time.
Trade nameNumber of BulbsFunction
H13/90082Headlamps
W5W2Side marker lamp - front
3157NA2Park/Turn lamp- front
31572Tail/stop/turn/side marker
(pickups only)
31572Tail/stop/turn/side marker
(chassis cabs only)
9212Reverse (pickups only)
31572Reverse (chassis cabs only)
194—License plate lamp
9145—Fog lamp
9121High-mount brake lamp
9122Cargo lamp
12V6W2Map lamp
252
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Trade nameNumber of BulbsFunction
5783Dome/reading lamps
28252Interior visor lamp
28252Mirror turn signal
2825Mirror clearance lamp
1945Front clearance lamps and
front identification lamps1
LED2
4
Rear fender clearance1
1932
3
Rear identification1
LED2
1Underhood Lamp
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer.
1Dual rear wheels, if equipped.
2 See your authorized dealer to replace the lamp assembly.
253
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. Resulting component damage
may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
When changing the air filter element, use
only the air filter element listed. See
Motorcraft Parts (page 304).
Change the air filter element at the correct
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 453).
E163755
1. Locate the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector on the air outlet
tube. Disconnect the mass air flow
sensor electrical connector.
E163756
2. Reposition the locking clip on the
connector (connector shown from
below for clarity), squeeze the
connector and pull it off of the air
outlet tube.
E163757
3. Clean the area from around the air tube
to the air cover connection to prevent
debris from entering the system. Next,
loosen the bolt on the air tube clamp
so the clamp is no longer snug to the
air tube. It is not necessary to
completely remove the clamp.
4. Pull the air tube off from the air cleaner
housing.
254
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
E163758
5. Release the three clamps that secure
the cover to the air filter housing. Push
the air filter cover toward the center of
the vehicle and up slightly to release it.
6. Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
7. Install the new air filter element.
E163759
8. Replace the air filter housing cover and
secure all the clamps. Be careful not
to crimp the filter element edges
between the air filter housing and cover
and ensure that you properly align the
tabs on the edge into the slots.
9. Slip the air tube onto the air filter
housing and tighten the air-tube clamp
bolt snugly. Do not over tighten
air-tube clamp bolt.
E163760
10. Reconnect the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector to the outlet
tube. Make sure the locking tab on
the connector is in the locked position
(connector shown from below for
clarity).
255
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has
many quality products available to clean
your vehicle and protect its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
•Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42)
•Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal
Cleaner (ZC-15)
•Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
•Motorcraft Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
•Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
•Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (Canada
only) (CXC-66-A)
•Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner
(Canada only) (CXC-101)
•Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner
(Canada only) (CXC-100)
•Motorcraft Premium Quality
Windshield Washer Fluid (Canada
only) [CXC-37-(A, B, D or F)]
•Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash
Concentrate with Bitterant (U.S. only)
(ZC-32-B2)
•Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
•Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (ZC-56)
•Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover
(U.S. only) (ZC-14)
•Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23)
•Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner
(ZC-37-A)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft
Detail Wash.
•Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
•Never wash your vehicle when is hot to
the touch, or during strong or direct
sunlight.
•Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
•Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time.
We recommend Motorcraft Bug and
Tar Remover.
•Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a
car wash.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come in contact with your
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as
possible.
Exterior Chrome Parts
•Apply a high quality-cleaning product
to bumpers and other chrome parts.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
We recommend Motorcraft Custom
Bright Metal Cleaner.
•Do not apply the cleaning product to
hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer
than the time recommended.
•Using other non-recommended
cleaners can result in severe and
permanent cosmetic damage.
256
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they
can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
Exterior Plastic Parts
For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease
spots are present, we recommend
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Do not use a commercial or high-pressure
sprayer on the surface or edge of stripes
and graphics. This can damage them and
cause the edges to peel away from the
vehicle surface.
Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your
vehicle frequently. Keep body and door
drain holes free of debris or foreign
material.
WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your
vehicle in a shaded area out of direct
sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before
applying wax.
•Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
•Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
to apply and remove the wax.
•Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
•Do not allow wax to come in contact
with any non-body (low-gloss black)
colored trim. The wax will discolor or
stain the parts over time.
•Roof racks.
•Bumpers.
•Grained door handles.
•Side moldings.
•Mirror housings.
•Windshield cowl area.
•Do not apply wax to glass areas.
•After waxing, your car's paint should
feel smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
•Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
•Do not spray a hot engine with cold
water to avoid cracking the engine
block or other engine components.
•Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine
Shampoo.
•Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
257
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
•Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or
the area in and around these locations.
•Cover the battery, power distribution
box, and air filter assembly to prevent
water damage when cleaning the
engine.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
•Clean the windshield with a
non-abrasive glass cleaner. When
cleaning the interior of the windshield,
avoid getting any glass cleaner on the
instrument panel or door panels. Wipe
any glass cleaner off these surfaces
immediately.
•For windshields contaminated with
tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean
the entire windshield using steel wool
(no greater than 0000 grade) in a
circular motion and rinse with water.
•Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNINGS
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach
or dye on the vehicle’s safety belts,
as these actions may weaken the
belt webbing.
On vehicles equipped with
seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong
detergents. Such products could
contaminate the side airbag system and
affect performance of the side airbag in a
collision.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts
and seats equipped with side airbags:
•Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
•Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
•If grease or tar is present on the
material, spot-clean the area first with
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose
Cleaner.
•If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate)
or the ring will set.
•Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect
the flame retardant abilities of the seat
materials.
258
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING
Do not use chemical solvents or
strong detergents when cleaning the
steering wheel or instrument panel
to avoid contamination of the airbag
system.
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats
(page 259).
Clean the instrument panel and cluster
lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth,
then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry
these areas.
•Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from
undesirable windshield reflection.
•Do not use any household cleaning
products or glass cleaners as these
may damage the finish of the
instrument panel, interior trim and
cluster lens.
•Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
have been in contact with certain
products such as insect repellent and
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
to the interior painted surfaces.
•Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Your warranty may not cover these
damages.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,
soft cloth as quickly as possible.
2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially
available leather cleaning product for
automotive interiors. Test any cleaner
or stain remover on an inconspicuous
area.
3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a
clean, soft cloth.
4. If necessary, apply more soap and
water solution or cleaning product to
a clean, soft cloth and press it onto the
soiled area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing
motion for 60 seconds on the soiled
area.
6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (If
Equipped)
Without King Ranch Edition
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
For cleaning and removing spots and stains
such as dye transfer, use Motorcraft
Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a
commercially available leather cleaning
product for automotive interiors.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous area.
259
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
You should:
•Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
•Clean and treat spills and stains as
soon as possible.
Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather:
•Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
leather conditioners.
•Household cleaners.
•Alcohol solutions.
•Solvents or cleaners intended
specifically for rubber, vinyl and
plastics.
With King Ranch Edition
Your vehicle has seating covered in
premium, top-grain leather that is
extremely durable, but still requires special
care and maintenance in order to preserve
longevity and comfort.
Regular cleaning and conditioning
maintains the appearance of the leather.
Cleaning
For dirt, use a vacuum cleaner then use a
clean, damp cloth or soft brush.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth. For more thorough
cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap
and water solution.
•Clean spills as quickly as possible.
•Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous part of the leather as
cleaners may darken the leather.
•Do not spill coffee, ketchup, mustard,
orange juice or oil-based products on
the leather as they may permanently
stain the leather.
•Do not use household cleaning
products, alcohol solutions, solvents
or cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl
or plastics.
Scratches
Because the leather in the seat comes
from genuine steer hides, there may be
evidence of naturally occurring markings,
such as small scars. These markings give
character to the seating covers and are
considered to be proof of a genuine leather
product.
In order to lessen the appearance of
certain scratches and other wear marks,
apply conditioner on the affected area
following the same instructions as in the
Conditioning section.
Conditioning
Bottles of King Ranch Leather Conditioner
are available at the King Ranch Saddle
Shop. Visit the website at
www.krsaddleshop.com, or call
1–800–282–KING (5464) in the United
States. If you are unable to obtain King
Ranch Leather Conditioner, use another
premium leather conditioner.
•Clean the surfaces using the steps
outlined in the Cleaning section.
•Make sure the leather is dry then apply
a nickel-sized amount of conditioner
to a clean, dry cloth.
•Rub the conditioner into the leather
until it disappears. Allow the
conditioner to dry, then repeat the
process for the entire interior. If a film
appears, wipe it off with a dry, clean
cloth.
260
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle
color code is printed on a sticker on the
front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your
color code to your authorized dealer to
make sure you get the correct color.
Before repairing minor paint damage, use
a cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
Always read the instructions before using
cleaning products.
CLEANING THE ALLOY
WHEELS (If Equipped)
Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to
warm or hot wheel rims and covers.
Note: Some automatic car washes may
cause damage to the finish on your wheel
rims and covers.
Note: Industrial-strength or heavy-duty
cleaners in combination with brush agitation
to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear
away the clear coat finish over a period time.
Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based
or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel
wool, fuels or strong household detergents.
Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your
vehicle for a few minutes before doing so.
This will reduce the risk of increased
corrosion of the brake discs.
Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated
with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain
their condition we recommend that you:
•Clean the wheels weekly using
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner.
Apply using manufacturer's
instructions.
•Use a sponge to remove heavy
deposits of dirt and brake dust
accumulation.
•Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream
of water when you have completed the
cleaning process.
•To remove tar and grease, use
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make
sure your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
We engineer and test all motor vehicles
and their components for reliable, regular
driving. Under various conditions,
long-term storage may lead to degraded
engine performance or failure unless you
use specific precautions to preserve engine
components.
General
•Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
•Protect from sunlight, if possible.
•If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.
Body
•Wash your vehicle thoroughly to
remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing
and the underside of front fenders.
•Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
261
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
•Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
•Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary
when you wash your vehicle.
•Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with
a light grade oil.
•Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
•Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
Engine
•Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil
contains contaminates which may
cause engine damage.
•Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
with the climate controls set to defrost
until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
•With your foot on the brake, shift
through all the gears while the engine
is running.
•We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
Fuel system
•Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the
fuel pump nozzle.
Cooling system
•Protect against freezing temperatures.
•When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm that there are no cooling
system leaks and that fluid is at the
recommended level.
Battery
•Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
•If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery,
we recommend that you disconnect
the battery cables to maintain battery
charge for quick starting.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if battery cables are disconnected.
Brakes
•Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.
Tires
•Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
•Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under your vehicle are covered
with grease to prevent rust.
•Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m)
every 15 days to lubricate working parts
and prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
•Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window
surfaces.
•Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
•Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage such as mice or squirrel
nests.
•Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage.
262
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
•Check tire pressures and set tire
inflation per the Tire Label.
•Check brake pedal operation. Drive
your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and
forth to remove rust build-up.
•Check fluid levels (including coolant,
oil and gas) to make sure there are no
leaks, and fluids are at recommended
levels.
•If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have
any concerns or issues.
263
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION
Use only approved wheel and tire sizes,
using other sizes could damage your
vehicle. If you change the diameter of the
tires from that fitted at the factory, the
speedometer may not display the correct
speed. Take your vehicle to an authorized
Ford dealer to have the system
reprogrammed. If you intend to change the
size of the wheels from that fitted by the
manufacturer, you can check the suitability
with an authorized dealer.
Additional information related to the
functionality and maintenance of your tires
can be found later in this chapter. See Tire
Care (page 267).
The Ford recommended tire inflation
pressures can be found on the Tire Label,
which is located on the B-pillar or the edge
of the driver's door. This information can
also be found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door last post;
next to the driver’s seating position).
Ford strongly recommends maintaining
these tire pressures at all times. Failure to
follow the tire pressure recommendations
can cause uneven treadwear patterns,
reduced fuel economy, and adversely
affect the way your vehicle handles.
Note: Check and set the tire pressure at the
ambient temperature in which you are
intending to drive your vehicle and when the
tires are cold.
Note: Check your tire pressures at least
once per month.
Set the pressure for your spare tire to the
highest value given for your vehicle and tire
size combination (if equipped).
Notice to utility vehicle and truck
owners
WARNINGS
Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types
of vehicles. To reduce the risk of
serious injury or death from a rollover or
other crash you must avoid sharp turns and
abrupt maneuvers, drive at safe speeds for
the conditions, keep tires inflated to Ford
recommended pressures, never overload
or improperly load your vehicle, and make
sure every passenger is properly restrained.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seat belt.
All occupants must wear seat belts and
children/infants must use appropriate
restraints to minimize the risk of injury or
ejection.
Do not become overconfident in the
ability of four-wheel drive vehicles.
Although a four-wheel drive vehicle
may accelerate better than a two-wheel
drive vehicle in low traction situations, it
won't stop any faster than two-wheel drive
vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
E145298
264
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in the
various driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways and
off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high
as passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
Study your owner's manual and any
supplements for specific information about
equipment features, instructions for safe
driving and additional precautions to
reduce the risk of an accident or serious
injury.
Four-wheel drive system (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not become overconfident in the
ability of four-wheel drive vehicles.
Although a four-wheel drive vehicle
may accelerate better than a two-wheel
drive vehicle in low traction situations, it
won't stop any faster than two-wheel drive
vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
A vehicle equipped with four-wheel drive
(when selected) has the ability to use all
four wheels to power itself. This increases
traction which may enable you to safely
drive over terrain and road conditions that
a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle
cannot.
Power is supplied to all four wheels
through a transfer case or power transfer
unit. Four-wheel drive vehicles allow you
to select different modes as necessary. For
information on transfer case operation and
shifting procedures, See Four-Wheel
Drive (page 158). For information on
transfer case maintenance, See
Maintenance (page 232). You should
become thoroughly familiar with this
information before you operate your
vehicle.
On some four-wheel drive vehicles, the
initial shift from two-wheel to four-wheel
drive while the vehicle is moving can cause
a momentary clunk and ratcheting sound.
These sounds are normal and are not
cause for concern.
For four-wheel drive vehicles, a spare tire
of a different size other than the tire
provided should never be used. A dissimilar
spare tire size (other than the spare tire
provided) or major dissimilar tire sized
between the front and rear axles could
cause the four-wheel drive system to stop
functioning and default to front-wheel
drive. See Using Four-Wheel Drive (page
158).
How your vehicle differs from
other vehicles
Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ
from some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be:
265
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E145299
•Higher - to allow higher load carrying
capacity and to allow it to travel over
rough terrain without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
•Shorter - to give it the capability to
approach inclines and drive over the
crest of a hill without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
All other things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs
than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
•Narrower - to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
E168583
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, Sport utility vehicles and
trucks often will have a higher center of
gravity and a greater difference in center
of gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition. These differences that
make your vehicle so versatile also make
it handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
266
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform
Tire Quality Grading
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
The Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For
example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the
United States Department of
Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
They do not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use
spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or
limited production tires as defined
in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
U.S. Department of
Transportation Tire quality
grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires Ford
Motor Company to give you the
following information about tire
grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1
½) times as well on the
government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING
The traction grade assigned
to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
267
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
The traction grades, from highest
to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled
conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING
The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
*Tire label: A label showing the
original equipment tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure
and the maximum weight the
vehicle can carry.
*Tire Identification Number
(TIN): A number on the sidewall
of each tire providing information
about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and
date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
*Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire.
*Standard load: A class of
P-metric or Metric tires designed
to carry a maximum load at set
pressure. For example: For
P-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) or
36 psi (2.5 bar) depending on tire
size and for Metric tires 36 psi
(2.5 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will
not increase the tire’s load
carrying capability.
*Extra load: A class of P-metric
or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 42 psi
(2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will
not increase the tire’s load
carrying capability.
268
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of
air pressure.
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
standard unit of air pressure.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire
pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct
sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for
1 mile (1.6 kilometers).
*Recommended inflation
pressure: The cold inflation
pressure found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door.
B-pillar: The structural member
at the side of the vehicle behind
the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of
the tire next to the rim.
* Sidewall of the tire: Area
between the bead area and the
tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of
the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted
on the vehicle.
*Rim: The metal support (wheel)
for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Information Contained on the
Tire Sidewall
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
Information on P Type Tires
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
CDEFG
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of
a tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example).
269
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that may be used for service on
cars, sport utility vehicles,
minivans and light trucks. Note: If
your tire size does not begin with
a letter this may mean it is
designated by either the European
Tire and Rim Technical
Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load
index. It is an index that relates to
how much weight a tire can carry.
You may find this information in
your owner’s manual. If not,
contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed
rating. The speed rating denotes
the speed at which a tire is
designed to be driven for extended
periods of time under a standard
condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle
may operate at different
conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may
need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The
ratings range from 81 mph (130
km/h) to 186 mph (299 km/h).
These ratings are listed in the
following chart.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
mph ( km/h)Letter
rating
81 (130)M
87 (140)N
99 (159)Q
106 (171)R
112 (180)S
118 (190)T
124 (200)U
130 (210)H
149 (240)V
270
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
mph ( km/h)Letter
rating
168 (270)W
186 (299)Y
Note: For tires with a maximum
speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers
sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph (299
km/h), tire manufacturers always
use the letters ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number: This begins with the
letters DOT and indicates that the
tire meets all federal standards.
The next two numbers or letters
are the plant code designating
where it was manufactured, the
next two are the tire size code and
the last four numbers represent
the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers
317 mean the 31st week of 1997.
After 2000 the numbers go to four
digits. For example, 2501 means
the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are
identification codes used for
traceability. This information is
used to contact customers if a tire
defect requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and
Material Used: Indicates the
number of plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the ply materials in the tire and the
sidewall, which include steel,
nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the
tire. (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire
Label located on the B-pillar or
the edge of the driver's door.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
*Treadwear The treadwear grade
is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear 1½ times as well
on the government course as a tire
graded 100.
*Traction: The traction grades,
from highest to lowest are AA, A,
B, and C. The grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
271
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
*Temperature: The temperature
grades are A (the highest), B and
C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation
Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers' maximum
permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the vehicle manufacturer's
recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on
the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower
than the recommended pressure
on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have
additional markings, notes or
warnings such as standard load
or radial tubeless.
Additional Information
Contained on the Tire Sidewall
for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A
BC
B
D
E142544
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires. These differences are
described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that is intended for service on light
trucks.
B. Load Range and Load
Inflation Limits: Indicates the
tire's load-carrying capabilities
and its inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual;
defined as four tires on the rear
axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
272
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
D. Maximum Load Single lb
(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates
the maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is used as
a single; defined as two tires
(total) on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a
tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.
A
BCDE
E142545
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires. These differences are
described below:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for
temporary service on cars, sport
utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width. Numbers of 70 or
lower indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label
containing tire inflation pressure
by tire size and other important
information located on the B-Pillar
or the edge of the driver's door.
273
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle
requires that your tires are
properly inflated. Remember that
a tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to
check pressure of all tires and
adjust if required.
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and
check the tire pressure with a tire
gauge (including spare, if
equipped). Inflate all tires to the
inflation pressure recommended
by Ford Motor Company.
You are strongly urged to buy a
reliable tire pressure gauge, as
automatic service station gauges
may be inaccurate. Ford
recommends the use of a digital
or dial-type tire pressure gauge
rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold
inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear.
Under-inflation or over-inflation
may cause uneven treadwear
patterns.
WARNING
Under-inflation is the most
common cause of tire failures
and may result in severe tire
cracking, tread separation or
blowout, with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increases
sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat
buildup and internal damage to
the tire. It also may result in
unnecessary tire stress, irregular
wear, loss of vehicle control and
accidents. A tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the
Ford recommended inflation
pressure even if it is less than the
maximum inflation pressure
information found on the tire. The
Ford recommended tire inflation
pressure is found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post,
or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire
Label located on the B-pillar or
the edge of the driver's door.
Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your
vehicle handles.
274
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Note: Do not reduce tire pressure
to change the ride characteristics
of the vehicle. If you do not
maintain the inflation pressure at
the levels specified by Ford, your
vehicle may experience a condition
known as shimmy. Shimmy is a
severe vibration and oscillation in
the steering wheel after the vehicle
travels over a bump or dip in the
road that does not dampen out by
itself. Shimmy may result from
significant under-inflation of the
tires, improper tires (load range,
size, or type), or vehicle
modifications such as lift-kits. In
the event that your vehicle
experiences shimmy, you should
slowly reduce speed by either lifting
off the accelerator pedal or lightly
applying the brakes. The shimmy
will cease as the vehicle speed
decreases.
Maximum Inflation Pressure is
the tire manufacturer's maximum
permissible pressure and the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the manufacturer’s recommended
cold inflation pressure which can
be found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower
than the recommended pressure
on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
When weather temperature
changes occur, tire inflation
pressures also change. A 10°F
(6°C) temperature drop can
cause a corresponding drop of 1
psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure.
Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the
proper pressure which can be
found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your
tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool,
meaning they are not hot from
driving even a mile.
Note: If you are checking tire
pressure when the tire is hot, (for
example, driven more than 1 mile
[1.6 kilometers]), never bleed or
reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for
pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A
hot tire at or below recommended
cold inflation pressure could be
significantly under-inflated.
275
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Note: If you have to drive a
distance to get air for your tire(s),
check and record the tire pressure
first and add the appropriate air
pressure when you get to the
pump. It is normal for tires to heat
up and the air pressure inside to go
up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve
on one tire, then firmly press the
tire gauge onto the valve and
measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the
recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release
air by pressing on the metal stem
in the center of the valve. Then
recheck the pressure with your tire
gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each
tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at
a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T type mini-spare
tires, (see the Dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly
information for a description. Store
and maintain at 60 psi (4.15 bar).
For full-size and dissimilar spare
tires, see the Dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly information for
a description. Store and maintain
at the higher of the front and rear
inflation pressure as shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to
make sure there are no nails or
other objects embedded that
could poke a hole in the tire and
cause an air leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make
sure there are no gouges, cuts or
bulges.
Tire Inflation Information
WARNING
An inflated tire and rim can
be very dangerous if
improperly used, serviced or
maintained. To reduce the risk of
serious injury, never attempt to
re-inflate a tire which has been run
flat or seriously under-inflated
without first removing the tire
from the wheel assembly for
inspection. Do not attempt to add
air to tires or replace tires or
wheels without first taking
precautions to protect persons
and property.
All tires with Steel Carcass Plies
(if equipped):
This type of tire utilizes steel cords
in the sidewalls. As such, they
cannot be treated like normal light
truck tires. Tire service, including
adjusting tire pressure, must be
performed by personnel trained,
supervised and equipped
according to Federal Occupational
Safety and Health Administration
regulations. For example, during
276
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
any procedure involving tire
inflation, the technician or
individual must utilize a remote
inflation device, and ensure that
all persons are clear of the
trajectory area.
277
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNING
Stay out of the trajectory (1)
as indicated in the illustration.
Inspecting Your Tires and
Wheel Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads
for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones,
nails or glass that may be wedged
in the tread grooves. Check the tire
and valve stems for holes, cracks,
or cuts that may permit air
leakage and repair or replace the
tire and replace the valve stem.
Inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other
signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire
is suspected, have the tire
demounted and inspected in case
it needs to be repaired or replaced.
For your safety, tires that are
damaged or show signs of
excessive wear should not be used
because they are more likely to
blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to
wear abnormally. Inspect all your
tires, including the spare,
frequently, and replace them if
one or more of the following
conditions exist:
278
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Tire Wear
E142546
When the tread is worn down to
one sixteenth of an inch (2
millimeters), tires must be
replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or wear bars, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will
appear on the tire when the tread
is worn down to one sixteenth of
an inch (2 millimeters).
When the tire tread wears down
to the same height as these wear
bars, the tire is worn out and must
be replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads
and sidewalls for damage (such
as bulges in the tread or sidewalls,
cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or
sidewall). If damage is observed
or suspected have the tire
inspected by a tire professional.
Tires can be damaged during
off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also
recommended.
Age
WARNING
Tires degrade over time
depending on many factors
such as weather, storage
conditions, and conditions of use
(load, speed, inflation pressure)
the tires experience throughout
their lives.
In general, tires should be
replaced after six years regardless
of tread wear. However, heat
caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading conditions
can accelerate the aging process
and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire
when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if
it has not been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
279
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT
and indicates that the tire meets
all federal standards. The next
two numbers or letters are the
plant code designating where it
was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last
four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
Tire Replacement
Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride
and handling capability.
WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires
and wheels that are the same
size, load index, speed rating and
type (such as P-metric versus
LT-metric or all-season versus
all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The
recommended tire and wheel size
WARNINGS
may be found on either the Safety
Compliance Certification Label or
the Tire Label. If this information
is not found on these labels then
you should contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Use of any tire or wheel
not recommended by Ford can
affect the safety and performance
of your vehicle, which could result
in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
Additionally the use of
non-recommended tires and
wheels could cause steering,
suspension, axle, transfer case or
power transfer unit failure. If you
have questions regarding tire
replacement, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury, when mounting
replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum
pressure indicated on the sidewall
of the tire to set the beads without
additional precautions listed
below. If the beads do not seat at
the maximum pressure indicated,
re-lubricate and try again.
280
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
When inflating the tire for
mounting pressures up to 20 psi
(1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure on the tire
sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to
protect the person mounting the
tire:
1. Make sure that you have the
correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and
wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft
(3.6 m) away from the wheel and
tire assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear
protection.
For a mounting pressure more
than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than
the maximum pressure, a Ford
dealer or other tire service
professional should do the
mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires
with a remote air fill with the
person inflating standing at a
minimum of 12 ft (3.6 m) away
from the wheel and tire assembly.
Important: Remember to replace
the wheel valve stems when the
road tires are replaced on your
vehicle.
The two front tires or two rear tires
should generally be replaced as a
pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted
in the wheels are not designed to
be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by Ford Motor
Company may affect the
operation of your tire pressure
monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring
system indicator is flashing, the
system is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be
incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or
some component of the system
may be damaged.
Safety Practices
WARNINGS
If your vehicle is stuck in
snow, mud, or sand, do not
rapidly spin the tires; spinning the
tires can tear the tire and cause
an explosion. A tire can explode in
as little as three to five seconds.
Do not spin the wheels at
over 35 mph (56 km/h). The
tires may fail and injure a
passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal
to do with your tire mileage and
safety.
*Observe posted speed limits.
281
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns.
*Avoid potholes and objects on
the road.
*Do not run over curbs or hit the
tire against a curb when parking.
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive
there’s always the possibility that
you may eventually have a flat tire
on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic.
This may further damage the flat
tire, but your safety is more
important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or
ride disturbance while driving, or
you suspect your tire or vehicle
has been damaged, immediately
reduce your speed. Drive with
caution until you can safely pull
off the road. Stop and inspect the
tires for damage. If a tire is
under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and
replace it with your spare tire and
wheel. If you cannot detect a
cause, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest repair facility or tire
dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or
pothole can cause the front end
of your vehicle to become
misaligned or cause damage to
your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you’re
driving, the wheels may be out of
alignment. Have an authorized
dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front
or the rear can cause uneven and
rapid treadwear of your tires and
should be corrected by an
authorized dealer. Front-wheel
drive vehicles and those with an
independent rear suspension may
require alignment of all four
wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire
and wheel assembly may result in
irregular tire wear.
Tire Rotation
WARNING
If the tire label shows
different tire pressures for the
front and rear tires and the vehicle
is equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system, then the
settings for the system sensors
need to be updated. Always
perform the system reset
procedure after tire rotation. If the
system is not reset, it may not
provide a low tire pressure
warning when necessary.
282
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Note: If your tires show uneven
wear ask an authorized dealer to
check for and correct any wheel
misalignment, tire imbalance or
mechanical problem involved
before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be
equipped with a dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly. A
dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is
different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and
wheels. If you have a dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly it is
intended for temporary use only
and should not be used in a tire
rotation.
Note: After having your tires
rotated, inflation pressure must be
checked and adjusted to the
vehicle requirements.
Rotating your tires at the
recommended interval (as
indicated in the Scheduled
Maintenance chapter) will help
your tires wear more evenly,
providing better tire performance
and longer tire life. Sometime
irregular tire wear can be
corrected by rotating the tires.
E142548
Rear-wheel drive vehicles and
four-wheel drive vehicles (front
tires at left of diagram).
E166988
Dual rear wheel drive vehicle - six
tire rotation (front tires at top of
diagram).
283
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
If your vehicle is equipped with
dual rear wheels it is
recommended that the front and
rear tires (in pairs) be rotated only
side to side. We do not
recommend splitting up the dual
rear wheels. Rotate them side to
side as a set. After tire rotation,
inflation pressures must be
adjusted for the tires new
positions in accordance with
vehicle requirements.
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING
Snow tires must be the same size,
load index, speed rating as those
originally provided by Ford. Use of
any tire or wheel not recommended by
Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death. Additionally, the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels could
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer
case or power transfer unit failure.
Note: Do not use snow chains on vehicles
with 20 inch wheels and tires.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather
treads to provide traction in rain and snow.
However, in some climates, you may need
to use snow tires and cables. If you need
to use cables, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and
specifications) be used, as cables may chip
aluminum wheels.
Note: The suspension insulation and
bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage.
Do not remove these components from your
vehicle when using snow tires and chains.
Follow these guidelines when using snow
tires and chains:
•If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle
•Use only SAE Class S chains.
•Install chains securely, verifying that
the chains do not touch any wiring,
brake lines or fuel lines.
•Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains
rub or bang against your vehicle, stop
and retighten the chains. If this does
not work, remove the chains to prevent
damage to your vehicle.
•Remove the tire chains when they are
no longer needed. Do not use tire
chains on dry roads.
If you have any questions regarding snow
chains or cables, please contact your
authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNING
The tire pressure monitoring system
is not a substitute for manually
checking the tire pressure. The tire
pressure should be checked periodically
(at least monthly) using a tire pressure
gauge. Failure to properly maintain your
tire pressure could increase the risk of tire
failure, loss of control, vehicle rollover and
personal injury.
284
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated
to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
The tire pressure monitoring system
complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Licence exempt RSS
Standards of Industry Canada. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
•This device may not cause harmful
interference.
•This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
285
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Changing Tires With a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
E142549
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is
not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor.
You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at
least monthly) using an accurate tire
gauge. See Inflating Your Tires in this
chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your four road tires
and sends the tire pressure readings to
your vehicle. The low tire pressure warning
light will turn on if the tire pressure is
significantly low. Once the light is
illuminated, your tires are under-inflated
and need to be inflated to the
manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
short time later turns off, your tire pressure
still needs to be checked.
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when
your tires need air. It can also warn you in
the event the system is no longer capable
of functioning as intended. See the
following chart for information concerning
your tire pressure monitoring system:
286
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Customer action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressure
warning light
Make sure tires are at the proper pres-
sure. See Inflating your tires in this
chapter. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended pressure
as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar),
the vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)
before the light turns off.
Tire(s) under-inflatedSolid warning light
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Tire pressure monitoring
system malfunction
On vehicles with different front and rear
tire pressures, the system must be
retrained following every tire rotation.
See Tire Care (page 267).
Tire rotation without
sensor training
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in useFlashing warning
light
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Tire pressure monitoring
system malfunction
287
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
When Inflating Your Tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at
a gas station or in your garage), the tire
pressure monitoring system may not
respond immediately to the air added to
your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving
over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn
off after you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system
monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic
tire. While driving in a normal manner, a
typical passenger tire inflation pressure
may increase about 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28
kPa) from a cold start situation. If the
vehicle is stationary overnight with the
outside temperature significantly lower
than the daytime temperature, the tire
pressure may decrease about 3 psi (21
kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient
temperature. This lower pressure value
may be detected by the tire pressure
monitoring system as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation
pressure and activate the system warning
light for low tire pressure.
If the low tire pressure warning light is on,
visually check each tire to verify that no tire
is flat. If one or more tires are flat, repair as
necessary. Check the air pressure in the
road tires. If any tire is under-inflated,
carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest
location where air can be added to the
tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset
Procedure
WARNING
To determine the required
pressure(s) for your vehicle, see the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver's door.
Note: You need to perform the tire pressure
monitoring system reset procedure after
each tire rotation on vehicles that require
different recommended tire pressures in the
front tires as compared to the rear tires.
Overview
To provide the vehicle's load carrying
capability, some vehicles require different
recommended tire pressures in the front
tires as compared to the rear tires. The tire
pressure monitoring system equipped on
these vehicles is designed to illuminate the
low tire pressure warning light at two
different pressures; one for the front tires
and one for the rear tires.
Since tires need to be rotated to provide
consistent performance and maximum tire
life, the tire pressure monitoring system
needs to know when the tires are rotated
to determine which set of tires are on the
front and which are on the rear. With this
information, the system can detect and
properly warn of low tire pressures.
System reset tips:
288
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
•To reduce the chances of interference
from another vehicle, perform the
system reset procedure at least three
feet (one meter) away from another
Ford Motor Company vehicle
undergoing the system reset procedure
at the same time.
•Do not wait more than two minutes
between resetting each tire sensor or
the system will time-out and the entire
procedure will have to be repeated on
all four wheels.
•A double horn will sound indicating the
need to repeat the procedure.
Performing the System Reset Procedure
Read the entire procedure before
attempting.
1. Drive the vehicle above 20 mph (32
km/h) for at least two minutes, then
park in a safe location where you can
easily get to all four tires and have
access to an air pump.
2. Place the ignition in the off position and
keep the key in the ignition.
3. Cycle the ignition to the on position
with the engine off.
4. Turn the hazard flashers on then off
three times. You must accomplish this
within 10 seconds. If the reset mode
has been entered successfully, the horn
will sound once, the system indicator
will flash and a message is shown in
the information display. If this does not
occur, please try again starting at Step
2. If after repeated attempts to enter
the reset mode, the horn does not
sound, the system indicator does not
flash and no message is shown in the
information display, seek service from
your authorized dealer.
5. Train the tire pressure monitoring
system sensors in the tires using the
following system reset sequence
starting with the left front tire in the
following clockwise order: Left front
(driver's side front tire), Right front
(passenger's side front tire), Right rear
(passenger's side rear tire), Left rear
(driver's side rear tire).
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the left front tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds.
Note: The single horn chirp confirms
that the sensor identification code has
been learned by the module for this
position. If a double horn is heard, the
reset procedure was unsuccessful, and
you must repeat it.
7. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the right front tire. Decrease
the air pressure until the horn sounds.
8. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the right rear tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds.
9. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem on the left rear tire. Decrease the
air pressure until the horn sounds.
Training is complete after the horn
sounds for the last tire trained (driver's
side rear tire), the system indicator
stops flashing, and a message is shown
in the information display.
10. Turn the ignition off. If two short horn
beeps are heard, the reset procedure
was unsuccessful and you must
repeat it. If after repeating the
procedure and two short beeps are
heard when the ignition is turned to
off, seek assistance from your
authorized dealer.
289
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
11. Set all four tires to the recommended
air pressure as indicated on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating position)
or Tire Label located on the B-Pillar
or the edge of the driver's door.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNINGS
The use of tire sealant may damage
your tire pressure monitoring system
and should only be used in roadside
emergencies. If you must use a sealant, the
Ford Tire Mobility Kit sealant should be
used. The tire pressure monitoring system
sensor and valve stem on the wheel must
be replaced by an authorized dealer after
use of the sealant.
If the tire pressure monitor sensor
becomes damaged, it will no longer
function. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 284).
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with the
tire pressure monitoring system, the
indicator light will illuminate when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not
apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe
place on the side of the road.
If your vehicle is equipped with the tire
pressure monitoring system, have a flat
serviced by an authorized dealer in order
to prevent damage to the system sensors.
See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 284). Replace the spare tire with a
road tire as soon as possible. During
repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have
the authorized dealer inspect the system
sensor for damage.
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING
Failure to follow these guidelines
could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and
tire, then it is intended for temporary use
only. This means that if you need to use it,
you should replace it as soon as possible
with a road wheel and tire assembly that
is the same size and type as the road tires
and wheels that were originally provided
by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel
is damaged, it should be replaced rather
than repaired.
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire
assembly that is different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire
begins with the letter T for tire size and
may have Temporary Use Only molded in
the sidewall.
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label
on wheel: This spare tire has a label on
the wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND
TIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE
ONLY
When driving with one of the dissimilar
spare tires listed above, do not:
290
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
•Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
•Load the vehicle beyond maximum
vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
Compliance Label.
•Tow a trailer.
•Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
•Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time.
•Use commercial car washing
equipment.
•Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires
listed above at any one wheel location can
lead to impairment of the following:
•Handling, stability and braking
performance.
•Comfort and noise.
•Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
•Winter weather driving capability.
•Wet weather driving capability.
•All-wheel driving capability.
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without
label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
•Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
•Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
•Use commercial car washing
equipment.
•Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
•Handling, stability and braking
performance.
•Comfort and noise.
•Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
•Winter weather driving capability.
•Wet weather driving capability.
•All-wheel driving capability.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
•Towing a trailer.
•Driving vehicles equipped with a
camper body.
•Driving vehicles with a load on the
cargo rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
and seek service as soon as possible.
Location of the Spare Tire and
Tools
If your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire,
jack and associated tools, see the
following table for their locations:
LocationTool
Under the vehicle, just forward of the rear
bumper
Spare tire (pick-up trucks only)
Regular cab and Crew Cab: Fastened to
floor pan behind rearmost seat on
passenger side
Jack
291
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
LocationTool
SuperCab: Under rear bench seat on
passenger side
Regular cab: Fastened to floor behind driver
seat
Jack handle, lug wrench, lug wrench exten-
sion (only available on dual rear wheel
vehicles) and wheel chock (only available
on single rear wheel vehicles equipped with
a diesel engine)
SuperCab: Fastened to floor under rear seat
Crew Cab: Fastened to floor behind rear
seat at driver side
In the glove boxKey and spare tire lock
Removing the Spare Tire (With
Spare Tire Carrier Only)
The following tools are required to remove
the spare tire:
E162795
One handle extension and two typical
extensions. To assemble, align the button
with the hole and slide the parts together.
To disconnect, press the button and pull
apart.
E162796
One wheel nut wrench. Slide over the
square end of the jack handle.
E162797
Note: For vehicles with dual rear wheels,
insert the lug wrench extension into the lug
wrench to reach the lug nuts.
292
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E162798
AB
AB
1. Attach the spare tire lock key (A) to the
jack handle (B).
E162799
2. Fully insert the jack handle (with one
extension) through the bumper hole
and into the guide tube. The key and
lock will engage with a slight push and
counterclockwise turn. You will feel
some resistance when you turn the jack
handle assembly.
3. Turn the handle counterclockwise and
lower the spare tire until you can slide
the tire rearward and the cable is slack.
4. Remove the retainer through the center
of the wheel. If your vehicle is equipped
with a tether, perform the following
steps.
E162800
5. Lift the spare tire on end to access the
tether attachment.
6. Use the lug wrench to remove the lug
nut from the spare tire tether.
7. If not replacing the spare or flat tire to
the underbody storage area, raise the
wheel retainer up into the installed
position.
8. Use the attached fastener strap (on
the spare tire tether) to attach the
tether end to the winch retainer prior
to raising to the installed position.
Tire Change Procedure
WARNINGS
When one of the front wheels is off
the ground, the transmission alone
will not prevent the vehicle from
moving or slipping off the jack, even if the
transmission is in park (P).
To help prevent the vehicle from
moving when you change a tire, be
sure to place the transmission in park
(P), set the parking brake and block (in
both directions) the wheel that is
diagonally opposite (other side and end of
the vehicle) to the tire being changed.
Never get underneath a vehicle that
is supported only by a jack. If the
vehicle slips off the jack, you or
someone else could be seriously injured.
293
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
Do not attempt to change a tire on
the side of the vehicle close to
moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
Always use the jack provided as
original equipment with your vehicle.
If using a jack other than the one
provided as original equipment with your
vehicle, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight, including
any vehicle cargo or modifications.
Note: Passengers should not remain in the
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Park on a level surface, set the parking
brake and activate the hazard flashers.
E142551
1. Turn the engine off and block the wheel
that is diagonally opposite of the flat
tire using the wheel chock. Note: Lock
the manual hub on the wheel if the
vehicle is a 4x4.
2. Remove the jack, jack handle, lug
wrench and spare tire from the
stowage locations.
3. Use the tip of the lug wrench to remove
any wheel trim.
4. Loosen each wheel lug nut ½ turn
counterclockwise, but do not remove
them until the wheel is raised off the
ground.
F-250 and F-350 Single Rear Wheel
Vehicles
E162801
1. Insert the hooked end of the jack
handle into the jack and use the handle
to slide the jack under the vehicle.
2. Position the jack according to the
following guides:
E162802
Front (4x2)
294
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E162803
Front driver side (4x4)
Note: Make sure the jack fits onto the flat
area on the outboard side of the differential.
E162804
Front passenger side (4x4)
Note: View shown from the rear of the
vehicle to clearly identify the jack point.
Place the jack directly under the axle.
E162805
Rear
Note: Jack at the specified locations to
avoid damage to the vehicle.
Jacking the Vehicle
E162811
1. Turn the jack handle clockwise until
the wheel is completely off the ground
and high enough to install the spare
tire.
2. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
3. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,
making sure the valve stem is facing
outward for all front wheels and single
rear wheel vehicles. If you are replacing
an inboard rear tire on dual rear wheel
vehicles, the valve stem must be facing
outward. If you are replacing the
outboard wheel, the valve stem must
be facing inward. Reinstall the lug nuts
until the wheel is snug against the hub.
Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until
the wheel has been lowered.
4. Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
5. Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page 301).
6. Stow the flat tire. See Stowing the flat
or spare tire if the vehicle is equipped
with a spare tire carrier.
295
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
7. Stow the jack, jack handle and lug
wrench. Make sure the jack is securely
fastened so it does not rattle when
driving.
8. Unblock the wheels.
E161441
1
3
4
2
7
6
5
8
8-lug nut torque sequence
1
2
3
4
56
7
8
9
10
E169375
10-lug nut torque sequence
E162820
When installing the wheel center
ornaments, make sure that the ornament
retention towers on the back side of the
ornament are aligned with the studs or lug
nuts. The retention towers are designed to
be installed over the studs or nuts and
retain to the flange on the lug nut.
E162821
If the ornament retention towers are
aligned between the studs or lug nuts, the
ornament is improperly installed. This
improper installation may appear and
sound correct, but will not keep the
ornament on the vehicle. Ornaments
improperly installed in this manner will fall
off or become loose with minimal force or
impact.
F-350 Dual Rear Wheel, F-450 and
F-550 Vehicles
E162812
296
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
1. Slide the notched end of the jack
handle over the release valve and use
the handle to slide the jack under the
vehicle. Make sure the valve is closed
by turning it clockwise.
2. Position the jack according to the
following guides:
E162813
Front (4x2): F-350 dual rear wheel
Note: Place the jack directly under the
I-beam.
E162814
Front driver side (4x4): F-350 dual rear
wheel
Note: Make sure the jack fits onto the flat
area on the outboard side of the differential
housing.
E162815
Front passenger side (4x4): F-350 dual
rear wheel
Note: View shown from the rear of the
vehicle to clearly identify the jack point.
Note: Place the jack directly under the axle
and inboard of the radius arm so that the
jack clears the radius arm.
E162816
Front: F-450 and F-550
297
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E162817
Rear: F-350 dual rear wheel
E162818
Rear: F-450 and F-550
Jacking the Vehicle
E162819
1. Insert the jack handle into the pump
linkage.
2. Use an up-and-down motion with the
jack handle to raise the wheel
completely off the ground.
Note: Hydraulic jacks are equipped with a
pressure release valve that prevents lifting
loads which exceed the jack's rated
capacity.
3. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
4. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,
making sure the valve stem is facing
outward on all front an inboard rear
wheels. If you are replacing the
outboard wheel, the valve stem must
be facing inward. Reinstall the lug nuts
until the wheel is snug against the hub.
Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until
the wheel has been lowered.
5. Lower the wheel by slowly turning the
release valve counterclockwise.
Opening the release valve slowly will
provide a more controlled rate of
descent.
6. Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page 301).
7. Stow the flat tire. See Stowing the flat
or spare tire if the vehicle is equipped
with a spare tire carrier.
8. Stow the jack, jack handle and lug
wrench. Make sure the jack is securely
fastened so it does not rattle when
driving.
9. Unblock the wheels.
298
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E161441
1
3
4
2
7
6
5
8
8-lug nut torque sequence
1
2
3
4
56
7
8
9
10
E169375
10-lug nut torque sequence
Installing Dual Rear Wheel Ornaments
A B
E162822
1. Align the ornament with the lug nuts.
A is the clip and B is the flange.
E162823
2. Hold the ornament so that all of the
retention clips are sitting on the flange
of the lug nuts.
A
C
B
D
E162824
3. Use your hand or rubber mallet to tap
the ornament in a star pattern. There
should be an even gap between the
ornament and the wheel.
4. Be sure to install all the clips on the
nuts over the flanges so that there is
an even gap all around and the
retention clips are fully seated.
299
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E162825
E162826
Stowing the Flat or Spare Tire
Note: Failure to follow spare tire stowage
instructions may result in failure of cable or
loss of spare tire.
Note: If you are stowing a tire that requires
reattaching it to the vehicle with a tether,
perform these steps first, then proceed with
the following steps.
1. Place the tire on end with the valve
stem facing toward the front of the
vehicle.
2. Place the tether into the bolt holes in
the wheel and attach the lug nut using
the lug wrench.
E162800
3. Lay the tire on the ground with the
valve stem facing up.
4. Slide the wheel partially under the
vehicle and install the retainer through
the wheel center. Pull on the cable to
align the components at the end of the
cable.
5. Turn the jack handle clockwise until
the tire is raised to its stowed position
underneath the vehicle. The effort to
turn the jack handle increases
significantly and the spare tire carrier
ratchets or slips when the tire is raised
to the maximum tightness. Tighten to
the best of your ability, to the point
where the ratchet/slip occurs, if
possible. The spare tire carrier will not
allow you to overtighten. If the spare
tire carrier ratchets or slips with little
effort, take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer for assistance at your
earliest convenience.
6. Check that the tire lies flat against the
frame and is properly tightened. Try to
push or pull, then turn the tire to be
sure it will not move. Loosen and
retighten, if necessary. Failure to
properly stow the spare tire may result
in failure of the winch cable and loss
of the tire.
300
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
7. Repeat this tightness check procedure
when servicing the spare tire pressure
(every six months, per scheduled
maintenance information), or at any
time that the spare tire is disturbed
through service of other components.
8. If removed, install the spare tire lock
into the bumper drive tube with the
spare tire lock key and jack handle.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials
present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub,
brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners
that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting
surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the
wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off
while the vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control.
lb.ft (Nm)Bolt size
165 lb.ft (224 Nm)M14 x 1.5
*Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford
recommended replacement fasteners.
On vehicles equipped with single rear wheels, retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque
at 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing
a flat tire, wheel removal).
On vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels, retighten the wheel lug nuts to the specified
torque at 100 miles (160 kilometers), and again at 500 miles (800 kilometers) of new
vehicle operation and after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat
tire, wheel removal).
It is important to follow the proper wheel mounting and lug nut torque procedures.
On all two-piece flat wheel nuts, apply one drop of motor oil between the flat washer
and the nut. Do not apply motor oil to the wheel nut threads or the wheel stud threads.
E161443
301
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E145950
Wheel pilot boreA
Inspect the wheel pilot hole and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.
302
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
6.8L V10 Engine6.2L V8 EngineEngine
413378Cubic inches
Minimum 87 octaneMinimum 87 octaneRequired fuel
1-6-5-10-2-7-3-8-4-91-5-4-8-6-3-7-2Firing order
Coil on plugCoil on plugIgnition system
0.039-0.043 inch (1.00-
1.10mm)
0.041-0.047 inch (1.04-1.20
mm)
Spark plug gap
9.2:19.8:1Compression ratio
Drivebelt Routing
6.2L Engines
E163761
6.8L Engines with A/C
E163762
6.8L Engines without A/C
E163763
303
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS
6.8L V10 engine6.2L V8 engineComponent
FA-1883FA-1883Air filter element
FL-820-SFL-820-SOil filter
BXT-65-650BXT-65-650Battery (standard)
BXT-65-750BXT-65-750Battery (optional)
SP-509SP-526Spark plugs-platinum
FS-104FS-104Seat filter
WW-2242 LH/RHWW-2242 LH/RHWindshield wiper blade
8C3Z-7A098-DBC3Z-7A098-BTransmission fluid filter
For scheduled maintenance, we recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at
your Ford dealer or at fordparts.com. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company’s
specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle
performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related
to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the
appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 453).
304
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
located on the left-hand side of the
instrument panel.
E142476
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
E142477
World manufacturer identifierA
Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
B
Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
C
Engine typeD
Check digitE
Model yearF
Assembly plantG
Production sequence numberH
305
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
E167469
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where
the Safety Compliance Certification Label
may be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post,
or the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.
TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION
E167814
The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
following table shows the transmission
code along with the transmission
description.
CodeDescription
TFive-speed automatic transmission 5R110W
PSix-speed automatic transmission 6R140
WSix-speed automatic transmission 6R140W
306
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 6.2L V8
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high
pressure. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Have the air conditioning refrigerant system serviced only by qualified personnel.
CapacityItem
7.0 qt (6.6 L)Engine oil
21.3 qt (20.2 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN and MAX on brake fluid
reservoir
Brake fluid
3.0 qt (2.8 L)Front axle
3.5 qt (3.3 L)Rear axle- F-250/350 (10.50 inch axle)
4.2 qt (4 L)Rear axle- F-350 (Dana M80)
7.0 qt (6.6 L)Rear axle- F-450/550 (Dana S110/S130)
16.7 qt (15.8 L)*Automatic transmission fluid
2.0 qt (1.9 L)Transfer case fluid
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
28 gal (106 L)Fuel tank (incomplete vehicle, steel tank,
middle location)
35 gal (132 L)Fuel tank (pickup)
40 gal (151 L)Fuel tank (incomplete vehicle , steel tank,
aft axle location)
29 oz (0.82 kg)A/C refrigerant
4.2 fl oz (125.09 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil
Refer to the diesel supplementFor diesel fluid capacities and specifica-
tions
*Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
307
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QFS
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A1Brake fluid (U.S.):
Motorcraft DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-1-C
WSS-M6C65-A1Brake fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
CPM-1-C
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSP-M2C197-AFront axle fluid :
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
308
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSL-M2C192-ARear axle fluid (F-250/350)(10.50 inch axle)(U.S. and
Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
WSL-M2C192-ARear axle fluid (F-250/350)(10.50 inch axle)(Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-75W140-1L
WSS-M2C918-ARear axle fluid (F350)(Dana M80):
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
WSL-M2C192-ARear axle fluid (F-450/550)(DanaS110/S130)(U.S. and
Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
WSL-M2C192-ARear axle fluid (F-450/550)(DanaS110/S130)(Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-75W140-1L
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
ESP-M2C166-HTransfer case fluid:
Motorcraft Transfer Case Fluid
XL-12
WSS-M2C938-APower steering fluid:
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C192-ASpindle bearing:
High Temperature 4x4 Front Axle and Wheel Bearing
Grease
XG-11
WSB-M8B16-A2Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with
Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSB-M8B16-A2Windshield washer fluid (Canada):
309
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A
--Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
WSD-M1C227-ATransmission, parking brake linkages and pivots, brake
pedal shift:
Motorcraft Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-E
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
•Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
•Longer engine cranking periods.
•Increased emission levels.
•Reduced engine performance.
•Reduced fuel economy.
•Degraded brake performance.
310
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
the International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The
use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 6.8L TRITON-30V - V10
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high
pressure. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Have the air conditioning refrigerant system serviced only by qualified personnel.
CapacityItem
7.0 qt (6.6 L)Engine oil
26.7 qt (25.3 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN and MAX on brake fluid
reservoir
Brake fluid
3.0 qt (2.8 L)Front axle
311
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CapacityItem
3.5 qt (3.3 L)Rear axle- F-250/350 (10.50 inch axle)
4.2 qt (4 L)Rear axle- F-350 (Dana M80)
7.0 qt (6.6 L)Rear axle- F-450/550 (Dana S110/S130)
17.5 qt (16.6 L)*Automatic transmission fluid
2.0 qt (1.9 L)Transfer case fluid
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
28 gal (106 L)Fuel tank (incomplete vehicle, steel tank,
middle location)
35 gal (132 L)Fuel tank (pickup)
40 gal (151 L)Fuel tank (incomplete vehicle , steel tank,
aft axle location)
29 oz (0.82 kg)A/C refrigerant
4.2 fl oz (125.09 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil
Refer to the diesel supplementFor diesel fluid capacities and specifica-
tions
*Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
312
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
XO-5W30-QFS
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A1Brake fluid (US):
Motorcraft DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-1-C
WSS-M6C65-A1Brake fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
CPM-1-C
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSP-M2C197-AFront axle fluid :
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
WSL-M2C192-ARear axle fluid (F-250/350)(10.50 inch axle)(U.S. and
Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
WSL-M2C192-ARear axle fluid (F-250/350)(10.50 inch axle)(Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-75W140-1L
WSS-M2C918-ARear axle fluid (F350)(Dana M80):
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
WSL-M2C192-ARear axle fluid (F-450/550)(DanaS110/S130)(U.S. and
Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
313
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSL-M2C192-ARear axle fluid (F-450/550)(DanaS110/S130)(Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-75W140-1L
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
ESP-M2C166-HTransfer case fluid:
Motorcraft Transfer Case Fluid
XL-12
WSS-M2C938-APower steering fluid:
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C192-ASpindle bearing:
High Temperature 4x4 Front Axle and Wheel Bearing
Grease
XG-11
WSB-M8B16-A2Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with
Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSB-M8B16-A2Windshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
314
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A
--Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
WSD-M1C227-ATransmission, parking brake linkages and pivots, brake
pedal shift:
Motorcraft Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-E
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
•Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
•Longer engine cranking periods.
•Increased emission levels.
•Reduced engine performance.
•Reduced fuel economy.
•Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
the International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
315
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The
use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
316
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by
the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
•AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz
•FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio Reception Factors
The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
Distance and strength
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Station overload
CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
4.75-inch (12 centimeter) audio compact
discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable
compact discs may not function correctly
when used in Ford CD players.
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player
as the label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. You should use a
permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs.
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact an authorized dealer for further
information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped
discs or discs with a scratch protection film
attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD
cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the
disc toward the edge. Do not clean in a
circular motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or
heat sources for extended periods.
MP3 Track and Folder Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and
playing MP3 individual tracks and folder
structures work as follows:
•There are two different modes for MP3
disc playback: MP3 track mode
(system default) and MP3 folder
mode.
•MP3 track mode ignores any folder
structure on the MP3 disc. The player
numbers each MP3 track on the disc
(noted by the .mp3 file extension) from
T001 to a maximum of T255. The
maximum number of playable MP3
files may be less depending on the
structure of the CD and exact model
of radio present.
317
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
•MP3 folder mode represents a folder
structure consisting of one level of
folders. The CD player numbers all MP3
tracks on the disc (noted by the .mp3
file extension) and all folders
containing MP3 files, from F001
(folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.
•Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through
the disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 discs, it is
important to understand how the system
reads the structures you create. While
various files may be present, (files with
extensions other than mp3), only files with
the .mp3 extension are played; other files
are ignored by the system. This enables
you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety
of tasks on your work computer, home
computer and your in-vehicle system.
In track mode, the system displays and
plays the structure as if it were only one
level deep (all .mp3 files play, regardless
of being in a specific folder). In folder
mode, the system only plays the .mp3 files
in the current folder.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
318
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
CLK: Press this button to switch the display between the clock and radio
frequency. To set the time, press and hold the button until the hours start to
flash. Press the arrow buttons (B) to adjust the hours, then repeat to set the
minutes. Press CLK again to exit clock mode.
A
Tune: Press these arrow buttons to manually search through the radio frequency
band. Press and hold for a fast search. In AUDIO mode, press the buttons to
adjust different sound settings.
B
AUDIO: Press this button to access settings for Treble, Middle, Bass, Fade and
Balance.
C
SEEK: Press this button to go to the previous or next strong station on the
frequency band.
D
Memory presets: Store your favorite radio stations. To store a radio station,
tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until sound returns.
E
AM/FM: Press this button to select a frequency band.F
VOL-PUSH: Press the button to switch the system on and off. Turn the control
to adjust the volume.
G
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM/CD/SYNC
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
319
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Eject: Press to eject a CD.A
CD slot: Insert a CD.B
Tune: Press to search through the radio frequency band manually. Press and
hold for a fast search.
C
Phone: Press to access the phone features of the SYNC system. See SYNC™
(page 329).
D
MENU: Press to access different audio system features.E
If your vehicle is equipped with satellite radio, you can access different menus
by pressing OK.
Set the time by pressing MENU until SET HOURS or SET MINUTES appears
and using the arrow buttons to adjust the time.
Set the strongest stations on the radio frequency by pressing MENU until
AUTOSET appears. AUTOSET does not override your original presets.
RBDS displays text transmitted by certain radio stations and searches for music
categories. To search for music categories, turn on RBDS (by using the SEEK
buttons when RBDS ON/OFF appears). Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through categories, then use the SEEK buttons to begin the search.
SPEEDVOL (speed compensated volume) allows you to adjust radio volume
to compensate for noise levels when vehicle speed increases.
320
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Track/Folder is only available on MP3 files when in CD mode. In track mode,
pressing the SEEK arrows allows you to scroll through all the tracks on the disc.
In folder mode, pressing the SEEK arrows allows you to scroll through all the
tracks within the selected folder. Press the FOLDER buttons to access other
folders.
COMPRESS (Compression) is only available in CD and MP3 modes. Switching
compression on brings the soft and loud passages together for a more consistent
listening level. Use the SEEK buttons and up and down arrow buttons to switch
it on and off.
AUX: Press to access the media features of the SYNC system. See SYNC™
(page 329).
F
SEEK: In radio mode, press and release these buttons to go to the next (or
previous) preset radio station or disc track. In CD and MP3 modes, press these
buttons to select the next (or previous) track, or press and hold to advance (or
reverse) within the same track.
G
Play, Pause and OK: Play and Pause allow you to play or pause a track when
listening to a CD. OK allows you to confirm commands with phone and media
features of the SYNC system. See SYNC™ (page 329).
H
SHUFFLE: Play music on the selected CD or MP3 folder in random order.I
FOLDER >: Press to access the next folder on an MP3 disc.J
< FOLDER: Press to access the previous folder on an MP3 disc.K
FF: Press to fast forward in a CD track or MP3 file manually.L
REW: Press to rewind in a CD track or MP3 file manually.M
Memory presets: Store your favorite radio stations. To store a radio station,
tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until sound returns.
N
TEXT/SCAN: In radio, CD and MP3 modes, press and hold to hear a brief
sampling of radio stations, CD tracks or MP3 files. In CD and MP3 modes, press
and release to display track title, artist name and disc title. In text mode,
sometimes the display requires additional text to show. When the < / > indicator
is on, press TEXT and then use the SEEK buttons to view the additional display
text.
O
AM/FM: Press to select a frequency band.P
VOL-PUSH: Press to switch the system off and on. Turn it to adjust the volume.Q
CD: Press to enter CD or MP3 mode.R
321
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM/CD/TOUCHSCREEN
DISPLAY
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: The MyFord Touch system controls
most of the audio features. See MyFord
Touch™ (page 374).
VOL and Power: Press this button to switch the system off and on. Turn it to
adjust the volume.
A
Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.B
CD slot: Insert a CD.C
TUNE: Turn this control to search through the radio frequency band manually.D
322
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Memory presets: Store your favorite radio stations. To store a radio station,
tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until sound returns.
E
Seek, Reverse and Fast Forward:F
In radio mode, select a frequency band and press one of these buttons. The
system stops at the first station it finds in that direction.
In Sirius mode, press these buttons to select the previous or next channel. If a
specific category is selected (such as Jazz, Rock or News), use these buttons
to find the previous or next channel in the selected category.
In CD mode, press these buttons to select the previous or next track.
MEDIA: Press this button to access different audio modes, such as AM, FM and
A/V Input.
G
DIGITAL RADIO
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit
www.hdradio.com.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the HD Radio logo on your
screen. When this logo is available, you
may also see Title and Artist fields
on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you
can access the following functions:
•Scan allows you to hear a brief
sampling of all available stations. This
feature still works when HD Radio
reception is on, although it does not
scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may
see the HD logo appear if the station
has a digital broadcast.
•Memory presets allow you to save an
active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot
until the sound returns. There is a brief
mute while the radio saves the station.
Sound returns when finished. When
switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory
preset, the sound mutes before the
digital audio plays, because the system
has to reacquire the digital signal.
323
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Note: As with any saved radio station, you
cannot access the saved station if your
vehicle is outside the station’s reception
area.
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on
the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due
to weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to
the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available
again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible
HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays
muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal
again.
When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the
analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an
HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending
on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change
when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending
is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to
analog sound.
Station blending
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
324
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Potential station issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is a
broadcast issue.
This is poor time alignment
by the radio broadcaster.
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat
in audio.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
No action required. The
reception issue may clear up
as you continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.
Sound fading or blending in
and out.
No action required. This is
normal behavior. Wait until
the audio is available.
The digital multicast is not
available until the HD Radio
broadcast is decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is avail-
able.
There is an audio mute
delay when selecting HD2 or
HD3, multicast preset or
Direct Tune.
No action required. The
station is not available in
your current location.
The previously stored
multicast preset or direct
tune is not available in your
current reception area.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3
multicast channel when
recalling a preset or from a
direct tune.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.*
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
Text information does not
match currently playing
audio.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.*
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
There is no text information
shown for currently selected
frequency.
No action required. This is
normal behavior.
Pressing Scan disables
HD2-HD7 channel search.
HD2-HD7 stations not found
when Scan is pressed.
* http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and
foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and
HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks
of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor
Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not
responsible for the content sent using HD
Radio technology. Content may be
changed, added or deleted at any time at
the station owner's discretion.
SATELLITE RADIO (If Equipped)
SIRIUS® broadcasts a variety of music,
news, sports, weather, traffic and
entertainment satellite radio channels. For
more information and a complete list of
SIRIUS satellite radio channels, visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS
at 1-888-539-7474.
325
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna
clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the
interference and the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal interfer-
ence
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right
to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
E142593
SIRIUS satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SIRIUS satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term,
which begins on the date of sale or lease
of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer
for availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio
channels, and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS
at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. When in
satellite radio mode, tune to channel 0.
326
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Troubleshooting
ActionConditionMessage
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
Radio requires more than
two seconds to produce
audio for the selected
channel.
Acquiring…
If this message does not
clear shortly, or with an igni-
tion key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See an
authorized dealer for service.
There is an internal module
or system failure present.
Satellite antenna fault
SIRIUS system failure
Tune to another channel or
choose another preset.
The channel is no longer
available.
Invalid Channel
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-
539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to
another channel.
Your subscription does not
include this channel.
Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When
you move into an open area,
the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the
SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS
tower to your vehicle
antenna.
No Signal
No action required. The
process may take up to
three minutes.
Update of channel
programming in progress.
Updating…
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-
539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.
Your satellite service is no
longer available.
Questions? Call
1-888-539-7474
Use the channel guide to
turn off the Lock or Skip
function on that station.
All the channels in the
selected category are either
skipped or locked.
None found
Check Channel Guide
No action required.SIRIUS has updated the
channels available for your
vehicle.
Subscription Updated
327
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
USB PORT (If Equipped)
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
E201595
The USB port allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices (if supported). See Using
SYNC™ With Your Media Player (page
355).
MEDIA HUB (If Equipped)
The media hub is located in a
compartment on top of the instrument
panel. Push down on the top of the
compartment to access the media hub.
E163162
C
B
A
A/V inputsA
SD card slotB
USB portsC
See MyFord Touch™ (page 374).
328
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION
SYNC is an in-vehicle communications
system that works with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and
portable media player. This allows you to:
•Make and receive calls.
•Access and play music from your
portable music player.
•Use 911 Assist, Vehicle Health Report
and SYNC Services (Traffic, Directions
& Information).*
•Use applications, such as Stitcher, via
SYNC AppLink.**
•Access phonebook contacts and music
using voice commands.
•Stream music from your connected
phone.
•Text message.
•Use the advanced voice recognition
system.
•Charge your USB device (if your device
supports this).
*These features are not available in all
markets and require activation.
**Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
market.
Make sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC.
Support
The SYNC support team is available to
help you with any questions you cannot
answer on your own.
329
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST.
Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST.
In the United States, call 1-800-392-3673.
In Canada, call 1-800-565-3673.
Times are subject to change due to
holidays.
SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
•Required to activate Vehicle Health
Report and to view the reports online.
•Required to activate the
subscription-based SYNC Services and
to personalize your Saved Points and
Favorites.
•Essential for keeping up with the latest
software downloads available for
SYNC.
•Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.
Driving Restrictions
For your safety, certain features are
speed-dependent and restricted when your
vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Safety Information
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
When using SYNC:
•Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
•Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's manual for further information.
•Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. See an authorized dealer.
Privacy Information
When a cellular phone is connected to
SYNC, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that is linked to that cellular
phone. This profile is created in order to
offer you more cellular features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other
things, this profile may contain data about
your cellular phone book, text messages
(read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cellular
phone was not connected to the system.
In addition, if you connect a media device,
the system creates and retains an index of
supported media content. The system also
records a short development log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent
system activity. The log profile and other
system data may be used to improve the
system and help diagnose any problems
that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index,
and development log will remain in the
vehicle unless you delete them and are
generally accessible only in the vehicle
when the cellular phone or media player
is connected. If you no longer plan to use
the system or the vehicle, we recommend
you perform a Master Reset to erase all
stored information.
330
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to the
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada will not
access the system data for any purpose
other than as described absent consent, a
court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government
authorities, or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may
seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the sections on 911 Assist,
Vehicle Health Report, and Traffic,
Directions and Information.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many
features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the
wheel and focus on what is in front of you.
Helpful Hints
•Make sure the interior of your vehicle is
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from
open windows and road vibrations may
prevent the system from correctly
recognizing spoken commands.
•After pressing the voice button, wait
until after the tone sounds and
Listening appears before saying a
command. Any command spoken
before this does not register with the
system.
•Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
•At any time, you can interrupt the
system while it is speaking by pressing
the voice button.
Initiating a Voice Session
E142599
Initiate a voice session by
pressing the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. See
Voice Control (page 67).
When prompted you can say any of the following:
If you want the system to carry out the followingVoice command
Stream audio from your phone.Bluetooth Audio
Cancel the requested action.Cancel
Access the device connected to the auxiliary input jack.Line In | Aux | Audio In
Access mobile applications.mobile (apps | applica-
tions)
Make calls.Phone
Access the device connected to your USB port.USB [1]
Run a vehicle health report.Vehicle Health (Report)
331
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
If you want the system to carry out the followingVoice command
Adjust the level of voice interaction and feedback.Voice Settings | Voice
Preferences
Hear a list of voice commands available in the current mode.Help
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where (cancel | stop | exit) appears you say; cancel or
stop or exit.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where mobile (apps | applications) appears, you must say mobile followed
by either apps or applications.
You do not need to say words that appear within square brackets. For example, for where
(USB [stick] | iPOD | MP3 [player]) appears, you can say USB or USB stick.
Note: SYNC Services and Vehicle health report are only available in the United States of
America.
System Interaction and Feedback
The system provides feedback through
audible tones, prompts, questions and
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of
interaction (voice settings). You can
customize the voice recognition system to
provide more or less instruction and
feedback.
The default setting is to a higher level of
interaction in order to help you learn to use
the system. You can change these settings
at any time.
Adjusting the Interaction Level
E142599
Initiate a voice session by
pressing the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. See
Voice Control (page 67).
When prompted say the following:
If you want the system to carry out the followingVoice command
Voice Settings | Voice Preferences
Followed by either of the following:
Provide more detailed interaction and guidance.Interaction Mode
Standard
Provide less audible interaction and more tone prompts.Interaction Mode
Advanced
The system defaults to the standard interaction mode.
332
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Confirmation prompts are short questions
the system asks when it is not sure of your
request or when there are multiple possible
responses to your request. For example,
the system may ask "Phone, is that
correct?". If turned off, the system simply
makes a best guess as to what you
requested and may ask you to confirm
settings.
If you want the system to carry out the followingVoice command
Make a best guess from the command; you may still occa-
sionally be asked to confirm settings.
Confirmation Prompts
Off
Clarify your voice command with a short question.Confirmation Prompts
On
The system creates candidate lists when
it has the same confidence level of several
options based on your voice command.
When turned on, it may prompt you with
as many as four possibilities for
clarification.
For example, say "Say 1 after the tone to
call John Doe at home. Say 2 after the tone
to call Johnny Doe on mobile. Say 3 after
the tone to call Jane Doe at home." You
could also say "Say 1 after the tone to play
John Doe, Say 2 after the tone to play
Johnny Doe."
If you want the system to carry out the followingVoice command
Make a best guess from the media candidate list. You may
still occasionally be asked questions.
Media Candidate Lists
Off
Clarify your voice command for media candidates.Media Candidate Lists On
Make a best guess from the phone candidate list. You may
still occasionally be asked questions.
Phone Candidate Lists
Off
Clarify your voice command for phone candidates.Phone Candidate Lists
On
333
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
PHONE
Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are
dependent on your cell phone's
functionality. At a minimum, most cell
phones with Bluetooth wireless technology
support the following functions:
•Answering an incoming call.
•Ending a call.
•Using privacy mode.
•Dialing a number.
•Redialing.
•Call waiting notification.
•Caller ID.
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are cell phone-dependent
features. To check your cell phone's
compatibility, see your cell phone's manual
and visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
Pairing a Cell Phone for the First
Time
Note: SYNC can support downloading up
to approximately 1000 entries per
Bluetooth-enabled cell phone.
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Put the transmission in
position park (P) (automatic transmission)
or neutral with the parking brake applied
(manual transmission).
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.
Wirelessly pairing your cell phone with
SYNC allows you to make and receive
hands-free calls.
Press the phone button. When the display indicates there is no cell phone paired,
do the following:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.No Phone Paired
Find SYNC 1. Press the OK button.
2. Put your cell phone into Bluetooth discovery mode. See
your device's manual if necessary.
3. When prompted on your cell phone's display, enter the
six-digit PIN provided by SYNC in the radio display. The
display indicates when the pairing is successful.
334
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Depending on your cell phone's capability
and your market, the system may prompt
you with questions, such as setting the
current cell phone as the primary cell
phone (the cell phone SYNC automatically
tries to connect with first upon vehicle
start-up) and downloading your
phonebook.
Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Put the transmission in
position park (P) (automatic transmission)
or neutral with the parking brake applied
(manual transmission).
Press the phone button, then scroll to:
ActionMessage
Press the OK button.Phone settings
Press the OK button.Bluetooth device
Press the OK button. When the following message appears
in the display.
Add
Find SYNC 1. Press the OK button.
2. Put your cell phone into Bluetooth discovery mode. See
your device's manual if necessary.
3. When prompted on your cell phone's display, enter the
six-digit PIN provided by SYNC in the radio display. The
display indicates when the pairing is successful.
The system then prompts with questions, such as if you would like to set the current cell
phone as the primary cell phone (the cell phone SYNC automatically tries to connect
with first upon vehicle start-up) or download your phonebook.
Phone Voice Commands
Press the voice icon and say:
Voice Commands
Phone
You can then say any of the following
commands.
Call History Incoming
Call History Missed
Call History Outgoing
Voice Commands
Phonebook ___
Phonebook ___ at Home
Phonebook ___ at Work
Phonebook ___ in Office
Phonebook ___ on Cell
___ is a dynamic listing that should be the
name of a contact in your phonebook. For
example you could say "Call Mom".
335
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
You can also say any of the following:
Voice Command
Call ___
Call ___ at Home
Call ___ at Work
Call ___ in Office
Call ___ on Mobile
Call ___ on Other
Dial
None of these commands are available
until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.
___ is a dynamic listing that should be the
name of a contact in your phonebook. For
example you could say "Call Mom".
The following commands are only
available during active calls:
Voice Commands
Go To Privacy
Hold
Join
Phone Menu Commands
To access the phone menu with voice
commands, press the voice button and
when prompted say:
Voice Command
[Phone] Menu
You can then say any of the following:
[Phone] Connections | [Media] Connec-
tions | [Bluetooth] Connections
Voice Command
[Phone] Settings [Message] Notification
On
[Phone] Settings [Message] Notification
Off
[Phone] Settings [Set] Phone Ringer
[Phone] Settings [Set] Ringer 1
[Phone] Settings [Set] Ringer 2
[Phone] Settings [Set] Ringer 3
[Phone] Settings [Set] Ringer Off
Battery
Phone Name
Signal
Text Message Inbox
Send [New] Text Message
You do not need to say word contained
within brackets for the system to
understand your command.
Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the
phone button or press MENU to go to the
PHONE menu.
Phonebook Commands
When you ask SYNC to access content, for
example the phonebook name or number,
the requested information appears in the
display to view.
336
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Making a Call
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
This command is not available until your cell phone informa-
tion is completely downloaded using Bluetooth.
Call ___
Use to enter a phone number digit by digit.Dial
When the system confirms the number say one of the following commands:
To confirm the number and initiate the call.Dial
To erase the last spoken digit. You can also press the left
arrow button.
delete
To erase all spoken digits. You can also press and hold the
left arrow button.
clear
To end a call, press and hold the red phone button.
Receiving Calls
When receiving a call, you can:
•Answer the call by pressing the phone
button.
•Reject the call by pressing and holding
the red phone button.
•Ignore the call by doing nothing.
Phone Options during an Active
Call
During an active call, you have more menu
features that become available, for
example putting a call on hold or joining
calls. Use the arrow buttons to scroll
through the menu options.
Press the MENU button during an active call, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Active call
Select one of the following:
Press the OK button to mute the call.Mute Call
Press the OK button to switch a call from an active hands-free envir-
onment to your cell phone for a more private conversation.
Privacy
Press the OK button to put an active call on hold.Hold
Join two separate calls. SYNC supports a maximum of three callers
on a multiparty call or conference call.
Join calls
337
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMessage
1. Press the phone button.
2. Access the desired contact through SYNC or use voice commands
to place the second call. Once actively in the second call, press
MENU.
3. Scroll to Join Calls, and press the OK button. Wait until the following
message appears.
Press the OK button.Join calls
Enter tones such as numbers for passwords. Scroll until the desired
number appears in the display, then press OK; a tone sounds as
confirmation. Repeat as necessary.
Enter Tones
To access your phonebook contacts.Phonebook
1. Press the OK button to select, and then scroll through your
phonebook contacts.
2. Press the OK button again when the desired selection appears in
the display.
3. Press the phone button to call the contact.
To access your call history log.Call History
1. Press the OK button to select, then scroll through your call history
options (incoming, outgoing or missed).
2. Press the OK button when the desired selection appears in the
display.
3. Press the phone button to call the selection.
Exit the current menu.Return
Accessing Features Through the
Phone Menu
The phone menu allows you to redial a
number, access your call history and
phonebook and sends text messages as
well as access cell phone and system
settings. You can also access advanced
features, for example 911 Assist, Vehicle
Health Report and SYNC Services.
338
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button to redial the last number called.Phone Redial
Press the OK button again to confirm.
Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls after you
connect your Bluetooth-enabled cell phone to SYNC.1
Call History
Press the OK button then select one of the following and press
the OK button again to confirm.
Incoming calls
Outgoing calls
Missed calls
The system attempts to automatically re-download your
phonebook and call history each time your cell phone connects
to SYNC (if the auto download feature is on and your Bluetooth-
enabled cell phone supports this feature).
Access and call any contacts in your previously downloaded
phonebook.1,2
Phonebook
If your phonebook has less than 255 entries, they appear
alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than 255
entries, the system will organize them into alphabetical
categories.
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to the desired contact.
3. Press OK or the phone button to call the contact.
Press the OK button to send, download, read and delete text
messages.1
Text messaging
View your cell phone's status, set ring tones, select your
message notification, change phonebook entries and automat-
ically download your cell phone content among other features.1
Phone settings
Access the SYNC Services portal where you can request various
types of information, for example traffic reports and directions.3
SYNC Services
Automatically place an emergency call to a 911 operator
following a crash.4
911 Assist
339
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMessage
Create and receive a diagnostic report card on your vehicle.3
Vehicle Health
Interact with SYNC-capable mobile applications on your
smartphone.
Mobile Apps
Access Bluetooth Devices menu listings and advanced menu
listings.
Sys Settings
Press the OK button to exit the phone menu.Exit
1 This is a cell phone-dependent feature.
2 This is a cell phone-dependent and speed-dependent feature.
3 This is an optional feature and available in the United States only.
4 This is an optional feature and available in the United States and Canada only.
Text Messaging
Note: This is a cell phone-dependent
feature.
SYNC allows you to receive, send,
download and delete text messages. The
system can also read incoming text
messages to you so that you do not have
to take your eyes off the road.
Note: This is a cell phone-dependent
feature.
Receiving a Text Message
Note: This is a cell phone-dependent
feature. Your cell phone must support
downloading text messages using Bluetooth
to receive incoming text messages.
Note: Forwarding a text message is a
speed-dependent feature. It is only available
when your vehicle is traveling at 3 mph (5
km/h) or less.
Note: Only one recipient is allowed per text
message.
When a new text message arrives, an
audible tone sounds and the information
display indicates you have a new message.
Following the notification you can do
any of the following:
Do nothing to have the message go into
your text message inbox.
To have SYNC read you the message using voice commands, press the voice
button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
SYNC will read the most recent text message to you.Read Message | Read
Text Message | Text
Message
340
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
To open the test message, press OK to
receive and open the text message. Press
OK again and SYNC reads your message
aloud as you are not able to view the
message. You can then also choose
whether you’d like to reply or forward the
message.
Reply or forward the message, press OK and scroll to choose between:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button to access and then scroll through the
list of pre-defined messages to send.
Reply to sender
Press the OK button to forward the message to anyone in
your Phonebook or Call History. You can also choose enter a
number.
Forward msg.
Sending, Downloading and Deleting
Your Text Messages
Text messaging is a cell phone-dependent
feature. If your cell phone is compatible,
SYNC allows you to receive, send,
download and delete text messages.
Note: Sending a text message is a
speed-dependent feature. It is only available
when your vehicle is traveling at 3 mph (5
km/h) or less.
Note: You can only have one recipient per
text message.
Press the phone button, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Text messaging
Select one of the following:
Allows you to send a new text message based on a pre-
defined set of 15 messages.
Send Text Message?
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to your desired message.
3. Press the OK button.
4. Scroll through your phonebook, call history entries or enter
a new number.
5. Press the OK button to enter the desired contact.
6. Press the OK button again when the system asks if you
would like to send the message. The system sends each
text message with the following signature: This message
was sent from my Ford.
341
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMessage
Allows you to download your unread messages to SYNC. To
download the messages, press the OK button to select. The
display indicates the system is downloading your messages.
When downloading is complete, SYNC returns you to the
inbox.
Download now
Allows you to delete current text messages from SYNC. To
delete the messages, press the OK button to select. The
display indicates when it is finished deleting all your text
messages. SYNC returns you to the text message menu.
Delete All Messages?
Press the OK button to exit the current menu.Return
Accessing Your Phone Settings
These are cell phone-dependent features.
Your cell phone settings allow you to
access and adjust some features. For
example ring tones, text message
notification, modify your phonebook and
set up automatic download.
Press the phone button, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Phone settings
Select one of the following:
See the provider, name, signal power, battery power and roaming
status of your connected cell phone.
Phone status
Press OK to select and scroll to view the information. When done,
press OK again to return to the phone status menu.
Select which ring tone sounds during an incoming call. You can choose
one of the system ring tones or your cell phone ring tones.
Set ringtone
Press the OK button and scroll to hear the available options. You can
also choose to use to use your phone's ring tone.
Press the OK button to select the desired ring tone. If your cell phone
supports in-band ringing, your cell phone ring plays when you choose
the phone ringer option.
You have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you when a
text message arrives.
Text msg notify
342
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button then select one of the following and press the
OK button again to confirm.
Message Notification On
Message Notification Off
Modify the contents of your phone book (such as add, delete, down-
load). Press OK to select and scroll between:
Modify Phone-
book
Press the OK button to add more contacts from your
phonebook. Push the desired contact(s) on your cell
phone. See your cell phone's manual on how to push
contacts.
Add contacts
Press OK to delete the current phone book and call
history. When Delete Phonebook appears, press OK
to confirm. SYNC takes you back to the Phone
Settings menu.
Delete Phone-
book
Press OK to select and press OK again when Confirm
Download? appears.
Download
Phonebook
Automatically download your phone book each time your phone
connects to SYNC. Press OK to select.
Auto-download
When this message appears, press OK to have your
phonebook automatically downloaded each time.
Auto On?
Select Off to NOT download your phonebook every
time your phone connects to SYNC. Your phonebook,
call history and text messages can only be accessed
when your specific phone is connected to SYNC. *
When enabled, SYNC speaks the contact name that is displayed on
the screen during phonebook browsing.
Speak Names
Exit the current menu.Return
* Downloading times are cell phone-dependent and quantity-dependent. When Auto
Download is on, it automatically deletes any changes, additions or deletions saved since
your last download.
System Settings
This menu provides access to your
Bluetooth Devices and Advanced menu
features. Use the arrow buttons to scroll
through the menu options.
Bluetooth Devices
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you
to add, connect and delete devices, set a
cell phone as primary as well as turn your
Bluetooth feature on and off.
343
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Press the Phone button to enter the Phone Menu, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Sys Settings
Press the OK button.Bluetooth device
Select one of the following:
See Using SYNC™ With Your Phone (page 334). 1
Add
Connect a previously paired Bluetooth-enabled phone. 2
Connect BT
Press OK to select and view a list of previously paired phones.
Scroll until the desired device is chosen, then press OK to
connect the phone.
Set a previously paired phone as your primary phone. 3
Set Primary?
Press OK to select and scroll to select the desired phone.
Press OK to confirm.
Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.4
Bluetooth On and Off
Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and Off. When the
desired selection is chosen, press OK.
Setting Bluetooth to off disconnects all Bluetooth devices
and turns off all Bluetooth features.
Delete a paired cell phone.Del Device
Press the OK button and scroll to select the device. Press OK
to confirm.
Delete all previously paired phones (and all information
originally saved with those phones).
Delete all
Press OK to select.
Exit the current menu.Return
1 This is a speed-dependent feature. It is only available when your vehicle is traveling at
3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
2 You can only connect one device at a time. When another cell phone is connected, the
previous one is disconnected.
3 SYNC attempts to connect with the primary phone at every ignition cycle. When a phone
is selected as primary, it appears first in the list and is marked with an asterisk (*).
4Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all Bluetooth devices and deactivates all Bluetooth
features.
344
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Advanced
The Advanced menu allows you to access
and set prompts, languages, defaults,
perform a master reset, install an
application and view system information.
To access the advanced menu, press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu,
the scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press OK.Sys Settings
Press OK.Advanced
Select one of the following:
Get help from SYNC by using questions, helpful hints or asking
you for a specific action. To turn these prompts on or off:
Confirmation Prompts
1. Press the OK button to select and scroll to select between
On and Off.
2. Press the OK button when the desired selection appears
in the display. SYNC returns you to the Advanced menu.
1. Press OK to select and then scroll through the languages.
Choose between English, Français and Español. Once
selected, all of the radio displays and prompts are in the
selected language.
2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in the
display. If you change the language setting, the display
indicates that the system is updating. When complete,
SYNC returns you to the Advanced menu.
Language
Return to the factory default settings. This selection does
not erase your indexed information, for example phonebook,
call history, text messages or paired devices.
Factory Defaults
Press the OK button to select and then press OK again when
the following message appears in the display.
Confirm Restore
Completely erase all information stored on SYNC, for example
phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices,
and return the system to the factory default settings.
Master reset
Press OK to select. The display indicates when complete.
SYNC returns you to the Advanced menu.
Install applications you have downloaded.Install Applications
345
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button and scroll to select. Press the OK button
to confirm.
Access the Auto Version number as well as the FDN number.System info
Press the OK button to select.
Exit the current menu.Return
SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND
SERVICES
In order for the following features to work,
your cell phone must be compatible with
SYNC. To check your phone's
compatibility, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
•SYNC Services*: Provides access to
traffic, directions and information such
as travel, horoscopes, stock prices and
more.
•911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of
an emergency.
•Vehicle Health Report*: Provides a
diagnostic and maintenance report
card of your vehicle.
*This is an optional feature and available
in the United States only.
911 Assist (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on
before a crash, the system will not
dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
WARNINGS
Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
Always place your phone in a secure
location in your vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or get damaged
in a crash. Failure to do so may cause
serious injury to someone or damage the
phone which could prevent 911 Assist from
working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user turns 911 Assist on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is turned off, either a voice
message plays or a display message (or
icon) comes on (or both) when your vehicle
is started after a previously paired phone
connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
346
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding
knee airbags and rear inflatable safety
belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel
pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped
vehicle may be able to contact emergency
services by dialing 911 through a paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You
can learn more about the 911 Assist
feature, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 37). Important information about
airbag deployment is in this chapter.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 212).
Important information about the fuel pump
shut-off is in this chapter.
Switching 911 Assist On or Off
Press the phone button to enter the phone menu and scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button to confirm and enter the 911 Assist menu.911 Assist
Press the OK button when the desired option appears in the
radio display.
On
Off
Off selections include:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Provides a display and voice reminder at phone connection
at vehicle start.
Off with reminder:
Provides a display reminder only without a voice reminder at
phone connection.
Off without reminder:
To make sure that 911 Assist works
correctly:
•SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
•The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
•You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
cell phone to SYNC.
•A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
•A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
•The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.
347
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or
activate the fuel pump shut-off (the
triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell
phone sustains damage or loses its
connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC
will search for and try to connect to a
previously paired cell phone; SYNC will
then attempt to call the emergency
services.
Before making the call:
•SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
•SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel."
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
•Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
•The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
•The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you turn on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not turn the feature on.
Vehicle Health Report (If
Equipped, United States Only)
WARNING
Always follow scheduled
maintenance instructions, regularly
inspect your vehicle, and seek repair
for any damage or problem you suspect.
Vehicle Health Report supplements, but
cannot replace, normal maintenance and
vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health Report
only monitors certain systems
electronically monitored by your vehicle
and will not monitor or report the status
of any other system, (such as brake lining
wear). Failure to perform scheduled
maintenance and regularly inspect your
vehicle may result in vehicle damage and
serious injury.
Note: This feature is only available in the
United States.
Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature
requires activation before use. Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There
is no fee or subscription associated with
Vehicle Health Report, but you must register
to use this feature.
348
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Note: This feature may not function
properly if you have enabled caller ID
blocking on your cellular phone. Before
running a report, review the Vehicle Health
Report Privacy Notice.
Note: In order to allow a break-in period for
your vehicle, you may not be able to create
a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle
odometer has reached 200 miles.
Note: Cellular phone and SMS charges may
apply when making a report.
Register for Vehicle Health Report and set
your report preferences at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering,
you can request a Vehicle Health Report
(inside your vehicle). Return to your
account at www.SYNCMyRide.com to view
your report. You can also choose for SYNC
to remind you automatically to run reports
at specific mileage intervals.
The system allows you to check your
vehicle's overall health in the form of a
diagnostic report card. The Vehicle Health
Report contains valuable information, for
example:
•Vehicle diagnostic information
•Scheduled maintenance
•Open recalls and Field Service Actions
•Items noted during vehicle inspections
by an authorized dealer that still need
servicing.
You can run a vehicle health report after
your vehicle has been running a minimum
of 60 seconds. Choose one of the following
options.
To use voice commands, press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
The system will run a vehicle health report of your vehicle's
diagnostic systems and send the results to Ford where it
combines with scheduled maintenance information, open
recalls, other field service actions and vehicle inspection items
that still need servicing by an authorized dealer.
Vehicle Health (Report)
To use the screen, press the phone button, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Vehicle Health
Select one of the following:
Press the OK button and select on or off.Auto On?
Select On to have SYNC automatically prompt you to run a
health report at certain mileage intervals.*
Scroll to select between 5000, 7500 or 10000-mile intervals.
Select your desired option and press the OK button.
Report Interval
349
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button for SYNC to run a health report of your
vehicle's diagnostic systems and send the results to Ford
where it combines with scheduled maintenance information,
open recalls, other field service actions and vehicle inspection
items that still need servicing by an authorized dealer.
Run Report
Exit the current menu.Return
*You must first turn this feature on before you can select the desired mileage interval.
Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice
When you create a Vehicle Health Report,
Ford Motor Company may collect your
cellular phone number (to process your
report request) and diagnostic information
about your vehicle. Certain versions or
updates to Vehicle Health Report may also
collect more vehicle information. Ford may
use your vehicle information it collects for
any purpose. If you do not want to disclose
your cellular phone number or vehicle
information, do not run the feature or set
up your Vehicle Health Report profile at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. See
www.SYNCMyRide.com (Vehicle Health
Report Terms and Conditions, and Privacy
Statement) for more information.
SYNC Services: Traffic, Directions
& Information (TDI) (If Equipped,
United States Only)
Note: SYNC Services varies by trim level
and model year and may require a
subscription. Traffic alerts and turn-by-turn
directions available in select markets.
Message and data rates may apply. Ford
Motor Company reserves the right to change
or discontinue this product service at any
time without prior notification or incurring
any future obligation.
Note: SYNC Services requires activation
before use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to
register and check your eligibility for
complimentary services. Standard phone
and message rates may apply. Subscription
may be required. You must also have the
active SYNC Services Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone paired and connected to the
system in order to connect to, and use,
SYNC Services. See Using SYNC™ With
Your Phone (page 334).
Note: This feature does not function
properly if you have enabled caller ID
blocking on your cellular phone. Make sure
your cellular phone is not blocking caller ID
before using SYNC Services.
Note: The driver is ultimately responsible
for the safe operation of the vehicle, and
therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe
to follow the suggested directions. Any
navigation features provided are only an aid.
Make your driving decisions based on your
observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an
unsafe or illegal maneuver, place you in an
unsafe situation, or if you would be directed
into an area that you consider unsafe. Maps
used by this system may be inaccurate
because of errors, changes in roads, traffic
conditions or driving conditions.
350
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Note: When you connect, the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect your vehicle's current
location, travel direction and speed to help
provide you with the directions, traffic
reports, or business searches you request.
Further, to provide the services you request,
for continuous improvement, the service
may collect and record call details and voice
communications. For more information, see
SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do not want
Ford or its service providers to collect your
vehicle travel information or other
information identified in the Terms and
Conditions, do not subscribe or use the
service.
SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle
sensors, integrated GPS technology and
comprehensive map and traffic data, to
give you personalized traffic reports,
precise turn-by-turn directions, business
search, news, sports, weather and more.
For a complete list of services, or to learn
more, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Connecting to SYNC Services Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
This initiates an outgoing call to SYNC Services using your
paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
Services
Once you connect to the service, follow the voice prompts
to request the desired service, for example traffic or directions.
Once you are connected to SYNC Services, you can also say the following:
Receive a list of available services from which to choose.(what are my (options |
choices) | what can I say
| [available] commands)
To return to the Services main menu.Services
Receive system help.Help
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where (options | choices) appears you say either; options
or choices.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where; what are my (options | choices) appears, you must say; what are
my, followed by either, options or choices.
You do not need to say words that appear within square brackets. For example, for where
(what can I say [available] commands) appears, you can say, what can I say commands.
351
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Connecting to SYNC Services Using the Phone Menu
Press the phone button, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.SYNC Apps
Services 1. Press the OK button. The display indicates the system is
connecting.
2. Press the OK button again. SYNC initiates the call to the
Services portal.
3. Once you connect to the service, follow the prompts to
request the desired service, for example traffic or direc-
tions.
Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions
When connected to SYNC Services, press the voice button and when prompted
say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
To receive directions to a location. Once you select your
destination, the system uploads your current vehicle location,
calculates a route based on current traffic conditions and
sends it back to your vehicle. After the route download is
complete, the phone call automatically ends. You then receive
audible and visual driving instructions as you travel toward
your destination.
Directions
To find a business or type of business. Select your destination,
the system uploads your current vehicle location, calculates
a route based on current traffic conditions and sends it back
to your vehicle. After the route download is complete, the
phone call automatically ends. You then receive audible and
visual driving instructions as you travel toward your destina-
tion.
Business search
You can also say the following:
To find the closest business or type of business to your loca-
tion, within business search.
Search near me
If you need further assistance in finding a location at any time
within a Directions or Business search and need to speak with
a live operator.
Operator
352
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionVoice command
The live operator can assist you by searching for businesses
by name or by category, residential addresses by street
address or by name or specific street intersections.
The system may prompt you to speak with an operator when
it has difficulty matching your voice request. Operator Assist
is a feature of your SYNC Services subscription. For more
information on Operator Assist, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com/
support.
If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks if you want the
route updated. Say yes when prompted and the system sends
a new route to your vehicle.
Yes *
* During an active route.
Disconnecting from SYNC Services
To disconnect from SYNC services, say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
From the SYNC Services main menu, or press and hold the
phone button on the steering wheel.
Goodbye
SYNC Services quick tips
SYNC Services quick tips
You can personalize your Services feature to provide quicker
access to your most used or favorite information. You can
save address points, for example work or home. You can also
save favorite information like sports teams or a news
category. You can learn more about personalization by logging
onto www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Personalizing
Press the voice button at any time while connected to SYNC
Services to interrupt a voice prompt or an audio clip and say
your voice command.
Push to interrupt
Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone number, not your VIN (Vehicle Identification
Number). You can pair and connect your phone to any vehicle
equipped with SYNC Services and continue enjoying your
personalized services.
Portable
353
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
SYNC Services quick tips
You can even access your account outside your vehicle. Just
use the number on your phone's call history. Traffic and
Directions features do not function properly but information
services and the 411 connect and text message features are
available.
SYNC™ APPLINK™
SYNC Mobile Apps
Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink.
Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port in order to start the
application.
Note: The AppLink feature is not available
if your vehicle is equipped with the MyFord
Touch system.
Note: Depending on your display type, you
can access AppLink from the media menu,
the phone menu, or by using voice
commands. Once an app is running through
AppLink, you can control main features of
the app through voice commands and
steering wheel controls.
To Access Using the Phone Menu
Press the phone button to access the
SYNC phone menu on-screen. You can
then scroll to:
Menu item
Press OK to access a list
of available applications.
Mobile Apps
Menu item
Scroll through the list of
available applications and
press OK to select a
particular app. Once an
app is running through
SYNC, you can access an
app’s menu by pressing the
MENU button to first
access the SYNC menu.
Scroll until the app name followed by
"Menu", is displayed (such as, sticher
Menu), then press OK. From here, you can
access an application's features, such as
Thumbs up and Thumbs down.
For more information, please visit:
Website
www.SYNCMyRide.com
To Access Using the Media Menu
Press the AUX button on the center
console.
354
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Press the Menu button to the SYNC menu and scroll to:
Action and descriptionMenu item
Press the OK button.SYNC-Media
Press the OK button and scroll through the list of available
applications and select your desired app.
Mobile Apps
Scroll until the app name followed by
"Menu", is displayed (such as, Stitcher
Menu), then press OK. From here, you can
access an application's features, such as
Thumbs up and Thumbs down.
For more information, please visit:
Website
www.SYNCMyRide.com
To Access Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and descriptionVoice command
Say the name of the application after the tone.
The app should start. While an app is running through SYNC,
you can press the voice button and speak commands specific
to the app, for example, "Playlist Road Trip".
Mobile Apps
You can also say the following:
To discover the available voice commands.The name of an app
(such as Stitcher)
followed by "help".
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
MEDIA PLAYER
You can access and play music from your
digital music player over your vehicle's
speaker system using the system's media
menu or voice commands. You can also
sort and play your music by specific
categories, for example artist and album.
Note: The system is capable of indexing up
to 6,000 songs.
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any
digital media player including: iPod®,
Zune™, plays from device players, and
most USB drives. SYNC also supports the
following audio formats MP3, WMA, WAV
and ACC.
Connecting Your Digital Media
Player to the USB Port
Note: If your digital media player has a
power switch, make sure you switch it on
before plugging it in.
355
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
To Connect Using Voice Commands
Plug the device into the USB port. See
USB Port (page 328).
E142599
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate
voice commands. See Media voice commands.
USB [1]
You do not need to say words that appear within square brackets. For example, for where
USB[1]appears, you can say USB or USB one.
To Connect Using the System Menu
Plug the device into the USB port. See
USB Port (page 328).
Press the AUX button, then the Menu
button to enter the Media Menu.
You can then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Select Src
Press the OK button.USB
Depending on how many digital media files are on your
connected device, the following message may appear in the
radio display.
Indexing…
When indexing is complete, the screen returns to the Play menu. You can then
select one of the following:
Play all
Artists
Albums
Genres
Playlists
Songs
Browse USB
Similar music
Exit the current menu.Return
356
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
What's Playing?
When a track is playing, you can ask the
system to tell you what is currently playing.
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
The system reads the metadata tags of the playing track,
and if the metadata tags are populated, the system will tell
you what track is playing.
Whats This? | Whats
Playing?
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's or
what is.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where; who plays this (what's | what is) playing, you must say; who plays
this (what's or what is) playing.
Media Voice Commands
Press the voice button and when
prompted say any of the following:
Voice command
USB [1]
You can then say any of the following
[Phone] Connections | [Media] Connec-
tions | [Bluetooth] Connections
Pause
Play
Play All
1,2
Play Artist ___
1,2
Play Album ___
1,2
Play Genre ___
3
[Play] Next Folder
[Play] Next Track | [Play] Next Song
Voice command
1,2
Play Playlist ___
3
[Play] Previous Folder
[Play] Previous Track | [Play] Previous
Song
1,2
[Play] Next Track | [Play] Next Song
Repeat [On]
Repeat Off
Shuffle [On]
Shuffle Off
1,2
Search Album ___
1,2
Search Artist ___
357
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice command
1,2
The system searches all
the data from your
indexed music and, if
available, begins to play
the chosen type of music.
You can only play genres
of music which are present
in the GENRE metadata
tags that you have on your
digital media player.
Search
Genre ___
1,2
The system searches for a
specific artist/track/album
from the music indexed
through the USB port.
Search
Track ___
| Search
Song ___
1,2
This allows you to make
your previous command
more specific. By using this
command you can filter
though a previous selec-
tion, such as an artist to
play only specific album.
Refine
album ___
The system compiles a
playlist and then plays similar
music to what is currently
playing from the USB port
using indexed metadata
information.
Similar
Music
Voice command
Autoplay Off
Turn autoplay on to listen to
music processed during
indexing. Turn autoplay off to
allow the indexing process to
finish before the system plays
any of your music.
Autoplay
[on]
1 ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it
could be the name of anything, such as a
group, artist or song. For example you
could say "Play artist The Beatles".
2 This voice command is not available until
indexing is complete.
3 This voice command is only available in
folder mode.
Bluetooth Audio Command Guide
Press the voice button and say:
Voice command
Bluetooth Audio
You can then say any of the following:
[Phone] Connections | [Media] Connec-
tions | [Bluetooth] Connections
Pause
Play
[Play] Next Track | [Play] Next Song
[Play] Previous Track | [Play] Previous
Song
Media Menu Features
The media menu allows you to select your
media source, how to play your music, for
example by artist, genre, shuffle or repeat,
and to add, connect or delete devices.
358
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Press the AUX button, then the Menu button to enter the Media Menu.
You can then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Play your music by artist, album, genre,
playlists, tracks, similar music or to simply,
play all. You can also choose to Explore
USB to view the supported digital music
files on your playing device.
Play Menu
See Play Menu later in this section for more
information.
Select one of the following:
Press the OK button to access music
plugged into your USB port. You can also
plug in devices to charge them (if supported
by your device). Once connected, the
system indexes any readable media files.1
USBSelect Src
Press the OK button. This is a phone-
dependent feature that allows you to
stream music playing on your Bluetooth-
enabled phone. If supported by your device,
you can press seek to play the previous or
next track.
Bluetooth Audio
Press the OK button to select and play
music from your portable music player over
your vehicle's speakers.2
Line in
Choose to shuffle or repeat your music and select your Auto-
play settings. Once you turn these selections on, they remain
on until you turn them off. Press SEEK to play the previous or
next track.3
Media Player Settings
Press the OK button to shuffle available
media files in the current playlist. To shuffle
all media tracks, you must select Play All
in the play menu and then select Shuffle.
Shuffle
Press the OK button to repeat any song.Repeat
359
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button to turn autoplay on to
listen to music processed during indexing.
Turn autoplay off to allow the indexing
process to finish before the system plays
any of your music.4
Autoplay
Interact with SYNC-capable mobile applications on your
smartphone.
Mobile Apps
Access available Bluetooth Device menu listings as well as
Advanced menu listings.
Sys Settings
Press OK to exit the media menu.Exit
1The time required to complete this depends on the size of the media the system needs
to index. If autoplay is on, you can listen to media processed during indexing. If autoplay
is off, you cannot listen to music until the system finishes indexing media. SYNC is capable
of indexing thousands of average size media and notifies you if it reaches the maximum
indexing file size.
2If you have already connected a device to the USB port, you cannot access the line in
feature. Some digital media players require both USB and line in ports to stream data
and music separately.
3Some digital media players require both USB and line in ports to stream data and music
separately.
4Indexing times can vary from device to device and with regard to the number of songs
the system needs to process.
Accessing Your Play Menu
This menu allows you to select and play
your media by artist, album, genre, playlist,
track, similar music or even to explore what
is on your USB device.
Make sure that your device is plugged into
the USB port and is turned on.
Press the AUX button, then the Menu
button to enter the Media Menu.
You can then scroll to select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Play Menu
If there are no media files to access, the display indicates there is no media. If there are
media files, you have the following options:
Press the OK button. The first track title appears in the
display.
Play all
360
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMessage
Play all indexed media (tracks) from your playing device in
flat file mode, one at a time in numerical order.
Sort all indexed media by artist. Once selected, the system
lists and then plays all artists and tracks alphabetically. If
there are fewer than 255 indexed artists, the system lists
them alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than
255, the system categorizes them alphabetically.
Artists
1. Press the OK button. You can select to play all artists or
any indexed artist.
2. Scroll to choose the desired artist. Press the OK button.
Sort all indexed media by albums. If there are fewer than 255
indexed albums, the system lists them alphabetically in flat
file mode. If there are more than 255, the system categorizes
them alphabetically.
Albums
1. Press the OK button. You can enter the album menu and
select from playing all albums or from any individual
indexed album.
2. Scroll to choose the desired album. Press the OK button.
Sort indexed music by genre (category) type. SYNC lists the
genres alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than
255, the system categorizes them alphabetically.
Genres
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to select the desired genre. Press the OK button.
Access your playlists from formats ASX, M3U, WPL or MTP.
The system lists your playlists alphabetically in flat file mode.
If there are more than 255, the system categorizes them
alphabetically.
Playlists
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to select the desired playlist. Press the OK button.
Search for and play a specific indexed track. SYNC lists your
tracks alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than
255, the system categorizes them alphabetically.
Songs
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to select the desired track. Press the OK button.
361
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMessage
Explore all supported digital media on your media device
connected to the USB port. You can only view media content
which is compatible with SYNC; other files saved are not
visible.
Browse USB
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to explore indexed media on your flash drive.
Play music similar to what is currently playing from the USB
port. The system uses the metadata information of each song
to compile a playlist for you.*
Similar music
1. Press the OK button.
2. The system creates a new list of similar songs and begins
playing. This feature does not include tracks with incom-
plete metadata information. Press the OK button.
Exit the current menu.Return
*With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags are not populated, the tracks are not
available in voice recognition, play menu or similar music. However, if you place these
tracks onto your playing device in "Mass Storage Device Mode", they are available in voice
recognition, play menu browsing and similar music. The system places Unknown items
into any unpopulated metadata tag.
System Settings
System settings provide access to your
Bluetooth Devices and Advanced menu
features.
Bluetooth Devices
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you
to enable, disable, add, connect and delete
a Bluetooth device.
Press the AUX button, then the Menu
button to enter the Media Menu.
You can then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Sys Settings
Press the OK button.Bluetooth device
You can then select one of the following:
Pair more devices to the system.*
Add Device
362
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMessage
1. Press the OK button. When find SYNC appears in the
display, press the OK button again.
2. Follow the directions in your phone's manual to put your
phone into discovery mode. A six-digit PIN appears in the
display.
3. When prompted on your phone's six-digit display, enter
the PIN.
Connect a previously paired Bluetooth-enabled phone.Connect BT
1. Press OK to select and view a list of devices.
2. Scroll until the desired device is chosen and press OK to
connect the device.
Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.**
Bluetooth On and Off
1. Press the OK button and scroll to toggle between on and
off.
2. Make a selection and press the OK button.
Delete a paired media device.Delete
1. Press the OK button and scroll to select the device.
2. Press the OK button to confirm.
Delete all previously paired devices.Delete all
1. Press the OK button.
2. Press the OK button to confirm.
Exit the current menu.Return
*This is a speed-dependent feature. It is only available when your vehicle is traveling at 3
mph (5 km/h) or less.
**Setting Bluetooth to off disconnects all Bluetooth devices and turns off all Bluetooth
features.
Advanced
The Advanced menu allows you to access
and set prompts, languages, defaults and
perform a master reset.
Press the AUX button, then the Menu
button to enter the Media Menu.
363
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
You can then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Sys Settings
Press the OK button.Bluetooth device
You can then select one of the following:
Have SYNC guide you by asking questions, helpful hints or
ask you for a specific action.
Confirmation Prompts
1. Press the OK button and scroll to toggle between on and
off.
2. Make a selection and press the OK button. SYNC takes
you back to the Advanced menu.
Choose from the available languages. The displays and
prompts are in the selected language.
Language
1. Press the OK button and scroll through the available
languages.
2. Press the OK button when the desired language appears
in the display.
3. If you change the language setting, the display indicates
that the system is updating. When complete, SYNC takes
you back to the Advanced menu.
Return to the factory default settings. This selection does
not erase your indexed information, for example phonebook,
call history, text messages and paired devices.
Factory Defaults
1. Press the OK button.
2. Press the OK button. When restore defaults appears in
the display, press the OK button again to confirm.
Completely erase all information stored on SYNC. All
phonebook, call history, text messages and all paired devices
will be deleted and the system will return to the factory
default settings.
Master reset
Download available software applications through the USB
port.
Install Applications
Exit the current menu.Return
364
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
should questions arise, see the tables
below.
Use the website at any time to check your
phone's compatibility, register your
account and set preferences as well as
access a customer representative via an
online chat (during certain hours). Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca for more
information.
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review your phone's manual
about audio adjustments.
The audio control settings
on your phone may be
affecting SYNC perform-
ance.
There is excessive back-
ground noise during a phone
call.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
During a call, I can hear the
other person but they
cannot hear me.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
SYNC is not able to down-
load my phonebook.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the
website.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
This may be a limitation on
your phone's capability.
The system says Phonebook
Downloaded but the
phonebook in SYNC is
empty or missing contacts. If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associ-
ated with the missing
contact.
365
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Depending upon your phone,
you may have to grant SYNC
permission to access your
phonebook contacts. Make
sure to confirm when
prompted by your phone
during the phonebook
download.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
I am having trouble
connecting my phone to
SYNC. Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Try deleting your device
from SYNC, deleting SYNC
from your device and trying
again.
Check the security and auto
accept and prompt always
settings relative to the SYNC
Bluetooth connection on
your phone.
Update your device's firm-
ware.
Turn off the Auto phone-
book download setting.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
Text messaging is not
working on SYNC.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
366
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
USB and media issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
device malfunction.
I am having trouble
connecting my device.
Make sure you are using the
manufacturer's cable.
Make sure you insert the
USB cable correctly into the
device and the USB port.
Make sure that the device
does not have an auto-
install program or active
security settings.
Make sure you are not
leaving the device in your
vehicle during very hot or
cold temperatures.
This is a device limitation.SYNC does not recognize
my device when I turn on the
car.
Review the device compatib-
ility chart on the SYNC
website to confirm your
phone supports the
Bluetooth audio streaming
function.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
The device is not connected.
Bluetooth audio does not
stream.
Make sure you correctly
connect the device to SYNC,
and that you have pressed
play on your device.
Make sure that all song
details are populated.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist,
song title, album or genre
information.
SYNC does not recognize
music that is on my device.
Some devices require you to
change the USB settings
from mass storage to MTP
class.
The file may be corrupted.
The song may have copy-
right protection, which does
not allow it to play.
367
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Vehicle Health Report and Services (Traffic, Directions and Information) issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
This is a free feature, but you
must first register online to
use it.
You did not activate your
account on the website.
You may have the wrong
VIN (vehicle identification
number) listed.
I received a text that I did
not activate Vehicle Health
Report.
Make sure that your VIN is
correctly listed in your
account.
When you register your
account, you must choose a
preferred dealer. If it already
lists a dealer, try selecting
another dealer and logging
out. Log back in, change it
back to your preferred
dealer, and retrieve the
report.
The preferred dealer
information did not load
correctly.
I am unable to retrieve the
report on the website, or I
receive a system error.
Update your cellular number
in your account on the
website.
This could be due to your
phone's compatibility.
Bad signal strength.
I am unable to submit a
report.
Make sure you have full
signal strength and that your
Bluetooth volume level has
been turned up.
You did not register your
phone correctly on the
website.
Make sure the currently
connected phone is
registered on your
SYNCMyRide account.
Try deleting your phone and
performing a clean pairing.
This is a free feature, but you
must first register online to
use it.
You did not activate this
phone for this service.
Your phone has ID blocker
active.
I heard a commercial when
I tried to use Traffic, Direc-
tions and Information.
Turn off ID blocker on your
phone as the system recog-
nizes you by your phone
number.
Make sure the currently
connected phone is the
same one that is registered
on your SYNCMyRide
account.
368
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review the phone voice
commands and the media
voice commands at the
beginning of their respective
sections.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
You may be speaking too
soon or at the wrong time.
SYNC does not understand
what I am saying.
After pressing the voice icon,
wait until after the tone
sounds and Listening
appears before saying a
command. Any command
spoken before this does not
register with the system.
Review the media voice
commands at the beginning
of the media section.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
SYNC does not understand
the name of a song or artist.
Say the song or artist
exactly as listed. If you say
"Play Artist Prince", the
system does not play music
by Prince and the Revolution
or Prince and the New
Power Generation.
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
Make sure you are saying the
complete title, such as
"California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles".
If the song titles are in all
CAPS, you have to spell
them. LOLA requires you to
say "L-O-L-A".
Do not use special charac-
ters in the title. The system
does not recognize them.
Review the Phone voice
commands at the beginning
of the phone section.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
SYNC does not understand
or is calling the wrong
contact when I want to
make a call.
369
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Make sure you are saying the
contacts exactly as they are
listed. For example, if you
save a contact as Joe
Wilson, say "Call Joe
Wilson".
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
Contacts in your phonebook
may be very short and
similar, or they may contain
special characters. Using the SYNC phone
menu, open the phonebook
and scroll to the name
SYNC is having trouble
understanding. SYNC will
read the name to you, giving
you some idea of the
pronunciation SYNC is
expecting.
Your phonebook contacts
may be in CAPS.
The system works better if
you list full names, such as
"Joe Wilson" rather than
"Joe".
Do not use special charac-
ters, such as 123 or ICE, as
the system does not recog-
nize them.
If a contact is in CAPS, you
have to spell it. JAKE
requires you to say "Call J-
A-K-E".
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Ensure you have a compat-
ible smartphone; an Android
with OS 2.3 or higher or an
iPhone 3GS or newer with
iOS 5.0 or higher. Addition-
ally, ensure your phone is
An AppLink capable phone
is not connected to SYNC.
AppLink Mobile Applica-
tions: When I select "Find
New Apps," SYNC does not
find any applications.
paired and connected to
370
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
SYNC in order to find
AppLink-capable apps on
your device. iPhone users
must also connect to
SYNC's USB port with an
Apple USB cable.
Ensure you have down-
loaded and installed the
latest version of the app
from your phone's app store.
Ensure the app is running on
your phone. Some apps
AppLink-enabled apps are
not installed and running on
your mobile device.
My phone is connected, but
I still cannot find any apps.
require you to register or
login on the app on the
phone before using them
with AppLink. Also, some
may have a "Ford SYNC"
setting, so check the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Closing and restarting apps
may help SYNC find the
application if you cannot
discover it inside the vehicle.
On an Android device, if
apps have an "Exit' or 'Quit'
Sometime apps do not
properly close and re-open
their connection to SYNC,
over ignition cycles, for
example.
My phone is connected, my
app(s) are running, but I still
cannot find any apps.
option, select that then
restart the app. If the app
does not have that option,
you can also manually
"Force Close" the app by
going to the phone's settings
menu, selecting 'Apps.' then
finding the particular app
and choosing 'Force stop.'
Don't forget to restart the
app afterwards, then select
"Find New Apps" on SYNC.
371
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to
force close an app, double
tab the home button then
swipe up on the app to close
it. Tab the home button
again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a
few seconds, the app should
then appear in SYNC's
Mobile App's Menu.
Reset the Bluetooth on your
phone by turning it off and
then turning Bluetooth back
on. If you are in your vehicle,
SYNC should be able to
automatically re-connect to
your phone if you press the
"Phone" button.
There is a bluetooth bug on
some order versions of the
Android OS that may cause
apps that were found on
your previous vehicle drive
to not be found again if you
have not turned off
bluetooth.
My Android phone is
connected, my app(s) are
running, I restarted them,
but I still cannot find any
apps.
372
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Unplug the USB cable from
the phone, wait a moment,
and plug the USB cable
back in to the phone. After a
few seconds, the app should
appear in SYNC's Mobile
Apps Menu. If not, "Force
Close" the application and
restart it.
The USB connection to
SYNC may need to be reset.
My iPhone phone is
connected, my app is
running, I restarted the app
but I still cannot find it on
SYNC.
Try increasing the Bluetooth
volume of the device by
using the device's volume
control buttons which are
most often found on the
side of the device.
The bluetooth volume on
the phone may be low.
I have an Android phone. I
found and started my media
app on SYNC, but there is no
sound or the sound is very
low.
Force close or uninstall the
apps you do not want SYNC
to find. If the app has a "Ford
SYNC" setting, disable that
setting in the app's settings
menu on the phone.
Some Android devices have
a limited number of
bluetooth ports apps can
use to connect. If you have
more AppLink apps on your
phone than the number of
availble Bluetooth ports, you
will not see all of your apps
listed in SYNC's mobile apps
menu.
I can only see some of the
AppLink apps running on my
phone listed in SYNC's
Mobile Apps Menu.
373
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
MessageItem
PhoneA
NavigationB
ClimateC
SettingsD
MessageItem
HomeE
InformationF
EntertainmentG
374
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
This system uses a four-corner strategy to
provide quick access to several vehicle
features and settings. The touchscreen
provides easy interaction with your cell
phone, entertainment, information and
system settings. The corners display active
modes within the menus, for example; your
cell phone's status.
Note: Some features are not available while
your vehicle is moving.
Note: You can access the entertainment
features for 30 minutes after you switch the
ignition off, and no doors are opened.
PHONE
Press to select any of the following:
Message
Phone
Quick Dial
Phonebook
History
Messaging
Settings
NAVIGATION
Press to select any of the following:
Message
My Home
Favorites
Previous Destinations
Point of Interest
Emergency
Street Address
Intersection
Message
City Center
Map
Edit Route
Cancel Route
CLIMATE
Press the corresponding icons to control
the following options:
•Driver Settings
•Recirculated Air
•Auto
•Dual
•Passenger Settings
•A/C
•Defrost
SETTINGS
E142607
Press to select any of the following:
Message
Clock
Display
Sound
Vehicle
Settings
Help
HOME
E142613
Press to access the home
screen.
375
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Note: Depending on your vehicle’s option
package and software, the screens may vary
in appearance from the descriptions in this
section. The features may also be limited
depending on the market. Check with an
authorized dealer for availability.
INFORMATION
E142608
Press to select any of the following:
Message
Services
Travel Link
Alerts
Message
Calendar
Apps
Where Am I?
ENTERTAINMENT
Press to select any of the following:
Message
AM
FM
SIRIUS
CD
USB
BT Stereo
SD Card
Using the Audio Controls
Depending on your vehicle, it may also have the following controls:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Switch the media features on or off.Power
Adjust the volume of playing media.Volume
Use as you normally would in media modes.Tune
Eject a CD from the entertainment system.Eject
Press this button to switch the display screen off. Press again,
or touch the screen to switch the display screen on.
Display
Touch the control repeatedly to switch between media
modes.
Source
Adjust the settings for:Sound
Bass
Treble
376
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMessage
Midrange
Set Balance and Fade
DSP
EQ Mode
Speed Compensated Volume
Using the Steering Wheel Controls
Depending on your vehicle, it may also have the following controls:
Action and DescriptionControl
Adjust the volume of playing media.VOL
Press to start a voice session. Press again to interrupt a voice
prompt and begin speaking. Press and hold to end an active
voice session.
Voice
Use as you normally would in media and phone modes.Seek and Call Accept
Use as you normally would in media and phone modes.Seek and Call Reject
Using the Touchscreen
•Make sure your hands are clean and
dry.
•Press firmly on the center of a control
graphic or menu item.
•Keep metal objects or other conductive
material away from the surface of the
touchscreen.
Cleaning the Touchscreen Display
Use a dry, clean, soft cloth. If dirt or
fingerprints are still visible, apply a small
amount of alcohol to the cloth. Do not pour
or spray alcohol onto the display. Do not
use detergent or any type of solvent to
clean the display.
Support
The SYNC support team is available:
•Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm
EST.
•United States: 1-888-270-1055
•Canada: 1-800-565-3673
Note: Times are subject to change due to
holidays.
377
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Safety Information
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
•Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. Have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer.
•Do not operate media devices if the
power cables are broken or damaged.
•Make sure the power cables do not
interfere with the safe operation of your
vehicle's controls or affect your safe
driving abilities.
•Some SYNC functions are
speed-dependent. Their use is limited
to when your vehicle is traveling at
speeds below 3 mph (5 km/h).
Make sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC.
Speed-restricted Features
Some features of this system are restricted
from use unless your vehicle is stationary.
•Screens crowded with information, for
example:
•Point of Interest reviews and ratings
•SIRIUS Travel Link sports scores
•Movie times
•Ski conditions.
•Any action that requires keyboard use,
for example: entering a navigation
destination or editing information.
•All lists are limited, for example: phone
contacts.
See the following chart for more specific
examples.
Speed-restricted Features
Pairing a cell phoneCell phone
Adding or editing phonebook contacts
Phone contacts and recent phone call entries
Enabling Valet ModeSystem Functionality
Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park
assist are active
Editing wireless settingsWi-Fi and Wireless
Editing the list of wireless networks
378
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Speed-restricted Features
Adding or editing wallpaperPhotos and Graphics
Composing text messagesText Messages
Viewing received text messages
Editing preset text messages
Using the keyboard to enter a destinationNavigation
Demo navigation route
Adding or editing Address Book or Avoid Area entries
Privacy Information
When you connect a cell phone to SYNC,
the system creates a profile within your
vehicle that links to that cell phone. This
profile helps in offering you more cellular
features and operating more efficiently.
Among other things, this profile may
contain data about your cell phone book,
text messages (read and unread), and call
history, including history of calls when your
cell phone was not connected to the
system. In addition, if you connect a media
device, the system creates and retains an
index of supported media content. The
system also records a short development
log of approximately 10 minutes of all
recent system activity. The log profile and
other system data may be used to improve
the system and help diagnose any
problems that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index,
and development log remain in your
vehicle unless you delete them, and are
generally accessible only in your vehicle
when your cell phone or media player is
connected. If you no longer plan to use the
system or your vehicle, we recommend you
carry out a Master Reset to erase all stored
information.
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to your
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada do not
access the system data for any purpose
other than as described without consent,
a court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government
authorities, or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may
seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the sections on 911
Assist®, Vehicle Health Report, and Traffic,
Directions and Information.
Using Voice Commands
This system helps you control many
features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the
wheel and focus on what is in front of you.
The system provides feedback through
audible tones, prompts, questions and
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of
interaction (voice settings).
The system also asks short questions
(confirmation prompts) when it is not sure
of your request or when there are multiple
possible responses to your request.
379
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
When using voice commands, words and
icons may appear in the lower left status
bar indicating the status of the voice
command session (such as Listening,
Success, Failed, Paused or Try Again).
How to Use Voice Commands
E142599
The following are some of the
voice commands that you can
say at any time during a voice
command session.
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Voice command
Main Menu
What Can I Say
Previous Page
Go Back
Help
Helpful Hints
•Make sure the interior of your vehicle is
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from
open windows and road vibrations may
prevent the system from correctly
recognizing spoken voice commands.
•After pressing the voice command icon,
wait until after the tone sounds and a
message appears before saying a voice
command. Any voice command spoken
prior to this does not register with the
system.
•Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
•At any time, you can interrupt the
system while it is speaking by pressing
the voice command icon.
Accessing a List of Available Voice
Commands
To access a list of available voice
commands you can do either of the
following.
Using the touchscreen, press:
Menu Item
Settings
Help
Voice Command List
Using the steering wheel control, press
the voice button and when prompted
say one of the following:
Voice Commands
List of Commands
Radio List of Commands
Phone List of Commands
Voice Instructions List of Commands
Voice Command Settings
These allow you to customize the level of
system interaction, help and feedback. The
system defaults to standard interaction
that uses candidate lists and confirmation
prompts as these provide the highest level
of guidance and feedback.
380
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
In this mode the system provides
detailed interaction and guidance.
NoviceInteraction Mode
This mode has less audible interac-
tion and more tone prompts.
Advanced
The system uses these short questions to confirm your voice
command. If turned off, the system simply makes a best guess
as to what you requested. The system may still occasionally
ask you to confirm a voice command.
Confirmation Prompts
Candidate lists are lists of possible results from your voice
commands. The system creates these lists when it has the
same confidence level of several options based on your voice
command
Phone Candidate Lists
Media Candidate Lists
Using the touchscreen, press the
settings icon, then press:
Menu Item
Voice Settings
Voice Control
Select from the following:
Interaction Mode
Confirmation Prompts
Media Candidate Lists
Phone Candidate Lists
Voice Control Volume
Using Voice Commands with the
Touchscreen Options
The voice command system has a dual
mode feature which allows you to switch
between using voice commands and
making on-screen selections. This is
available only when the system displays a
list of candidates generated during a voice
command session. For example, this can
be used when entering a street address or
trying to call a contact from a cell phone
paired to the system.
381
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
SETTINGS
MessageItem
ClockA
DisplayB
SoundC
VehicleD
SettingsE
HelpF
Clock
Under this menu, you can set the clock,
access and adjust the display, sound and
vehicle settings as well as access settings
for specific modes or the help feature.
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Press the + or - to adjust the time.Clock
From this screen, you can also make other adjustments such
as 12-hour or 24-hour mode, activate GPS time synchroniza-
tion and have the system automatically update new time
zones.
382
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
You can also switch the outside air temperature display off
and on. It appears at the top center of the touchscreen, next
to the time and date.
Note: You cannot manually set the date. Your vehicle’s GPS does this for you.
Note: If the battery has been disconnected, your vehicle needs to acquire a GPS signal to
update the clock. Once your vehicle acquires the signal, it may take a few minutes for the
update to display the correct time.
Display
You can adjust the display using the
touchscreen or the voice button on the
steering wheel controls.
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Display
Then select from the following:
When set to On, lets you use the automatic dimming feature.Auto Dim
When set to Off you are able to adjust the brightness of the screen.
Make the screen display brighter or dimmer.Brightness
Allows you to switch the display off. It also allows you to set the screen
to a certain brightness or have the system automatically change based
on the outside light level.
Mode
If you also select:
These features will allow you to adjust the dimming of
your screen.
Auto
Night
Allows you to adjust screen dimming as the outside lighting conditions
change from day to night.
Auto Dim
Manual Offset
Allows you to display the default photo or upload your own.Edit Wallpaper
383
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
E142599
To make adjustments using the voice
button, press the button and when
prompted, say:
Voice command
Display Settings
Uploading Photos for Your Home
Screen Wallpaper
Note: You cannot load photos directly from
your camera. You must access the photos
either from your USB mass storage device
or from an SD card.
Note: Photographs with extremely large
dimensions (such as 2048 x 1536) may not
be compatible and appear as a blank
(black) image on the display.
The system allows you to upload and view
up to 32 photos.
To upload your photos, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Display
Follow the system prompts to upload your photographs.Edit Wallpaper
Only the photograph(s), which meets the
following conditions display:
•Compatible file formats are as follows:
JPG, GIF, PNG, BMP.
•Each file must be 1.5 MB or less.
•Recommended dimensions: 800 x 384.
Sound
To make adjustments using the
touchscreen, select:
Message
Settings
Sound
Then select from the following:
Bass
Midrange
Treble
Message
Set Balance and Fade
Occupancy Mode
Speed Compensated Volume
DSP
Note: Your vehicle may not have all of
these sound settings.
Vehicle
To make adjustments using the
touchscreen, select:
Message
Settings
Vehicle
Then select from the following:
Ambient Lighting
384
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Message
*
Vehicle Health Report
Camera Settings
Enable Valet Mode
* US only
Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
When you switch this feature on, ambient
lighting illuminates the dashboard,
footwells, doors, cupholders, and console
with a choice of colors.
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Vehicle
Ambient Lighting
•You can then touch the desired color.
•Use the scroll bar to increase or decrease the intensity.
•To switch the feature on or off, press the power button.
Vehicle Health Report (If Equipped, US Only)
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the settings icon.Settings
Vehicle
Vehicle Health
Turn on and off and set the mileage interval at which you
would like to receive the reports. Press the ? for more
information on these selections.
Automatic Reminders
Mileage Interval (Miles)
To run the vehicle health report immediately.Run Vehicle Health
Report Now
You can find more information on Vehicle Health Report in this chapter.
385
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Camera Settings
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the settings icon.Settings
Vehicle
Camera Settings
Then select from the following:
Enhanced Park Aids
Rear Camera Delay
You can find more information on the rear view camera system in another chapter. See
Parking Aids (page 179).
Enable Valet Mode
Note: If the system locks, and you need to
reset the PIN, please contact the Customer
Relationship Center.
United States: 1-800-392-3673
Canada: 1-800-565-3673
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Vehicle
Then enter a four digit PIN twice, as prompted.Enable Valet Mode
After you press Continue the system locks until you enter the
PIN again.
Continue
Settings
Access and adjust system settings, voice
features, as well as phone, navigation and
wireless settings.
386
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
System
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the settings icon.Settings
System
Then select from the following:
Select to have the touchscreen display in English, Spanish or
French.
Language
Select to display units in kilometers or miles.Distance
Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.Temperature
Adjust the volume of voice prompts from the system.System Prompt Volume
Select to have the system beep to confirm choices made
through the touchscreen.
Touch Screen Button
Beep
Have the touchscreen keyboard display in QWERTY or ABC
format.
Keyboard Layout
Install any downloaded applications or view the current
software licenses.
Install Applications
Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all personal
settings and personal data.
Master reset
Voice Control
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Settings
Voice Control
Then select from the following:
Novice interaction mode provides more detailed interaction
and guidance. Advanced mode has less audible interaction
and more tone prompts.
Interaction Mode
Have the system ask you short questions if it has not clearly
heard or understood your request.
Confirmation Prompts
387
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMessage
Note: Even with confirmation prompts turned off, the system
may occasionally ask you to confirm settings.
Candidate lists are possible results from your voice
commands. The system simply makes a best guess at your
request with these turned off.
Media Candidate Lists
Candidate lists are possible results from your voice
commands. The system simply makes a best guess at your
request with these turned off.
Phone Candidate Lists
This allows you to adjust the system’s voice volume level.Voice Control Volume
Media Player
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the settings icon.Settings
Media Player
Then select from the following:
When this feature is on, the system automatically switches
to the media source upon initial connection. This allows you
to listen to music during the indexing process. When this
feature is off, the system does not automatically switch to
the inserted media source.
Autoplay
Select to connect, disconnect, add or delete a device. You
can also set a device as your favorite so that the system
automatically attempts to connect to that device at every
ignition cycle.
Bluetooth Devices
This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote
Database.
Gracenote® Database
Info
With this feature on, the Gracenote Database supplies
metadata information for your music files. This overrides
information from your device. This feature defaults to off.
Gracenote® Manage-
ment
With this feature on, the Gracenote Database supplies cover
art for your music files. This overrides any art from your device.
This feature defaults to Media Player.
Cover Art Priority
388
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Navigation
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the settings icon.Settings
Navigation
Then select from the following:
Turn breadcrumbs on and off.Map Preferences
Have the system display your turn list top to bottom or
bottom to top.
Turn the Parking POI notification on and off.
Select shortest route, fastest route or ecological route as
your preferred route. This route will be displayed first.
Route Preferences
Always use preferred route. If set to yes, the system will only
calculate a single route. This speeds up your destination entry
process.
Select a low, medium or high cost for the calculated ecolo-
gical route. This may incur a time penalty.
Have the system avoid freeways.
Have the system avoid toll roads.
Have the system avoid ferries or car trains.
Have the system use HOV (high-occupancy vehicle) lanes.
Have the system use guidance prompts.Navigation Preferences
Have the system automatically fill-in State/Province
information.
Have the system automatically avoid traffic concerns or allow
you to accept or decline an alternative route.
Traffic Preferences
Have the system automatically alert you to traffic concerns
that occur on your route.
Have the system display accident icons.
Have the system display traffic jam icons.
Have the system display closed roads.
389
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMessage
Have the system display areas where road work occurs.
Have the system display incident icons.
Have the system display areas where difficult driving condi-
tions may occur.
Have the system display areas where snow and ice on the
road may occur.
Have the system display any smog alerts.
Have the system display weather warnings.
Have the system display where there may be reduced visib-
ility.
Have the system turn on your radio for traffic announcements.
Enter specific areas that would like to avoid on planned
navigation routes.
Avoid Areas
Phone
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the settings icon.Settings
Phone
Then select from the following:
Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well as save
it as a favorite.
Bluetooth Devices
Turn Bluetooth on and off.Bluetooth
Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and not ring inside
your vehicle. With this feature turned on, text message noti-
fications are also suppressed and do not ring inside your
vehicle.
Do Not Disturb
Turn on or turn off the 911 Assist feature. See Information
(page 418).
911 Assist
Select the type of notification for phone calls - ring tone,
beep, text to speech or silent.
Phone Ringer
390
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMessage
Select the type of notification for text messages - alert tone,
beep, text to speech, or have it be silent.
Text Message Notifica-
tion
If compatible with your phone, you can adjust your internet
data connection. Select to make your connection profile with
the personal area network or to turn off your connection. You
can also choose to adjust your settings or have the system
always connect, never connect when roaming, or query on
connect. Press ? for more information.
Internet Data Connection
Access features, such as automatic phonebook download,
re-download your phonebook, add contacts from your phone
as well as delete or upload your phonebook.
Manage Phonebook
Have the system alert you when in Roaming mode.Roaming Warning
Wireless and Internet
Your system has a Wi-Fi feature that
creates a wireless network within your
vehicle, thereby allowing other devices
(such as personal computers or phones)
in your vehicle to speak to each other,
share files or play games. Using this Wi-Fi
feature, everyone in your vehicle can also
access the internet if you have a USB
mobile broadband connection inside your
vehicle, your phone supports personal area
networking or if you park outside a wireless
hotspot.
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Wireless & Internet
Then select from the following:
Wi-Fi Network (Client) ModeWi-Fi Settings
Turns the Wi-Fi feature on and off in your vehicle. Make sure
you switch it on for connectivity purposes.
Choose a Wireless Network
Allows you to use a previously stored wireless network. You
can categorize by alphabetical listing, priority and signal
strength. You can also choose to search for a network,
connect to a network, disconnect from a network, receive
more information, prioritize a network or delete a network.
391
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Gateway (Access Point) Mode
Makes SYNC an access point for a phone or a computer when
turned on. This forms the local area network within your
vehicle for things, such as game playing, file transfer and
internet browsing. Press ? for more information.
Gateway (Access Point) Settings
Allows you to view and change settings for using SYNC as
the internet gateway.
Gateway (Access Point) Devices List
Allows you to view recent connections to your Wi-Fi system.
Instead of using Wi-Fi, your system can also use a USB mobile
broadband connection to access the internet. (You must
switch on your mobile broadband device on your personal
computer before connecting it to the system.) This screen
allows you to set up what is your typical area for your USB
mobile broadband connection. (USB mobile broadband
settings may not display if the device is already on.) You can
select the following:
USB Mobile Broadband
Country
Carrier
Phone Number
User Name
Password
Shows you the currently paired devices as well as giving you
your typical Bluetooth options to connect, disconnect, set as
favorite, delete and add device. Bluetooth is a registered
trademark of the Bluetooth SIG.
Bluetooth Settings
Choose your connection methods and change them as
needed. You can select to change order and have the system
either always attempt to connect using a USB, mobile
broadband, or using Wi-Fi.
Prioritize Connection
Methods
392
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
E142626
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification
mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
Help
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the settings icon.Settings
Help
Then select from the following:
Touchscreen system serial numberSystem Inform-
ation Your vehicle identification number (VIN)
Touchscreen system software version
Navigation system version
Map database version
Sirius satellite radio ESN
Gracenote® Database Information and Library version
View the licenses for any software and applications installed on your
system.
Software
Licenses
Certain features are not accessible when your vehicle is moving.Driving Restric-
tions
Turn on and turn off the 911 Assist feature. See Information (page
418).
911 Assist
Allows you to save up to two
numbers as ICE contacts for
quick access if there is an
emergency.
In Case of Emergency (ICE) Quick Dial
393
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMessage
The ICE contacts you select
appear at the end of the
Emergency Assistance call
process.
Select to access your phone-
book and then select the
desired contacts. The
numbers then appear as
options on this screen for the
ICE 1 and ICE 2 buttons.
Edit
View categorized lists of voice commands.Voice
Command List
E142599
You can also access Help using
the voice commands. The
system provides allowable voice
commands for the current mode.
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Voice command
Help
You can say help at any time to get
assistance with commands, menus or
other information.
394
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
ENTERTAINMENT
Message and DescriptionMessage
AMA
FMB
SIRIUSC
CDD
USBE
Touch this button to scroll down for more options, for example
SD Card and USB
F
These buttons change with the media mode you are in.G
Radio memory presets.H
Note: Some features may not be available in your area. Contact an authorized dealer for
more information.
You can access these options using the
touchscreen or voice commands.
AM/FM Radio
E142611
The following controls are
available for AM/FM radio
395
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionItem
Touch either tab to listen to the radio. To change between AM and FM
presets, just touch the AM or FM tab.
AM
FM
Save a station by pressing and holding one of the memory preset areas.
There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound returns
when finished.
Presets
Touch this button to turn HD Radio on. The light on the button illumin-
ates when the feature is on. HD Radio allows you to receive radio
broadcasts digitally, where available, providing free, crystal-clear sound.
See HD Radio information later in this chapter.
HD Radio
Touch this button to make adjustments to your audio settings.Options
Touch this button to go to the next strong AM or FM radio station. The
light on the button illuminates when the feature is on.
Scan
Touch this button to manually enter the desired station number. Touch
Enter when you are done.
Direct Tune
Options
You can make adjustments to the following options:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch this button to adjust settings for:Sound Settings
Bass
Midrange
Treble
Set Balance and Fade
DSP
Occupancy Mode
Speed Compensated Volume
This allows you to select a category of music you would like to search
for. You can then choose to either seek or scan for the stations playing
that category.
Set PTY for
Seek / Scan
396
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
This allows you to view the information broadcast by FM stations.RDS Text
Display
AST (Autostore) allows you to have the system automatically store
the six strongest stations in your current location.
AST
This feature is available when HD Radio is on, and allows you to tag a
song to download later. When you select On, TAG appears on-screen
when HD Radio is active. You can touch TAG to save the information
of the song that is playing. When you plug in your portable music player,
the information transfers, if supported by your device. When you are
connected to iTunes, the tags appear to remind you of the songs you
would like to download. See HD Radio information later in this chapter.
TAG Button
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings.
HD Radio™ Information (If Available)
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit
www.hdradio.com.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the following indicators on
your screen:
E142616
The HD logo either blinks when acquiring
a digital station, and then stays solid when
digital audio is playing, or is grey when
acquiring a digital station, and then
changes to orange when digital audio is
playing. When this logo is available, you
may also see Title and Artist fields
on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.
397
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
TAG allows you to save a song to
download later when you are on an
acquired HD Radio station and the feature
is on.
To turn the feature on and use it, select AM or FM and the select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Options
TAG Button
When you hear a song you want to tag, select:On
The system automatically saves the song's information and transfers
it to your portable music player (if supported) when you connect it to
the system. The system automatically transfers the tag to your player
(if already connected) and a pop-up confirms the transfer.
TAG
When you access iTunes with your portable music player, the tags
appear to you as a reminder. The system allows you to tag up to
approximately 100 songs. For a list of devices that support tagging,
see www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.sync-
maroute.ca
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Allows you to hear a brief sampling of all available stations. This feature
still works when HD Radio reception is on, although it does not scan
for HD2-HD7 channels. You may see the HD logo appear if the station
has a digital broadcast.
Scan
Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset. Touch and
hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns. There is a brief mute
while the radio saves the station. Sound returns when finished. When
switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before
the digital audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital
signal.
Presets
Note: As with any saved radio station, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle
is outside the station’s reception area.
398
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of
the reception area, the station may mute due to weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to the analog
broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again. However, if you
are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the
station mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital
signal again.
When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-HD7 multicast
stations), it first plays the station in the analog version. Once the receiver
verifies the station is an HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version.
Depending on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change
when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift
from analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound.
Station
blending
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
Potential station issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is a
broadcast issue.
This is poor time alignment by
the radio broadcaster.
Echo, stutter, skip or
repeat in audio.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
No action required. The recep-
tion issue may clear up as you
continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.
Sound fading or
blending in and out.
No action required. This is
normal behavior. Wait until the
audio is available.
The digital multicast is not
available until the HD Radio
broadcast is decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is available.
There is an audio mute
delay when selecting
HD2 or HD3, multicast
preset or Direct Tune
399
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Potential station issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. The station
is not available in your current
location.
The previously stored multicast
preset or direct tune is not
available in your current recep-
tion area.
Cannot access HD2 or
HD3 multicast channel
when recalling a preset
or from a direct tune.
Fill out the station issue form
at http://www.ibiquity.com/
automotive/
report_radio_station_experi-
ences
Data service issue by the radio
broadcaster.
Text information does
not match currently
playing audio.
Fill out the station issue form
at http://www.ibiquity.com/
automotive/
report_radio_station_experi-
ences
Data service issue by the radio
broadcaster.
There is no text
information shown for
currently selected
frequency.
No action required. This is
normal behavior.
This selection disables HD2-
HD7 channel search.
HD2-HD7 stations not
found when you press
Scan
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and
foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and
HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks
of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor
Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not
responsible for the content sent using HD
Radio technology. Content may be
changed, added or deleted at any time at
the station owner's discretion.
Radio Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
Radio
Then you can say a command similar to the following:
Say a frequency or preset.FM
Off
Help
400
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If
Activated)
E142611
To turn the feature on press the lower left corner of the touchscreen, and then
select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
SIRIUS
You can then select any of the following:
Save a channel by pressing and holding one of the memory preset
areas. There is a brief mute while the radio saves the channel.
Sound returns when finished.
Presets
Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite.Alerts
If you are listening to music, you can save the song or artist, so the
system can alert you when they are playing on a satellite radio
channel. If you are listening to a sporting event, you can save your
favorite teams so the system can alert you when they are playing
on a satellite radio channel. You can also edit alerts or turn alerts
on or off.
When an alert appears on the screen, you can choose to tune to
the channel, cancel the alert or turn off alerts.
Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approximately
45 minutes of audio as long as you have remained tuned to the
current station. Changing stations erases the previous audio.
Replay
While in replay mode:
Press and release the seek buttons to hear the previous or next
song.
Press and hold the seek buttons to reverse or fast forward in the
current track.
Press play or pause to play or pause the audio.
Press the button again to return to live audio.
Touch this button to hear a brief sampling of channels.Scan
Touch this button to view a list of all available stations. Scroll to
see more categories. Touch the station you want to listen to.
Browse
Note: SIRIUS does not support the Alert feature on all channels. Ford Motor Company shall
not be responsible for Alert feature variation.
401
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Browsing Controls
Action and DescriptionMessage
Touch this button if you want to skip this channel.Skip
Touch this button if you do not want anyone to listen to this
channel.
Lock
Touch this button to see song titles playing on other stations.Title
Touch this button to see artists playing on other stations.Artist
Touch this button to see a list of all the channel names.Channel
Options
Touch this button to view and adjust
various media settings.
MessageMessage
Touch this button to adjust settings for:Sound Settings
Bass
Midrange
Treble
Set Balance and Fade
DSP
Occupancy Mode
Speed Compensated Volume
This allows you to select a category of music you would like to
search for. You can then choose to either seek or scan for the
stations playing that category.
Set Category for
Seek/Scan
This allows you to lock and unlock channels, change or reset your
PIN or unlock all channels. To use this feature, you need your initial
PIN, which is 1234.
Parental Lockout
This feature allows you turn alerts on and off.Artist / Title / Team
Alerts
402
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
MessageMessage
SIRIUS requires this number when communicating with you about
your account.
Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
Touch this button to manually enter the desired satellite channel
number. Touch Enter when you are done
Direct Tune
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Information
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right
to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
E142593
SIRIUS satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SIRIUS satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term
that begins on the date of sale or lease of
your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels, and
other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at
1-888-539-7474.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. The ESN
is on the System Information Screen (SR
ESN:XXXXXXXXXXXX).
To access your ESN, touch the bottom
left corner of the touchscreen, then
select:
Message
SIRIUS
Options
403
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow
and ice build-up and keep luggage and other materials as far away
from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstruc-
tions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses,
parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere
with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower, a
stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio system
may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interference
and the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio
signal interfer-
ence
Troubleshooting tips
ActionCauseMessage
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
Radio requires more than two
seconds to produce audio for
the selected channel.
Acquiring…
If this message does not clear
shortly, or with an ignition key
cycle, your receiver may have
a fault. See an authorized
dealer for service.
There is an internal module or
system failure present.
Satellite antenna fault
SIRIUS system failure
Tune to another channel or
choose another preset.
The channel is no longer avail-
able.
Invalid Channel
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-539-
7474 to subscribe to the
channel, or tune to another
channel.
Your subscription does not
include this channel.
Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When
you move into an open area,
the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the
SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS
tower to your vehicle antenna.
No Signal
No action required. The
process may take up to three
minutes.
Update of channel program-
ming in progress.
Updating…
404
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Troubleshooting tips
ActionCauseMessage
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-539-
7474 to resolve subscription
issues.
Your satellite service is no
longer available.
Questions? Call
1-888-539-7474
Use the channel guide to turn
off the Lock or Skip function on
that station.
All the channels in the selected
category are either skipped or
locked.
None found
Check Channel Guide
No action required.SIRIUS has updated the chan-
nels available for your vehicle.
Subscription Updated
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Voice
Commands
E142599
If you are listening to SIRIUS
satellite radio, press the voice
button on the steering wheel
controls. You will hear a prompt, you can
then say any of the commands in the
following table.
If you are not listening to SIRIUS
satellite radio, press the voice button
and, after the tones press the voice
button and when prompted say:
Voice command
Sirius
You can then say any of the following
or a similar command:
SAT 1
Voice command
Sports Games
Tune
Help
You can also say the name of any Sirius
station, such as “The Highway” or “Deep
Tracks”, to listen to that station.
CD
E142611
To access, press the lower left corner
on the touchscreen, then select:
Menu Item
CD
405
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Insert your CD then select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch this button to repeat the currently
playing track, all tracks on the disc or switch
the feature off if already on.
Repeat
Touch this button to play the tracks or
entire albums in random order, or switch
the feature off if already on.
Shuffle
Touch this button to hear a brief sampling
of all available tracks.
Scan
Touch this button to see disc information.More Info
Touch this button to look through all avail-
able CD tracks.
Browse
To adjust the Sound Settings, select:
Menu Item
Options
Sound Settings
Then any of the following:
Bass
Midrange
Treble
Set Balance and Fade
Occupancy Mode
EQ Mode
Speed Compensated Volume
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these
sound settings.
CD Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to a CD, press
the voice button on the steering
wheel controls. When prompted,
say any of the following commands.
If you are not listening to a CD, press
the voice button and, after the tone,
say:
Voice command
CD Player
When listening to a CD you can say
many commands. Following are a few
examples of what you can say.
Voice command
Play
Pause
Next Track
406
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Voice command
Previous Track
Help
*This applies to WMA or MP3 files only.
SD Card Slot and USB Port
The SD card slot and USB port are located
in the Media Hub. See Media Hub (page
328).
SD Card
Note: Your SD card slot is spring-loaded.
To remove the SD card, press the card in
and the system ejects it. Do not attempt to
pull the card to remove it as this could cause
damage.
Note: The navigation system also uses this
card slot. See Navigation (page 431).
E196637
To access and play music from your device,
press the lower left corner of the
touchscreen.
E142620
SD logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
USB Port
E196638
To access and play music from your device,
press the lower left corner of the
touchscreen.
This feature allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks, flash drives
or thumb drives, and charge devices if they
support this feature.
Playing Music from Your Device
Note: The system is capable of indexing up
to 30,000 songs.
E142611
407
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Insert your device and select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Once the system recognizes your USB or SD card you can then
select from the following options:
USB
SD Card
This feature replays the currently playing song or album.Repeat
Touch this button to play music on the selected album or folder
in random order.
Shuffle
This feature allows you to choose music similar to what is currently
playing.
Similar Music
Touch this button to see disc information, for example current
track, artist name, album and genre.
More Info
Touch this button to view and adjust various media settings.Options
Sound
You can adjust the settings for:
Action and DescriptionMessage
BassSound Settings
Midrange
Treble
Set Balance and Fade
DSP
EQ Mode
Speed Compensated Volume
Allows you to select more settings, which is under Media Player.
See Settings (page 382).
Media Player
Settings
408
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMessage
Displays software and firmware information about the currently
connected media device.
Device Information
Indexes your device when you connect it for the first time and
each time the content changes (for example adding or removing
tracks) to make sure you have the latest voice commands avail-
able for all media on the device.
Update Media Index
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings.
Browse
This feature allows you to view the
contents of the device. It also allows you
to search by categories, for example genre,
artist or album.
If you want to view song information, for
example Title, Artist, File, Folder, Album,
and Genre, touch the on-screen album art.
You can also select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
To hear how the system pronounces the current band and song.
This can be helpful when using voice commands to make sure
the system correctly plays your request.
What’s Playing?
USB and SD Card Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Voice command
SD Card
USB
Then commands such as the following:
Browse
Next Track
Pause
Say the name of what you would like to listen to such as a band, song,
album or playlist.
Play
409
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Voice command
*
Play Artist ___
*
Play Song ___
Similar Music
Help
* ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it could be the name of anything, such as a group,
artist or song. For example you could say "Play artist The Beatles" or "Play song Penny
Lane".
Supported Media Players, Formats
and Metadata Information
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any
digital media player, including iPod,
Zune™, plays from device players, and
most USB drives. Supported audio formats
include MP3, WMA, WAV and AAC.
It is also able to organize your indexed
media from your playing device by
metadata tags. Metadata tags, which are
descriptive software identifiers embedded
in the media files, provide information
about the file.
If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these metadata
tags, SYNC may classify the empty
metadata tags as unknown.
Bluetooth Audio
The system allows you to stream audio
over your vehicle's speakers from your
connected, Bluetooth-enabled cell phone.
E142611
To access, press the lower left corner
on the touchscreen, then select:
Message
BT Stereo
Bluetooth Audio Voice Commands
E142599
The voice system allows you to control
your media with a simple voice command.
For example to change songs, press the
voice button and follow the system
prompts.
410
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
PHONE
MessageItem
PhoneA
Quick DialB
PhonebookC
HistoryD
MessagingE
SettingsF
Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of SYNC. Once you pair your cell
phone, you can access many options using
the touchscreen or voice commands. While
the system supports a variety of features,
many are dependent on your cell phone’s
functionality.
At a minimum, most cell phones with
Bluetooth wireless technology support the
following functions:
•Answering an incoming call.
•Ending a call.
•Using privacy mode.
•Dialing a number.
•Redialing.
•Call waiting notification.
•Caller ID.
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are cell phone-dependent
features. To check your cell phone’s
compatibility, see your cell phone’s user
manual and visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
411
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the
First Time
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
The first thing you must do to use the
phone features of SYNC is to pair your
Bluetooth-enabled cell phone with SYNC.
This allows you to use your cell phone in a
hands-free manner.
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature.
It is unavailable when your vehicle is
traveling at speeds over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Touch the upper left corner of the touchscreen:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Add phone
Follow the on-screen instructions.Find SYNC
Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and that your cell phone
is in the correct mode. See your cell phone’s manual if
necessary.
Select SYNC and a six-digit PIN appears on your device.
If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, it does not
support Secure Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN
displayed on the touchscreen. Skip the next step.
When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm that
the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your
cell phone.
The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options. For
more information on your cell phone's capability, see your
cell phone's manual and visit the website.
Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature.
It is unavailable when your vehicle is
traveling at speeds over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and
that your cell phone is in the correct mode.
See your device's manual if necessary.
412
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
To pair a subsequent cell phone, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Phone
Settings
Bluetooth Devices
Add Device
Follow the on-screen instructions.Find SYNC
Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and that your cell phone
is in the correct mode. See your cell phone’s manual if
necessary.
Select SYNC and a six-digit PIN appears on your device.
If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, it does not
support Secure Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN
displayed on the touchscreen. Skip the next step.
When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm that
the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your
cell phone.
The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options. For
more information on your cell phone's capability, see your
cell phone's manual and visit the website.
Making Calls
E142599
Press the voice button and say a
command similar to the following:
Voice command
Call
Dial
You can say the name of a person from
your phone book to call or a say a number
to dial. For example "Call John" or "Dial
867-5309".
E142632
To end the call or exit phone
mode, press and hold the phone
button.
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone
sounds. Call information appears in the
display if it is available.
413
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
To accept the call, select:
Message
Accept
Note: You can also accept the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
E142632
To reject the call, select:
Message
Reject
Note: You can also reject the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC logs
it as a missed call.
Phone Menu Options
Press the top left corner on the
touchscreen to select from the following
options:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch this button to access the on-screen numerical pad to
enter a number and place a call. During an active call, you can
also choose any of these options:
Phone
Mute Call
Hold Call
Privacy
Join Calls
End
Select to call stored contacts.Quick Dial
Touch this button to access and call any contacts in your
previously downloaded phonebook. The system places the
entries in alphabetical categories summarized at the top of
the screen
Phonebook
To turn on contact picture settings, if your device supports this
feature, select:
Phone
Settings
414
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Manage Phonebook
Display Photos from Phonebook
Certain smartphones may support transferring street addresses
when listed with phonebook contact information. If your cell
phone supports this feature, you can select and use these
addresses as destinations and save them as favorites.
Note: This is a cell phone-dependent feature. If your cell phone
does not support downloading call history using Bluetooth,
SYNC keeps track of calls made with the SYNC system.
Call History
After you connect your Bluetooth-enabled cell phone to SYNC,
you can access any previously dialed, received or missed calls.
You can also choose to save these to:
Quick DialFavorites
Send text messages using the touchscreen. See Text
Messaging later in this section.
Messaging
Touch this button to access various phone settings, for
example turning Bluetooth on and off, managing your phone-
book and more. See Phone Settings later in this section
Settings
Text Messaging
Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are cell
phone-dependent features.
Note: Certain features in text messaging
are speed-dependent and not available
when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over
3 mph (5 km/h).
Note: SYNC does not download read text
messages from your cell phone.
You can send and receive text messages
using Bluetooth, read them aloud and
translate text messaging acronyms, for
example LOL.
Touch the top left corner of the display,
then select:
Message
Phone
Messaging
Then any of the following:
Listen (speaker icon)
Dial
Send Text
View
Delete
415
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Composing a Text Message
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature.
It is unavailable when your vehicle is
traveling at speeds over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are cell
phone-dependent features.
To compose and send a text message, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Phone
Messaging
Enter a cell phone number or choose from your phonebook.Send Text
Allows you to customize the pre-defined message or create
a message on your own.
Edit Text
Sends the message as it is.Send
You can then preview the message, verify
the recipient as well as update the
message list.
Text Message Options
Message
I’ll call you back in a few minutes.
I just left, I’ll be there soon.
Can you give me a call?
I’m on my way.
I’m running a few minutes late.
I’m ahead of schedule, so I’ll be there
early.
I’m outside.
I’ll call you when I get there.
OK
Yes
No
Thanks
Message
Stuck in traffic.
Call me later.
LOL
Receiving a Text Message
Note: If you select View and your vehicle is
traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h), the system
offers to read the message to you instead
of allowing you to view it while driving.
When a new message arrives, an
audible tone sounds and the screen
displays a pop-up with the caller name
and ID, if supported by your cell phone.
You can select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
To view the text message.View
For SYNC to read the
message to you.
Listen
To call the contact.Dial
To exit the screen.Ignore
416
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Phone Settings
To enter the phone settings menu select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Phone
Settings
Then any of the
following:
Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well as save
it as a favorite.
Bluetooth Devices
To turn Bluetooth off or on.Bluetooth
If you want all calls to go directly to your voicemail and not
ring in the vehicle. When this feature is on, text message
notifications do not ring inside the cabin either.
Do Not Disturb
Turn the 911 Assist feature on and off. See Information
(page 418).
911 Assist
Select the ring tone you want to hear when you receive a call.
Choose from possible system ring tones, your currently paired
cell phone’s ring tone, a beep, text-to-speech or a silent
notification.
Phone Ringer
Select a text message notification, if supported by your cell
phone. Choose from possible system alert tones, text-to-
speech or silent.
Text Message Notifica-
tion
If your cell phone is compatible, use this screen to adjust your
internet data connection. Select to make your connection
profile with the personal area network or to turn off your
connection. You can also choose to adjust your settings or
have the system always connect, never connect when
roaming or query on connect. Press ? for more information.
Internet Data Connection
To access features such as automatic phonebook download,
re-download your phonebook, add contacts from your cell
phone as well as delete or upload your phonebook.
Manage Phonebook
To have the system alert you when your cell phone is in
roaming mode.
Roaming Warning
417
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Phone Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button and when
prompted say any of the following or a
similar command:
Voice command
Call Voicemail
Listen to Message
Reply to Message
Pair Phone
Help
INFORMATION
MessageItem
SYNC ServicesA
Travel LinkB
AlertsC
CalendarD
AppsE
Where Am I?F
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, press the
Information button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, press the corner
of the touchscreen with the green tab.
418
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
SYNC Services (If Equipped,
United States Only)
Note: SYNC Services varies by trim level
and model year and may require a
subscription. Traffic alerts and turn-by-turn
directions available in select markets.
Message and data rates may apply. Ford
Motor Company reserves the right to change
or discontinue this product service at any
time without prior notification or incurring
any future obligation.
Note: SYNC Services requires activation
before use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to
register and check your eligibility for
complimentary services. Standard phone
and message rates may apply. Subscription
may be required. You must also have the
active SYNC Services Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone paired and connected to the
system in order to connect to, and use,
SYNC Services. See Phone (page 411).
Note: This feature does not function
properly if you have enabled caller ID
blocking on your cellular phone. Make sure
your cellular phone is not blocking caller ID
before using SYNC Services.
Note: The driver is ultimately responsible
for the safe operation of the vehicle, and
therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe
to follow the suggested directions. Any
navigation features provided are only an aid.
Make your driving decisions based on your
observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an
unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be
placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would
be directed into an area that you consider
unsafe. Maps used by this system may be
inaccurate because of errors, changes in
roads, traffic conditions or driving
conditions.
Note: When you connect, the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect your vehicle's current
location, travel direction and speed to help
provide you with the directions, traffic
reports, or business searches you request.
Further, to provide the services you request,
for continuous improvement, the service
may collect and record call details and voice
communications. For more information, see
SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do not want
Ford or its service providers to collect your
vehicle travel information or other
information identified in the Terms and
Conditions, do not subscribe or use the
service.
SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle
sensors, integrated GPS technology and
comprehensive map and traffic data, to
give you personalized traffic reports,
precise turn-by-turn directions, business
search, news, sports, weather and more.
For a complete list of services, or to learn
more, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Connecting to SYNC Services
You can connect to SYNC Services using
voice commands or by selecting a menu
item on the touchscreen.
419
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
To use voice commands, press the voice button and say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
This initiates an outgoing call to SYNC Services using your
paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
Once you connect to the service, follow the voice prompts
to request the desired service, for example traffic or
directions.
Services
Once connected to SYNC Services, you can also say the following:
Receive a list of available services from which to choose.What Can I Say
To return to the Services main menu.Services
Receive system help.Help
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation,
press the I (Information) button. If your
vehicle is not equipped with Navigation,
press the green tab on your touchscreen.
To use the touchscreen select:
Menu Item
Connect to Services
This command initiates an outgoing call
to SYNC Services using your paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled cellular
phone. Once you connect to the service,
follow the voice prompts to request the
desired service.
420
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions
Press the voice button and say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
To receive directions to a location. Once
you select your destination, the system
uploads your current vehicle location,
calculates a route based on current traffic
conditions and sends it back to your vehicle.
After the route download is complete, the
phone call automatically ends. You then
receive audible and visual driving instruc-
tions as you travel toward your destination.
Directions
To find a business or type of business. Once
you select your destination, the system
uploads your current vehicle location,
calculates a route based on current traffic
conditions and sends it back to your vehicle.
After the route download is complete, the
phone call automatically ends. You then
receive audible and visual driving instruc-
tions as you travel toward your destination.
Business Search
To find the closest business or type of
business to your location, within business
search.
Search near me
Provides you with further assistance within
Directions and Business Search. The system
may prompt you to speak with an operator
when it has difficulty matching your voice
request. The live operator can assist you by
searching for businesses by name or by
Operator
category, residential addresses by street
address or by name or specific street inter-
sections. Operator Assist is a feature of your
SYNC Services subscription. For more
information on Operator Assist, visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.
If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks
if you want the route updated. Say yes
when prompted and the system sends a
new route to your vehicle.
Yes [During an active route]
421
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Disconnecting from SYNC Services
To use the steering wheel controls, press
and hold the hang-up phone button on the
steering wheel.
To use voice commands, press the
voice button and say:
Voice Command
Good-bye
SYNC Services Quick Tips
Tips
You can personalize your Services feature to provide quicker
access to your most used or favorite information. You can
save address points, such as work or home. You can also
save favorite information like sports teams, for example
Detroit Lions, or a news category. You can learn more about
personalization by logging onto www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Personalizing
Press the voice button at any time (while connected to SYNC
Services) to interrupt a voice prompt or an audio clip (such
as a sports report) and say your voice command.
Push to interrupt
Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone number, not your VIN (Vehicle Identification
Number). You can pair and connect your phone to any vehicle
equipped with SYNC Services and continue enjoying your
personalized services.
Portable
SYNC Services Voice Commands
E142599
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, SYNC Services
downloads your requested
destination to the navigation system. The
navigation system then calculates the
route and provides driving instructions.
See Navigation (page 431).
If your vehicle is not equipped with
Navigation, when a route has been
downloaded (non-navigation systems),
you can press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls and say any of the
following commands to receive directions:
Services
Voice command
Cancel Route
Route Status
Route Summary
Update Route
Help
422
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Sirius Travel Link (If Equipped)
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any handheld device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: In order to use Sirius Travel Link, your
vehicle must be equipped with navigation
and your navigation SD card must be in the
SD card slot.
Note: A paid subscription is required to
access and use these features. Go to
www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and
click on Coverage map and details for a
complete listing of all traffic areas covered
by Sirius Travel Link.
Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible
for any errors or inaccuracies in the Sirius
Travel Link services or its use in vehicles.
When you subscribe to Sirius Travel Link,
it can help you locate the best gas prices,
find movie listings, get current traffic alerts,
view the current weather map, get
accurate ski conditions and see scores to
current sports games.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route,
nearby your vehicle’s current location or near any of your
favorite places, if programmed.
Traffic on Route
Traffic Nearby
Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your
vehicle’s location or on an active navigation route.
Fuel Prices
Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their
show times, if available.
Movie Listings
Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather,
or the five day forecast for the chosen area.
Weather
Select to see the weather map,
which can show storms, radar
information, charts and winds.
Map
423
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select to choose from a listing of
weather locations.
Area
Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety
of sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier
access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in
progress.
Sports Info
Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.Ski Conditions
Sirius Travel Link Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button on the steering
wheel controls. When prompted, say
any of the following or a similar
command:
Voice command
Show Traffic
Show Weather
Help
Alerts
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the I
(Information) button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, touch the corner
of the touchscreen with the green tab.
Press Alerts, then choose from any of
the following services:
Action and DescriptionMessage
The complete messageView
The messageDelete
MessagesDelete All
This screen displays any system messages
(such as an SD card fault).
Note: The system alerts you to any
messages by turning the information icon
yellow. After you read or delete the
messages, the icon returns to white.
Calendar
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the I
(Information) button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, touch the corner
of the touchscreen with the green tab.
Press Calendar. You can view the current
calendar by day, week or month.
424
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
911 Assist
WARNINGS
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on
before a crash, the system will not
dial for help, which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time, which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
Always place your phone in a secure
location in your vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or damaged in
a crash. Failure to do so may cause serious
injury to someone or damage the phone,
which could prevent 911 Assist from
working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on prior to the incident.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user turns 911 Assist on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is turned off, either a voice
message plays or a display message (or
icon) comes on (or both) when your vehicle
is started after a previously paired phone
connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag, excluding knee
airbags and rear inflatable safety belts
where fitted or activates the fuel pump
shut-off, your SYNC-equipped vehicle may
be able to contact emergency services by
dialing 911 through a paired and connected
Bluetooth-enabled phone. For more
information about the 911 Assist feature
visit:
Website
visit www.SYNCMyRide.com
www.SYNCMyRide.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 37). Important information
regarding airbag deployment is in this
chapter.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 212).
Important information regarding the fuel
pump shut-off is in this chapter.
Setting 911 Assist On
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the I (Information)
button to access these features. If your
vehicle is not equipped with
Navigation, touch the corner of the
touchscreen with the green tab. Then
select:
Message
Apps
911 Assist
On
425
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
You can also access 911 Assist by
pressing:
Message
Settings
Phone
911 Assist
Or you can also select:
Help
911 Assist
To make sure that 911 Assist works
properly:
•SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
•The 911 Assist feature must be set on
prior to the incident.
•You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
phone to SYNC.
•A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
•A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
•The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the United States,
Canada or in a territory in which 911 is
the emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate
the fuel pump shut-off (which would
trigger 911 Assist); however, SYNC tries to
contact emergency services if 911 Assist
triggers. If a connected phone sustains
damage or loses connection to SYNC,
SYNC searches for, and tries to connect
to, any available previously paired phone
and tries to make the call to 911.
Before making the call:
•SYNC provides a short window of time
(approximately 10 seconds) to cancel
the call. If you fail to cancel the call,
SYNC attempts to dial 911.
•SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel."
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If:
•Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
•The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
•The phones(s) previously paired or
connected to the system are thrown
from the vehicle.
426
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you turn on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not turn the feature on.
Vehicle Health Report (If
Equipped, US Only)
WARNING
Always follow scheduled
maintenance instructions, regularly
inspect your vehicle, and seek repair
for any damage or problem you suspect.
Vehicle Health Report supplements, but
cannot replace, normal maintenance and
vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health Report
only monitors certain systems
electronically monitored by your vehicle
and will not monitor or report the status
of any other system, (such as brake lining
wear). Failure to perform scheduled
maintenance and regularly inspect your
vehicle may result in vehicle damage and
serious injury.
Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature
requires activation prior to use. Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There
is no fee or subscription associated with
Vehicle Health Report, but you must register
to use this feature.
Note: This feature may not function
properly if you have enabled caller ID
blocking on your cellular phone. Before
running a report, review the Vehicle Health
Report Privacy Notice.
Note: In order to allow a break-in period for
your vehicle, you may not be able to create
a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle
odometer has reached 200 miles.
Note: Cellular phone and SMS charges may
apply when making a report.
Register for Vehicle Health Report and set
your report preferences at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering,
you can request a Vehicle Health Report
(inside your vehicle). Return to your
account at www.SYNCMyRide.com to view
your report. You can also choose for SYNC
to remind you automatically to run reports
at specific mileage intervals. Cellular phone
airtime usage may apply when reporting.
The system allows you to check your
vehicle’s overall health in the form of a
diagnostic report card. The Vehicle Health
Report contains valuable information, for
example:
•Vehicle diagnostic information.
•Scheduled maintenance.
•Open recalls and Field Service Actions.
•Items noted during vehicle inspections
by your authorized dealer that still need
servicing.
Making a Report
If you want to run a report by using the
touchscreen, select:
Message
Apps
Vehicle Health Report
E142599
You can also run a vehicle health
report by voice command.
427
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Voice command
Vehicle Health Report
Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice
When you create a Vehicle Health Report,
Ford Motor Company may collect your
cellular phone number (to process your
report request) and diagnostic information
about your vehicle. Certain versions or
updates to Vehicle Health Report may also
collect more vehicle information. Ford may
use your vehicle information it collects for
any purpose. If you do not want to disclose
your cellular phone number or vehicle
information, do not run the feature or set
up your Vehicle Health Report profile at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. See
www.SYNCMyRide.com (Vehicle Health
Report Terms and Conditions, and Privacy
Statement) for more information.
Where Am I?
For information about your current
location, select:
Action and Descrip-
tion
Message
View your vehicle's
current location, if
your vehicle is
equipped with
navigation. If your
vehicle is not
equipped with
navigation, nothing
displays.
Where Am I?
CLIMATE
Touch the lower right corner on the
touchscreen to access your climate control
features. Depending on your vehicle line
and option package, your climate screen
may look different from this screen.
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See
Settings (page 382).
428
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Power: Touch the button to switch the system on and off. Switching off the
climate control system prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.
A
Passenger settings:B
Touch the + or – to increase or decrease the air temperature on the passenger
side of the vehicle.
Touch the heated seat icon to turn the heated seat off and on (if equipped).
Touch the climate-controlled seat icon to turn the climate-controlled seat off
and on (if equipped).
Touch DUAL to turn separate passenger side temperature controls off and on.
When you turn off DUAL, the passenger side temperature changes to match
the driver side temperature.
Note: The passenger side temperature and the DUAL indicator automatically
turn on when the passenger is adjusting their temperature control.
Fan speed: Touch + or - to increase or decrease the volume of air circulated
in your vehicle.
C
Note: When the system is controlling the fan speed automatically, all the fan
speed indicators turn off.
Rear: Touch to access the rear climate control. Rear climate control settings
appear at the bottom of the screen.
D
Touch the power icon to turn the rear climate control functions off and on.
429
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Touch Rear Control to allow the rear seat passengers to adjust the rear climate
settings. Touch it again to prevent the rear seat passengers from adjusting the
settings. Rear Control automatically turns off when you use the touchscreen
to adjust the rear climate settings.
Touch + or – to adjust the temperature.
To adjust fan speed, touch + or – next to the fan icon.
Touch Rear again to close the rear controls. Closing the rear climate control
functions does not affect their current settings.
Recirculated air: Touch the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. When you select recirculated air, the air currently in the
passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool
the interior (when used with A/C) and may reduce unwanted odors from
entering your vehicle.
E
Note: Recirculated air may turn off automatically (or be prevented from turning
on) in all airflow modes except Max A/C to reduce risk of fogging. Recirculated
air may also turn on and off automatically in Panel or Panel and Floor airflow
modes during hot weather in order to improve cooling efficiency.
MAX A/C: Touch the button to maximize cooling. Recirculated air flows through
the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
F
A/C: Touch the button to switch air conditioning compressor on or off. Use air
conditioning with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency.
G
Note: In certain conditions (such as when using Max Defrost), the air
conditioning compressor may continue to operate even after you switch off the
air conditioning with the A/C button.
AUTO: Touch the button to turn on automatic operation. Select the desired
temperature using the temperature control. The system adjusts fan speed, air
distribution, air conditioning operation, and selects outside air or recirculated
air to heat or cool the vehicle in order to maintain the desired temperature. You
can also use the AUTO button to turn off dual zone operation by touching and
holding the button for more than two seconds.
H
Heated rear window: Turns the heated rear window on and off. See the heated
Windows and Mirrors chapter in your owner manual.
I
Defrost: Press the button to distribute air to the windshield vents and de-mister.
Air distribution to instrument panel and footwell vents turn off. You can use
this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
J
Air distribution control: Touch these buttons to turn airflow from the
windshield, instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off. The system can
distribute air through any combination of these vents.
K
Driver settings:L
430
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Touch the + or – to increase or decrease the air temperature on the passenger
side of the vehicle.
Touch the heated seat icon to turn the heated seat off and on (if equipped).
Touch the climate-controlled seat icon to turn the climate-controlled seat off
and on (if equipped).
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a
wood-trimmed steering wheel, it does not
heat between the 10 o'clock and 2 o'clock
positions.
Climate Control Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the
following or a similar command:
Voice commands
Climate On
Climate Off
Adjust the temperature between 59.0°F
(15°C)-86.0°F (30°C).
Set temperature
NAVIGATION
Note: The navigation SD card must be in
the SD card slot to operate the navigation
system. If you need a replacement SD card,
see an authorized dealer.
Note: The SD card slot is spring-loaded. To
remove the SD card, just push the card in
and release it. Do not attempt to pull the
card out to remove it; this could cause
damage.
Your navigation system is comprised of
two main features, destination mode and
map mode.
Destination Mode
To set a destination, press the green
corner of your touchscreen, then press:
Menu Item
Dest.
Choose any of the following:
My Home
Favorites
Previous Destinations
Point of Interest
Emergency
Street Address
Intersection
City Center
431
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Menu Item
Map
Edit Route
Cancel Route
To set your destination, enter the
necessary information into the highlighted
text fields (in any order).
For an address destination entry, press:
Action and Descrip-
tion
Menu Item
Pressing this button
makes the address
location appear on
the map.
Go
To choose a previous destination,
press:
Action and Descrip-
tion
Menu Item
The last 20 destina-
tions you have
selected appear.
Previous Destina-
tions
Once you have chosen your destination press:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
To make this your destination. You can also choose to set this
as a waypoint (have the system route to this point on the way
to your current destination) or save it as a favorite. You can
then choose your route from three different options.
Set as Dest
Uses the fastest moving roads
possible.
Fastest Route
Uses the shortest distance possible.Shortest Route
Uses the most fuel-efficient route.Eco Route
To begin navigation press:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
You can cancel the route or have the system demo the route
for you.
Start Route
During route guidance, you can press the talking bubble icon
that appears in the upper right navigation corner (green bar) if
you want the system to repeat route guidance information.
When the system repeats the last guidance instruction, it
updates the distance to the next guidance instruction, since it
detects when the vehicle is moving.
432
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Note: If your vehicle is on a recognized road
and you do not press the Start Route
button, the system defaults to the Fastest
Route option and begins guidance.
Point of Interest (POI) Categories
Main Categories
Food/Drink & Dining
Travel & Transportation
Financial
Emergency
Community
Health & Medicine
Automotive
Shopping
Entertainment & Arts
Recreation & Sports
Government
Domestic Services
Subcategories
Restaurant
Golf
Parking
Home & Garden
Personal Care Services
Auto Dealership
Govt Office
Public Transit
Education
To expand these listings, press the + in
front of the listing.
The system also allows you to sort
alphabetically, by distance or by cityseekr
listings (if available).
cityseekr
Note: cityseekr point of interest (POI)
information is limited to approximately 912
cities (881 in the United States, 20 in
Canada and 11 in Mexico).
E142634
cityseekr, when available, is a service that
provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants,
hotels and attractions.
When you have selected a point of interest,
the location and information appear, such
as address and phone number. If cityseekr
lists the point of interest, more information
is available, such as a brief description,
check-in and checkout times or restaurant
hours.
For a longer review, a list of services
and facilities, the average room, meal
price or the website press:
Menu Item
More Information
This screen displays the point of interest
icon such as:
433
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
E143884
Hotel
E142636
Coffeehouse
E142637
Food & Drink
E142638
Nightlife
E142639
Attraction
E142640
This icon appears when your
selection exists in multiple
categories within the system.
When you are viewing more
information for hotels, cityseekr also
tells you if the hotel has certain
services and facilities using icons, such
as:
•Restaurant
•Business center
•Handicap facilities
•Laundry
•Refrigerator
•24 hour room service
•Fitness center
•Internet access
•Pool
•Wi-FI
For restaurants, cityseekr can provide
information such as star rating, average
cost, review, handicap access, hours of
operation, and website address.
For hotels, cityseekr can provide
information such as star rating, price
category, review, check-in and checkout
times, hotel service icons and website
address.
Setting Your Navigation
Preferences
E142607
Select settings for the system to
take into account when planning
your route.
To access the settings options, press
Menu Item
Settings
Navigation
You can then select any of the following
options.
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Map Preferences
Then select any of the following:
Display your vehicle’s previously traveled route with white dots.
You can switch this feature:
Breadcrumbs
OffOn
434
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Have the system display your turn listTurn List Format
Bottom to TopTop to Bottom
When parking point of interest notification is on, the icons
display on the map when you get close to your destination.
This may not be very useful in dense areas, and may clutter
the map when other points of interest display. Set the auto-
matic parking point of interest notification. You can switch this
feature:
Parking POI Notification
OffOn
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Route Preferences
Then select any of the following:
Choose to have the system display your chosen route type.Preferred Route
EcologicalFastest RouteShortest Route
Bypass route selection in destination programming. The system only
calculates one route based on preferred route setting.
Always use
Preferred Route
When activated, the system uses your selected route type to calculate
only one route to the desired destination.
Select a level of cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the
setting, the longer the time allotment is for the route.
Eco Time
Penalty
When activated, you can to choose to have the system avoid highways,
toll roads, ferries, and car trains when planning your route.
Avoid
Have the system use high-occupancy vehicle lanes, if available, when
planning your route.
Use HOV Lanes
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Navigation Preferences
Then select any of the following:
Select the type of prompts the system uses.Guidance Prompts
435
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Voice and TonesTones Only
Have the system automatically fill in this information based
on what you have already entered into the system. You can
switch this feature:
Auto - Fill State/Province
OffOn
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Traffic Preferences
Then select any of the following:
You can choose how you want the system to handle traffic
problems along your route.
Avoid Traffic Problems
Have the system reroute you to avoid
traffic incidents that develop and
impact the current route. The system
does not provide a traffic alert notific-
ation
Automatic
Have the system always provide a
traffic alert notification for traffic
incidents along the planned route.
You have a choice to accept or ignore
the notification before making the
route deviation.
Manual
Activate traffic alert notifications on or off.Traffic alert notification
These icons will alert you to traffic and driving conditions
including accidents, closures and weather conditions.
You are also able to
switch on and off the 11
traffic map icons.
436
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Choose areas which you want the system to avoid when
calculating a route for you
Avoid Areas
Then select any of the following:
Once you make a selection, the system tries to avoid the
area(s) if possible for all routes. Select this button to program
an entry, then choose a destination entry method. You can
edit the name or location of a destination or remove it from
your selections.
Add
To remove an area from your selection, choose the listing on
the screen. The screen will change, then press delete and
confirm the deletion.
Delete
Map Mode
Press the green bar in the upper right area
of the touchscreen to view map mode. Map
mode shows advanced viewing comprised
of both 2D city maps as well as 3D
landmarks (when available).
2D city maps show detailed outlines of
buildings, visible land use and land
elements and detailed railway
infrastructure for the most essential cities
around the globe. These maps also contain
features, such as town blocks, building
footprints and railways.
3D landmarks appear as clear, visible
objects that are typically recognizable and
have a certain tourist value. The 3D
landmarks appear in 3D map mode only.
Coverage varies and improves with
updated map releases.
E174016
Change the appearance of the
map display by repeatedly
pressing the arrow button in the
upper left corner of the screen. It toggles
between three different map modes:
Heading up, North up and 3D.
E142642
Heading up (2D map) always
shows the direction of forward
travel to be upward on the
screen. This view is available for
map scales up to 2.5 miles (4
kilometers). The system remembers this
setting for larger map scales, but shows
the map in North up only. If the scale
returns below this level, the system
restores Heading up.
E142643
North up (2D map) always
shows the northern direction to
be upward on the screen.
E142644
3D map mode provides an
elevated perspective of the map.
This viewing angle can be
adjusted and the map can be
rotated 180 degrees by touching
the map twice, and then dragging your
finger along the shaded bar with arrows at
the bottom of the map.
437
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
You can also select the following
options:
DescriptionMenu Items
Switches between
full map, street list
and exit view in
route guidance.
View
Displays a pop-up
box that allows
direct access to
navigation settings.
Menu
E174017
Press the speaker button on the
map to mute route guidance.
When the light on the button
illuminates, the feature is on. The speaker
button appears on the map only when
route guidance is active.
E146188
Re-center the map by pressing
this icon whenever you scroll the
map away from your vehicle’s
current location.
Auto Zoom
Press the green bar to access map mode,
then select the + or - zoom button to bring
up the zoom level and Auto buttons on the
touchscreen. When you press Auto, Auto
Zoom turns on and Auto displays in the
bottom left corner of the screen in the map
scale. The map zoom level then
synchronizes with vehicle speed. The
slower your vehicle is traveling, the farther
the map zooms in; the faster your vehicle
is traveling, the farther the map zooms out.
To switch off the feature, just press the +
or - button again.
In 3D mode, rotate the map view by
swiping your finger across the shaded bar
with the arrows.
The ETA box under the zoom buttons
appears when a route is active and
displays the distance and time to your
destination. If the button is pressed, a pop
up appears with the destination listed (and
waypoint if applicable) along with mileage
and time to destination. You may also
select to have either the estimated time
to reach your destination or your estimated
arrival time.
Map Icons
E142646
Vehicle mark shows the current
location of your vehicle. It stays
in the center of the map display,
except when in scroll mode.
E142647
Scroll cursor allows you to
scroll the map; the fixed icon is
in the center of the screen. The
map position closest to the
cursor is in a window on the top
center part of the screen.
E142648
Address book entry default
icon(s) indicates the location
on the map of an address book
entry. This is the default symbol
shown after the entry has been
stored to the Address Book by any method
other than the map. You can select from
any of the 22 icons available. You can use
each icon more than once.
E142649
Home indicates the location on
the map currently stored as the
home position. You can only
save one address from the
Address Book as your Home
entry. You cannot change this icon.
E142650
POI (Point Of Interest) icons
indicate locations of any point
of interest categories you choose
to display on the map. You can
choose to display three point of
interest categories on the map at one time.
438
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
E142651
Starting point indicates the
starting point of a planned route.
E142652
Waypoint indicates the location
of a waypoint on the map. The
number inside the circle is
different for each waypoint and
represents the position of the
waypoint in the route list.
E142653
Destination symbol indicates
the ending point of a planned
route.
E142654
Next maneuver point indicates
the location of the next turn on
the planned route.
E142655
No GPS symbol indicates that
insufficient GPS satellite signals
are available for accurate map
positioning. This icon may
display under normal operation
in an area with poor GPS access.
Quick-touch Buttons
When in map mode, touch anywhere on
the map display to access the following
options:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch this button to select a scrolled location on the map as
your destination. You may scroll the map by pressing your index
finger on the map display. When you reach the desired location,
simply let go and then touch this button.
Set as Dest
Touch this button to set the current location as a waypoint.Set as Waypoint
Touch this button to save the current location to your favorites.Save to Favorites
Touch this button to select icons to display on the map. You
can select up to three icons to display on the map at the same
time. You can switch these features:
POI Icons
OffOn
When on an active route, select any of the following options:View / Edit Route
View Route
Edit Destination/Waypoints
Edit Turn List
Detour
Edit Route Preferences
Edit Traffic Preferences
Cancel Route
439
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
HERE is the digital map provider for the
navigation application. If you find map data
errors, you may report them directly to
HERE by going to
www.here.com/mapcreator. HERE
evaluates all reported map errors and
responds with the result of their
investigation by e-mail.
Navigation Map Updates
Annual navigation map updates are
available for purchase through your
dealership, by calling 1-866-462-8837 (in
Mexico, call 01-800-557-5539) or going
to www.navigation.com/sync. You need
to specify the make and model of your
vehicle to determine if there is an update
available.
Navigation Voice Commands
E142599
When in navigation mode, press
the voice button on the steering
wheel controls.
After the tone, say any of the following
or a similar command:
Voice command
Destination
Zoom Out
Zoom In
Where Am I
Help
The following commands can only be
used when a navigation route is active:
Voice command
Detour
Cancel Route
Show Route
Repeat Instruction
Turn List
One-shot Destination Street Address
To set a destination with voice
commands, you can say:
Action and Descrip-
tion
Voice Command
The system asks
you to say the full
address. The
system displays an
example on-screen.
Find an Address
You can then speak the address naturally,
such as "One two three four Main Street,
Anytown".
MYFORD TOUCH™
TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
should questions arise, see the tables
below.
Use the website at any time to check your
phone's compatibility, register your
account and set preferences as well as
access a customer representative via an
online chat (during certain hours). For more
information visit:
440
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Websites
www.SYNCMyRide.com
Websites
www.SYNCMyRide.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review your phone's manual
about audio adjustments.
The audio control settings
on your phone may be
affecting SYNC perform-
ance.
There is excessive back-
ground noise during a phone
call.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
During a call, I can hear the
other person but they
cannot hear me.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
SYNC is not able to down-
load my phonebook.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC. See
Phone (page 411).
Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the
website.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC. See
Phone (page 411).
This may be a limitation on
your phone's capability.
The system says that the
phonebook has downloaded
but the phonebook in SYNC
is empty or missing
contacts.
If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associ-
ated with the missing
contact.
441
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Depending upon your phone,
you may have to grant SYNC
permission to access your
phonebook contacts. Make
sure to confirm when
prompted by your phone
during the phonebook
download.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
I am having trouble
connecting my phone to
SYNC. Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Try deleting your device
from SYNC, deleting SYNC
from your device and trying
again.
Check the security and auto
accept and prompt always
settings relative to the SYNC
Bluetooth connection on
your phone.
Update your device's firm-
ware.
Turn off the Auto phone-
book download setting.
You can also preform the
MyFord Touch reset
procedure.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
Text messaging is not
working on SYNC.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
442
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
USB and media issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
device malfunction.
I am having trouble
connecting my device.
Make sure you are using the
manufacturer's cable.
Make sure you insert the
USB cable correctly into the
device and the USB port.
Make sure that the device
does not have an auto-
install program or active
security settings.
Make sure you are not
leaving the device in your
vehicle during very hot or
cold temperatures.
This is a device limitation.SYNC does not recognize
my device when I turn on the
car.
Review the device compatib-
ility chart on the SYNC
website to confirm your
phone supports the
Bluetooth audio streaming
function.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
The device is not connected.
Bluetooth audio does not
stream.
Make sure you correctly
connect the device to SYNC,
and that you have pressed
play on your device.
You can also preform the
MyFord Touch reset
procedure.
Make sure that all song
details are populated.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist,
song title, album or genre
information.
SYNC does not recognize
music that is on my device.
Some devices require you to
change the USB settings
from mass storage to MTP
class.
The file may be corrupted.
The song may have copy-
right protection, which does
not allow it to play.
443
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Vehicle Health Report and Services (Traffic, Directions and Information) issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
This is a free feature, but you
must first register online to
use it.
You did not activate your
account on the website.
You may have the wrong
VIN (vehicle identification
number) listed.
I received a text that I did
not activate Vehicle Health
Report.
Make sure that your VIN is
correctly listed in your
account.
When you register your
account, you must choose a
preferred dealer. If it already
lists a dealer, try selecting
another dealer and logging
out. Log back in, change it
back to your preferred
dealer, and retrieve the
report.
The preferred dealer
information did not load
correctly.
I am unable to retrieve the
report on the website, or I
receive a system error.
Update your cellular number
in your account on the
website.
This could be due to your
phone's compatibility.
Bad signal strength.
I am unable to submit a
report.
Make sure you have full
signal strength and that your
Bluetooth volume level has
been turned up.
You did not register your
phone correctly on the
website.
Make sure the currently
connected phone is
registered on your
SYNCMyRide account.
Try deleting your phone and
performing a clean pairing.
This is a free feature, but you
must first register online to
use it.
You did not activate this
phone for this service.
Your phone has ID blocker
active.
I heard a commercial when
I tried to use Traffic, Direc-
tions and Information.
Turn off ID blocker on your
phone as the system recog-
nizes you by your phone
number.
Make sure the currently
connected phone is the
same one that is registered
on your SYNCMyRide
account.
444
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review the phone voice
commands and the media
voice commands at the
beginning of their respective
sections.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
You may be speaking too
soon or at the wrong time.
SYNC does not understand
what I am saying.
After pressing the voice icon,
wait until the system
prompts you to begin saying
a command. Any command
spoken before this does not
register with the system.
Review the media voice
commands at the beginning
of the media section.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
SYNC does not understand
the name of a song or artist.
Say the song or artist
exactly as listed. If you say
"Play Artist Prince", the
system does not play music
by Prince and the Revolution
or Prince and the New
Power Generation.
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
Make sure you are saying the
complete title, such as
"California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles".
If the song titles are in all
CAPS, you have to spell
them. LOLA requires you to
say "L-O-L-A".
Do not use special charac-
ters in the title. The system
does not recognize them.
Review the Phone voice
commands at the beginning
of the phone section.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
SYNC does not understand
or is calling the wrong
contact when I want to
make a call. Make sure you are saying the
contacts exactly as they are
listed. For example, if you
save a contact as Joe
Wilson, say "Call Joe
Wilson".
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
445
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Contacts in your phonebook
may be very short and
similar, or they may contain
special characters.
Using the SYNC phone
menu, open the phonebook
and scroll to the name
SYNC is having trouble
understanding. SYNC will
read the name to you, giving
you some idea of the
pronunciation SYNC is
expecting.
Your phonebook contacts
may be in CAPS.
The system works better if
you list full names, such as
"Joe Wilson" rather than
"Joe".
Do not use special charac-
ters, such as 123 or ICE, as
the system does not recog-
nize them.
If a contact is in CAPS, you
have to spell it. JAKE
requires you to say "Call J-
A-K-E".
Touchscreen System Reset
The touchscreen system has a system reset feature that can be performed if the function
of a SYNC feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and will not erase
any information previously stored in the system (such as paired devices, phonebook,
call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and
hold the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power button. After
approximately 5 seconds the screen will go black. Allow a 1-2 minutes for the system
reset to complete. You may then resume using the SYNC system.
446
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)
For a complete listing of the accessories
that are available for your vehicle, please
contact your authorized dealer or visit the
online store web site:
Web Address (United States)
www.Accessories.Ford.com
Web Address (Canada)
www.Accessories.Ford.ca
Ford Accessories are available for your
vehicle through an authorized Ford dealer.
Ford Motor Company will repair or replace
any properly authorized dealer-installed
Ford Original Accessory found to be
defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period,
as well as any component damaged by the
defective accessories.
Ford Motor Company will warrant your
vehicle through the warranty that provides
the greatest benefit:
•24 months, unlimited mileage.
•The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.
Contact an authorized dealer for details
and a copy of the warranty.
Exterior style
•Bug shields.
•Commercial graphics.*
•Commercial LED warning strobe lights.
•Deflectors.
•Exhaust tip.
•Fog lamps.
•Running boards.
•Splash guards.
•Stainless-steel wheel covers.*
•Step bars.
•Wheel well liners.
Interior style
•Cargo organizers.
•Custom seat covers.*
•Floor mats.
Lifestyle
•Ash cup / smoker's package.
•Bed extender.
•Bedliners and bedmats.
•Racks and carriers.*
•Rear-seat entertainment.*
•Sportliner cargo liner.*
•Tonneau covers*.
•Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and
accessories.
•Truck bed camping tent.*
Peace of mind
•Back-up alarm.*
•Bed hooks.*
•Bumper and hitch-mounted parking
sensors.*
•Cable lock.*
•Ford Telematics.
•Keyless entry keypad.
•Protective seat covers.*
•Remote start and alarms.
•Speed/Cruise control.
•Tool or Cargo boxes.*
•Wheel locks.
447
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Accessories
*The accessory manufacturer designs,
develops and therefore warrants Ford
Licensed Accessories, and does not design
or test these accessories to Ford Motor
Company engineering requirements.
Contact an authorized Ford dealer for the
manufacturer’s limited warranty details,
and request a copy of the Ford Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty from
the accessory manufacturer.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep
the following information in mind when
adding accessories or equipment to your
vehicle:
•When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Ask an authorized
dealer for specific weight information.
•The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian
Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulate the use
of mobile communications systems
that are equipped with radio
transmitters, for example, two-way
radios, telephones and theft alarms.
Any such equipment installed in your
vehicle should comply with Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC) regulations and should be
installed only by an authorized dealer.
•An authorized dealer needs to install
mobile communications systems.
Improper installation may harm the
operation of your vehicle, particularly
if the manufacturer did not design the
mobile communication system
specifically for automotive use.
•If you or an authorized Ford dealer add
any non-Ford electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect
battery performance and durability. In
addition, you may also adversely affect
the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
AUXILIARY SWITCHES
For maximum vehicle performance, keep
the following information in mind when
adding accessories or equipment to your
vehicle:
•When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Ask an authorized
dealer for specific weight information.
•The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian
Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulate the use
of mobile communications systems
equipped with radio transmitters, for
example, two-way radios, telephones
and theft alarms. Any such equipment
installed in your vehicle should comply
with Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian
Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulations, and
should be installed by an authorized
dealer.
448
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Accessories
•An authorized dealer needs to install
mobile communications systems.
Improper installation may harm the
operation of your vehicle, particularly
if the manufacturer did not design the
mobile communication system
specifically for automotive use.
•If you or an authorized Ford dealer add
any non-Ford electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect
battery performance and durability. In
addition, you may also adversely affect
the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
E163431
The auxiliary switch option package
provides four switches, mounted in the
center of the instrument panel. These
switches operate only while the ignition is
in the on position, whether the engine is
running or not. Ford recommends, however,
that the engine remain running to maintain
battery charge when using the auxiliary
switches for extended periods of time or
higher current draws.
Note: When your vehicle has a diesel
engine, use the auxiliary switches only while
the engine is running. The glow plugs also
drain battery power when the ignition key is
in the on position. Using the auxiliary
switches, even for limited amounts of time,
can cause your battery to drain quickly and
prevent your vehicle from restarting.
When switched on, the auxiliary switches
provide 8 amps, 12 amps or 20 amps of
electrical battery power for a variety of
personal or commercial uses.
The relay box for the auxiliary switches is
on the end of the left side of the instrument
panel. See your authorized dealer for
service.
The relays are coded as shown:
E163432
Each switch includes a power lead, a
blunt-cut and sealed wire located below
the instrument panel and to the left of the
steering column.
E165186
The power leads are coded as shown:
449
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Accessories
Fuse
Amp
Rating
Wire
Color
Circuit
Number
Switch
25AYellowCAC05AUX 1
25AGreen
with
Brown
Trace
CAC06AUX 2
10AViolet
with
Green
Trace
CAC07AUX 3
15ABrownCAC08AUX 4
Learn more about auxiliary switches by
visiting
https://www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas/.
450
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Accessories
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD
EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.
SERVICE PLANS (U.S. Only)
More than 32 million Ford owners have
discovered the powerful protection of Ford
Extended Service Plan. It is the extended
service plan backed by Ford Motor
Company, and provides peace of mind
protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty coverage.
Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and
labor – can easily exceed the price of your
Ford Extended Service Plan. With Ford ESP
you minimize your risk for unexpected
repair bills and rising repair costs.
Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle
Components
There are four core Extended Service Plans
with different levels of coverage. Ask your
authorized dealer for details.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most
comprehensive coverage. With over
1,000 covered components, this plan
is so complete that we generally only
discuss what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components,
and includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Ford Extended Service Plan is honored by
all authorized Ford dealers in the U.S.,
Canada and Mexico. It is the extended
service plan authorized and backed by Ford
Motor Company.
That means you get:
•Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
Lincoln dealership
•Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts
Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit
You take advantage of replacement
transportation if your vehicle is at your
authorized dealer for same day covered
repairs.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including bumper to bumper
warranty repairs, and Field Service Actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,
including:
•Towing, flat-tire change and battery
jump starts
•Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
•Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
•Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle,
rental car coverage and emergency
transportation.
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
Extended Service Plan coverage expires,
you can transfer any remaining coverage
to the new owner. Whenever you sell your
vehicle, prospective buyers may have a
higher degree of confidence that vehicle
was properly maintained with Ford ESP,
thereby improving resale value.
451
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
Avoid the Rising Cost of Properly
Maintaining Your Vehicle!
Ford Extended Service Plan also offers a
Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all
scheduled maintenance, and selected
wear items. The coverage is prepaid, so
you never have to worry about affording
your vehicle’s maintenance. It covers
regular checkups, routine inspections,
preventive care and replacement of select
items that require periodic attention for
normal wear:
•Windshield wiper blades.
•Spark plugs.
•The clutch disc.
•Brake pads and linings.
•Shock absorbers.
•Struts.
•Engine Belts.
•Engine coolant hoses, clamps and
o-rings.
•Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment.
Interest Free Finance Options
Available
Take advantage of our interest free
installment payment plan. Just a 10%
down payment will provide you with an
affordable, no interest, no fee payment
program allowing you all the security and
benefits Ford ESP has to offer while paying
over time. You are pre-approved with no
credit checks, no hassles! To learn more,
call our Ford ESP specialists at
800-367-3377.
Ford ESP
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your
vehicle by purchasing a Ford Extended
Service Plan. Ford Extended Service Plan
is the only service contract backed by Ford
Motor Company of Canada, Limited.
Depending on the plan you purchase, Ford
Extended Service Plan provides benefits
such as:
•Rental reimbursement.
•Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
•Protection against repair costs after
your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Coverage expires.
•Roadside Assistance benefits.
There are several Ford Extended Service
Plans available in various time, distance
and deductible combinations. Each plan
is tailored to fit your own driving needs,
including reimbursement for towing and
rental. When you purchase Ford Extended
Service Plan, you receive added
peace-of-mind protection throughout
Canada, the United States and Mexico,
provided by a network of participating
authorized Ford Motor Company dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of
Canada, the United States and Mexico are
not eligible for Ford Extended Service Plan
coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information, visit your local Ford of
Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the
Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for
you.
452
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when
you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you
have your vehicle serviced at the proper
times. These intervals serve two purposes;
one is to maintain the reliability of your
vehicle and the second is to keep your cost
of owning your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all
scheduled maintenance performed and to
make sure that the materials used meet
the specifications identified in the owner's
manual.
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the
operation of your vehicle. Ask your
dealership about the training and
certification their technicians have
received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft
Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed
at your dealership carry a nationwide
24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer)
parts and labor limited warranty.
If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one
stop shopping. They can perform any
services that are required on your vehicle,
from general maintenance to collision
repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved
reliability, durability and resale value. To
maintain the proper performance of your
vehicle and its emission control systems,
make sure you have scheduled
maintenance performed at the designated
intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance
systems. Every manufacturer develops
these systems using different
specifications and performance features.
That is why it is important to rely upon your
dealership to properly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.
453
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Ford Motor Company has recommended
maintenance intervals for various parts
and component systems based upon
engineering testing. Ford Motor Company
relies upon this testing to determine the
most appropriate mileage for replacement
of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at
the lowest overall cost to you and
recommends against maintenance
schedules that deviate from the scheduled
maintenance information.
We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or
Ford-authorized re-manufactured
replacement parts engineered for your
vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and the Ford
Workshop Manual list the recommended
additives and chemicals for your vehicle.
We do not recommend using chemicals or
additives not approved by us as part of
your vehicle’s normal maintenance. Please
consult your warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
normal operating characteristic and, by
itself, does not necessarily indicate a
concern or that the fluid needs to be
changed. However, a qualified expert, such
as the factory-trained technicians at your
dealership, should inspect discolored fluids
that also show signs of overheating or
foreign material contamination
immediately.
Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a
viable way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are
flushed only with new fluid that is the same
as that required to fill and operate the
system or using a Ford-approved flushing
chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.
Check every month
Air filter restriction gauge.
Fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary (or if indicated by the information display).
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Holes and slots in the tail pipe to make sure they are functional and clear of debris.
454
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Tightening lug nuts
Tighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 500 miles
(800 km) after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rota-
tion, changing a flat tire or wheel removal).
Vehicles with single rear
wheels
Tighten the wheel lug nuts to the specified torque at 100
miles (160 km), and again at 500 miles (800 km) of new
vehicle operation and after any wheel disturbance (such
as tire rotation, changing a flat tire or wheel removal).
Vehicles with dual rear
wheels
Note: For the proper lug nut torque specification, see Technical specifications in the Wheels
and Tires chapter of your owner's manual.
Multi-point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval
to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
Multi-point inspection
Horn operationAccessory drive belt(s)
Radiator, cooler, heater and A/C hosesBattery performance
Suspension component for leaks or
damage
Engine air filter
Steering and linkageExhaust system
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper
pressure**
Exterior lamps and hazard warning system
operation
Windshield for cracks, chips or pits
Fluid levels*; fill if necessary
Washer spray and wiper operationFor oil and fluid leaks
* Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission, power steering and window
washer.
**If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration
Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
455
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive
way to perform a thorough inspection of
your vehicle. Your checklist gives you
immediate feedback on the overall
condition of your vehicle.
NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
6.2L and 6.8L Gasoline Engines
Every 7500 miles (12000 km) or six months (whichever comes first)
Change engine oil and filter.
Rotate tires*, inspect tire wear and measure tread depth.
Inspect wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Perform multi-point inspection (recommended).
*Vehicles with dual rear wheels should rotate the front wheels when specified; rear wheels
only if unusual wear is noted.
Every 15000 miles (24000 km) or 12 months (whichever comes first)
Inspect automatic transmission fluid level. Consult dealer for requirements.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect front axle and U-joints. Lubricate if equipped with grease fittings (Four-wheel
drive vehicles).
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tie-rod ends, driveshaft and U-joints.
Lubricate if equipped with grease fittings.
Other maintenance items
Replace climate-controlled (heated and cooled) seat
filter.*
Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Replace engine air filter.
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter on 5-speed
transmission. Consult dealer for requirements.
Every 60000 miles (96000
km)
456
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Other maintenance items
Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease seal if non-
sealed bearings are used.
Replace spark plugs.
Every 97500 miles (156000
km)
Change engine coolant.**
Every 105000 miles
(168000 km) Replace rear axle fluid.
Inspect accessory drive belt(s).***
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter on 6-speed
transmission. Consult dealer for requirements.
Every 150000 miles
(240000 km)
Replace accessory drive belt(s) if not replaced within the
last 100000 miles (160000 km).
Replace front wheel bearings and seals if non-sealed
bearings are used.
* If your vehicle has climate-controlled (heated and cooled) seats.
** Initial replacement at six years or 105000 miles (168000 kilometers), then every three
years or 45000 miles (72000 kilometers).
*** If not replaced, inspect every 15000 miles (24000 kilometers).
6.7L Diesel Engine
See the diesel supplement for scheduled
maintenance information.
SPECIAL OPERATING
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
6.2L and 6.8L Gasoline Engines
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally
under any of these conditions, it is not
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.
457
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
Inspect and lubricate U-joints.Inspect frequently, service
as required See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Every 5000 miles (8000
km)
Rotate tires*, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
Change engine oil and filter.Every 5000 miles (8000
km) or six months Inspect and lubricate U-joints.
Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease seals if
non-sealed bearings are used.
Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).Every 60000 miles (96000
km) Replace spark plugs.
*Vehicles with dual rear wheels should rotate the front wheels when specified; rear wheels
only if unusual wear is noted.
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use
(such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or livery)
Replace engine air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Inspect brake system.Every 5000 miles (8000
km) Inspect wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Lubricate control arm and steering ball joints if equipped
with grease fittings.
Rotate tires*, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
Inspect and lubricate U-joints.Every 5000 miles (8000
km) or six months
Change engine oil and filter.Every 5000 miles (8000
km), six months or 200
engine hours
458
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use
(such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or livery)
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).Every 30000 miles (48000
km) Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease seals if
non-sealed bearings are used.
Replace spark plugs.Every 60000 miles (96000
km)
*Vehicles with dual rear wheels should rotate the front wheels when specified; rear wheels
only if unusual wear is noted.
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)
Replace engine air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Every 5000 miles (8000
km)
Rotate tires*, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
Change engine oil and filter.Every 5000 miles (8000
km) or six months Inspect and lubricate U-joints.
Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease seals if
non-sealed bearings are used.
Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Change rear axle fluid (F-450 and F-550 only).Every 50000 miles (80000
km)
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).Every 60000 miles (96000
km)
*Vehicles with dual rear wheels should rotate the front wheels when specified; rear wheels
only if unusual wear is noted.
459
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Off-road operation
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints and U-joints, Lubricate
if equipped with grease fittings.
Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Change engine oil and filter.Every 5000 miles (8000
km) or six months Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires*, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease seals if
non-sealed bearings are used.
Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Change rear axle fluid (F-450 and F-550 only).Every 50000 miles (80000
km)
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).Every 60000 miles (96000
km)
*Vehicles with dual rear wheels should rotate the front wheels when specified; rear wheels
only if unusual wear is noted.
Exclusive use of E85 (Flex fuel vehicles only)
If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular
unleaded fuel.
Every oil change interval
6.7L Diesel Engine
See the diesel supplement for special
operating condition information.
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule:
Axle Maintenance
Change the axle fluid anytime an axle is
submerged in water.
Rear axles and power take-off units with
synthetic fluid and light-duty trucks
equipped with Ford-design axles are
lubricated for life; do not check or change
fluid unless a leak is suspected, service is
required or the assembly has been
submerged in water. During long periods
of trailer towing with outside temperatures
above 70°F (21°C) and at wide-open
throttle for long periods above 45 mph (72
km/h), change non-synthetic rear axle fluid
every 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) or
three months, whichever comes first. This
interval can be waived if the axle is filled
with 75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting
460
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Ford specification WSL-M2C192-A, part
number F1TZ-19580-B, or equivalent. Add
friction modifier XL-3 (EST-M2C118-A) or
equivalent for complete refill of
Traction-Lok rear axles. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 303).
Additional Axle Maintenance for F-450
and F-550
Change rear axle fluid every 100000 miles
(160000 kilometers) under normal driving
conditions on all commercial applications.
When operating your vehicle at or near
maximum gross vehicle weights, change
the rear axle fluid every 50000 miles
(80000 kilometers). In addition, follow
this 50000-mile (80000-kilometer)
schedule when operating your vehicle
under the special operating conditions,
where noted.
California Fuel Filter Replacement
If you register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals
Vehicles operating in the Middle East,
North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or
locations with similar climates using an
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification
mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal
oil change interval is 3000 miles (5000
kilometers).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is
1800 miles (3000 kilometers).
Engine Air Filter and Cabin Air Filter
Replacement
The life of the engine air filter and cabin air
filter is dependent on exposure to dusty
and dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in
these conditions require frequent
inspection and replacement of the engine
air filter and cabin air filter.
Diesel Particulate Filter
The filter may need to be removed for ash
cleaning at approximately 120000 miles
(192000 kilometers) or greater (actual
mileage can vary greatly depending upon
engine and vehicle operating conditions)
and replaced with a new or
re-manufactured (ash cleaned) part. The
filter may need to be replaced at
approximately 250000 miles (400000
kilometers) depending upon engine and
vehicle operating conditions. In both cases,
the engine control system sets a service
light (wrench icon) to inform you to bring
your vehicle to the dealer for service. If
there are any issues with the oxidation
catalyst or particulate filter system, a
service light (wrench or engine icon) sets
by the engine control system to inform you
to bring your vehicle into a dealer for
service.
461
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
462
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
463
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
464
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
465
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
466
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
467
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
468
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
469
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
470
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
471
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT
SYNC End User License Agreement
(EULA)
•You have acquired a device ("DEVICE")
that includes software licensed by Ford
Motor Company and its affiliates
("FORD MOTOR COMPANY") from an
affiliate of Microsoft Corporation
("MS") . Those installed software
products of MS origin, as well as
associated media, printed materials,
and "online" or electronic
documentation ("MS SOFTWARE")
are protected by international
intellectual property laws and treaties.
The MS SOFTWARE is licensed, not
sold. All rights reserved.
•The MS SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be
later upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY. The additional
software and systems of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY origin, as well as
associated media, printed materials,
and "online" or electronic
documentation ("FORD SOFTWARE")
are protected by international
intellectual property laws and treaties.
The FORD SOFTWARE is licensed, not
sold. All rights reserved.
•The MS SOFTWARE and/or FORD
SOFTWARE may interface with and/or
communicate with, or may be later
upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by third party
software and service suppliers. The
additional software and services of
third party origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation ("THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All
rights reserved.
•The MS SOFTWARE, FORD
SOFTWARE and THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE hereinafter collectively
and individually will be referred to as
"SOFTWARE".
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL
CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO
THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY
PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This
EULA grants you the following license:
•You may use the SOFTWARE as
installed on the DEVICE and as
otherwise interfacing with systems
and/or services provide by or through
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third
party software and service providers.
472
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Description of Other Rights and
Limitations
•Speech Recognition: If the
SOFTWARE includes speech
recognition component(s), you should
understand that speech recognition is
an inherently statistical process and
that recognition errors are inherent in
the process. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
liable for any damages arising out of
errors in the speech recognition
process.
•Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly:
You may not reverse engineer,
decompile, or disassemble nor permit
others to reverse engineer, decompile
or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
and only to the extent that such activity
is expressly permitted by applicable
law notwithstanding this limitation.
•Limitations on Distributing,
Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not
distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on
the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation.
•Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICE and
related systems and services may
contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple
media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software).
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of
the SOFTWARE.
•SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or
transfer of the DEVICE, provided you
retain no copies, you transfer all of the
SOFTWARE (including all component
parts, the media and printed materials,
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the
recipient agrees to the terms of this
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,
any transfer must include all prior
versions of the SOFTWARE.
•Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
or MS may terminate this EULA if you
fail to comply with the terms and
conditions of this EULA.
•Security Updates/Digital Rights
Management: Content owners use
the WMDRM technology included in
your DEVICE to protect their
intellectual property, included
copyrighted content. Portions of the
SOFTWARE on your DEVICE use
WMDRM software to access
WMDRM-protected content. If the
WMDRM software fails to protect the
content, content owners may ask
Microsoft to revoke the SOFTWARE's
ability to use WMDRM to play or copy
protected content. This action does
not affect unprotected content. When
your DEVICE downloads licenses for
protected content, you agree that
Microsoft may include a revocation list
with the licenses. Content owners may
require you to upgrade the SOFTWARE
on your DEVICE to access their content.
If you decline an upgrade, you will not
be able to access content that requires
the upgrade.
473
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
•Consent to Use of Data: You agree
that MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and systems suppliers, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent
may collect and use technical
information gathered in any manner as
part of product support services related
to the SOFTWARE or related services.
MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and services suppliers, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent
may use this information solely to
improve their products or to provide
customized services or technologies to
you. MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and systems suppliers, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent
may disclose this information to others,
but not in a form that personally
identifies you.
•Internet-Based Services
Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and
facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You
acknowledge and agree that MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, their affiliates and/or
their designated agent may
automatically check the version of the
SOFTWARE and/or its components
that you are utilizing and may provide
upgrades or supplements to the
SOFTWARE that may be automatically
downloaded to your DEVICE.
•Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, their affiliates and/or their
designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components
of the SOFTWARE after the date you
obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
Components").
If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party
software and services suppliers provide or
make available to you Supplemental
Components and no other EULA terms are
provided along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this EULA
shall apply.
If MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates
and/or their designated agent make
available Supplemental Components, and
no other EULA terms are provided, then
the terms of this EULA shall apply, except
that the MS, Microsoft Corporation or
affiliate entity providing the Supplemental
Component(s) shall be the licensor of the
Supplemental Component(s).
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, their affiliates and/or their
designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to you or
made available to you through the use of
the SOFTWARE.
474
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
•Links to Third Party Sites: The MS
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites through
the use of the SOFTWARE. The third
party sites are not under the control of
MS, Microsoft Corporation, their
affiliates and/or their designated
agent. Neither MS nor Microsoft
Corporation nor their affiliates nor their
designated agent are responsible for
(i) the contents of any third party sites,
any links contained in third party sites,
or any changes or updates to third
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any
other form of transmission received
from any third party sites. If the
SOFTWARE provides links to third
party sites, those links are provided to
you only as a convenience, and the
inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by
MS, Microsoft Corporation, their
affiliates and/or their designated
agent.
•Obligation to Drive Responsibly:
You recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICE operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety
and assumes any risk associated with
the use of the DEVICE.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the
DEVICE on media such as a ROM chip, CD
ROM disk(s) or via web download or other
means, and is labeled "For Upgrade
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICE as a
replacement copy for the existing
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with
this EULA, including any additional EULA
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:
All title and intellectual property rights in
and to the SOFTWARE (including but not
limited to any images, photographs,
animations, video, audio, music, text and
"applets" incorporated into the
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or
their affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials
accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title
and intellectual property rights in and to
the content which may be accessed
through use of the SOFTWARE is the
property of the respective content owner
and may be protected by applicable
copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no
rights to use such content. All rights not
specifically granted under this EULA are
reserved by MS, Microsoft Corporation,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and service providers, their
affiliates and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through
the SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export
jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
applicable international and national laws
that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
as well as end-user, end-use and
destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
other governments. For additional
information, see
http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
475
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, third party software or service
providers, their affiliates or suppliers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support
for the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS,
its parent corporation Microsoft
Corporation, or their affiliates or
subsidiaries. For product support, please
refer to FORD MOTOR COMPANY
instructions provided in the documentation
for the DEVICE. Should you have any
questions concerning this EULA, or if you
desire to contact FORD MOTOR
COMPANY for any other reason, please
refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICE.
No Liability for Certain Damages:
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,
MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND
THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS,
MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND/OR
THEIR AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY
AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO
HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.
$250.00).
•THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER
THAN THOSE THAT MAY EXPRESSLY
BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.
Adobe
Contains Adobe® [Flash® Player] or
[AIR®] technology by Adobe Systems
Incorporated. This [Licensee Product]
contains [Adobe® Flash® Player]
[Adobe® AIR®] software under license
from Adobe Systems Incorporated,
Copyright ©1995-2009 Adobe
Macromedia Software LLC. All rights
reserved. Adobe, Flash and AIR are
trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated.
End User Notice
Microsoft® Windows® Mobile for
Automotive Important Safety
Information
This system Ford SYNC contains software
that is licensed to Manufacturer FORD
MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate of
Microsoft Corporation pursuant to a license
agreement. Any removal, reproduction,
reverse engineering or other unauthorized
use of the software from this system in
violation of the license agreement is strictly
prohibited and may subject you to legal
action.
Read and follow instructions: Before
using your Windows Automotive- based
system, read and follow all instructions
and safety information provided in this end
user manual ("User's Guide"). Not
following precautions found in this User's
Guide can lead to an accident or other
serious consequences.
Keep User's Guide in vehicle: When kept
in the vehicle, the User's Guide will be a
ready reference for you and other users
unfamiliar with the Windows
Automotive-based system. Please make
certain that before using the system for
the first time, all persons have access to
the User's Guide and read its instructions
and safety information carefully.
476
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
WARNING
Operating certain parts of this
system while driving can distract
your attention away from the road,
and possibly cause an accident or other
serious consequences. Do not change
system settings or enter data non-verbally
(using your hands) while driving. Stop the
vehicle in a safe and legal manner before
attempting these operations. This is
important since while setting up or
changing some functions you might be
required to distract your attention away
from the road and remove your hands from
the wheel.
General Operation
Voice Command Control: Functions
within the Windows Automotive-based
system may be accomplished using only
voice commands. Using voice commands
while driving allows you to operate the
system without removing your hands from
the wheel.
Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a prolonged
view of the screen while you are driving.
Pull over in a safe and legal manner before
attempting to access a function of the
system requiring prolonged attention. Even
occasional short scans to the screen may
be hazardous if your attention has been
diverted away from your driving task at a
critical time.
Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume
excessively. Keep the volume at a level
where you can still hear outside traffic and
emergency signals while driving. Driving
while unable to hear these sounds could
cause an accident.
Use of Speech Recognition Functions:
Speech recognition software is inherently
a statistical process which is subject to
errors. It is your responsibility to monitor
any speech recognition functions included
in the system and address any errors.
Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully read
and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual (non-verbal)
setup. Attempting to perform such set-up
or insert data while driving can seriously
distract your attention and could cause an
accident or other serious consequences.
Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner
before attempting these operations.
Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only as
an aid. Make your driving decisions based
on your observations of local conditions
and existing traffic regulations. Any such
feature is not a substitute for your personal
judgment. Any route suggestions made by
this system should never replace any local
traffic regulations or your personal
judgment or knowledge of safe driving
practices.
Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an
unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be
placed in an unsafe situation, or if you
would be directed into an area that you
consider unsafe. The driver is ultimately
responsible for the safe operation of the
vehicle and therefore, must evaluate
whether it is safe to follow the suggested
directions.
477
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used
by this system may be inaccurate because
of changes in roads, traffic controls or
driving conditions. Always use good
judgment and common sense when
following the suggested routes.
Emergency Services: Do not rely on any
navigation features included in the system
to route you to emergency services. Ask
local authorities or an emergency services
operator for these locations. Not all
emergency services such as police, fire
stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to
be contained in the map database for such
navigation features.
Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the Telenav
Software. Your use of the Telenav
Software indicates that you accept these
terms and conditions. If you do not accept
these terms and conditions, do not break
the seal of the package, launch, or
otherwise use the Telenav Software.
These terms and conditions represent the
agreement (“Agreement”) between you
and Telenav, Inc. (“Telenav”) with respect
to the Telenav Software (including
upgrades, modifications, or additions
thereto) (collectively “Telenav Software”).
All references herein to “you” and “your”
means you, your employees, agents, and
contractors, and any other entity on whose
behalf you accept these terms and
conditions, all of whom shall also be bound
by this Agreement. Additionally, all of your
account information, as well as other
payment and personal information
provided by you to Telenav (directly or
through the use of the Telenav Software,
is subject to Telenav’s privacy policy
located at http://www.telenav.com.
Telenav may revise this Agreement and
the privacy policy at any time, with or
without notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention
to the Telenav Software may pose a risk
of injury or death to you and others in
situations that otherwise require your
undivided attention, and you therefore
agree to comply with the following when
using the Telenav Software: (a) observe
all traffic laws and otherwise drive safely;
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested
by the Telenav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions; (c)
do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the Telenav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked; (d)
do not use the Telenav Software for any
illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe,
hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any
manner inconsistent with this Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the
Telenav Software in a secure manner in
your vehicle so that they will not interfere
with your driving and will not prevent the
operation of any safety device (such as an
airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold Telenav
harmless against all claims resulting from
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
use of the Telenav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.
478
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the
Telenav Software, to provide Telenav with
true, accurate, current, and complete
information about yourself, and (b) to
inform Telenav promptly of any changes
to such information, and to keep it true,
accurate, current and complete.
3. Software License
Subject to your compliance with the terms
of this Agreement, Telenav hereby grants
to you a personal, non-exclusive,
non-transferable license (except as
expressly permitted below in connection
with your permanent transfer of the
Telenav Software license), without the
right to sublicense, to use the Telenav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the Telenav
Software. This license shall terminate upon
any termination or expiration of this
Agreement. You agree that you will use the
Telenav Software only for your personal
business or leisure purposes, and not to
provide commercial navigation services to
other parties.
3.1 License Limitations
You agree not to do any of the following:
(a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter or
otherwise change the Telenav Software
or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive
the source code, audio library or structure
of the Telenav Software without the prior
express written consent of Telenav; (c)
remove from the Telenav Software, or
alter, any of Telenav’s or its suppliers’
trademarks, trade names, logos, patent or
copyright notices, or other notices or
markings; (d) distribute, sublicense or
otherwise transfer the Telenav Software
to others, except as part of your permanent
transfer of the Telenav Software; or (e)
use the Telenav Software in any manner
that (i) infringes the intellectual property
or proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party, (ii)
violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming,
privacy, consumer and child protection,
obscenity or defamation, or (iii) is harmful,
threatening, abusive, harassing, tortuous,
defamatory, vulgar, obscene, libelous, or
otherwise objectionable; and (f) lease, rent
out, or otherwise permit unauthorized
access by third parties to the Telenav
Software without advanced written
permission of Telenav.
4. Disclaimers
To the fullest extent permissible pursuant
to applicable law, in no event will Telenav,
its licensors and suppliers, or agents or
employees of any of the foregoing, be
liable for any decision made or action
taken by you or anyone else in reliance on
the information provided by the Telenav
Software. Telenav also does not warrant
the accuracy of the map or other data used
for the Telenav Software. Such data may
not always reflect reality due to, among
other things, road closures, construction,
weather, new roads and other changing
conditions. You are responsible for the
entire risk arising out of your use of the
Telenav Software. For example but
without limitation, you agree not to rely on
the Telenav Software for critical navigation
in areas where the well-being or survival
of you or others is dependent on the
accuracy of navigation, as the maps or
functionality of the Telenav Software are
not intended to support such high risk
applications, especially in more remote
geographical areas.
TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND
EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM
479
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR
TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do not
permit the disclaimer of certain warranties,
so this limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR
ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE
LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY
FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR
EXEMPLARY DAMAGES (INCLUDING IN
EACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE
THE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA,
LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS,
LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISING
OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO
USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT
OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT,
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR
OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF
TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV’S
SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE
AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR
THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME
STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION
OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS
OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO
YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to this
Agreement or the Telenav Software shall
be settled by independent arbitration
involving a neutral arbitrator and
administered by the American Arbitration
Association in the County of Santa Clara,
California. The arbitrator shall apply the
Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
American Arbitration Association, and the
judgment upon the award rendered by the
arbitrator may be entered by any court
having jurisdiction. Note that there is no
judge or jury in an arbitration proceeding
and the decision of the arbitrator shall be
binding upon both parties. You expressly
agree to waive your right to a jury trial.
This Agreement and performance
hereunder will be governed by and
construed in accordance with the laws of
the State of California, without giving
effect to its conflict of laws provisions. To
the extent judicial action is necessary in
connection with the binding arbitration,
both Telenav and you agree to submit to
the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of
the County of Santa Clara, California. The
United Nations Convention on Contracts
for the International Sale of Goods shall
not apply.
7. Assignment
You may not resell, assign, or transfer this
Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in connection
with your permanent transfer of the
Telenav Software, and expressly
conditioned upon the new user of the
Telenav Software agreeing to be bound by
480
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
the terms and conditions of this
Agreement. Any such sale, assignment or
transfer that is not expressly permitted
under this paragraph will result in
immediate termination of this Agreement,
without liability to Telenav, in which case
you and all other parties shall immediately
cease all use of the Telenav Software.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, Telenav
may assign this Agreement to any other
party at any time without notice, provided
the assignee remains bound by this
Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between Telenav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, Telenav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
Telenav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
not expressly granted in this Agreement
are intended to, or shall be, granted or
conferred by implication, statute,
inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
Telenav and its suppliers and licensors
hereby reserve all of their respective rights
other than the licenses explicitly granted
in this Agreement.
8.3
By using the Telenav Software, you
consent to receive from Telenav all
communications, including notices,
agreements, legally required disclosures
or other information in connection with the
Telenav Software (collectively, “Notices”)
electronically. Telenav may provide such
Notices by posting them on Telenav’s
Website or by downloading such Notices
to your wireless device. If you desire to
withdraw your consent to receive Notices
electronically, you must discontinue your
use of the Telenav Software.
8.4
Telenav’s or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not
affect that party’s right to require
performance at any time thereafter, nor
shall a waiver of any breach or default of
this Agreement constitute a waiver of any
subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held
unenforceable, then such provision will be
modified to reflect the intention of the
parties, and the remaining provisions of
this Agreement will remain in full force and
effect.
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement,
and will not be referred to in connection
with the construction or interpretation of
this Agreement. As used in this Agreement,
the words “include” and “including,” and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to
be terms of limitation, but rather will be
deemed to be followed by the words
“without limitation.”
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement includes
end-user terms applicable to these
companies (included at the end of this
481
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Agreement), and thus your use of the
Telenav Software is also subject to such
terms. You agree to comply with the
following additional terms and conditions,
which are applicable to Telenav’s third
party vendor licensors:
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and
its licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from
the United States Postal Service® to
publish and sell ZIP+4® information.
©United States Postal Service® 2014.
Prices are not established, controlled or
approved by the United States Postal
Service®. The following trademarks and
registrations are owned by the USPS:
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
ZIP+4.
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co.,
Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (including
their licensors and suppliers) on the other
hand.
© 20xx. All rights reserved.
Permitted Use.
You agree to use this Data together with
the Telenav Software solely for the internal
business and personal purposes for which
you were licensed, and not for service
bureau, time-sharing or other similar
purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the
restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you agree not to otherwise
reproduce, copy, modify, decompile,
disassemble, create any derivative works
of, or reverse engineer any portion of this
Data, and may not transfer or distribute it
in any form, for any purpose, except to the
extent permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions.
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by Telenav, and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not use this Data (a) with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
482
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs.
Warning.
The Data may contain inaccurate or
incomplete information due to the passage
of time, changing circumstances, sources
used and the nature of collecting
comprehensive geographic data, any of
which may lead to incorrect results.
No Warranty.
This Data is provided to you “as is,” and
you agree to use it at your own risk. Telenav
and its licensors (and their licensors and
suppliers) make no guarantees,
representations or warranties of any kind,
express or implied, arising by law or
otherwise, including but not limited to,
content, quality, accuracy, completeness,
effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a
particular purpose, usefulness, use or
results to be obtained from this Data, or
that the Data or server will be
uninterrupted or error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty:
TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS
(INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND
SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF
QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow
certain warranty exclusions, so to that
extent the above exclusion may not apply
to you.
Disclaimer of Liability:
TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS
(INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND
SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO
YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM,
DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF
THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING
ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT
OR INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM
THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THE
INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF
PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR
SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO
USE THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN
THE INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF
THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT
OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY,
EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS
HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.
Export Control.
You shall not export from anywhere any
part of the Data or any direct product
thereof except in compliance with, and
with all licenses and approvals required
under, applicable export laws, rules and
regulations, including but not limited to the
laws, rules and regulations administered
by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of
the U.S. Department of Commerce and the
Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S.
Department of Commerce. To the extent
483
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
that any such export laws, rules or
regulations prohibit HERE from complying
with any of its obligations hereunder to
deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall
be excused and shall not constitute a
breach of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement.
These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between Telenav (and
its licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between
us with respect to such subject matter.
Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the State of Illinois
[insert “Netherlands” where European
HERE Data is used], without giving effect
to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii)
the United Nations Convention for
Contracts for the International Sale of
Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You
agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the
State of Illinois [insert “The Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used] for
any and all disputes, claims and actions
arising from or in connection with the Data
provided to you hereunder.
Government End Users.
If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf
of the United States government or any
other entity seeking or applying rights
similar to those customarily claimed by the
United States government, this Data is a
“commercial item” as that term is defined
at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in
accordance with these End-User Terms,
and each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the
following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
treated in accordance with such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425
West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
60606
This Data is a commercial item as
defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to
these End-User Terms under which this
Data was provided.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
refuses to use the legend provided herein,
the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
must notify HERE prior to seeking
additional or alternative rights in the Data.
I. US/Canada Territory
A. United States Data. The End-User
Terms for any Application containing
Data for the United States shall contain
the following notices:
“HERE holds a non-exclusive license
from the United States Postal
Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4®
information.”
“©United States Postal Service®
20XX. Prices are not established,
controlled or approved by the United
States Postal Service®. The following
trademarks and registrations are
owned by the USPS: United States
Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”
484
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
B. Canada Data. The following provi-
sions apply to the Data for Canada,
which may include or reflect data from
third party licensors (“Third Party
Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen
in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”),
Canada Post Corporation (“Canada
Post”) and the Department of Natural
Resources of Canada (“NRCan”):
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client
agrees that its use of the Third Party
Data is subject to the following provi-
sions:
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data
is licensed on an “as is” basis. The
licensors of such data, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
make no guarantees, representa-
tions or warranties respecting such
data, either express or implied,
arising by law or otherwise, including
but not limited to, effectiveness,
completeness, accuracy or fitness
for a particular purpose.
b. Limitation on Liability: The Third
Party Data licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
shall not be liable: (i) in respect of
any claim, demand or action, irre-
spective of the nature of the cause
of the claim, demand or action
alleging any loss, injury or damages,
direct or indirect, which may result
from the use or possession of such
Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the
Data.
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with
each copy of all or any portion of the
Data for the Territory of Canada, Client
shall affix in a conspicuous manner the
following copyright notice on at least
one of: (i) the label for the storage
media of the copy; (ii) the packaging
for the copy; or (iii) other materials
packaged with the copy, such as user
manuals or end user license agree-
ments: “This data includes information
taken with permission from Canadian
authorities, including © Her Majesty
the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada
Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The
Department of Natural Resources
Canada. All rights reserved.”
3. End-User Terms: Except as other-
wise agreed by the parties, in connec-
tion with the provision of any portion
of the Data for the Territory of Canada
to End-Users as may be authorized
under the Agreement, Client shall
provide such End-Users, in a reason-
ably conspicuous manner, with terms
(set forth with other end user terms
required to be provided under the
Agreement, or as otherwise may be
provided, by Client) which shall include
the following provisions on behalf of
the Third Party Data licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan:
The Data may include or reflect
data of licensors, including Her
Majesty the Queen in the Right of
Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada
Post Corporation (“Canada Post”)
and the Department of Natural
Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such
data is licensed on an “as is” basis.
The licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, make no
guarantees, representations or
warranties respecting such data,
485
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
either express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not
limited to, effectiveness, complete-
ness, accuracy or fitness for a
particular purpose. The licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, shall not be liable in
respect of any claim, demand or
action, irrespective of the nature of
the cause of the claim, demand or
action alleging any loss, injury or
damages, direct or indirect, which
may result from the use or posses-
sion of the data or the Data. The
licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not
be liable in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the data
or the Data.
End User shall indemnify and save
harmless the licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
and their officers, employees and
agents from and against any claim,
demand or action, irrespective of
the nature of the cause of the claim,
demand or action, alleging loss,
costs, expenses, damages or injuries
(including injuries resulting in death)
arising out of the use or possession
of the data or the Data.
4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addi-
tion to all of the rights and obligations
of the parties under the Agreement.
To the extent that any of the provi-
sions of this Section are inconsistent
with, or conflict with, any other provi-
sions of the Agreement, the provisions
of this Section shall prevail.
II. Mexico. The following provision applies
to the Data for Mexico, which includes
certain data from the Instituto Nacional
de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):
A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or
packaging containing Data for Mexico
shall contain the following notice:
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía)”
III. Latin America Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeTerritory
“INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
AUTORIZACION N° IGM-
2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE
ENERO DE 2011”
Ecuador
“source: © IGN 2009 - BD
TOPO ®”
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)”
Guade-
loupe,
French
Guiana
and
Marti-
nique
Mexico
IV. Middle East Territory
486
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
NoticeCountry
“© Royal Jordanian
Geographic Centre”. The
foregoing notice requirement
for Jordan Data is a material
term of the Agreement. If
Client or any of its permitted
Jordan
sublicensees (if any) fail to
meet such requirement, HERE
shall have the right to
terminate Client’s license
with respect to the Jordan
Data.
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted
sublicensees (if any) are restricted from
licensing and/or otherwise distributing
HERE’s database for the country of
Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enter-
prise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian
entities for use of the Jordan Data solely
in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers.
In addition, Client, its permitted subli-
censees (if any) and End-Users are
restricted from using the Jordan Data in
Enterprise Applications if such party is
(i) a non-Jordanian entity using the
Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a
Jordan-based customer. For purposes
of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applica-
tions” shall mean Geomarketing applic-
ations, GIS applications, mobile business
asset management applications, call
center applications, telematics applica-
tions, public organization Internet
applications or for providing geocoding
services.
V. Europe Territory
A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
1. General Restrictions Applicable to
Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges
and agrees that in certain countries of
the Europe Territory, Client will need
to obtain rights directly from third
party RDS-TMC code providers to
receive and use the Traffic Codes in
the Data and to deliver to End-Users
Transactions in any way derived from
or based on such Traffic Codes. For
such countries, HERE shall deliver the
Data incorporating Traffic Codes to
Client only after receiving certification
from Client of its having obtained such
rights.
2. Display of Third Party Rights
Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for
each Transaction that uses Traffic
Codes for Belgium, provide the
following notice to the End-User:
“Traffic Codes for Belgium are
provided by the Ministerie van de
Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des
Transports.”
B. Paper Maps. With respect to any
license granted to Client relating to
making, selling or distributing paper
maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or
paper-like medium): (a) such license
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s
entering into and complying with a
separate written agreement with the
Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and
sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the
OS any and all applicable paper map
royalties, and Client’s complying with
the OS copyright notice requirements;
(b) such license for selling or otherwise
distributing for charge with respect to
Data for the Territory of Czech Republic
487
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
is conditioned on Client’s obtaining prior
written consent from Kartografie a.s.;
(c) such license for selling or distributing
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s
obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d)
Client is restricted from using Data for
the Territory of France to create paper
maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and
1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted
from using any Data to create, sell or
distribute paper maps that are the same
or substantially similar, in terms of data
content and specific use of color,
symbols and scale, to paper maps
published by the European national
mapping agencies, including without
limitation, Landervermessungämter of
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland,
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung-
swesen of Austria, and the National
Land Survey of Sweden.
C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting
Section IV(B) above, with respect to
Data for the Territory of Great Britain,
Client acknowledges and agrees that
the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring
a direct action against Client to enforce
compliance with the OS copyright notice
(see Section IV(D) below) and paper
map requirements (see Section IV(B)
above) contained in this Agreement.
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all
copies of the Data and/or packaging
relating thereto shall include the
respective Third Party Notices set forth
below and used as described below
corresponding to the Territory (or
portion thereof) included in such copy:
NoticeCountry(ies)
“© Bundesamt für Eich- und
Vermessungswesen”
Austria
“© EuroGeographics”
Croatia
Cyprus,
Estonia,
Latvia,
Lithuania,
Moldova,
Poland,
Slovenia
and/or
Ukraine
“source: © IGN 2009 – BD
TOPO ®”
France
“Die Grundlagendaten
wurden mit Genehmigung der
zuständigen Behörden
entnommen”
Germany
“Contains Ordnance Survey
data © Crown copyright and
database right 2010 Contains
Royal Mail data © Royal Mail
copyright and database right
2010”
Great
Britain
“Copyright Geomatics Ltd.”Greece
“Copyright © 2003; Top-Map
Ltd.”
Hungary
“La Banca Dati Italiana è
stata prodotta usando quale
riferimento anche cartografia
numerica ed al tratto
prodotta e fornita dalla
Regione Toscana.”
Italy
“Copyright © 2000; Norwe-
gian Mapping Authority”
Norway
“Source: IgeoE – Portugal”Portugal
“Información geográfica
propiedad del CNIG”
Spain
488
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
“Based upon electronic data
© National Land Survey
Sweden.”
Sweden
“Topografische Grundlage: ©
Bundesamt für Landestopo-
graphie.
Switzer-
land
E. Respective Country Distribution. Client
acknowledges that HERE has not
received approvals to distribute map
data for the following countries in such
respective countries: Albania, Belarus,
Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan.
HERE may update such list from time to
time. The license rights granted to Client
under this TL with respect to the Data
for such countries are contingent upon
Client’s compliance with all applicable
laws and regulations, including, without
limitation, any required licenses or
approvals to distribute the Application
incorporating such Data in such
respective countries.
VI. Australia Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
Copyright. Based on data provided
under license from PSMA Australia
Limited (www.psma.com.au).
Product incorporates data which is ©
20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In
addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Terms for any Application containing
RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia
shall contain the following notice:
“Product incorporates traffic location
codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corpora-
tion Limited and its licensors.”
VII. China Territory
Personal Use Only
You agree to use this Data together with
[insert name of Client Application] for the
solely personal, non-commercial purposes
for which you were licensed, and not for
service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject
to the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you may copy this Data only
as necessary for your personal use to (i)
view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you
do not remove any copyright notices that
appear and do not modify the Data in any
way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce,
copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or
reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
and may not transfer or distribute it in any
form, for any purpose, except to the extent
permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not (a) use this Data with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
489
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease
using this Data if you fail to comply with
these terms and conditions.
Limited Warranty
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will
perform substantially in accordance with
the accompanying written materials for a
period of ninety (90) days from the date
of receipt, and (b) any support services
provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as
described in applicable written materials
provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s
support engineers will make commercially
reasonable efforts to solve any problem
issues.
rigCustomer Remedies
NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and
your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s
sole discretion, either (a) return of the price
paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of
the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited
Warranty and that are returned to NAV2
with a copy of your receipt. This Limited
Warranty is void if failure of the Data has
resulted from accident, abuse, or
misapplication. Any replacement Data will
be warranted for the remainder of the
original warranty period or thirty (30) days,
whichever is longer. Neither these remedies
nor any product support services offered
by NAV2 are available without proof of
purchase from an authorized international
source.
No Other Warranty:
EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY
SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Limited Liability:
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
490
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Export Control
You agree not to export to anywhere any
part of the Data provided to you or any
direct product thereof except in
compliance with, and with all licenses and
approvals required under, applicable
export laws, rules and regulations.
IP Protection
The Data are owned by NAV2 or its
suppliers and are protected by applicable
copyright and other intellectual property
law and treaties. The Data are provided
solely on the basis of a license to use, not
sale.
Entire Agreement
These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between NAV2(and its
licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between
us with respect to such subject matter.
Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the People’s
Republic of China, without giving effect to
(i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the
United Nations Convention for Contracts
for the International Sale of Goods, which
is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising
from or in connection with the Data
provided to you hereunder shall be
submitted to the Shanghai International
Economic and Trade Arbitration
Commission for arbitration.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright© 2000-2007
Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright
© 2000-2007 Gracenote. This product and
service may practice one or more of the
following U.S. Patents #5,987,525,
#6,061,680, #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6.240,459,
#6,330,593 and other patents issued or
pending. Some services supplied under
license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608
("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform
other functions. You may use Gracenote
Data only by means of the intended End
User functions of this device.
This device may contain content belonging
to Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
content and such content providers shall
be entitled to all of the benefits and
protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote.
491
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
You agree that you will use the content
from Gracenote ("Gracenote Content") ,
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and Gracenote Servers for your own
personal, non-commercial use only. You
agree not to assign, copy, transfer or
transmit the Gracenote Content,
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote
Data (except in a Tag associated with a
music file) to any third party. YOU AGREE
NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE
CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS
EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote,
respectively, reserve all rights in Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and the
Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content,
including all ownership rights. Under no
circumstances will either Gracenote
become liable for any payment to you for
any information that you provide, including
any copyrighted material or music file
information. You agree that Gracenote
may enforce its respective rights,
collectively or separately, under this
agreement against you, directly in each
company's own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
queries without knowing anything about
who you are. For more information, see the
web page at www.gracenote.com for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE
MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER.
© Gracenote 2007.
492
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Vehicle with SYNC only
United States and Mexico
FCC ID: KMHSG1G1
IC: 1422A-SG1G1
Mexico
Model: KMHSG1P1
NOM-121-SCT1-2009
The operation of this equipment is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This
equipment or device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this
equipment or device must accept any
interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Vehicle with SYNC with
Touchscreen/My Touch
FCC ID: KMHSYNCG2
IC: 1422A-SYNCG2
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the
equipment. The term "IC" before the radio
certification number only signifies that
Industry Canada technical specifications
were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
493
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
494
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
4
4WD
See: Four-Wheel Drive.....................................158
A
A/C
See: Climate Control..........................................110
About This Manual...........................................7
ABS
See: Brakes...........................................................169
ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes................................................................169
Accessories....................................................447
Exterior style........................................................447
Interior style.........................................................447
Lifestyle.................................................................447
Peace of mind.....................................................447
Accessories
See: Replacement Parts
Recommendation.............................................11
Adjusting the Headlamps.........................247
Horizontal Aim Adjustment...........................248
Vertical Aim Adjustment.................................247
Adjusting the Pedals....................................69
Adjusting the Steering Wheel...................66
Airbag Disposal..............................................46
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control..........................................110
Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm........................................65
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................65
Arming the Alarm.................................................65
Disarming the Alarm...........................................65
Appendices.....................................................472
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............87
Headlamps On Warning Chime......................87
Key in Ignition Warning Chime.........................87
Parking Brake On Warning Chime.................88
Audio Control..................................................66
Media.........................................................................67
Seek, Next or Previous........................................67
Audio System.................................................317
General Information...........................................317
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC..............................................................319
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
Touchscreen Display................................322
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM.......318
Autolamps.........................................................72
Autolamps - Programmable Exit
Delay.....................................................................72
Automatic Climate Control.........................111
Automatic Transmission.............................151
Brake-Shift Interlock.........................................155
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow..................................................................156
Understanding the Shift Positions of a
6–Speed Automatic Transmission.........152
Understanding the Shift Positions of the
5–Speed Automatic Transmission..........151
Understanding your SelectShift
Automatic™ transmission.........................154
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check............................................................240
Checking Automatic Transmission
Fluid....................................................................241
Auxiliary Power Points.................................137
110 Volt AC Power Point....................................137
12 Volt DC Power Point......................................137
Locations................................................................137
Auxiliary Switches.......................................448
B
Bed Extender...................................................62
Grocery mode........................................................63
Tailgate mode........................................................62
Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood...........232
Booster Seats..................................................24
Types of Booster Seats......................................25
Brake Fluid Check........................................244
Brakes...............................................................169
General Information..........................................169
Breaking-In.....................................................207
Bulb Specification Chart...........................252
C
California Proposition 65..............................11
Capacities and Specifications - 6.2L
V8...................................................................307
Specifications.....................................................308
495
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Capacities and Specifications - 6.8L
Triton-30V - V10..........................................311
Specifications.......................................................312
Capacities and Specifications................303
Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................256
Center Console..............................................139
Removable Front Cupholders........................139
Changing a Bulb...........................................249
Replacing Brake/Tail/Turn/Reverse Lamp
Bulbs...................................................................251
Replacing Cargo Lamp and Central High
Mounted Brake Lamp Bulbs......................251
Replacing Fog Lamp Bulbs............................250
Replacing Front Clearance and
Identification Lamp Bulbs.........................250
Replacing Front Park and Direction
Indicator Lamp Bulbs..................................250
Replacing Headlamp Bulbs...........................250
Replacing the License Plate Lamp
Bulb....................................................................252
Changing a Fuse............................................231
Fuses........................................................................231
Changing a Road Wheel...........................290
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information.....................................................290
Location of the Spare Tire and Tools..........291
Removing the Spare Tire (With Spare Tire
Carrier Only)....................................................292
Tire Change Procedure....................................293
Changing the 12V Battery.........................245
Battery Management System (If
Equipped)........................................................246
Changing the Engine Air Filter................254
Changing the Wiper Blades.....................247
Checking MyKey System Status...............53
Checking the Wiper Blades......................247
Child Restraint and Safety Belt
Maintenance.................................................36
Child Safety.......................................................15
General Information.............................................15
Child Safety Locks..........................................27
Child Seat Positioning..................................26
Cleaning Leather Seats.............................259
With King Ranch Edition.................................260
Without King Ranch Edition..........................259
Cleaning Products.......................................256
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels........................261
Cleaning the Engine....................................257
Cleaning the Exterior..................................256
Exterior Chrome Parts.....................................256
Exterior Plastic Parts.........................................257
Stripes or Graphics............................................257
Underbody............................................................257
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens........................259
Cleaning the Interior...................................258
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades...........................................................258
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................53
Climate............................................................428
Climate Control Voice Commands..............431
Climate Control..............................................110
Climate Controlled Seats..........................125
Cooled Seats........................................................126
Heated Seats........................................................125
Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check............................236
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator........45
Creating a MyKey............................................52
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings...............................................................52
Cruise Control..................................................67
Principle of Operation.......................................183
Cruise control
See: Using Cruise Control................................183
Customer Assistance...................................217
D
Data Recording..................................................9
Event Data Recording...........................................9
Service Data Recording........................................9
Daytime Running Lamps.............................73
Digital Radio..................................................323
HD Radio Reception and Station
Troubleshooting............................................324
Direction Indicators........................................74
Lane Change..........................................................74
Driver and Passenger Airbags...................38
Children and Airbags...........................................43
Passenger Airbag On and Off Switch ..........38
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment........................................................42
Driving Aids.....................................................184
Driving Hints...................................................207
496
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Driving Through Water..............................208
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps.........................73
E
Economical Driving.....................................207
Electronic Locking Differential.................167
Activating the Electronic Locking
Differential........................................................167
Emission Control System..........................148
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)...................149
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) Testing...................................................150
End User License Agreement..................472
SYNC End User License Agreement
(EULA)..............................................................472
Engine Block Heater....................................142
Using the Engine Block Heater......................143
Engine Coolant Check...............................236
Adding Engine Coolant....................................237
Recycled Engine Coolant................................238
Severe Climates.................................................238
What You Should Know About Fail-Safe
Cooling..............................................................239
Engine Immobilizer
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................64
Engine Oil Check..........................................235
Adding Engine Oil..............................................235
Engine Oil Dipstick......................................235
Engine Specifications................................303
Drivebelt Routing...............................................303
Entertainment..............................................395
AM/FM Radio......................................................395
Bluetooth Audio..................................................410
CD...........................................................................405
SD Card Slot and USB Port...........................407
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If
Activated)........................................................401
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information.................................410
Environment......................................................14
Essential Towing Checks...........................196
Before Towing a Trailer....................................202
Dynamic Hitching Using the Rear View
Camera System..............................................197
Hitches...................................................................198
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller.............200
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC)........................................203
Safety Chains.......................................................199
Trailer Brakes.......................................................199
Trailer Lamps.......................................................202
Trailer Towing Connector.................................197
When Towing a Trailer.....................................202
Event Data Recording
See: Data Recording..............................................9
Export Unique Options..................................13
Extended Service Plan (ESP)..................451
SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)............452
SERVICE PLANS (U.S. Only)..........................451
Exterior Mirrors.................................................77
Clearance Lamps.................................................78
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors................................77
Heated Exterior Mirrors......................................78
Memory Mirrors.....................................................78
Power Exterior Mirrors.........................................77
Telescoping Mirrors..............................................78
F
Fastening the Safety Belts.........................30
Fastening the Cinch Tongue..............................31
Safety Belt Extension Assembly.....................33
Safety Belt Locking Modes...............................32
Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy............31
Using the Safety Belt with Cinch Tongue
(Front Center and Rear Center Seats
Only)....................................................................30
Floor Mats......................................................208
Fog Lamps - Front
See: Front Fog Lamps.........................................73
Foot Pedals
See: Adjusting the Pedals.................................69
Ford Credit..........................................................11
(U.S. Only).................................................................11
Four-Wheel Drive.........................................158
Front Fog Lamps.............................................73
Front Seat Armrest.......................................127
Fuel and Refueling.......................................144
497
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Fuel Consumption........................................147
Calculating Fuel Economy..............................148
Filling the Tank.....................................................147
Fuel Filter........................................................244
Fuel Quality.....................................................145
Choosing the Right Fuel...................................145
Choosing the Right Fuel With a Flex Fuel
Vehicle (If Equipped)...................................145
Diesel Engine........................................................145
Octane Recommendations............................145
Fuel Shutoff....................................................213
Fuses.................................................................223
Fuse Specification Chart...........................223
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel..................................................................228
Power Distribution Box....................................223
G
Garage Door Opener
See: Universal Garage Door Opener............129
Gauges...............................................................82
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge............83
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge...............................83
Fuel Gauge..............................................................83
Information Display.............................................84
Transmission Fluid Temperature
Gauge..................................................................83
General Information on Radio
Frequencies...................................................47
General Maintenance Information.......453
Multi-point Inspection.....................................455
Owner Checks and Services..........................454
Protecting Your Investment...........................453
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?.........................453
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?.....................................................453
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.........................................................220
Getting the Services You Need................217
Away From Home...............................................217
Global Opening................................................77
Opening the Windows........................................77
H
Handbrake
See: Parking Brake..............................................170
Hazard Warning Flashers...........................213
HDC
See: Using Hill Descent Control.....................177
Head Restraints..............................................117
Adjusting the Head Restraint..........................118
Heated Seats..................................................124
Rear Heated Seats ............................................124
Heated Steering Wheel...............................68
Heated Windows and Mirrors...................115
Heated Exterior Mirror........................................115
Heated Rear Window.........................................115
Heating
See: Climate Control..........................................110
Hill Start Assist..............................................170
Switching the System On and Off.................171
Using Hill Start Assist........................................170
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate...........................................................112
Cooling the Interior Quickly..............................114
General Hints.........................................................112
Heating the Interior Quickly.............................113
Recommended Settings for Cooling ...........114
Recommended Settings for Heating...........114
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather..............................................................115
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes............................................................169
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood...........232
I
Ignition Switch...............................................140
In California (U.S. Only).............................218
Information Display Control.......................67
Type 1.........................................................................67
Type 2.......................................................................68
Information Displays....................................89
General Information...........................................89
Information.....................................................418
911 Assist...............................................................425
Alerts......................................................................424
Calendar................................................................424
Sirius Travel Link.................................................423
SYNC Services (If Equipped, United States
Only)...................................................................419
Vehicle Health Report (If Equipped, US
Only)..................................................................427
498
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Information Messages...............................100
4WD........................................................................109
AdvanceTrac™...................................................100
Alarm......................................................................100
Diesel Messages..................................................101
Doors and Locks.................................................104
Drivetrain...............................................................104
Engine.....................................................................105
Fuel..........................................................................105
Key...........................................................................105
Maintenance........................................................106
MyKey®..................................................................106
Off Road.................................................................107
Park Aid..................................................................107
Park Brake..............................................................107
Power Steering....................................................107
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.................108
Trailer......................................................................108
Installing Child Seats.....................................16
Child Seats...............................................................16
Tether Strap Attachment..................................22
Tether Strap Attachment (Rear SuperCab
Only).....................................................................23
Using Cinch Tongue Lap and Shoulder Belts
(All Front Center, Super Cab and Crew
Cab Rear Center Positions)..........................19
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts..........................17
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH).............................................21
Using Tether Straps..............................................21
Instrument Cluster.........................................82
Instrument Lighting Dimmer......................73
Interior Lamps..................................................74
Front Map Lamps (If equipped).....................74
Rear Dome and Map Lamps............................75
Interior Mirror....................................................79
Auto-Dimming Mirror..........................................79
Introduction.........................................................7
J
Jump Starting the Vehicle.........................214
Connecting the Jumper Cables.....................214
Jump Starting.......................................................215
Preparing Your Vehicle......................................214
Removing the Jumper Cables........................215
K
Keyless Entry....................................................57
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD...............................................................57
Unlocking and Locking the Doors..................59
Keys and Remote Controls.........................47
L
Lighting Control................................................71
Headlamp Flasher................................................72
High Beams..............................................................71
Lighting................................................................71
General Information.............................................71
Limited Slip Differential..............................167
Load Carrying.................................................185
Load Limit.......................................................185
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of
Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type
Vehicles..............................................................191
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer.................................................................185
Locking and Unlocking.................................56
Autolock and Autounlock.................................56
Battery Saver..........................................................57
Illuminated Entry...................................................57
Power Door Locks................................................56
Remote Control....................................................56
Smart Unlocks......................................................56
Locks...................................................................56
Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................290
M
Maintenance..................................................232
General Information..........................................232
Manual Climate Control.............................110
Manual Seats..................................................119
Manual Lumbar ..................................................120
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward..............................................................119
Recline Adjustment............................................119
Media Hub......................................................328
499
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Memory Function.........................................120
Easy Entry and Exit Feature............................122
Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote
Control or Intelligent Access Key Fob
................................................................................121
Recalling a Preset Position...............................121
Saving a Preset Position....................................121
Message Center
See: Information Displays.................................89
Mirrors
See: Heated Windows and Mirrors................115
See: Windows and Mirrors................................76
Mobile Communications Equipment.......13
Moonroof..........................................................80
Bounce-Back..........................................................81
Opening and Closing the Moonroof.............80
Venting the Moonroof.........................................81
Motorcraft Parts..........................................304
MyFord Touch™...........................................374
General Information..........................................374
MyFord Touch™ Troubleshooting........440
MyKey Troubleshooting...............................55
MyKey™..............................................................51
Principle of Operation..........................................51
N
Navigation.......................................................431
cityseekr................................................................433
Destination Mode...............................................431
Map Mode.............................................................437
Navigation Map Updates...............................440
Navigation Voice Commands.......................440
Point of Interest (POI) Categories...............433
Quick-touch Buttons.......................................439
Setting Your Navigation Preferences.........434
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........456
6.2L and 6.8L Gasoline Engines..................456
6.7L Diesel Engine..............................................457
O
Oil Change Indicator Reset......................236
Resetting the Oil Life Monitoring
System..............................................................236
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check......................................235
Opening and Closing the Hood..............232
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature.......................................................221
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual...........221
Overhead Console........................................139
P
Parking Aid......................................................179
Rear Parking Aid..................................................179
Parking Aids....................................................179
Parking Brake.................................................170
Passive Anti-Theft System........................64
SecuriLock™..........................................................64
PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................64
Pedals................................................................69
Perchlorate.........................................................11
Phone.................................................................411
Making Calls.........................................................413
Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones..................412
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
Time....................................................................412
Phone Menu Options........................................414
Phone Settings....................................................417
Phone Voice Commands.................................418
Receiving Calls.....................................................413
Text Messaging....................................................415
Post-Crash Alert System...........................216
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking.............................56
Power Seats...................................................120
Power Lumbar.....................................................120
Power Recline......................................................120
Power Steering Fluid Check.....................244
Power Take-Off.............................................156
Power Windows..............................................76
Accessory Delay.....................................................77
Bounce-Back..........................................................76
One-Touch Up or Down.....................................76
Window Lock..........................................................77
Protecting the Environment........................14
R
Rear Axle..........................................................167
Rear Seat Armrest........................................128
500
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Rear Seats........................................................122
Folding the Rear Seat Back (Crew Cab)
...............................................................................122
Folding up the Rear Seat Cushion................122
Rear Under Seat Storage (Crew Cab).........123
Returning the Seat to the Seating
Position..............................................................122
Rear View Camera.......................................180
Using the Rear View Camera System........180
Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera...................................180
Recommended Towing Weights............193
Calculating the Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight for Your Vehicle...............................196
Refueling..........................................................146
Fuel Filler Cap.......................................................147
Remote Control...............................................47
Car Finder................................................................48
Integrated Keyhead Transmitters ..................47
Memory Feature...................................................48
Remote Start ........................................................48
Replacing the Battery.........................................47
Sounding a Panic Alarm....................................48
Remote Start..................................................116
Automatic Settings.............................................116
Removing a Headlamp..............................249
Removing the Tailgate.................................60
Repairing Minor Paint Damage...............261
Replacement Parts
Recommendation.........................................11
Collision Repairs.....................................................11
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs...................................................................11
Warranty on Replacement Parts.....................12
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control............................................................50
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)..............................................................222
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only)...............................................................221
Roadside Assistance...................................212
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance.........................................................212
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside
Assistance.........................................................212
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance....................................212
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance....................................212
Roadside Emergencies...............................212
Running-In
See: Breaking-In.................................................207
Running Out of Fuel....................................146
S
Safety Belt Height Adjustment.................33
Safety Belt Minder.........................................34
Belt-Minder™........................................................34
Safety Belts......................................................29
Principle of Operation........................................29
Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime...............................................................33
Conditions of operation.....................................34
Safety Canopy™............................................44
Safety Precautions......................................144
Satellite Radio..............................................325
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)................................................................326
Satellite Radio Reception Factors...............326
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service..................326
Troubleshooting..................................................327
Scheduled Maintenance Record...........462
Scheduled Maintenance...........................453
Seats...................................................................117
Security..............................................................64
Settings...........................................................382
Clock.......................................................................382
Display...................................................................383
Settings.................................................................386
Sound....................................................................384
Vehicle...................................................................384
Side Airbags.....................................................43
Sitting in the Correct Position....................117
Sliding Windows.............................................79
Power Sliding Back Window............................79
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains.................................284
501
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Snowplowing................................................209
Engine temperature while plowing..............210
Installing the Snowplow.................................209
Operating the Vehicle with the Snowplow
Attached...........................................................210
Snowplowing with your Airbag Equipped
Vehicle...............................................................210
Transmission operation while
plowing...............................................................211
Special Notices................................................12
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.........................12
On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II).......................12
Special Instructions..............................................12
Using your Vehicle as an Ambulance.............12
Using your Vehicle as a Stationary Power
Source...................................................................13
Using your Vehicle With a Snowplow............12
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance...............................................457
6.2L and 6.8L Gasoline Engines...................457
6.7L Diesel Engine.............................................460
Exceptions...........................................................460
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control............................................183
Stability Control.............................................174
Principle of Operation.......................................174
Starter Switch
See: Ignition Switch...........................................140
Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................141
Cold Weather Starting (Flexible Fuel
Vehicles Only)..................................................141
Failure to Start......................................................141
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes................142
Important Ventilating Information...............142
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving.................................................................141
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary..........................................................141
Starting and Stopping the Engine.........140
General Information..........................................140
Steering............................................................184
Steering Wheel...............................................66
Storage Compartments.............................139
Sunroof
See: Moonroof......................................................80
Sun Visors.........................................................80
Illuminated Vanity Mirror..................................80
Slide-on-rod..........................................................80
Supplementary Restraints System..........37
Principle of Operation.........................................37
Symbols Glossary.............................................7
SYNC™ Applications and
Services........................................................346
911 Assist...............................................................346
SYNC Services: Traffic, Directions &
Information (TDI) (If Equipped, United
States Only)...................................................350
Vehicle Health Report (If Equipped, United
States Only)...................................................348
SYNC™ AppLink™.....................................354
SYNC Mobile Apps............................................354
SYNC™............................................................329
General Information.........................................329
SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................365
T
Tailgate Lock...................................................60
Tailgate Step.....................................................61
Closing the step.....................................................61
Opening the step...................................................61
Tailgate..............................................................60
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications............303
Terrain Response...........................................177
Principle of Operation........................................177
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)........................219
Tire Care..........................................................267
Glossary of Tire Terminology........................268
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading..............................................................267
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall...........................................................269
Temperature A B C............................................268
Traction AA A B C...............................................267
Treadwear.............................................................267
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........284
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.......................................286
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System ......................................286
Tires
See: Wheels and Tires.....................................264
Towing a Trailer.............................................192
Load Placement..................................................192
502
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Towing Points...............................................204
Towing the Vehicle on Four
Wheels.........................................................206
Emergency Towing...........................................206
Recreational Towing........................................206
Towing..............................................................192
Traction Control.............................................172
Principle of Operation........................................172
Trailer Sway Control....................................193
Transfer Case Fluid Check........................243
Transmission Code Designation...........306
Transmission...................................................151
Transmission
See: Transmission...............................................151
Transporting the Vehicle..........................205
U
Under Hood Overview - 6.2L...................233
Under Hood Overview - 6.8L..................234
Universal Garage Door Opener...............129
CAR2U® Home Automation System..........129
HomeLink Wireless Control System............132
USB Port.........................................................328
Using Cruise Control....................................183
Switching Cruise Control Off.........................183
Switching Cruise Control On..........................183
Using Four-Wheel Drive.............................158
4WD Indicator Lights........................................159
Driving Off-Road With Truck and Utility
Vehicles.............................................................162
Electronic Shift-On-the-Fly (ESOF) 4WD
system...............................................................158
How Your Vehicle Differs From Other
Vehicles.............................................................162
Manual Shift On Stop (MSOS) 4WD
system...............................................................158
Using a Manual Shift On Stop (MSOS)
4WD system....................................................159
Using the Electronic Shift on the Fly 4WD
system................................................................161
Using Hill Descent Control.........................177
Hill descent modes.............................................177
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems..........................................................55
Using Snow Chains.....................................284
Using Stability Control................................174
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™
(RSC®)...............................................................174
Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player............................................................355
Accessing Your Play Menu.............................360
Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the
USB Port...........................................................355
Media Menu Features......................................358
Media Voice Commands.................................357
System Settings.................................................362
What's Playing?.................................................357
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............334
Accessing Features Through the Phone
Menu..................................................................338
Accessing Your Phone Settings....................342
Making a Call.......................................................337
Pairing a Cell Phone for the First
Time...................................................................334
Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones.................335
Phone Options during an Active Call..........337
Phone Voice Commands................................335
Receiving Calls....................................................337
System Settings.................................................343
Text Messaging..................................................340
Using Traction Control................................172
System Indicator Lights and
Messages...........................................................173
Using Voice Recognition............................331
Initiating a Voice Session.................................331
System Interaction and Feedback..............332
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only).........................219
V
Vehicle Care...................................................256
General Information.........................................256
Vehicle Certification Label......................306
Vehicle Identification Number...............305
503
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index
Vehicle Storage.............................................261
Battery...................................................................262
Body.........................................................................261
Brakes.....................................................................262
Cooling system...................................................262
Engine....................................................................262
Fuel system..........................................................262
General...................................................................261
Miscellaneous.....................................................262
Removing Vehicle From Storage.................262
Tires........................................................................262
Ventilation
See: Climate Control..........................................110
VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number............305
Voice Control....................................................67
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators................84
4X2.............................................................................87
4X4 HIGH.................................................................87
4X4 LOW.................................................................87
Anti-Lock Braking System................................84
Battery.....................................................................84
Brake System........................................................84
Check Fuel Cap.....................................................85
Cruise Control........................................................85
Diesel Warning Lights.........................................87
Direction Indicator...............................................85
Door Ajar.................................................................85
Electronic Locking Differential........................85
Engine Coolant Temperature..........................85
Engine Oil................................................................85
Fasten Safety Belt...............................................85
Front Airbag...........................................................85
High Beam..............................................................85
Hill Descent............................................................85
Low Fuel Level......................................................86
Low Tire Pressure Warning..............................86
Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced
Power/Electronic Throttle Control...........86
Service Engine Soon...........................................86
Stability Control...................................................86
Stability Control Off............................................87
Transmission Tow/Haul.....................................87
Washer Fluid Check....................................244
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................256
See: Wipers and Washers.................................70
Waxing..............................................................257
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................290
Wheels and Tires.........................................264
General Information.........................................264
Technical Specifications..................................301
Windows and Mirrors....................................76
Windshield Washers.....................................70
Front Camera Washer........................................70
Windshield Wipers.........................................70
Speed dependent wipers..................................70
Wipers and Washers.....................................70
Wrecker Towing
See: Transporting the Vehicle.......................205
504
Super Duty (TFA) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing
Index

Navigation menu